Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
V6.2
This document outlines the objectives of the Rainbow Standard and sets the general requirement for Project Developers for registering and operating Rainbow projects and issuing Rainbow Carbon Credits (RCC).
It should be used together with the latest versions of the Rainbow Procedures Manual, Methodologies, Requirements for Validation and Verification Bodies, and all other documentation found on this site.
GlossaryWelcome to the Rainbow Documentation Hub—your go-to resource for everything related to our carbon registry: standard rules, procedures, and methodologies. Whether you are a project developer, partner, or carbon credit buyer, this platform is designed to provide you with all relevant information you might look in a efficient navigation system.
Why this documentation?
At Rainbow, we believe that consistency, transparency, and adherence to well-defined standards are the cornerstones of trustful and success Voluntary Carbon Markets.
Our documentation is providing detailed guidance, rules and structured approaches to all processes of our carbon standard and registry.
This section includes all procedural templates used in the Rainbow process.
🔍 Check out our open public consultations and give feedback 💬
Our Rainbow Standard Document section covers the essential rules and guidelines that govern our standard and registry across all methodologies and project types.
Each methodology gives specific requirements and quantification methods per project types.
General Rainbow modules cover parts of project life cycles that are repeated across many technology types and methodologies. They contain basic eligibility requirements and GHG quantification approaches, and are combined with Rainbow methodologies when needed.
The Conflict of Interest Policy (available ) is a separate document that must be signed by all individuals or parties identified as being at potential risk of a conflict of interest. For a detailed outline of the parties involved, please refer to the diagram found in the section.
All parties involved must sign the policy. The following is the minimum list of stakeholders who must be included:
Members of the Executive board
Members of the Secretariat, Standard Advisory Board
Any stakeholder may submit a request for a new methodology at any time. The requests are summarized and grouped into sectors by the Secretariat, in the creation of a Methodology Creation Proposal.
👉 Download the template
This document summarizes all key elements of a project, allowing Rainbow and the general public to have a complete understanding of its actions and expected results.
👉 Download the template
The purpose of this document is to provide extra information on how to evaluate additionality of projects, according to the Rainbow Standard.
This is already described in the Rainbow Standard Rules and methodology documents, but this document provides detailed templates to guide project developers through their additionality proof.
Additionality shall be evaluated for each project, and there are no automatically additional project types or positive lists.
👉 Download the template
This template shall be used to register all operating sites. All sites where the project operates shall be registered. This includes all factories, facilities, or operations under direct control of the project developer, whose activities are issued carbon credits.
Projects are requested to send this letter to local communities and stakeholders. This letter should articulate the project's intent to issue RCC as a means to finance its operations and monetize its mitigation activities.
This document reports all activities carried out by the Project Developer during the year and its respective achievements. It serves as a channel to track the Project’s progress and communicate it to the general public.
As required in the Rainbow Double counting policy, Project Developers seeking to obtain the CORSIA or Article 6 label on Rainbow Carbon Credits must provide an official Letter of Authorisation from the Host Country.
👉 Download the template
This letter template shall be used by Project Developers willing to use the services of a third party firm to conduct part or all of the validation and/or verification process.
👉 Download the template
Module category
👉 Download the template
Projects eligible under this methodology are the anaerobic digestion sites where feedstock inputs are collected, anaerobic digestion occurs, and biogas/energy is generated. The Project Developers are the operators of the anaerobic digestion sites.
The only use of biogas eligible in the current version of the methodology is purifying biogas to biomethane and direct injection into the gas grid. Other uses may be considered on a case by case basis, if Project Developers provide sufficient proof that they 1) still adhere to the eligibility criteria and 2) have a rigorous, conservative GHG reduction quantification method for components that differ from the method described in the present document.
The only use of digestate eligible for carbon credits under this methodology is application to agricultural soils as an organic amendment and fertilizer. Such activities shall be credited with avoided synthetic mineral fertilizer production and use. If digestate is used in a different application, the project is still eligible for credits on the basis of their energy production activities.
Monitoring Plans for this methodology shall include at a minimum, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information:
amount of biomethane injected into the grid
mass and waste status of each feedstock input in tonnes of fresh matter (ensuring the dedicated crop and ILUC risk thresholds are not surpassed, see Environmental and Social Do No Harm and Leakage)
repartition of solid, liquid and raw digestate
👉 Download the template
One project corresponds to one anaerobic digestion site. It is not possible under this methodology to group multiple sites together as one project.
An anaerobic digestion site is defined as a site with one operations permit and shared infrastructure (e.g. digestion tanks, storage, and treatment facilities).
Only the activities at the biogas site that are deemed additional are part of the project scope.
amount and type of electricity use on-site
description of any major changes in operations
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
First release of methodology for public consultation
-
June 23, 2025
V1 Public consultation (PC)
Final publication of methodology
-
September 10, 2025
V1.0 PC to V1.0
Members the Technical Advisory Board
VVBs
Contractors to the Rainbow Standard involved in at least one of the procedures
Procedures to identify and mitigate conflicts of interest are detailed in the policy document.
Sets the general requirement for Project Developers for registering and operating Rainbow projects and issuing Rainbow Carbon Credits (RCC).
Describes the rules and procedures for documentation management, methodology development and updates, registering and operating carbon projects.
Outline the requirements set by the Rainbow Standard to ensure that carbon credits are unique, following the No Double Counting criteria in the Rainbow Standard Rules
Biogas from anaerobic digestion
Biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS)
Refurbishing of electronic devices
Biobased construction materials
Battery second life
Mineralization of alkaline materials (ex situ)
Enhanced rock weathering
Transportation
Processing and energy use
Infrastructure and machinery
Energy co-products











Version history and changes to the Rainbow Procedures Manual
👉 See Archived Rainbow Standard Documents for full versions of previous documents
This document presents guidelines for Validation and Verification Bodies (VVBs) for conducting evaluations of greenhouse gas emission avoidance and/or removals of project developers.
The aim of this document is to present guidelines for Validation and Verification Bodies (VVBs) for conducting comprehensive evaluations of greenhouse gas emission avoidance and/or removals of Project Developers under the Rainbow Standard.
This document delineates the requirements and procedures necessary for ensuring compliance with the Rainbow Standard Rules and Rainbow Procedures Manual. It pertains to the following types of audits:
Validation Audits
Verification Audits
This guidance is part of the larger framework of the Rainbow Standard system, which encompasses the Rainbow Standard Rules and the methodologies. Moreover, it complements the Rainbow Procedures Manual that delineates project registration and supervision This document offers targeted guidance for auditors performing validation and verification audits within the specialized scope of Project Developers.
The guidelines detailed in this document become binding upon its formal release. Post this date, any VVB that meets the requirements can contribute to the validation and verification of Rainbow Standard Projects.
Existing VVBs must reapply and provide the necessary documentation outlined in this text before continuing validation or verification tasks.
For VVBs who have an existing formalized agreement with Project Developers before the activation date of this guidance, a grace period of twelve months is given to apply again and comply with the new requirements.
Henceforth, Project Developers can only collaborate with VVBs officially recognized by Rainbow, based on the requirements and processes defined herein. Projects already registered that haven't transitioned to the Rainbow Standard Rules might be subjected to different review templates than those mentioned here.\
I hereby acknowledge that I have read and understand the above requirements.
\
Company name:____________________
\
Name:_________________
\
Signature: ____________________________________ Date:_____________
\
Version history and changes to the Rainbow Standard Rules
👉 See Archived Rainbow Standard Documents for full versions of previous documents
Once the project has undergone validation, it transitions to the verification phase with a designated Validation and Verification Body (VVB). The primary objectives of VVB verification are to ascertain the project's ongoing integrity, eligibility, and alignment with the initial projections. Verification is done for each year of the crediting period.
This involves a thorough:
review of the validity and proof of indicators presented in the Monitoring Plan.
evaluation of any major reported changes to the project, such as changes in operations or production output. Ensure that the project still meets the eligibility criteria.
validation of updated LCA calculations (using indicators from the Monitoring Plan), and the corresponding amount of RCCs to issue.
The output of this verification will be used to verify and issue the expected amount of RCCs, cancel (in case of underachievement) or issue additional RCCs (in case of overachievement).
The VVB team must follow the procedures outlined in the “Annual monitoring & verification” section of the Rainbow Procedures Manual.
Following the comprehensive audit work, the derived results are as follows:
Consistency: The answers and evidence furnished for each criterion of the Monitoring Plan of the project have been verified and found to be consistent and valid.
Model: The model employed for CO2 calculation is the same as in the validation process, or is the latest version of related framework
Data authenticity and estimates: inputs include actual data and where appropriate estimates, and are supported by technical data from reliable and recognised sources;
Monitoring Plans for this module shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for each Mineralization Batch:
Proof of regulatory additionality, that CO2 didn't have to be captured, wasn't covered by ETS (or mention no change)
Proof of permanence/low reversal risk, end use of product (or mention no change)
Proof of no double counting: EPDs, ETS (or mention no change)
If biomass feedstock, proof of adherence to ESDNH requirement (or mention no change)
Amount CO2 leakage during transport
Repartition of CO2 types purchased, entering carbonation facility
Carbon storage measurements, either:
Solid phase:
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
Monitoring Plans for this methodology shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for biobased material producers:
amount and type of biobased building material units sold
amount, type and source of biobased inputs
proof of adherence to the No Double Counting criterion
Monitoring Plans for this methodology shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for building developers using biobased materials:
amount and type of biobased building material units incorporated into buildings
proof of completed construction and delivery of building/s
proof of adherence to the No Double Counting criterion
if in France, embodied and use-stage GHG emissions of the completed building (see section)
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
👉 Download the template here
Monitoring Plans for this methodology shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information by Project Developers:
Transportation distances for the collection of waste batteries until the project's site.
Type and chemistry of collected batteries (Battery A).
Percentage of recycled battery packs, auxiliary components, BMS, and BUs derived from the collected battery packs (Battery A).
The quantity, type, and weight of second-life batteries sold (Battery B) in a functional state, along with their respective State of Health (SoH) and lifespan (optional). If lifespan data is unavailable, conservative assumptions will be made.
Quantity and type of new materials used in the second life battery, as well as any new electrolyte solutions incorporated into the sold battery (Battery B).
See Table 2 in the section for more details.
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
List of document and information requested for validation
👉 Download the table here
All requirements for VVB application and accredited VVBs can be found in the .
By accepting the audit assignment, the accredited VVB agrees to:
declare whether impartiality and independence are compromised (this may be the case if the auditor is already in a relationship with the Project Developer)
V3.1
This methodology covers projects that produce biogas from anaerobic digestion of agricultural products, residues and wastes. It includes both energy production from biogas and the production of digestate, a valuable organic amendment.
Use of fossil fuels such as natural gas, oil, and coal are responsible for about 75% of global greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, and make up 98% of GHG emissions within the energy sector. Alternative energy sources exist with far fewer GHGs emissions, but technological, economic, and administrative barriers prevent and limit their development.
Biogas is a renewable energy source that can be produced via several different pathways. One option is anaerobic digestion, where organic materials such as food waste, animal manure, and agricultural residues are broken down by microorganisms in an oxygen-free environment. Common uses of biogas include:
Injection: Purification of biogas to biomethane and directly injecting it into the gas network.
The project may be biobased construction material manufacturing. In this case, carbon credits are issued according to the amount of biobased materials sold to building developers during the reference calendar year. The Project Developer may be the biobased construction material manufacturer.
The project may be the use of biobased construction materials in new, permanent building construction or renovation of permanent buildings during the reference calendar year. RCCs are issued according to the amount of biobased construction materials used in the new building construction. The Project Developer may be the building developer, i.e. the entity responsible for technical choices, building design, and oversight of the development.
V2.5
This methodology covers projects that refurbish electronic devices, extend their usable lifetime, reduce electronics waste and avoid production of new devices. The eligible device types include smartphones, tablets, laptops, desktop computers, and screens.
Buildings are responsible for 21% of global greenhouse gas emissions (GHGs). These can be split into operational emissions (such as energy consumption while buildings are used), and embodied emissions (emissions from the production, maintenance, and waste treatment of building materials). Embodied emissions of buildings account for almost 5-12% of national GHGs across European countries. Much of this impact comes from the energy-intensive production of cement and steel, which are the top two building materials used globally, along with masonry (bricks, blocks, and stone).
Biobased construction materials are composed of matter derived from biogenic origins. They typically have lower embodied GHG emissions than conventional materials because they 1) are mostly composed of renewable, biogenic carbon, which comes with low or even negative embodied emissions, and 2) can have less energy-intensive manufacturing processes.
V2.3
This methodology covers projects that manufacture biobased construction materials and/or use these materials in building construction or renovation. The eligible biobased materials include, but are not limited to, wood framing, hempcrete, and cellulose insulation, derived from biomass sources such as wood, bamboo, and hemp.
This methodology covers projects that refurbish or regenerate used batteries, extend their usable lifetime, reduce hazardous waste, and avoid the production of new batteries. Eligible battery applications include starting, lighting, and ignition (SLI) batteries; light means of transport batteries (LMT); electric vehicle (EV) batteries; and energy storage systems (ESS). Eligible battery chemistries include nickel-metal hydride (NiMH), lithium-ion (Li-ion), and lead-acid (Pb-acid) batteries.
👉 Download the template
LCA update: The LCA calculations have been accurately updated to reflect the indicators measured in the Monitoring Plan, and any major project/process changes if any)
RCCs verification: The annual quantity of removal/avoidance RCCs, based on real ex-ante carbon reductions/sequestration, has been verified.
CO2 measured in solid samples of carbonated material
Gas inflow-outflow:
Volumetric flow and concentration of CO2 inflow and outflow
Gas void fraction of alkaline feedstock (if carbonating solid materials)
Bulk density of the alkaline feedstock (if carbonating solid materials)
Ongoing demonstration of equipment calibration and QA/QC procedures
Transport distance or amount of fuel, and transport mode, for CO2 delivery, alkaline feedstock delivery, and final product delivery (if >50 km)
Amount and type of alkaline feedstock used
Baseline removal calculations from alkaline feedstock carbonation
Baseline and project removal calculations from concrete use phase carbonation
Amount cement needed in baseline and project scenario, and chosen cement emission factor (only for projects issuing avoidance credits from reduced cement use)
Energy and/or material use from CO2 capture, CO2 purification, alkaline feedstock processing, and carbonation process
Total amount of carbonated material produced per crediting period, in tonnes of material
and that the project adequately answers to all 12 criteria outlined in the Rainbow Standard Rules.
Validation seeks to guarantee the realness and authenticity of the project, ensuring that it genuinely contributes to the set objectives and is not merely a theoretical construct. This external validation provides an additional layer of credibility and trustworthiness to the entire process, ensuring stakeholders of the project's integrity and alignment with established requirements.
The VVB team must follow the procedures outlined in the “Project validation” section of the Rainbow Procedures Manual.
The audit shall validate the following elements:
Consistency: The answers and evidence provided for each criterion of the Rainbow Standard are consistent, conservative and valid;
Model: if the project is not covered by one of the Rainbow methodologies, check that the LCA includes all necessary life cycle stages, and the methodology is in line with current LCA practice;
Data authenticity and estimates: inputs include actual data and where appropriate estimates, and are supported by technical data from reliable and recognised sources;
Model usage: the Project Developers uses life cycle assessment (LCA) to calculate the estimated carbon removals and avoidance, and determine the number of Rainbow Carbon Credits (RCCs) to issue. The choice of the baseline scenario is justified, using accurate and conservative assumptions.
RCCs estimation over the crediting period: The projected quantity of removal/avoidance RCCs expected per annum has been validated, based on the modeled emission reductions and the expected output/production quantity of the project.
Monitoring Plan: the documents and indicators suggested in the Monitoring Plan will allow the VVB to verify project eligibility and RCCs issuance in the following years.
Cogeneration: Generation of electricity and heat by a biogas engine or turbine for a combined heat and power (CHP) system.
Heat only: Production of heat in a biogas boiler.
Transport: Compressed natural gas (BioCNG) and liquefied natural gas (BioLNG)
The second output of anaerobic digestion, digestate, is a material rich in organic matter and nutrients that is spread on agricultural fields.
Numerous life cycle assessments (LCAs) have confirmed that using biogas from anaerobic digestion rather than energy from fossil fuels leads to reduced GHG emissions. Yet, biogas makes up a small share of energy consumption: in 2022 in Europe, 20 times more natural gas was used than biogas,.
Biobased construction materials may include but are not limited to, wood framing, wood panels, hempcrete (concrete containing hemp fibers), and cellulose thermal insulation.
Types of biomass used for biobased construction materials may include wood (timber/lumber), bamboo, hemp, straw, recycled paper, and flax, among others.
For the manufacturing of biobased construction materials, one project corresponds to the production of a single biobased product by one registered company within a single country.
For the use of biobased construction materials in buildings, one project shall include constructing one or more buildings that include biobased materials, provided all buildings are in the same country.
For the manufacturing of biobased construction materials, credits are issued ex-post upon proof of sale of the construction product.
For the use of biobased construction materials in buildings, credits are issued ex-post upon proof of completed construction and delivery of each building containing biobased construction materials.
If the construction material has an expected carbon storage duration of 100 years or more, then the biogenic content of that material counts towards removal Rainbow Carbon Credits (RCCs). Regardless of their carbon storage duration, all biobased construction materials are eligible for avoidance RCCs, if the biobased construction material has lower embodied impacts than conventional materials thanks to its low-carbon inputs.
First release of methodology
-
February 4th 2025
V1.0
Change GHG quantification from ecoinvent v3.10 to v3.11
Using more recent data
July 9th 2025
V1.0 to V1.1
Comply with and sign a copy of Rainbow's Conflict of Interest Policy.
comply with and sign a copy of Requirements for VVB
allow Rainbow to disclose the results of the audit, the name of the firm, and the names of the people involved in the audit
respect confidentiality clauses with Project Developers (on processes, materials, quantities)
Remote audits (those that do not include a physical site visit by an auditor) can optimize audit efficiency while maintaining the integrity of the audit process. The objective of a remote audit is to establish confidence in the VVB certification process by direct observations carried out through an electronic medium:
Videographic evidence is required for remote audits. The video should allow the VVB to confirm that each component is true, and will typically consist of a tour of the site with commentary.
Formats may include video calls with the auditors or pre-recorded videos.
The use of remote assessments by VVB of a given project may be requested in site validation assessment. Additional remote audits for verification are at the discretion of the VVB, who is entitled to reject any request from PDs.
If the remote audit does not allow the VVB to to audit all elements deemed necessary, the remaining issues should be recorded and documented.
To maintain impartiality and credibility, and reduce complacency and bias, a single VVB may conduct a maximum of three (3) sequential verifications for a specific project.
Upon reaching the sequential verification limit with a VVB, the PD shall be granted a transition period of six (6) months to engage a new VVB for the subsequent verification.
PDs must maintain comprehensive records of all verifications, including the VVBs involved, to demonstrate compliance with this rule.
Regular audits will be conducted to ensure PDs adhere to this rule. Non-compliance may result in penalties or suspension of the project's validation status.
Regular performance reviews ensure that VVBs consistently uphold their responsibilities, for accurate and impartial verification, as detailed in the Requirements for Validation and Verification Bodies.
The following metrics will be employed to evaluate a VVB's performance:
Timeliness: Adherence to stipulated timelines for project verification.
Accuracy: Correctness of verification processes, calculations, and conclusions.
Consistency: Uniform application of standards and methodologies across different projects.
Communication: Effectiveness and clarity in communication with PDs and other stakeholders.
Integrity: Adherence to ethical guidelines, including conflict of interest declarations
Each VVB is required to submit an annual Performance Report that details its activities, challenges, and areas of improvement relating to its work with the Rainbow validation and verification process. This report should provide insights into the VVB's verification approach, methodologies employed, and training undertaken.
Project Developers are asked to provide feedback on the VVB's performance after each validation and verification process, as part of the Rainbow satisfaction survey. This feedback is considered in the VVB performance review.
The Standard Secretariat annually reviews the annual Performance Reports and assess VVBs based on the established performance metrics. VVBs are encouraged to continually enhance their skills, methodologies, and processes. Training resources, workshops, and seminars specific to the Rainbow Standard will be provided to support this endeavor.
Small IT and telecommunication equipment constitute about 2% of global greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions and is one of the fastest growing sectors in emissions. In addition to climate change impacts, these electronic devices also require mining rare minerals and materials, and make up a rapidly growing stream of hazardous waste.
Most environmental impacts of electronic devices come from their manufacturing stage. Therefore, a major lever to reduce GHG emissions in this sector is to increase the lifetime of devices, so that fewer devices are produced. One method for increasing device lifetime is device repair and refurbishing.
Refurbishing of electronics involves restoring previously owned and used electronic devices to a functional state. It requires a diagnosis, cleaning, repairs, replacing parts, and testing to ensure performance. Extending the lifespan of these devices reduces the production of new devices and reduces electronic waste. Refurbishment of electronic devices is gaining mainstream acceptance from consumers but still faces barriers from high costs of repair, market fragmentation, and lack of consumer trust.
The global demand for batteries is projected to increase fourteenfold by 2030, with the European Union expected to account for 17% of this demand. This is primarily fueled by the rise of electric mobility. In addition to climate change impacts, the production of batteries relies on critical raw materials (CRM) such as lithium, cobalt, antimony, rare earth elements, and natural graphite.
Most environmental impacts of batteries stem from two main stages: (a) the mining and processing of CRM and (b) their disposal at the end of life. Mining for CRMs raises significant environmental and human rights concerns, particularly as 82% of mining areas target materials for renewable energy, often in protected regions with high mine density. Additionally, improper battery disposal can contaminate soil and water, negatively impacting human health. In 2021, the EU's end-of-life battery collection rate was potentially below 50% for some types of less-regulated batteries.
Therefore, a major lever to reduce GHG emissions in this sector is to increase the lifetime of batteries, so that fewer batteries are produced. One method for increasing the battery's lifetime is the preparation for reuse or repurpose through regeneration and refurbishing, giving it a second life.
Battery second life involves restoring previously owned and used batteries to a functional state for continued use, thereby delaying their entry into waste streams. This process includes thorough testing, cleaning, repairs, and, when necessary, replacing components to ensure optimal performance. Extending the lifespan of batteries reduces the production of new batteries and reduces hazardous waste. Refurbishment and regeneration of batteries face barriers from high costs of repair, market fragmentation, and lack of consumer trust and acceptance.
Launch of methodology public consultation
April 2025
V1.0 PC
First version published
October 17th, 2025
V1.0
See the glossary for methodology-specific terminology 👇
Methodology name
Biogas from anaerobic digestion
Version
3.2
Methodology ID
RBW-ENGY-01-ADGAS-V3.2
Release date
June 20th, 2025
Status
In use
See the glossary for methodology-specific terminology 👇
Methodology name
Refurbishing of electronic devices
Version
2.5
Methodology ID
RBW-REC-01-ELEC-V2.5
Release date
December 5th, 2025
Status
In use
Methodology name
Biobased construction materials
Version
2.4
Methodology ID
RBW-BIOBM-01-CONST-V2.4
Release date
October 9th, 2025
Status
In use
Methodology name
Battery second life
Version
1.1
Methodology ID
RBW-REC-02-BAT-V1.1
Release date
July 9th, 2025
Status
In use
Methodology name
Mineralization of alkaline materials (ex situ)
Version
1.0
Methodology ID
RBW-CDR-MIN-V1.0
Release date
September 10, 2025
Status
In use
It is widely acknowledged that in addition to reducing global greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, carbon dioxide must be removed from the atmosphere and permanently sequestered. One way to do this is through mineral carbonation/mineralization of concrete and alkaline wastes that contain metal ions, destined for permanent incorporation into permanent products. In this process, captured CO2 is exposed to and reacts with alkaline materials, generating stable carbonates that can permanently store the CO2.
This methodology document outlines the general requirements for mineral carbonation of materials projects certified under the .
Modules are like mini-methodologies that only cover a part of the project life-cycle. Combining the relevant modules for a project results in a complete picture of eligibility criteria, GHG reduction quantification requirements, required data, monitoring plans, and other instructions for Rainbow certification. This methodology shall be used in conjunction with the following Rainbow modules:
👉 Download the template here
The table below presents a non-exhaustive selection of Ecoinvent activities that may be used in the GHG calculations for this module. Additional activities may be used for any project, if the following selection does not cover all relevant activities.
Table A1 List of ecoinvent 3.11 processes used in the GHG reduction quantification model, all processes are from the cutoff database
grid electricity
market for electricity, low voltage
market for electricity, medium voltage
onsite solar electricity
electricity production, photovoltaic, 570kWp open ground installation, multi-Si
diesel fuel material
market for diesel, low-sulfur
market for diesel
diesel burning
diesel, burned in agricultural machinery
diesel, burned in diesel-electric generating set, 18.5kW
natural gas burning
natural gas, burned in gas turbine
heat, from steam
market for heat, from steam, in chemical industry
heat, from municipal incineration
heat, from municipal waste incineration to generic market for heat district or industrial, other than natural gas
heat, from biomethane burning
market for heat, central or small-scale, biomethane
heat, from straw burning in a furnace
heat production, straw, at furnace 300kW
heat, from natural gas
market for heat, district or industrial, natural gas
market for heat, central or small-scale, natural gas
water
market for tap water
market for water, decarbonised
market for water, deionised
non-hazardous landfill
market for process-specific burdens, slag landfill
market for process-specific burdens, sanitary landfill
market for process-specific burdens, inert material landfill
hazardous waste treatment
market for hazardous waste, for incineration
market for hazardous waste, for underground deposit
Energy crop: sunflower
market for sunflower silage | sunflower silage | Cutoff, U, GLO
Energy crop: rye grass
market for ryegrass silage | ryegrass silage | Cutoff, U, GLO
Energy crop: other grass silage
grass silage production, Swiss integrated production, intensive | grass silage, Swiss integrated production | Cutoff, U, CH
Energy crop: alfalfa, and triticale
alfalfa-grass mixture production, Swiss integrated production | alfalfa-grass mixture, Swiss integrated production | Cutoff, U, CH
Straw
wheat grain production | straw | Cutoff, U, RoW
Energy crop: whole corn
sweet corn production | sweet corn | Cutoff, U, RoW
Transport, truck
market for transport, freight, lorry, 3.5-7.5 metric ton, diesel, EURO 5 | transport, freight, lorry, 3.5-7.5 metric ton, diesel, EURO 5 | Cutoff, U, RER
Electricity
market for electricity, medium voltage | electricity, medium voltage | Cutoff, U (geography set to project country)
Activated carbon
market for activated carbon, granular | activated carbon, granular | Cutoff, U, GLO
Nitrogen fertilizer
market group for inorganic nitrogen fertilizer, as N | inorganic nitrogen fertilizer, as N | Cutoff, U, RER
Potassium fertilizer
market group for inorganic potassium fertilizer, as K2O | inorganic potassium fertilizer, as K2O | Cutoff, U, RER
Phosphorus fertilizer
market group for inorganic phosphorus fertilizer, as P2O5 | inorganic phosphorus fertilizer, as P2O5 | Cutoff, U, RER
Biogas plant construction
anaerobic digestion plant construction, agriculture, with methane recovery | anaerobic digestion plant, agriculture, with methane recovery | Cutoff, U, RoW
Natural gas
natural gas, burned in gas turbine | natural gas, burned in gas turbine | Cutoff, U (geography set to project country)
Biogas
market for biogas | biogas | Cutoff, U, RoW
Biomethane
market for biomethane, high pressure | biomethane, high pressure | Cutoff, U, RoW
diesel fuel material
market for diesel, low-sulfur
market for diesel
diesel burning
diesel, burned in agricultural machinery
diesel, burned in diesel-electric generating set, 18.5kW
natural gas burning
natural gas, burned in gas turbine
heat, from steam
market for heat, from steam, in chemical industry
heat, from municipal incineration
heat, from municipal waste incineration to generic market for heat district or industrial, other than natural gas
heat, from biomethane burning
market for heat, central or small-scale, biomethane
heat, from straw burning in a furnace
heat production, straw, at furnace 300kW
heat, from natural gas
market for heat, district or industrial, natural gas
market for heat, central or small-scale, natural gas
water
market for tap water
market for water, decarbonised
market for water, deionised
non-hazardous landfill
market for process-specific burdens, slag landfill
market for process-specific burdens, sanitary landfill
market for process-specific burdens, inert material landfill
hazardous waste treatment
market for hazardous waste, for incineration
market for hazardous waste, for underground deposit
cement production
cement production, Portland
cement production, Portland Slag (with ground granulated blast furnace slag)
cement production, Pozzolana Portland (with fly ash)
cement, all types to generic market for cement, unspecified
Ground granulated blast furnace slag (GGBS)
market for ground granulated blast furnace slag
Gypsum additive
market for gypsum, mineral
For further clarification or implementation support, contact the methodology development team at [email protected].
grid electricity
market for electricity, low voltage
market for electricity, medium voltage
onsite solar electricity
electricity production, photovoltaic, 570kWp open ground installation, multi-Si
The SAB shall:
Ensure Rainbow’s activity is in line with its foundational mission, delineated in its statutes
Accept or reject changes to the Rainbow Standard Rules, Procedure Manual, and Rainbow Registry Procedures, specifying written reasons for the decisions
Provide strategic guidance for the Standard and make recommendations to align Rainbow processes and rules with relevant regulations and integrity frameworks.
The SAB shall be appointed following the process bellow:
The inaugural SAB was selected by the Rainbow Executive Team, following interviews with candidates who were distinguished by their expertise in areas relevant to the board's focus.
New SAB members are nominated by the Rainbow Executive Team and confirmed through a decision made by the current SAB members.
The Chair of the SAB is elected by its members from among themselves by a simple majority vote for a one-year term
The mandate for SAB members is tacitly renewed every year
Only SAB members and the Chair have the right to vote on decision items during SAB meetings. When the Chair calls for a vote on any issue, decisions will be made by a simple majority. In the event of a tie, the Chair will cast the deciding vote to determine the outcome.
The Rainbow Technical Advisory Committee (TAC) is an external entity from the Rainbow organization. Its mission is to bring in-depth expertise on each sector covered by Rainbow.
The Rainbow Executive and Climate teams will establish the TAC’s missions as necessary. Typical missions may include the following:
Review a specific project application and deliver a Technical Analysis report
Review a new methodology, or its revision
Review a specific methodological aspect on their domain of expertise
Conduct solutions-based scientific research on their domain of expertise
Members of the TAC should be knowledgeable in at least one specialized area relating to the Rainbow Standard focus (such as, but not limited to, refurbishment and recycling processes, bioenergy, biobased construction materials, biomass carbon removal and storage, or carbon markets).
TAC members are nominated by the Rainbow Executive Team, with the approval of the SAB.
TAC members should prove the following skills:
Expertise in an area covered by the Rainbow Standard Rules, existing methodologies, or a sector considered for future methodology development
Deep understanding of environmental topics
The TAC serves as an expert consultative committee for the Rainbow Standard, without decision-making authority. Should a technical issue arise necessitating a decision, the SAB may seek a recommendation from a TAC member. However, the final decision will be made by the SAB.
The Rainbow Executive Team is tasked with operational and strategic functions within the organization. Their key responsibilities include:
Overseeing daily operations to ensure efficiency and alignment with organizational goals
Determining the long-term strategy and direction
Making essential decisions for Rainbow.
Reporting to and integrating advice from the SAB into the company's operations and strategy
The Executive Team of Rainbow is appointed by a collective decision of the Rainbow SAS partners, in accordance with the constitutive statutes of Rainbow.
Decisions for which the executive team is responsible are made by a simple majority vote within the executive team.
The Secretariat of Rainbow holds a fundamental administrative and coordinating role within the organization's structure.
The Secretariat’s main responsibilities are outlined as follows:
Collecting and synthesizing feedback on the Rainbow Standard Rules and methodologies, preparing them for review and validation by the governing bodies.
Serving as a communicative bridge, it conveys information between the Executive Team, the Certification and Climate Teams, and the SAB
Organizing and documenting public consultations.
The Climate team is responsible for the climate science and integrity of the Rainbow Standard Rules.
The Climate team’s main tasks are the following:
Regularly revise and improve the Rainbow Standard Rules
Monitor relevant references and scientific progress to integrate into the Rainbow methods
Develop new methodologies, and regularly revise and improve existing ones
Coordinate with the TAC for methodologies creation and revision
Certification team and VVB trainings
The Certification team is responsible for delivering the ongoing tasks required by the Rainbow Standard Documentation management.
The Certification team’s main tasks are the following:
Improve the validation process to make it as rigorous, transparent and practical as possible
Review Project Applications
Accompany Project Developers in the certification process of their project
Coordinate with VVBs for outputs of validation/verification audits
Run VVB performance oversight
Manage the Rainbow Registry: register projects, deregister projects, process the issuance/verification/cancellation of credits.
All Rainbow Carbon Credits are issued ex post, after the verification process.
Two main types of RCCs are issued by Rainbow: removal RCCs and avoidance RCCs. Both types are measured by calculating the difference in GHG emissions of the project scenario compared to the baseline scenario, following the approach outlined in ISO 14064-2:2019. See details in the GHG Reduction Quantification section.
Removal RCCs are calculated by evaluating the removal projects’ net GHG emissions (i.e. carbon removal and emissions) compared to the baseline scenario’s (i.e. what would have occurred in the absence of the project). See more details on choosing a baseline scenario in the .
Removal RCCs are issued on Rainbow’s registry under the mechanism label “removal”. They represent one tonne of carbon dioxide equivalent captured and stored: 1 removal RCC = 1 t CO2eq.
Avoidance RCCs are calculated by comparing GHG emissions of the project to the ones of a reference or baseline scenario that would have occurred without the project.
Avoidance RCCs are classified on Rainbow’s registry under the mechanism label “avoidance”. They represent one avoided tonne of carbon dioxide equivalent: 1 avoidance RCC = 1 t CO2eq.
Credit pools are defined as a group of Rainbow Carbon Credits from the same project, mechanism and vintage year. Each transaction in the Rainbow Registry may cover credits from one credit pool. For example, separate transactions are required to retire credits from two different credit pools.
A project is uniquely described on the registry by:
Project registry ID
Project name
Name of the Project Developer
Location
Each RCC is uniquely described on the registry by:
unique identifier
Project registry ID
Vintage year (year of verified activity in verification)
Type of mechanism (avoidance or removal)
Rainbow Carbon Credits and provisional credits can have different statuses on the Rainbow Registry:
Verified RCCs may have labels, which are supplementary information and do not change the inherent status of a verified avoidance or removal RCC. Labels may cover, for example:
Permanence horizons: e.g. 100 or 1000 year permanence for removal RCCs
Compliance with trading schemes: e.g. CORSIA eligible, Article 6 eligible
Accredited: e.g. ICROA accredited, ICVCM accredited
Provisional credits are estimated upon project validation for the projected volume of emission avoidance/removal over the project’s crediting period. They are conservatively calculated.
Pre-purchase agreements are signed agreements between the PD and a buyer with defined volumes and prices of Rainbow Carbon Credits. These can be made once provisional credits have been estimated and the project has been validated.
Provisional credits are only used to track pre-purchase agreements for buyers. Their property rights can not be transferred to the buyer until the mitigation activity occurs and they are verified (hence become RCCs).
Rainbow is a simplified joint-stock company ("société par actions simplifiée") with its headquarters situated at 28 Avenue des Pépinières, 94260 Fresnes, France, and is registered in the Créteil Companies and Trade Register with the number 908 082 332.
As a mission-driven entity ("Société à Mission"), Rainbow has a defined purpose pursuant to Article 1835 of the French Civil Code.
The company's mission is to create significant and positive environmental or social impact through its commercial and operational activities, and to conduct its business with exemplary professionalism in the pursuit of the collective interest. In alignment with its mission, the company is dedicated to:
Advancing solutions that contribute a net environmental or social benefit to both the community and the planet;
Engaging with partners and customers who share the company's values and objectives;
Delivering significant value and impact through its partnerships and client interactions;
Ensuring the dignity of individuals and promoting a healthy work-life balance for its employees.
Building upon its core mission, the simplified joint-stock company Rainbow operates two entities:
The Rainbow Standard: A European crediting program within the voluntary carbon market, tailored for industrial projects that demonstrate the potential for significant reductions or sequestration of greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. The Rainbow Standard prescribes exacting certification criteria, rooted in stringent scientific methodology and designed to align with the principal frameworks dedicated to fostering transparency and integrity in the voluntary carbon market.
The Rainbow Tech Infrastructure: Serving as the operational backbone for the Rainbow Standard, this infrastructure comprises two principal components:
The Rainbow Registry: Ensuring traceability and transparency, it maintains detailed records of Rainbow Carbon Credits from issuance to retirement, thereby preventing double counting and adhering to the protocols recommended by carbon market integrity organizations.
Both entities are managed by the Rainbow Executive Team and supported by the internal teams within Rainbow.
Overview of the Rainbow Organization:
The Rainbow Standard's governance architecture is designed to ensure scientific rigor, independence and efficiency.
It is spearheaded by two principal independent entities: the Standard Advisory Board and the Technical Advisory Committee.
In addition to these independent governance entities, four specialized Rainbow teams are dedicated to the standard's operational execution:
All Rainbow ecosystem stakeholders are contractually linked with Rainbow. The following stakeholders are publicly disclosed:
Moreover, any stakeholder of Rainbow’s ecosystem is under .
Finally, Rainbow implements a robust that sets out how the Rainbow organization identifies, manages, prevents, and discloses potential or real conflicts of interest to comply with the applicable regulatory requirements and code of practices.
The following is the minimum list of stakeholders who must sign the policy:
Members of the Executive board
Members of the Secretariat, Standard Advisory Board
Members of the Climate, Certification, R&D and Partnerships teams
Members the Technical Advisory Board
The Rainbow Registry is openly accessible through Rainbow’s website , and displays the following information to ensure maximum transparency and traceability of Rainbow Carbon Credits:
Project information, including documentation, detailed calculations, audit/verification/monitoring statements, as well as reports and legal representations
Transparent issuance tracking, transfer and retirement/cancellation of units
Individually identified units through unique serial numbers containing sufficient information to avoid double counting (type, geography, vintage)
Unit status (issued, verified, retired, canceled), with full traceability of the chain of custody
The Rainbow Registry IT security requirements are detailed in the Appendix 6.5.
The Rainbow Certification Team may eliminate a fraction of a project’s estimated RCCs using the uncertainty discount factor to mitigate carbon credit overestimation. These verified avoided/removed emissions are never issued as RCCs.
Application of a discount factor may occur when material uncertainty is identified, for example, in the project’s measured data, assumptions, or the selection of the baseline scenario.
When faced with high uncertainty, steps should be taken to reduce uncertainty, and conservative choices should be made. If uncertainty remains, a discount factor shall be applied. Requirements are described in the Uncertainty Assessment section of the Rainbow Standard Rules.
RCCs that are eliminated with the discount factor are not issued and will not appear on the registry. This discount factor may vary from 0% to more than 10% of estimated RCCs. The amount is evaluated individually for each project.
All projects that issue removal RCCs must allocate a portion of their verified removal RCCs to the buffer pool. This pool acts as an insurance mechanism, shared across all removal projects, against the risk of reversal of sequestered carbon before the agreed upon commitment period (at least 100 years, for removal RCCs). This may occur due to, for example, natural disaster (fires, drought, pests) or project mismanagement. These RCCs cannot be retired by buyers.
The buffer pool is supplied with RCCs via two paths:
Default: Each removal project allocates by default at least 3% of its verified removal RCCs to the buffer pool.
Conditional: If the project has high or very high risks of reversal (according to the project evaluation’s Risk Assessment Template), the Project Developer may choose to develop a risk mitigation plan, or contribute an extra 3% of their verified RCCs to the buffer pool. More details are available in the section on Risk Assessment.
RCCs are withdrawn from the buffer pool if there is a reversal event (see details in the section).
As a result of the verification phase, provisional credits either are issued as verified RCCs or are canceled.
Upon verification, three situations are possible: exact estimation, overestimation and under-estimation. Below is an example for 100 estimated provisional removal credits. Note that the actual portion of RCCs going to the buffer pool may vary by project.
The issuance of RCCs is operated by the Certification team once the is fully conducted and all audit certificates are available.
The name of the Rainbow Registry operator, from the Certification team, who operates the issuance is registered in the process.
When removal RCCs are issued, a contribution will automatically be transferred from Project accounts to the Rainbow Buffer Pool account. The amount of removal credits to be added to the buffer pool is defined for each project, and displayed on the project page on the registry. The contribution shall equal the percentage confirmed during project validation, and shall be rounded up to the nearest whole RCC (3% by default).
Provisional credits may be canceled on the registry for several reasons:
lack of measurement source for a KII
change in KII or overall process, so that the project no longer avoids/removes carbon as expected
change in external factors causing the project to lose its additional status (i.e. change in regulation that makes the project activities required)
If pre-purchase agreements were made between buyers and PDs, the buffer pool will not be used to replace canceled provisional credits.
Verified removal RCCs may be canceled/withdrawn from the buffer pool if the Project Developer notifies Rainbow of an event that re-emits at least 1 tonne of COeq of the carbon stored in the removal solution, before the commitment period ends. The amount of RCCs withdrawn from the buffer pool equals the tonnes of COeq estimated to have been released as a result of the reversal event. The Project Developer must notify Rainbow within 30 calendar days of becoming aware of the reversal event.
Rainbow Certification Team shall cancel RCCs from the buffer pool of a similar type as the removal RCCs that were reversed.
Verified RCCs may be deemed erroneously issued due to, for example, calculation errors, use of wrong input data, or inaccurate proof. While the comprehensive audit process renders this highly unlikely, a procedure is prepared out of an abundance of caution.
Erroneous issuance may be signaled by the PD, the VBB, the Rainbow Certification Team, or any stakeholder. The Rainbow Certification Team shall investigate the incident, determine the number of excess credits issued, and take the following remediating action:
Credits not yet transferred: an amount of credits corresponding to the number of excess credits issued for the given project's shall be frozen during the investigation, and canceled.
Credits already transferred or retired: the above procedure shall be applied, and an equivalent amount of excess credits will be transferred to the credit user at no cost from the project's next verification and issuance. If no additional credits are available, Rainbow will work with the credit user on a case-by-case basis to agree upon compensation, with Rainbow taking financial responsibility to ensure the credit user incurs no loss.
An Cancelation Report will be generated and attached to the cancelation event in the Registry that states the amount of excess credits erroneously issued and the remediating action.
To retire RCCs, the user must log in with their username and password to the Rainbow Registry and click on the option “retirement”. There they must enter the following information:
Project name and registry ID from which RCCs are to be removed
Vintage year
Number of RCCs to be retired
Reason for retirement: voluntary offset, carbon tax, or another specific offset scheme
A retirement certificate can be downloaded from the Rainbow Registry. Additionally, all retirement transactions are publicly available on the registry (see example ).
Once retired, RCCs can not be transacted, retired or canceled.
Projects eligible under this methodology are the activities that carry out the technical aspects of refurbishing or regeneration of used batteries at the end of their lifecycle in Europe. These batteries can either be reused or repurposed in their second life. Activities that only recycle batteries (e.g. shred them to collect and use metals), collect used batteries (e.g. buyback schemes), serve as marketplaces for resale, or act as Producer Responsibility Operators (PRO) are not eligible projects.
Marketplaces, battery waste management intermediaries, and battery optimization software companies may act as intermediaries between Rainbow and battery second-life projects to assist in the certification process. Signed agreements shall be provided ensuring that the battery second-life project is the principal and final beneficiary of carbon finance.
Treated batteries eligible under this methodology include starting, lighting, and ignition (SLI) batteries; light means of transport batteries (LMT); electric vehicle (EV) batteries; and energy storage systems (ESS). Other collected waste battery types such as portable batteries and portable batteries of general use are not eligible under this methodology. New, unused batteries obtained from overproduction are not eligible under this methodology.
This methodology distinguishes between two types of processes enabling a battery's second life:
Refurbishing: involves a lighter process to restore battery packs to optimal working conditions. This includes but is not limited to mechanical repairs such as cosmetic damage (casing), deep discharge, component replacement, fuse replacements, battery management system (BMS) repair and balancing, wiring harness repairs, and cleaning the battery. In this process, any damaged or low-quality battery units and auxiliary components are replaced with either reused or new parts. In the EU battery regulation 2023/1542 this is defined as battery remanufacturing.
Regeneration: in addition to the battery refurbishing steps above, regeneration involves a more complex process of regenerating battery packs through methods such as applying electrical pulses and replacing the battery’s electrolytes to reverse some of the chemical degradation within the battery. The goal is to restore the battery's performance by reverting its degradation process without the need for replacing its core components, usually enabling it to return to its initial use application.
Both refurbishing and regeneration activities are eligible for Rainbow Carbon Credits (RCCs) under this methodology.
Note that the project shall be defined as the project activities that are justified as additional. This may include a refurbishing/regeneration site’s entire operations or only an expansion project. See the Additionality section of the for more details.
One project corresponds to the battery second life sites within one registered company/holding company located within one country.
The general GHG reduction quantification approach and components are outlined below. Detailed instructions and requirements can be found in Rainbow methodologies.
Rainbow Carbon Credits shall be calculated by subtracting the GHG emissions and removals of the project scenario from the emissions and removals of a baseline scenario, or reference scenario, that would have occurred without the implementation of the project.
Explore the results of our public consultations, including feedback summaries and responses that drive improvements in our standards and methodologies.
This methodology covers durable carbon removal through enhanced rock weathering. This includes crushing and spreading specific types of rocks on agricultural soils to increase the rock's surface area exposed to the atmosphere, which speeds up the naturally occurring rock weathering and CO removal process.
Type of mechanism (avoidance and/or removal)
Crediting period
Validation body
Other labels where relevant (e.g. CORSIA, Article 6, CCP…)
Rainbow Standard Rules version number
Host country (inherited from Project)
Other labels where relevant (e.g. CORSIA, Article 6, CCP…)
Provisional
Provisional credits are estimated credits from projects that are validated but not yet verified. They give visibility on the volume of expected credits, which enables pre-purchase agreements. They may result from:
Validated projects that are still in the planning phase, and have completed a validation audit, and ex-ante estimates of avoided/removed emissions.
Continuous issuance projects that continuously upload data to the Impact Certification Platform to estimate credit volumes frequently (e.g. monthly, weekly), but only undergo verification audits e.g. annually.
Verified
Rainbow Carbon Credits are issued ex-post as after the verification audit at the end of the monitoring period if the project meets the expected KII, with the production and emissions as estimated. See Under- / Overachievement for more details. They appear as “verified” on the registry.
Canceled
Rainbow Carbon Credits can be “canceled” if the verification audit demonstrates that the previous ex-post credits were not legitimate, or if a reversal event is reported (for removal RCCs).
Retired
Rainbow Carbon Credits are “retired” when a buyer claims them, they can’t be transacted anymore and are considered permanently used. They still appear on the Rainbow Registry for traceability, with the label “retired”.
Demonstrate a net-negative project carbon footprint based on initial LCA estimates of induced emissions and initial modeled CDR estimates.
One project shall be defined as any spreading activities within eligible sites within the project lifetime (i.e. the crediting period), and all removal that occurs as a result of that spreading over the project lifetime, plus the upstream/downstream activities associated with that spreading (e.g. GHG emissions from feedstock sourcing, transport...).
Rocks shall be spread on soils already affected by human activity, including but not limited to agricultural fields, forests, prairies, golf courses, and parks. Project Developers must demonstrate capabilities to perform the necessary GHG quantification measurements on the given land type. There is no predefined maximum area of a project, and spreading sites must be within the same administrative, jurisdictional and geographic area.
Eligible types of feedstock are silicate rocks that contain alkaline materials. This includes minerals such as olivine, pyroxene, and plagioclase feldspar, and rocks such as basalt, dunite and peridotite. Removals from carbonate feedstocks are currently excluded, but may be added in future revisions of the present methodology.
The quantity of feedstock applied must comply with jurisdictional regulations on nutrient and metal additions to soils (e.g., national fertilizer guidelines).
Projects that spread feedstock before or shortly after the publication of this methodology may deviate from its requirements but remain eligible for Rainbow certification. Eligibility is determined on a case-by-case basis, with such projects labeled "Retroactively approved" on the registry. The aim is to be inclusive in a field with rapidly evolving scientific knowledge and best-practices, and to support Project Developers in upgrading their deployment setup and/or MRV approach.
The following minimum requirements must still be met:
Demonstrate a statistically significant weathering signal between treatment and representative control plots.
Estimate and deduct far-field zone (FFZ) carbon loss.
Estimate and deduct project-induced emissions.
Demonstrate a net-negative project carbon footprint based on initial LCA estimates of induced emissions and modeled CDR estimates.
Provide sufficient documentation of past activities (e.g., feedstock sourcing and spreading, sampling protocols, locations).
Project Developers must:
Identify which requirements they currently meet, which they will meet in the future, and which are impossible to meet due to project timing (e.g., pre-spreading measurements).
Outline their timeline and approach for future compliance.
Detail the implications of non-compliance on quantification uncertainty, environmental and social risks, and any remediation or conservative measures taken.
Any new spreading events or site expansions in subsequent years of the crediting period must fully comply with this methodology.
The Impact Certification Platform: This platform streamlines the RCCs certification (validation and verification) process for Project Developers by offering tools for environmental impact assessment, documentation assembly, and simplifying validation and verification procedures. With features designed for third-party Validation and Verification Bodies (VVB), it promotes a transparent and efficient pathway for project auditing and RCC management.
VVBs
Contractors to the Rainbow Standard involved in at least one of the procedures described in the Rainbow Procedures Manual.
Standard Advisory Board (SAB)
Ensures Rainbow’s activity is continuously in line with its foundational mission. Provides strategic direction, endorses or vetoes amendments to the standard rules and methodologies, and recommends enhancements.
Technical Advisory Committee (TAC)
Composed of independent experts, provides technical expertise and reviews on specific methodological aspects or project certification.
Executive Team
Manages the organization's day-to-day operations
Secretariat
Compiles and synthesizes feedback and updates on standard documents, and conveys these to the Standard Advisory Board for deliberation and approval.
Certification team
Primary point of contact for Project Developers navigating the standard processes, provides technical assistance, process guidance, feedback, and performs the final validation review.
Climate team
Oversees the scientific approach and choices behind Rainbow Standard Rules and methodologies. As GHG quantification and climate solution experts, they assist the Certification team in case of technical inquiries.

0
End-user information: country of location, name, document type, and document number
Taxpayer information, if applicable: country of location, name, document type, and document number
Case 1: the project produced exactly as expected, thus all the credits issued for this period are verified
100
100 RCCs verified: - 97 to the project
- 3 RCC go to the buffer pool.
0
Case 2: the project did not deliver the expected KIIs, thus part of the provisional credits are canceled
80
80 RCCs verified: - 77 to the project - 3 to the buffer pool
20 canceled, not issued
Case 3: the project produced more impact than expected, thus all the credits plus new credits are issued
120
100 RCCs verified and 20 new RCCs issued/verified: - 116 to the project - 4 to the buffer pool
RBW-ERW-V1.0
Release date
October 17th, 2025
Status
In use
Although rock weathering is a well understood and proven natural phenomenon, accurately measuring CDR from ERW still has major uncertainties and can be considered in the research stage.
The following methodology was developed in consultation with scientists and Project Developers, and uses the best available knowledge. However this knowledge is rapidly changing and critical research is ongoing that is expected to modify, improve or clarify the present methodology.
To that end, Rainbow encourages Project Developers to contribute to this ongoing research, by going beyond the minimum requirements outlined herein for carbon credit certification.
See the glossary for methodology-specific terminology 👇
Methodology name
Enhanced rock weathering
Version
1.0
Methodology ID
See the Measurability criteria for more general guidance on calculations.
Functional units shall include characteristics such as:
Type of product/service
Amount
Functional units may include characteristics such as:
Performance specifications
Geographic location
Duration
The system boundary shall cover the project scope, and include:
all processes under direct control of the project and
the key upstream and downstream processes.
Processes may include raw material extraction, delivery of supplies, processing, manufacturing, distribution, use, retail, distribution, and waste treatment.
Indirect processes, such as market changes or physical displacement, shall be evaluated in the leakage criteria, and included in the GHG reduction quantification when relevant and feasible. Methodologies provide instructions on how to assess leakage and manage and, if necessary, deduct leakage emissions.
Processes with the lowest contributions to impacts, which each account for less than 1% of total impacts, may be excluded from the GHG quantification. These processes shall be transparently identified and justified.
Due to the comparative measurement approach, processes that are identical in the project and baseline scenario may be excluded, since they will not affect the comparative results.
The Guidance on Avoided Emissions by the World Business Council for Sustainable Development (WBCSD) shall be followed to select the baseline scenario (see figure below).
According to the Guidance on Avoided Emissions from the WBCSD, average market solutions shall be assumed by default for the baseline scenario. Only when a project solution is known to substitute one specific technology (e.g. the best available technology, or a product from one specific manufacturer), may the specific technology be used as a baseline.
Conservative assumptions, values, and processes shall be chosen when selecting a baseline scenario, to avoid overestimation of GHG emission reductions. Average market solutions shall be determined based on practices in the country/region of the project, and statistically relevant historical information.
If the project activity is multifunctional, the baseline scenario shall cover all functions of the project.
When the average market solution is represented by a market mix of solutions, the market mix shall include the portion of the project solution that is already used in the market.
The duration of validity of the baseline scenario selection shall be defined in methodologies.
Project GHG emissions and removals shall be quantified using primary data from project operations for operating projects, or estimated data for planned projects. The estimated data shall be used for project validation, and shall be replaced with actual data once the project begins operations for the verification of emission reductions.
All measurements from the project must be verifiable and based on recent conditions (no more than 1 year old). These measurements include quantities (volume, mass, number) and type of products and inputs.
All background data (for example, emission factors, rates of recycling, composition of national electricity grid) shall be derived from traceable, transparent, unbiased, and reputable sources.
All assumptions and estimates shall be conservative, transparently presented and justified.
For geographic accuracy and consistency across projects, national-level background data should be prioritized. Local (region, state, city-scale) or global sources may be used if justified.
Qualitative estimates of uncertainty shall be justified ranging from none, low, medium, to high. A choice of “None” is only applicable for measurements of primary data that have strong, immutable sources of proof.
Project Developers shall assess uncertainty for the following areas at the project-level:
assumptions
selection of the specific baseline scenario
measurements
estimates or secondary data used for the project assessment
Methodologies shall include assessments of uncertainty for the following areas at the methodology-level:
assumptions
baseline scenario selection guidance
equations and models
estimates or secondary data used for all projects under the given methodology
All practical steps must be taken to achieve a low level of uncertainty for each area.
Areas that have high levels of uncertainty shall use the most conservative reasonable option, to avoid overestimation of GHG emission reductions.
Based on the uncertainty levels estimated for the above individual areas, Project Developers shall justify an overall uncertainty estimate of low, medium or high for the project’s GHG emission reductions.
The uncertainty estimate shall account for the sensitivity of the total GHG emission reductions to each assessed area. This way, for example, an area might have high uncertainty, but if that area has a small effect on the total GHG emission reduction calculations, then the level of uncertainty is acceptable and can be considered lower.
The overall uncertainty estimate shall be translated into the discount factor, representing the percent of credits that will not be issued, using the following:
Low uncertainty: 3%
Medium uncertainty: 6%
High uncertainty: 9% or higher
Enhanced rock weathering
April 3 2025
May 5, 2025
Mineralization of alkaline materials ex situ
June 20, 2025
July 23, 2025
BiCRS: Marine sub-sediment burial v1.0
February 7, 2025
March 10, 2025
Access all archived versions of Rainbow Standard Documents and methodologies here 👇
The updated Rainbow Standard Rules V7.0 is open for public consultation, from November 25th to December 28th.
🔎Provide your feedback ! 👉 Read the updated documentation , and the here.
The updated Rainbow Procedures Manual V3.0 is open for public consultation, from November 25th to December 28th.
🔎Provide your feedback ! 👉 Read the updated documentation , and the here.
The updated Rainbow Requirements for VVBs are open for public consultation, from November 25th to December 28th.
🔎Provide your feedback ! 👉 Read the updated documentation , and the here.
VVBs shall have a valid accreditation from either:
ISO 14065 or equivalent
COFRAC ISO:17029 or equivalent
Approval as a Designated Operational Entity (DOE) under UNFCCC-CDM, with scopes: 1, 4, 5 6 or 13
The VVB company shall prove more than 5 years of auditing experience, including at least 2 years in environmental/sustainability auditing (refer to Structure and competencies
VVB shall adhere to Rainbow and confirm their independence from the market and carbon credits transactions.
VVB must demonstrate knowledge of and experience on the its seeks accreditation for by providing:
CVs of the lead auditors
Proof of work on at least 2 projects within the sector within the 2 previous years
At application review and on yearly basis the VVB shall:
Prove that the company is financially sound
Disclose the Rainbow program any negative media coverage
Disclose any legal/juridical proceedings
The VVB must demonstrate its knowledge of and experience related to a specific sector on which it can conduct the VVB tasks.
This sector should be one of the following:
Industrial circular economy solutions
Bioenergies
Biomass carbon removal and storage
Construction sector
The VVB submitted the .
Upon receipt of the application, the Rainbow Secretariat reviews the information provided and responds once the review is complete.
Rejection: Rainbow rejects applications where it determines that the applicant does not possess the required competencies, specified in the section above.
Approval: Rainbow approves the application and sends documents to be signed.
VVB must submit a signed copy of the Rainbow , and a signed copy of this current document, Requirements for VVB.
Rainbow Secretariat organizes training with the Certification team, on the Rainbow Standard and the Impact Certification Platform. Methodologic specific training could be planned depending on the scope of the accreditation.
Once all the above is completed, the Rainbow Secretariat delivers an accreditation to the VVB. It can start working with projects seeking validation under the Rainbow program.
The VVB organization is added as an approved VVB on Rainbow’s website.
Each VVB must employ a minimum of two auditors: one Auditor leader and one Internal reviewer, in addition to the wider audit team. This policy ensures that the Audit Team for every project includes at least two auditors, one to serve as the audit team leader and one to serve as the Internal Reviewer. The audit team may also include additional auditors, local experts, content experts, and/or translators. The Audit Leader is the main contact person for project verification.
The Team Leader must demonstrate:
Knowledge of the Rainbow Standard and accompanying documents;
Knowledge of and experience related to the framework for emissions avoidance or removals project;
Competency leading audits and coordinating team members.
The audit team must demonstrate collective knowledge and expertise in:
The Rainbow Standard Rules, methodologies, and relevant procedures, as well as specific expertise in the project type/activity;
The GHG emission avoidance/removal accounting methodology(ies) applied by the project, including activity data and emissions factors;
Data sampling techniques, including risk weighting and statistical significance calculation;
Project baselines, removals, and sequestration;
The on-the-ground audit team must demonstrate knowledge and expertise in:
Country-specific knowledge/language skills;
Interviewing, listening, and observing; and
Sensitivity towards socio-economic matters and environmental and social safeguards.
Appropriate checks must be completed through:
A Internal Reviewer, approved by Rainbow as a lead auditor, to perform a final QA/QC (Quality Assurance/Quality Control) review attesting to accuracy of data. The Internal Reviewer is not part of any direct validation or verification activities and shall remain neutral.
A Conflict of Interest (COI) form that is submitted to Rainbow’s Certification team when an audit team is contracted for validation or verification. The VVB is the responsible party for a Rainbow audit. VVBs must ensure that individual validators and verifiers are qualified with the proper training and skills to conduct verification activities.
The VVB is responsible for assembling a competent and qualified Audit Team to undertake validation / verification activities before commencement of the activities. It must consider the capabilities and capacities of its staff when building the team and skills mentioned in . The Audit Team must have sector-specific competency in relation to the type of project being validated/verified.
CVs of Lead Auditors (Lead Auditor and Internal Reviewer) and a COI form should be submitted to the Certification team for approval prior to carrying out validation/verification services for a project.
To maintain impartiality and credibility, and reduce complacency and bias, a single VVB may conduct a maximum of three (3) sequential verifications for a specific project.
Upon reaching this limit, the Project Developer is required to engage a different VVB for subsequent verifications. The Project Developer shall be granted a transition period of six (6) months to engage a new VVB for the subsequent verification.
Project developers must maintain comprehensive records of all verifications, including the VVBs involved, to demonstrate compliance with this rule.
Regular audits will be conducted to ensure Project Developers adhere to this rule. Non-compliance may result in penalties or suspension of the project's validation status.
Regular monitoring ensures that VVBs consistently perform accurate, impartial and timely validation and verification audits.
The following metrics will be employed to evaluate a VVB's performance:
Timeliness: Adherence to stipulated timelines for project validation and verification.
Accuracy: Correctness of validation and verification processes, calculations, and conclusions.
Consistency: Uniform application of requirements and methodologies across different projects.
Communication: Effectiveness and clarity in communication with Project Developers and other stakeholders.
Each VVB is required to submit an annual Performance Report that details its activities, challenges, and areas of improvement relating to its work with the Rainbow certification process. This report should provide insights into the VVB's verification approach, methodologies employed, and training undertaken.
Project Developers are asked to provide feedback on the VVB's performance after each validation and verification process, as part of the This feedback will be integral to the VVB performance review.
The Standard Secretariat annually reviews the annual Performance Reports and assess VVBs based on the established performance metrics. VVBs are encouraged to continually enhance their skills, methodologies, and processes. Training resources, workshops, and seminars will be provided to support this endeavor.
Registered
The project has completed and undergone with Riverse.
Project Developers are given access to the certification platform and the project is added to the registry.
The project may be already operating or may still be in the planning phase.
No credits have been estimated or issued.
Validated
The project is registered, and has completed and .
The PDD is completed on the Impact Certification Platform and validation audit is completed by the VVB.
The project may be already operating or may still be in the planning phase.
If the project is in the planning phase,
Credited
The project is registered and validated, and has completed at least one round of .
A has been submitted and audited by a VVB.
The project must be operating.
Verified RCCs are issued and made available on the registry.
The following sampling and measurement requirements only apply to projects measuring using solid-sample CO2 storage measurement methods. Projects using gaseous inflow-outflow measurements are exempt from these sampling protocols, as their measurement approach directly tracks CO2 flux in real time.
All solid sample measurements shall be done by an external laboratory, accredited and compliant with ISO/IEC 17025, or accredited by national accreditation bodies that certify compliance with ISO 17025 or equivalent, such as COFRAC (France), UKAS (UK) or ANAB (USA).
Project Developers shall use one of the following high-accuracy measurements:
Projects eligible under this methodology are the activities that carry out the technical aspects of refurbishment. Refurbishment is defined according to the EU Regulation 2024/1781 as "actions carried out to prepare, clean, test, service and, where necessary, repair a product or a discarded product in order to restore its performance or functionality within the intended use and range of performance originally conceived at the design stage at the time of the placing of the product on the market". Activities that only collect used devices (e.g. buyback schemes) or serve as marketplaces for refurbishers are
The purpose of this document is to:
Outline the requirements set by the Rainbow Standard to ensure that carbon credits are unique, following the No Double Counting criteria in the Rainbow Standard Rules.
Inform Project Developers and carbon credit buyers to avoid making misleading claims about the greenhouse gas emission reductions their activities enable
Double use occurs when a single carbon credit is used and/or retired twice (by two entities, or two times by the same entity). This is prevented on the Rainbow Registry, where Rainbow Carbon Credits are traced with a unique identification number from issuance to retirement.
An immutable certificate is generated upon retirement, available to the public on the Rainbow Registry, with the following information:
Entity that retired the carbon credit
Vintage year
Mechanism (avoidance or removal)
Date of retirement
Credit IDs
Credit source (project name and information)
Any applicable credit labels (e.g. CORSIA)
Refer to the Rainbow Procedures Manual Section 9.7 RCC management- Retirement for more detailed information.
There are no project-specific requirements related to double use.
Double issuance occurs when multiple carbon credits are issued for one greenhouse gas (GHG) reduction or removal activity. This can occur in two ways:
Two carbon credits are issued for the same amount of emission reductions or removals that actually occurs
Two different entities (e.g., the manufacturer of the material/equipment and the user), both claim the same GHG avoidance or removal and request carbon credit issuance for it, to the same or two different crediting standards.
Projects shall not seek credit issuance for the same GHG avoidance or removal under the Rainbow Standard and another crediting program. Project Developers commit to this by signing the Rainbow MRV & Registry Terms & Conditions.
Where there exists a risk of overlapping claims of GHG avoidance and removal between actors in the same supply chain, projects shall clearly delineate the GHG accounting boundary of the GHG avoidance and removal activity. The Rainbow Standard shall only issue one carbon credit for the GHG avoidance or removals that occur within the project’s GHG accounting boundary, and not to any overlapping activities.
Methodologies may specify requirements for projects to reduce risk of double issuance between actors in the same supply chain by, for example:
Obtaining signed agreements from upstream suppliers or downstream users
Adding relevant clauses in sales contracts
Providing information to users via marketing, packaging, or other outreach
Projects shall not be eligible for Rainbow Carbon Credits if the Certification team identifies overlaps of GHG accounting boundaries with another project’s GHG accounting boundaries, within the same or any other crediting program.
If the project is already registered under another crediting program, and intends to register and/or issue credits under the Rainbow Standard, the project must prove that the same emission avoidance and removals will not be issued under both crediting programs. The project shall provide the following information related to the project status under the other crediting program to Rainbow:
Project unique identifier
Vintage period(s) and corresponding volumes
Signed letter from the Project Developer that it has informed the other crediting program representative about its intention to register to the Rainbow Standard and requesting the deactivation or putting on hold the project with this other crediting program.
If the project has already issued credits under another crediting program, the project may be permitted to be certified under the Rainbow Standard after deactivating registration with the other crediting program. Only GHG avoidance and removal units of a different vintage and/or scope, that have not already been issued under the other crediting program, shall be eligible for Rainbow Carbon Credits.
Rainbow shall complete regular spot checks to ensure that the same project, and different projects with overlapping project scopes and mitigation activities, are not also included on other registries under other carbon credit programs. Spot checks are conducted for each project based on geographies, similar processes types, and other standards/methodologies. Projects found to be non-compliant will face penalties outlined in the Rainbow MRV & Registry Terms & Conditions.
Double claiming occurs when the same GHG emission avoidance or removal is claimed by two different entities towards their mitigation targets, inventories, or pledges. The following sections outline requirements to prevent double claiming across several scenarios.
If one of the following conditions are met, Project Developers shall follow requirements in 3.2.2 through 3.2.5.
the project issues carbon credits for use towards a nationally determined contribution (NDC), or
the project issues carbon credits for a domestic climate mitigation target of a jurisdiction or nation other than the host country, or
the project issues RCC to be used under CORSIA.
Obtain an authorisation by the project’s host country, to use the project carbon credits for the intended purpose. This authorization will be made publicly available with the project documentation, and updated as needed.
Obtain confirmation from the project’s host country, that the corresponding carbon credits will be granted a corresponding adjustment. This written confirmation will be made publicly available with the project documentation, and updated as needed.
Ensure the project’s compliance with host country regulations/guidance relating to the voluntary use of carbon credits that are also accounted towards a country’s NDC.
If the following conditions are met, Project Developers shall follow requirements in 3.3.3.
the host country has a regulated domestic climate mitigation target and/or national emissions trading scheme, and
the project’s GHG removal/avoidance units fall within the scope of the host country’s domestic climate mitigation target and/or national emissions trading scheme, and
the GHG avoidance or removal units may also be claimed by another country, jurisdiction, or entity
Obtain a letter from the host country/regional regulator stating that the GHG removal or avoidance unit is not accounted for under the host country’s domestic mitigation target and/or national emissions trading scheme, or that an accounting adjustment or cancellation has been made.
Project Developers shall not seek issuance of credits for GHG avoidance and removal units under the Rainbow Standard at the same time as another GHG-related environmental credit for the same project activity and time period. Project Developers commit to this by signing the Rainbow MRV & Registry Terms & Conditions.
If the Project Developer seeks to issue credits with another GHG-related environmental credit framework for a different time period than GHG avoidance and removal units sought under the Rainbow Standard, the Project Developer shall provide evidence that the other GHG-related environmental credits will not be issued for the same time period as the impact credited under the Rainbow Standard.
Where the Project Developer is a buyer or seller of a product within a supply chain, and implements a project that generates a GHG avoidance/removal that changes the GHG inventory of another entity within the supply chain (e.g. through insetting), there is a risk that the other entity upstream or downstream within the supply chain could double claim the GHG avoidance/removal.
The Project Developer shall
inform entities throughout the supply chain that they are claiming and reporting the emission reductions from the associated intervention,
retire the associated Rainbow Carbon Credits on the registry on their own behalf,
and inform Rainbow of the associated change in their product's emission footprint through an issued statement.
Any transfer of GHG removal/avoidance units from one entity to another within the supply chain must be documented through an authorized project representative issuing a signed statement detailing the transfer that has occurred.
Situations may arise where two end users seek different types of claims (e.g. contributory vs. offsetting claims) from GHG avoidance/removal units issued by the same Project Developer from the same project. Under such circumstances, the company shall seek guidance from reporting companies, the GHG Protocol, and other accounting tracking mechanisms that emerge.
Projects that aim to issue RCCs that meet the requirements of Article 6 of the Paris Agreement, or other Paris Agreement-related programs such as CORSIA, must be differentiated from RCCs that are only eligible to be used for voluntary carbon market purposes. This is to prevent double counting between the host country’s NDC and the buyer or airline’s own climate targets, accounting and claims. As such, unique Rainbow Standard labels can be issued to avoidance or removal credits that meet the requirements of Article 6 and CORSIA.
The Rainbow Standard mainly covers projects based in Europe. In the context of Article 6, sellers of Internationally Transferred Mitigation Outcomes (ITMOs) are most likely to be low-income countries, while high-income countries, such as European countries are more likely to be the buyers. This is due to greater financial need, higher emission reduction potential at a lower cost, and the ability for ITMOs to facilitate technology transfer and capacity building in lower-income countries. Furthermore, high-income countries are more likely to purchase ITMOs to take responsibility for historical emissions and meet emission reduction targets.
Therefore, while the Rainbow Standard has introduced the use of Rainbow Standard labels to enable the use of credits under Article 6, at least in the short term, projects located in Europe are unlikely to become sellers of ITMOs under Article 6. However, seeking the labeling of Rainbow Carbon Credits remains an option for Project Developers, since ITMOs may be used for other purposes.
Any project that intends to issue Rainbow Carbon Credits for use under Article 6 or CORSIA shall meet any necessary established requirements specifically recognised under Article 6 of the Paris Agreement and CORSIA mechanisms. Projects that meet these requirements, including those relating to double counting and corresponding adjustments, may receive the relevant Rainbow Standard labels. These credits will be labeled accordingly and be made available within the Rainbow Registry.
Rainbow labeled credits may also be used for voluntary carbon market purposes that do not require Article 6 or CORSIA labels but not vice versa.
To obtain the Rainbow Standard labels on Rainbow Carbon Credits, the Project Developer must provide an official Letter of Authorisation from the Host Country. The Letter of Authorisation shall be made public on the Rainbow Registry. A template letter is made available here.
The Project Developer applying these requirements shall provide evidence to Rainbow that the Host Country has applied relevant corresponding adjustments in accordance with Article 6 of the Paris Agreement and its Letter of Authorisation. It shall also provide evidence that the Host Country is and continues to fulfill its obligations required under the relevant Paris Requirements.
The Project Developer shall provide evidence of the appropriate application of a corresponding adjustment within two years of the required application of corresponding adjustments pursuant to Article 6 of the Paris Agreement.
If the Project Developer is unable to provide evidence of the appropriate application of a corresponding adjustment as per 4.2.5 above, Rainbow upholds the right to withdraw the Rainbow Standard label from carbon credits in the registry and inform all account holders.
Rainbow shall prepare and publish regular annual reports prior to April 1st of each calendar year, on the status of Rainbow Carbon Credits associated with Article 6 authorisations on its website. The report will provide information relating to Rainbow Carbon Credits authorized for use as ITMOs and categorize this data by host country, project activity type, and vintage. This will provide information to fulfill their reporting obligations in accordance with the Paris Agreement.
Document name
Rainbow Double Counting Policy
Release date
February 19, 2024
Version number
1.0
Status
In use
Engineered removals
Concepts such as additionality, leakage and permanence;
Risk assessment techniques;
Data monitoring, auditing, and assurance;
Desk-based reviews of documents, data, and records;
Validation and verification techniques, to assess accuracy and appropriateness of gathered evidence; and
Preparation of validation and verification reports.
Integrity: Adherence to ethical guidelines, including conflict of interest declarations.
Battery second life v1.0
December 4, 2024
January 6, 2025
Biomass Carbon Removal Storage v1.0
September 12, 2024
October 12, 2024
Biogas from anaerobic digestion v3.0
May 27, 2024
June 28, 2024
Electronic device refurbishing v2.0
April 23, 2024
May 24, 2024
Riverse Standard Rules v6
March 12, 2024
April 12, 2024
Biobased Construction Materials Methodology v2.0
January 24, 2024
March 1, 2024
Riverse Standard Rules for European Greentechs v5
February 1, 2023
March 8, 2023

The biobased material from the project that is subject to removal and/or avoidance Rainbow Carbon Credit issuance. Its production/use is the mitigation activity for this methodology.
Biobased construction material
Materials derived from biomass that are used in construction and other applications
Biogenic carbon
Carbon from organic matter that can be sequestered and stored in biobased products during their production, and released back into the atmosphere if they are incinerated or decayed. It is considered part of the short, natural carbon cycle, as opposed to fossil based carbon
Biomass
The biodegradable fraction of materials from biogenic origin, such as trees, plants, and agricultural and urban waste
Carbon storage duration
The number of years that biogenic carbon will be stored in a construction material. This corresponds to the reference service lifetime for the material’s first use, plus extended storage periods from reuse, recycling, or landfilling
Environmental Product Declaration (EPD)
A standardized and independently verified document that communicates the environmental performance of a product, including construction materials, based on a life cycle assessment
Reference service lifetime
The expected or predefined period of use for a product or construction material, measured in number of years. Used for assessing its environmental impact over its life cycle
Modules A-D
Components and terminology of an environmental assessment under EN 15804, outlining the stages of a life cycle assessment for construction materials. They encompass (A) Production, (B) Construction/Installation, (C) Use, and (D) End of Life
Project biobased material
If the project is operating, it may undergo validation and verification at the same time, and pass directly to "Credited" status.
The project may retain this status for a maximum of 5 years, corresponding to the maximum 5-year crediting period length. After 5 years, the status changes back to Registered, and the project must undergo Renewal.
Application
Project Developer (PD) submits a Project Application (PA); the Certification team reviews it within 15 days.
Clarifications may be requested, and a refusal report is issued if the application is rejected. Approved applications proceed to registration.
Registration
PD signs Terms & Conditions and completes administrative setup, including Know Your Customer (KYC) requirements.
Project sites and any Registration Partner are formally documented.
Pre-Validation
PD submits data and proof to the Impact Certification Platform
Project Design Document (PDD) is generated, outlining project operations, GHG quantification, additionality, and Monitoring Plan.
Certification team reviews the PDD, possibly involving domain experts, and approves it before third-party validation.
Validation
VVB conducts a validation audit to confirm project adherence to Rainbow Standard Rules and chosen methodology, involving the PD and Certification team as needed.
In parallel, PD conducts or provides evidence of a stakeholder consultation, open for 30 days on the Rainbow Registry.
Monitoring and Verification
Key Impact Indicators (KIIs) are monitored regularly to track project impact and eligibility.
PD submits KIIs per the Monitoring Plan; prepares a Monitoring Report which subject to the verification audit by the VVB annually (or as per schedule) to verify GHG quantification and RCC issuance.
Continuous Issuance (Optional)
Eligible projects may choose more frequent issuance of provisional credits if they meet the data frequency and accuracy requirements
Provisional credits are converted to RCCs upon verification.
Precise values rarely available
May 2023
V1.1
Add possibility to have digestate separated during storage, and during spreading
Improved accuracy
June 2023
V1.1
Specify amounts and nutrient content of different phases of digestate (raw, liquid, solid)
Improved accuracy
June 2023
V1.1
Remove transport of manure and slurry in baseline and project scenario
Assumed to be the same in both scenarios, no effect in a comparative LCA
June 2023
V1.1
Add options for digestate transport via irrigation pipes or truck transport
Improved accuracy, more relevant options for Project Developers
June 2023
V1.1
Calculate digestate storage methane emission rate based on residence time in digester, rather than fixed rate of 2% of biogas produced
Improved accuracy
July 2023
V2.1
Updated parameter on amount of methane leaked during purification
Error in units conversion
September 2023
V2.2
Add possibility for projects to provide their own data on methane leakage rates during purification, instead of standard leakage rate of 0.7% of biogas leaked
Improved accuracy, increased use of project specific data
October 2023
V2.2
New section Monitoring Plan
Alignment with Standard Rules V6
March 2024
V2.3
Add share of biogas in the grid to the baseline scenario
Alignment with Rainbow Standard Rules V6 and increase conservativeness.
March 2024
V2.3
Added equations for calculation GHG reductions
Increased transparency.
May 2024
V3.0
Aligned terminology with ISO 14064-2:2019
Improved consistency with the voluntary carbon market. LCA principles still apply.
May 2024
V3.0
Added risk assessment template for environmental and social do no harm
Provide more detailed and prescriptive assessment framework, clearer instructions for project developers.
May 2024
V3.0
Removed text for sections that are the same for all methodologies:
Measurability
Real
Additionality
Technology readiness level
Repeated text from the Standard Rules.
May 2024
V3.0
Added Monitoring Plan section
Alignment with Rainbow Standard Rules V6.
May 2024
V3.0
Remove Rebound Effect and Independently Validated criteria
Alignment with Rainbow Standard Rules V6.
May 2024
V3.0
Added uncertainty assessment section
Alignment with Rainbow Standard Rules V6.
May 2024
V3.0
Model infrastructure instead of full data collection, move under “Digestion and biomethane management” section
Simplification, results not sensitive to impacts
May 2024
V3.0
Model activated carbon based on energy production, instead of direct data collection
Simplification, results not sensitive to impacts
May 2024
V3.0
Change biomethane combustion methane emissions from fossil to biogenic
Error
May 2024
V3.0
Reintroduce transport of manure and slurry in baseline scenario
Completeness, often collected project transport distance anyway
May 2024
V3.0
Add five different energy cover crop options, instead of a single proxy
Improved accuracy, increased use of project specific data
May 2024
V3.0
New Leakage requirements
More rigorous eligibility criteria, and clear requirements and instructions for Project Developers (after public consultation)
July 2024
V3.0
Include methane emissions from manure and slurry storage in project and baseline scenarios
Public consultation feedback, erroneously assumed previously that they are the same in project and baseline scenarios
July 2024
V3.0
Create project scope requirements
Specify the project scope as one anaerobic digestion site
October 2024
V3.1
Add minimum list of ESDNH risks
Align with Standard Rules V6.2
October 2024
V3.1
Change GHG quantification from ecoinvent v3.10 to v3.11
Using more recent data
June 2025
V3.2
Remove biogas torching parameter
Below impact threshold
May 2023
V1.1
Define gas self consumption rate of 4%
GHG results not sensitive, simplify data collection
May 2023
V1.1
Set digestate produced to 85% of the sum of feedstock input fresh mass
Thermogravimetric analysis (TGA), e.g. ISO 11358-1:2014, ISO 19579:2006 and ISO 21687:2007
Dry combustion (Total Carbon Analysis, or TCA) methods, following e.g. ISO 10694:1995, ISO 13878:1998, and ISO 15178:2000
These measurements shall be done in 3 or more replicates.
For dry combustion measurements, Project Developers must determine fraction of total measured carbon that is attributable to stable mineral carbonates (e.g., CaCO3 or MgCO3). This may be determined once, upfront, for the project's alkaline feedstock, and applied throughout the crediting period until a different feedstock is used. This ensures that only creditable carbon increases resulting from the project activity are counted, excluding carbon stored in less stable or non-mineral phases. Accepted methods for confirming carbonate speciation include, but are not limited to, X-ray diffraction (XRD) with Rietveld refinement and infrared spectroscopy (FTIR).
Heterogeneous materials and sampling error
Rainbow recognizes that certain feedstocks (particularly those with highly heterogeneous composition or particle size) pose challenges for obtaining representative samples when using TGA or dry combustion. While alternative methods like acid digestion with CO₂ quantification or furnace-based mass loss may help reduce sampling error through bulk measurements, they currently introduce unacceptably high analytical uncertainty and are therefore not permitted under this methodology.
However, Rainbow remains open to the adoption of such methods, if supported by credible evidence or research demonstrating that they yield results consistent with high-accuracy reference methods (e.g. TGA, dry combustion). Upon review and approval of such evidence, these methods may be accepted with appropriate safeguards and limitations in place to ensure integrity and comparability of results.
Mineralization projects may be highly distributed, deploying the same mineralization technology and process to many different sites. For example, mineralization may occur directly in concrete mixing trucks, with small amounts of carbon storage taking place at each carbonation site. Because of this, we distinguish between two types of projects: centralized vs distributed, with different sampling requirements.
A distributed project is defined as one where
Each mineralization site is expected to issue fewer than 100 RRCs annually, based on carbon storage via mineralization (i.e. excluding reduced cement avoidance), and
The following characteristics are consistent across sites in a group:
Mineralization reaction type, the metal(s) contributing to mineral formation, and expected carbonate compound
Expected mineralization timeline post-reactor, based on the kinetics of the specific technology (e.g. full mineralization occurs within 24 hours, 1 week, etc.)
Reactor operating temperature and pressure (within a target range of ±10%)
Distributed projects can use empirical data from a representative subset of sites to prove that mineralization rates are sufficiently similar across grouped sites (RSD<10%) when alkaline feedstock is the same.
Once this is demonstrated, the project can shift to reduced sampling, where only one site continues to take samples and perform laboratory measurements. Those results may then be applied to other sites in the same group, under the conditions agreed upon by the Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification team and the VVB. The lowest-measured mineralization rate shall be used to issue credits.
Grouped sites must use the same alkaline feedstock. The criteria for determining whether feedstocks are considered the same, or should be treated as distinct, are outlined in Mineralization batch section.
This approach can be planned from the start and included in the project design, or implemented partway through the crediting period. In the latter case, the supporting data and updated Monitoring Plan must be reviewed and approved by the VVB.
Grouped sites that are not taking samples and measurements shall continue to provide all other data required for GHG quantification, such as alkaline feedstock type and amount, onsite energy use, and transport distances. These sites are only exempt from taking samples and laboratory measurements of carbonated materials.
To maintain data quality, Project Developers shall perform random cross checks annually, taking samples from non-measuring grouped sites to confirm that their mineralization rates remain within the expected range. The number of sites and samples depends on the project size, and shall be decided by the Rainbow Certification team and the Project Developer on a case by case basis.
Project Developers must perform carbon storage measurements, in replicates of 3 or 6, on a representative sample, at the frequency outlined below. The approach to obtain a representative sample and measurement is:
Samples shall be taken in a way that minimize bias and are representative of the entire mineralization batch. This includes but is not limited to taking samples at appropriate times and locations from the reactor/pile. Project Developers shall justify their approach for taking representative samples in the ex-ante sampling plan and ex-post sampling records.
Taking representative samples of heterogeneous materials like concrete is challenging due to high baseline variability in carbonate and carbon content: factors not affected by the project activity or controlled by the Project Developer. To address this, it is recommended to separate the reactive fraction (e.g. cement paste) from aggregates before sampling. Otherwise:
Natural variability in aggregate mineralization may obscure the smaller, project-induced changes in mineralization in the cement fraction, and
The overall carbon content difference between project and baseline samples may not be statistically significant, even if a measurable effect exists within the cement fraction alone.
Project Developers shall submit a Sampling Plan, upon validation, that details:
procedure to ensure representative sampling, including:
tools or equipment for taking samples,
homogenization techniques,
sample storage conditions
the approach for random timing and location (i.e. within the pile, or the production line) of sub-samples,
the proposed frequency and number of measurements performed in the first reporting period, to establish a robust dataset (mean and distribution),
approach to ensure the control/uncarbonated samples are representative of project samples, and exposed to the same conditions,
the post-mineralization timing of sample collection (e.g. 24 hours, 1 week), justified in terms of the mineralization kinetics of the specific technology.
For each Reporting Period, Project Developers shall submit a Sampling Record documenting all sampling activities. This record must include the following information, for both project and control materials:
Date and time of carbonated material production
Date and time of sampling
Name or ID of the person(s) performing sampling
Amount of material in sub-sample and composite sample
Processing or preparation steps before analysis
Description of representative sampling method
Sample ID for traceability
Notes on anomalies, if any
Expanding the scope to include other types of actors that are decisive in the sector
29/01/2024
V1.1 to V2.0
Aligned terminology with ISO 14064-2:2019
Improved consistency with the voluntary carbon market
29/01/2024
V1.1 to V2.0
Added risk assessment template for permanence and environmental and social do no harm
Provide more detailed and prescriptive assessment framework, clearer instructions for project developers
29/01/2024
V1.1 to V2.0
Removed text for sections that are the same for all methodologies:
Measurability
Real
Additionality
Technology readiness level
Repeated text from the Standard Rules
29/01/2024
V1.1 to V2.0
Distinction between reference service lifetime (RSL) and carbon storage duration (CSD)
Two lifetimes must be differentiated for two purposes: CSD for permanence criteria, and RSL for GHG reduction calculations/substitution criteria
29/01/2024
V1.1 to V2.0
Added Monitoring Plan section
Alignment with Rainbow Standard Rules V6
13/03/2024
V2.0 (PC) to V2.0
Remove mentions of Rebound Effect and Independently Validated criteria
Alignment with Rainbow Standard Rules V6
13/03/2024
V2.0 (PC) to V2.0
Added uncertainty section
Alignment with Rainbow Standard Rules V6
13/03/2024
V2.0 (PC) to V2.0
Modifications in calculation approach:
No longer subtract biogenic carbon from Module A for avoidance calculations
Removals now have emissions from Modules A1-A3 subtracted from removals
More clearly and accurately represent avoided vs removed GHG emissions.
13/03/2024
V2.0 (PC) to V2.0
Renamed provision pool to buffer pool, and uncertainty buffer to discount factor.
Alignment with Rainbow Standard Rules V6 post public consultation.
17/5/2024
V2.0 to V2.1
Recommended discount factor changed from 10% to 6%.
Alignment with Rainbow Standard Rules V6 post public consultation.
17/5/2024
V2.0 to V2.1
Clarify that ancillary material emissions/removals are not considered in project removals, and distinguish between project biobased material and project scenario.
Clarification of the previous text’s intent.
August 2024
V2.1 to V2.2
Expanded description of guidelines for selecting baseline scenario plus examples
Transparency and documentation of our current practice
October 2024
V2.2 to V2.3
Added Project Scenario section
Consistent structure with other methodologies, exhaustive
October 2024
V2.2 to V2.3
Create project scope requirements
Specify that operations in different countries must be registered as separate projects
October 2024
V2.2 to V2.3
Add minimum list of ESDNH risks
Align with Standard Rules V6.2
October 2024
V2.2 to V2.3
Specify minimum frequency of updating baseline scenario
Clarity and transparency
October 2024
V2.2 to V2.3
Change scope of buildings using biobased materials to include multiple buildings
Facilitate certification for building developers
October 2025
V2.3 to V2.4
New rules for French building-scale projects to exceed building energy efficiency targets
To comply with ,
October 2025
V2.3 to V2.4
Add Auditing requirements table
Transparency, sharing resources that are already used in practice
October 2025
V2.3 to V2.4
Short term removal credits (50-100 years) no longer an option
Short term removals have limited value in offsetting GHG emissions
23/10/2023
V1.0 to V1.1
Added equations for calculation GHG reductions
Increased transparency
29/01/2024
V1.1 to V2.0
Specified that building developers are eligible for carbon credits based on their use of biobased materials in their constructions
Marketplaces may act as intermediaries between Rainbow and refurbishers to assist in the certification process. Signed agreements shall be provided ensuring that the refurbishers are the principal and final beneficiaries of carbon finance.
Devices eligible under this methodology include: small consumer electronics such as smartphones, laptops, tablets, desktop computers, gaming consoles, and monitors. Other device types may be included in future versions of this methodology.
This methodology distinguishes between two types of refurbishing processes:
Light refurbishing is focused on testing device functionality, fixing cosmetic damage, and/or restoring software. It is a more simple process because it doesn’t involve replacing parts.
Full refurbishing is an intensive process that involves light refurbishing plus replacing some device components and reassembling products. It is more costly and rigorous.
Both full and light refurbishing activities are eligible for Rainbow Carbon Credits (RCCs) under this methodology.
Note that the project shall be defined as the project activities that are justified as additional. This may include a refurbishing site’s entire operations or only an expansion project. See the Additionality section and the Rainbow Standard Rules for more details.
Crediting period duration: the maximum duration of the crediting period for projects certified under this methodology is 5 years. Upon reaching the maximum duration, a project's crediting period may be renewed, according to the Crediting Period Renewal procedure.
Monitoring period duration: The default monitoring period duration is one year, but may be shorter at the Project Developer's request. Project Developers shall submit a Monitoring Report at least once per 24 months. Failure to do so shall result in the project being deregistered.
Site audits: validation site audits for projects under this methodology may be performed either remotely or in-person, depending on the project size. Projects that issue more than 10,000 RCCs per year must undergo an in-person site audit. Projects that issue less than 10,000 RCCs per year may choose between an in-person or remote audit. The Rainbow team may require an in-person site audit for any project, regardless of the size.
Versioning and project compliance: When this methodology is revised, projects are required to comply with the latest version for subsequent verifications of RCCs.
One project corresponds to the refurbishing sites within one registered company located within one country. There is no limit to the number of sites registered within one project, but all sites must be registered, according to the site registration requirements outlined in the Rainbow Standard Rules.
The project scope includes the additional refurbishment activities made possible through carbon finance. Refurbishing used electronic devices serves two purposes:
managing the device at end-of-life (Device A), and
restoring it to create a functioning “new” device (Device B).
The project scope includes a cradle-to-grave assessment of all processes needed to fulfill these functions, where the processes differ from business-as-usual activities. These processes are organized into three life-cycle stages, all of which are included in the project system boundary as defined in the GHG quantification section:
Device A: e-waste collection, based on project operational data regarding device collection
Device A: e-waste treatment and processing of scrap materials that couldn't be successfully refurbished, based on average country-specific e-waste management practices
Device B: refurbishment process, based on project operational data
Only devices that have not already been refurbished are eligible under this methodology.
The baseline scope includes the set of business-as-usual (BAU) activities and their resulting GHG emissions that would have occurred in the absence of the project refurbishment activity. An activity-specific baseline scenario is used, based on current market conditions reflecting the actual practices for e-waste end-of-life and new device refurbishing.
This is reflected in the two main functions accounted for in the baseline scenario:
waste treatment of the device after its first life (Device A), and
provisioning of a new device (Device B).
These processes are organized into three life-cycle stages, all of which are included in the baseline system boundary as defined in the GHG quantification section:
Device A: e-waste collection, based on a conservative estimate of e-waste device collection
Device A: e-waste treatment, based on average country-specific e-waste management practices.
Device B: manufacturing new devices, based on representative market data for device production emission factors, the proportion of devices currently procured through refurbishment, reflecting existing industry practice
A conservative and representative baseline is ensured by accounting for two main factors in the substitutability of refurbished devices for new devices:
Device quality: Project developers must demonstrate refurbished project devices are appropriate substitutes for newly manufactured devices, ensuring that the baseline remains representative of the project scenario. To do so, the developer must provide evidence of the quality of refurbished devices, confirming that they meet the standards required to serve as valid replacements for new products. Acceptable evidence may include documentation of quality control procedures, the device grading system, and the quality thresholds that devices must meet to be sold rather than recycled.
Devices sold by the project that are not fully functional shall not be considered as substitutes for new devices, and therefore will not be counted towards avoided emissions from new device production. The avoided emissions from e-waste treatment are still counted.
Device lifetime: Refurbished devices are assumed to have shorter lifetimes than new devices. This difference in performance is acceptable because it is accounted for in the GHG reduction calculations to calculate the number of RCCs to issue a project (see Equation 19 in the section ).
Lifetimes for selected devices are presented in Table 3 in the section.
Projects that reduce GHG emissions and are issued Rainbow Carbon Credits typically also contribute to a circular economy. The assessment of a project's circularity is considered under the co-benefits criteria and represents the Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) number 12.2.
The Material Circularity Indicator (MCI) is the selected measure of circularity, due to its comprehensive assessment of material flows and alignment with global standards, notably established by The Ellen MacArthur Foundation.
The MCI examines the mass of material flows throughout a product's lifecycle. It evaluates how efficiently materials circulate within a closed-loop system, assigning “more circular” scores to systems that minimize waste and optimize resource reuse. The formula uses input parameters such as material feedstock amount and type (e.g. from recycled, reused, or biological sources), recycling rates, and lifespan extension potential to quantify a product's circularity.
A detailed description and formulas for calculating the MCI are documented in the dedicated methodology document, on pages 22 to 31 (following the Product-level Methodology under the Whole product approach). Figure 3 summarizes the MCI material flows for biogas and natural gas production.
The MCI is a unitless indicator that varies from 0 to 1, where 0 represents a fully linear product and 1 is fully circular. The project scenario MCI is compared to the baseline scenario MCI, measuring how much more circular the project scenario is than the baseline.
The MCI methodology has been applied to biogas production using the input data presented in Table 9.
Figure 3 Summarized representation of the MCI material flows. *Energy recovery as part of a circular strategy only applies to biological materials following the MCI's conditions.
Table 9 All variables needed to calculate the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI) for the Rainbow Biogas from anaerobic digestion methodology are detailed below. The full methodology and equations can be found in the dedicated methodology document.
Project developers shall demonstrate that they comply with all principles and requirements outlined in the Rainbow Standard Rules, and described below with a specific focus on electronic device refurbishment.
Rainbow Standard RulesTo demonstrate additionality, Project Developers shall perform regulatory surplus analysis, plus either investment or barrier analysis, using the Rainbow Additionality Template.
Regulatory surplus analysis shall demonstrate that there are no regulations that require or mandate collection, refurbishment, and resale of electronic devices. It is acceptable if regulations promote or set targets for these activities, because the resulting increase in these activities shall be accounted for in the baseline scenario.
At the European Union level, projects automatically pass the regulatory surplus analysis, which has been conducted by the Rainbow Climate Team. The EU has introduced the Waste Electrical and Electronics Equipment (WEEE) Directive (), the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in EEE (RoHS) Directive (), Waste Framework Directive (), and the to prevent WEEE generation and promote re-use, recycling, and other forms of WEEE recovery. None of these legislations require electronic device refurbishing at the EU level. Project Developers are only required to provide a country-level regulatory surplus analysis.
Any increase in electronic device refurbishing and WEEE recycling thanks to the support of these regulations is accounted for in the GHG reduction quantification. For example, current rates of WEEE recycling are used in the GHG section of the baseline scenario, and the current share of refurbished devices sold annually in the project country is considered in the section of the baseline scenario.
Investment analysis may be used to prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary to make the project investment financially viable.
Barrier analysis may be used to prove that the project faces financial, institutional, or technological barriers to ongoing operations that can only be overcome using carbon finance.
For any type of barrier analysis, audited financial documents shall be provided as proof. These documents should either demonstrate the financial status to prove financial barriers, or show that the project could not independently fund solutions to overcome institutional or technological barriers.
Project developers shall sign the , committing to follow the No Double Counting requirements outlined in the Rainbow Standard Rules, including not double using or double issuing carbon credits.
No additional measures for double issuance are required because double issuance among actors in the supply chain is unlikely, given that device collectors and marketplaces are not eligible under this methodology.
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high-risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification Team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project Developers shall fill in the , to evaluate the identified risks of electronic device refurbishing. The identified risks include:
Improper on-site storage of non-functional e-waste
Energy intensive processing
Greenhouse gas emissions from transport for collection
Greenhouse gas emissions from transport for shipping
Leakage may occur when carbon-emitting activities are geographically displaced or relocated to areas outside the project boundaries as a direct result of the project's implementation. For electronic device refurbishing, this includes:
There is a risk that e-waste is transferred to different countries with less stringent waste treatment standards than their original country. This can occur in the form of:
non-functioning parts or devices that are discarded at the refurbishing facility, and/or
the refurbished device itself, which will undergo waste treatment in the country where it is sold and distributed.
Upstream and downstream emissions shall be included by default in the GHG reduction quantification, as part of the life-cycle approach. The upstream and downstream emissions included in the quantification are detailed in the Baseline scenario and Project scenario section
Monitoring Plans for this methodology shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information:
Amount and type of devices collected
Transportation distances of these devices for collection, and for possible secondary transport
Amount and type of functional and non-functional devices sold
Number of devices undergoing full refurbishment, light refurbishment, recycled, and saved for spare parts.
See Table 2 in the section for more details.
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
The process for issuing credits under this methodology is described below.
Project Developers submit required documentation to Rainbow and the project undergoes an ex-ante validation audit. This is performed by a Rainbow-accredited VVB, and if necessary the process described below. The project documentation is made available on the and expected CDR volume is estimated.
Project Developers spread crushed rocks on eligible sites, take samples, and conduct MRV according to the .
Monitoring in some reporting periods may show no statistically significant CDR has occurred yet, and result in no credit issuance. In that case, this step is repeated without advancing to step 4.
Project Developers may revise the Sampling Plan and/or Monitoring Plan based on initial measurement results, or as scientific knowledge and best practices evolve. Any proposed changes should be submitted to Rainbow before implementation. Depending on the scope of the revisions, updates may require auditing and approval by the VVB. Failure to obtain prior approval may result in measurements being rejected for credit verification and issuance, due to substantial deviations from the audited and agreed-upon Monitoring Plan.
By adhering to the , Project Developers prove that real ex-post CDR has occurred and document their results in a Monitoring Report, which is audited by a third-party VVB. Removal RCCs are issued on the .
Statistical requirements for proving eligibility to issue credits for a given reporting period are detailed in the section below.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each reporting period.
ERW projects are notoriously variable, case-specific and subject to rapidly evolving knowledge and innovative measurement techniques. As a result, the present ERW methodology is intentionally not prescriptive at times, allowing project design elements to be evaluated on a case-by-case basis. Project assessments are rather individualized, sometimes relying on complex geochemical justifications, and requiring both technical expertise and a degree of professional judgment.
Therefore, if a project regularly falls outside the recommendations in this methodology, and requires extensive, complex, project-specific assessments, a technical peer review by at least 2 experts may be recommended.
Any of the following parties may request a technical peer review: the Project Developer, the VVB or the Rainbow Certification team. The final decision on whether to initiate peer review rests with the Rainbow Certification team. The review may occur either
before the validation audit by a VVB,
decided on as an outcome of the validation audit, in which case it occurs after, and/or
before or during a verification audit, if the project operations change substantially from the initially validated setup.
It may be in the Project Developer's best interest to initiate a peer review before submitting the project to a validation audit, to identify any potential issues early and facilitate a smooth audit.
The Rainbow Certification team arranges the peer review and acts as the main intermediary between the Project Developer and reviewers. The Project Developer should remain anonymous throughout the review process to reduce potential bias. This stage is charged directly to the Project Developer, and fees may vary by project depending on the scope of the review.
Before the review, the Project Developer and the Rainbow Certification team shall agree upon a scope of review, outlining:
which eligibility criteria and points need to be reviewed, and which have already been validated as meeting the methodology requirements
which points, if any, should be reviewed by the VVB if project design changes (e.g. a contingency plan)
which underlying data must be shared to allow a sufficiently thorough technical assessment by the reviewers
The possible outcomes of a peer review include:
full approval: the project is validated as-is
partial approval: the project may operate as designed but certification-related aspects must be updated (e.g. increase in discount factor, changed responses to ESDNH criteria)
changes requested: the project should change its planned operations, MRV and/or project design
refusal: unresolvable issues mean that the project should not be certified. The Project Developer may start over with a new project application, with major changes.
The Rainbow Certification team makes the final recommendation for the project's eligibility and required changes, following the Rainbow Project validation review. Changes made as a result of the review should be directly incorporated into a revised PDD as much as possible, or where relevant, may be reflected in separate, additional project documentation. The findings of the technical peer review shall be made available on the registry along with all other project documentation.
The Rainbow Certification team shall review and approve eligible reviewers upon their submission of a Rainbow ERW Technical Reviewer Application form.
Through the application, reviewers shall demonstrate technical, scientific expertise in fields related to ERW, such as geochemistry, mineralogy, soil and crop science, and/or modeling and statistics. The specific reviewer chosen for a given project should have expertise in the topic/s that the project does not clearly meet from the methodology.
Reviewers may be affiliated with universities, research institutes, NGOs, consulting, freelance, or ERW companies that are not related to the project being reviewed. Two reviewers are needed per project review, and a maximum of one reviewer may come from an ERW company.
The Project Developer and the Rainbow Certification team shall select and agree upon the reviewers from the list of eligible reviewers. The Project Developer may refuse a given reviewer to preserve confidentiality.
Issuing credits for ERW projects is complex because there may be a time lag of months to years from when rock is spread on the soil, draws down atmospheric CO2, and this CO2 is permanently stored in the ocean as bicarbonate. This methodology considers that carbon removal is:
Initiated upon feedstock dissolution.
Sufficiently complete to issue credits upon alkalinity being exported from the NFZ or remaining in soil porewaters at the depth of the NFZ. This amount is adjusted for expected FFZ losses, which are not considered removals, because carbon is not yet permanently stored.
To be eligible to issue credits, Project Developers must measure a statistically significant signal of complete CDR in treatment plots, compared to the baseline scenario/control plots, during the reporting period. One of the following requirements must be met to issue credits for a given reporting period:
A statistically significant increase in the export of weathering products or the concentration of weathering products in porewaters at the depth of the NFZ, between the treatment and control plots, between the beginning and end of the reporting period. See measurement details .
A statistically significant decrease of base cation concentration in the NFZ. This may be solid-phase measurements showing either a decrease in:
base cation concentration relative to an immobile tracer within the treatment plot, between the beginning and end of the reporting period, or
Project Developers may perform additional rounds of feedstock spreading throughout the crediting period. They should apply for validation before any additional spreading round. This ensures that Rainbow, the Project Developer, and if necessary, a VVB can confirm the eligibility of the planned activities for credit issuance. This step helps avoid situations where the Project Developer completes the spreading only to discover an oversight or mistake that renders the spread ineligible.
As part of this process, Project Developers shall notify Rainbow of:
their intention to conduct additional spreading,
sites involved,
timing of the activity,
amount and source of the feedstock.
This notification may be included proactively during the initial validation audit, in a year prior to the successive spreading event, outlining plans for repeat spreading in later reporting periods. Alternatively, it may be provided on an ongoing basis throughout the crediting period.
CDR from successive spreading events shall be cumulative, with the total CDR considered for the entire project. For credit issuance, it is not necessary to track which removals are attributed to specific spreading events.
Project Developers shall document and update their project induced emissions estimates and accounting timeline from successive spreading events. See below and in the section for a full list of required information to provide/update upon a successive spreading event.
Even if CDR from successive spreading events is cumulative, and the vintage year of a spreading event does not need to be tracked to issue credits for separate years, Project Developers using NFZ Method 2: Mass balance shall describe how they plan to resolve overlapping signals of simultaneously increasing and decreasing base cation and immobile tracer concentrations from previous year's spreading events and successive spreading events.
If the spreading event occurs in new sites or with new feedstocks that weren't included in the initial validation, the Project Developer shall submit a and a , respectively.
Project Developers shall follow the requirements outlined in the corresponding section of the minimum requirements for a .
The Rainbow Certification team and the VVB shall decide whether a is required to assess the eligibility and updated project design considering the new sites and feedstock.
Monitoring Plans for this methodology shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information by Project Developers. The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
Biogas
A mixture of gasses produced by the anaerobic digestion of organic matter, primarily composed of biogenic methane and carbon dioxide. It can be used directly as a renewable energy source, or can be purified to biomethane.
Biogenic methane
Methane produced from the decomposition of organic matter, as opposed to methane derived from fossil fuels. It has a slightly lower global warming potential than fossil-based methane.
Biomethane
Methane that has been purified from biogas to meet quality standards for natural gas. It can be used for heating, electricity generation, or as vehicle fuel.
Dedicated crop
Crops specifically grown for use as feedstock in energy production, such as maize or sorghum, as opposed to crops grown for food or other purposes. They are cultivated during the main growing season and harvested at maturity.
Digestate
The nutrient-rich residue left after the anaerobic digestion of organic feedstock, which can be used as a fertilizer or soil conditioner.
Energy cover crop
Crops like clover or rye that are grown during the off-season for use as biogas feedstock. They prevent soil erosion and are harvested for energy production, unlike traditional cover crops, which are mixed into the soil.
Feedstock
Organic materials used as inputs in the production of biogas through anaerobic digestion, such as agricultural residues, food waste, or manure.
Mineralization, Mineral Carbonation
A chemical process where CO2 reacts with alkaline materials (e.g., concrete, cement, industrial residues) to form stable carbonates (e.g. CaCO3), permanently storing CO2. Mineralization and carbonation are used interchangeably in the present methodology.
Ex situ
Processes that occur in controlled, engineered environments, such as reactors or industrial facilities, rather than in situ approaches that take place in the natural environment (e.g. enhanced rock weathering).
Carbonated Material
The solid product resulting from mineral carbonation, containing CO2 locked in stable carbonate form (e.g., carbonated concrete or aggregate).
Carbonation curing
A process where CO2 is introduced to concrete or cement-based materials during the curing stage, to accelerate strength development and chemically bind CO2 into the material.
Carbonation batch
The carbonated material produced using the same input materials (alkaline feedstock and CO2) and operating conditions. It is assumed that all carbonated material from the same carbonation batch has similar characteristics.
Alkaline Feedstock
Materials that contain metal oxides (e.g., calcium, magnesium, iron) that react with CO2 to form carbonates.
Biogenic CO2
CO2 originating from biomass sources. Its carbonation leads to net carbon removals, and is eligible for removal carbon credits.
Project Developers shall submit a Feedstock Characterization Report for each spreading event, that includes the applicable information outlined in the following sections: a qualitative , , , and the .
Project Developers shall provide a comprehensive qualitative description of the feedstock once for each feedstock source (in addition to the quantitative described below). This description shall include:
Minimum impact
Independently verified
Compliance and Updates
Projects must stay compliant with Rainbow Standard and methodology revisions and report major operational changes in the Monitoring Report.
VVB audits any revisions or changes, ensuring alignment with updated methodologies and standards.
Crediting Period Renewal
After a 5-year crediting period, the project must undergo a full revalidation, including a new PDD, validation audit, and stakeholder consultation to continue issuing credits.
Methane
A colorless, odorless flammable gas (CH₄) that is the main component of natural gas and biogas. It is a potent greenhouse gas when released into the atmosphere.
Nitrous oxide
A potent greenhouse gas (N₂O) occasionally emitted during anaerobic digestion, especially with high-nitrogen feedstock. It has a much higher global warming potential than carbon dioxide.
Atmospheric CO2
CO2 captured directly from the atmosphere, typically from Direct Air Capture (DAC) or ambient air. Its carbonation leads to net carbon removals, and is eligible for removal carbon credits.
Fossil CO2
CO2 originating from fossil fuels. Its carbonation leads to carbon storage, and is eligible for avoidance carbon credits.
Calcination CO2
CO2 originating from lime that is calcinated in cement production, from breaking up CaCO3 into CO2 and calcium silicates. Its carbonation leads to carbon storage, and is eligible for avoidance carbon credits.
Fugitive CO2 Emissions
Unintended leaks of CO2 from equipment (e.g., reactors, pipelines, trucks). Not to be confused with the Leakage eligibility criteria.
Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC)
The most common type of cement, produced by heating limestone and other materials to form clinker, which is then ground into a fine powder.
Supplementary cementitious materials (SCM)
Industrial by-products (e.g. fly ash, slag) or natural pozzolans used to partially replace OPC in concrete. They can both replace and reduce clinker-related emissions, and serve as reactive alkaline materials that bind CO2 into stable carbonates.
At the start of verification, for the first mineralizationbatch, measurements shall be taken at high frequency until the project demonstrates stable operating conditions and establishes operational stability and consistent results.
It is recommended to conduct 10 separate measurements, each on a composite sample from 3 sub-samples each, in 3 or 6 replicates depending on the measurement type used, at the beginning of the crediting period. The variability of these measurements should not exceed an RSD of 10%.
The lowest value of recent stable measurements shall be used for initial credit issuance once measurement consistency is established. This shall be updated regularly for ongoing verification.
This frequency may be adjusted based on the project’s technological maturity, existing data, and expected variability. For example, this step may be skipped if the project can prove stable operating conditions were established before the start of the crediting period.
For ongoing monitoring and verification, measurements shall be repeated:
For each mineralization batch (with batch validity limited to 1 year), or
At least once per quarter, or
Every 500 tonnes CO2 removed, whichever comes first.
Each ongoing verification measurement shall:
Be based on a representative sample. Best practice is to create this sample as a homogenized composite of at least 3 sub-samples taken from different points in the batch.
Be analyzed in replicates of 3
Achieve an RSD ≤ 10% between the replicate measurements; otherwise, measurements must be repeated.
The lowest of the replicate values shall be retained and used for crediting.
Minimum impact
Independently verified
Fs
Fraction of a product's biological feedstock from Sustained production.
In the project scenario, feedstock is of biological origin except dedicated crops. According to Rainbow's biogas methodology section 2.4, projects must adhere to specific limitations when using dedicated crops as feedstock. Consequently, dedicated crops are deemed "virgin" to not benefit from biological feedstock circularity.
The market gas mix is composed of natural gas, biomethane, and biogas. It is assumed that biological feedstock is used in biogas and biomethane, but not in natural gas production. Thus, Fs in the baseline scenario is the sum of the fraction of biogas and biomethane in the grid.
V
Material that is not from reuse, recycling or biological material from sustained production.
The amount of virgin materials used in the project scenario is the equivalent of dedicated crops used.
All the input materials, except the fraction related to biogas/biomethane described above, are considered virgin as no reuse, recycled, or biological materials are assumed in a status quo scenario.
Cr
Fraction of mass of a product being collected to go into a recycling process
Assumed zero because after the gas and digestate use, no product is left for recycling.
Cu
Fraction of mass of a product going into component reuse
Assumed zero as, after the gas use, no product is left for reuse except digestate in the project scenario (which is considered in the composting process below).
Cc
Fraction of mass of a product being collected to go into a composting process
This fraction represents the amount of digestate relative to the total mass of the final product
().
Although the fraction of biogas and biomethane in the baseline scenario generate digestate, the amount would be very small, and does not have a significant impact on the MCI. Thus, it is excluded from the calculation.
Ce
Fraction of mass of a product being collected for energy recovery where the material satisfies the requirements for inclusion
This fraction represents the amount of biomethane relative to the total mass of the final products ().
Energy recovery as part of a circular strategy only applies to biological materials, according to the MCI methodology. This value is assumed to be zero for natural gas. Thus, the final value considered is the sum of the fraction of biogas and biomethane in the grid.
Wo
Mass of unrecoverable waste through a product's material going into landfill, waste to energy and any other type of process where the materials are no longer recoverable
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is zero as all final product mass can be recovered.
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is equal to the mass of the final product (M) minus the fraction of biogas and biomethane in the grid.
Ec
Efficiency of the recycling process used for the portion of a product collected for recycling
Not considered as no recycled material is used.
Wc
Mass of unrecoverable waste generated in the process of recycling parts of a product
Not considered as no recycled material is used.
Ef
Efficiency of the recycling process used to produce recycled feedstock for a product
Not considered as no recycled material is used.
Wf
Mass of unrecoverable waste generated when producing recycled feedstock for a product
Not considered as no recycled material is used.
W
Mass of unrecoverable waste associated with a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is zero as all the final product mass can be recovered.
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is equal to the mass of the final product (M) minus the fraction of biogas/biomethane.
LFI
Linear flow index (LFI)
Varies from 0 to 1, where 1 is a completely linear flow and 0 is a completely restorative flow. In a circular project, the LFI shall be closer to zero, while the baseline shall be closer to 1.
L
Actual average lifetime of a product
Biomethane shall have similar properties to natural gas to be injected into the gas grid. It is assumed that the actual average lifetime of the product in both scenarios is equivalent, and therefore doesn’t affect the comparative calculations. It is assumed to be 1.
Lav
Average lifetime of an industry-average product of the same type
U
Actual average number of functional units achieved during the use phase of a product
Biomethane shall have similar properties to natural gas to be injected into the gas grid. It is assumed that the actuarial average number of functional units of the product in both scenarios is equivalent, and therefore doesn’t affect the comparative calculations. It is assumed to be 1.
Uav
Average number of functional units achieved during the use phase of an industry-average product of the same type
X
Utility of a product (function of the product's lifespan and intensity of use)
Following the MCI methodology calculation, this is equal to 1.
MCIp
Material Circularity Indicator of a product
Varies from 0 to 1, where 0 represents a fully linear product and 1 is fully circular.
M
Mass of a product
Total mass (kg) of gas produced, calculated based on the GWh of energy input into the gas grid in the project scenario according to:
where,
represents the mass of gas produced in one year, calculated based on the number of Functional Units produced (GWh) in the base year and the gas' LHV in kWh/m³.
represents the amount of GWh injected into the grid, from the gas grid injection receipts.
represents the gas calorific value, in kWh/m³. This is assumed to be 10, converted from Table 5.
represents the biomethane density, in kg/m³, which is assumed 0.75 kg/m³.
In the project scenario, the digestate produced shall also be considered in the final product weight as it has economic value. Thus,
where,
represents the product's final mass in the project scenario, calculated based on M and the amount of fertilizer thanks to the use of digestate.
represents the amount of digestate produced. This is calculated according to the amount of feedstock input, according to Eq.2, in kg (without considering the transport emission factor).
Fr
Fraction of mass of a product's feedstock from recycled sources
Assumed zero
Fu
Fraction of mass of a product's feedstock from reused sources

Assumed zero
Projects shall demonstrate that their Internal Rate of Return (IRR) is below 28.5% in order to meet the financial additionality threshold. This threshold corresponds to three times the sectoral Weighted Average Cost of Capital (WACC), based on benchmark data from the Damodaran database.
The IRR shall be calculated based on the projected net cash flows over the project’s economic lifetime, using the following approach:
Where:
NPV = net present value
= net cash flow in year t
r = internal rate of return
n = project duration (in years)
Only projects with an IRR strictly below 28.5% will be considered as financially additional under this criterion.
Business plans shall account for any public funding or other financial support received by the project. During verification, audited accounting documents shall be used to demonstrate that the projected net cash flows from the calculation above was reasonable, and that carbon finance was used as initially described.
Note that for investments in expansion, only the additional carbon reductions enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Rainbow Carbon Credits.
Technological barrier: Refurbishment in Europe may struggle to be cost-competitive with new device sales, or refurbishment occurring elsewhere. Carbon finance may be used to lower the selling price of the project’s refurbished devices, making them a more attractive and competitive option.
Projects shall demonstrate that their EBITDA/Revenues is below 9% in order to pass the financial additionality threshold. The EBITDA shall be calculated using the following formula:
All financial analyses shall account for any public funding or other financial support received by the project.
SDG 12.5 - Reduce waste generation through prevention, reduction, recycling and reuse
The project diverts e-waste from improper disposal. In the EU, an average of 44% of small IT and telecommunication equipment e-waste is not treated in proper waste management channels. All e-waste collected in the project scenario is properly managed (via refurbishing or recycling).
Number and type of waste input devices.
Worker health and safety
Frequent replacement of devices due to shortened lifetime (rebound effect)
Frequent replacement of devices due to economic incentives (rebound effect)
Quantified value of any co-benefits claimed.
SDG 5.1 - Achieve gender equality and empower all women and girls
Women are less likely to work in the technology sector, and when they do they are usually paid less than men.
Electronic device refurbishing projects may promote gender parity in the information and communications technologies (ICT) workplace by having a large female workforce and having equal pay between men and women for doing the same job.
Average hourly earnings of men and women by age and disabilities (if any)
Standalone official policy for equal pay or current scenario in the sustainability report
SDG 8.5 - Achieve full and productive employment and decent work for all women and men, including for young people and persons with disabilities
Electronic device refurbishing projects often hire people with disabilities, who tend to have lower rates of employment (e.g. 55% activity rate of people with some disability in the EU vs 74% overall activity rate).
Official record of number of employees with a disability vs total employees of the workforce
SDG 12.2 - Achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural resources
The project’s circularity will be measured by the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI), according to the Ellen MacArthur Foundation's methodology.
Primary data collected from the project for the GHG reduction quantification, which are also used in the Circularity Assessment
SDG 12.4 - Achieve the environmentally sound management of chemicals and all wastes throughout their life cycle
Electronic devices contain precious metals and rare earth elements. By refurbishing electronic devices, and recycling the precious metals and rare earth elements they contain, projects avoid the destructive mining and extraction of these finite, virgin elements.
Number of devices refurbished. Amount of rare earth elements avoided calculated in Rainbow life cycle inventory models.
directly measured base cation concentration between the treatment and control plot between the beginning and end of the reporting period (or, for the first reporting period, between a sample taken just after spreading and at the end of the reporting period).
See measurement details here.
Description of statistical methods used to asses uncertainty, and approach for choosing final values from measurements
Measurements of heavy metal content in soils and biomass grown where rock was spread, and soil organic carbon, compared between treatment and control plots, at least once after rock spreading during the crediting period (ESDNH criteria)
Changes in crop yield between treatment and control plots, at least once after rock spreading during the crediting period (Leakage criteria)
Measured concentration of base cation/s in biomass
Total biomass removed (annual crops) or new growth (perennial crops)
Actual measurement method used
Calculated potential CDR loss
Inefficient conversion of alkalinity to CDR
pH-dependent speciation
If porewater measurements, measured water volume infiltrated through NFZ soil and two carbonate system parameters results
If conservative deduction, measured source and amount of strong acid addition to or production in the NFZ
Non-carbonic acid weathering
If porewater measurements, measured water volume infiltrated through NFZ soil and anion concentration results
If nitric acid simplification, proof that that nitric acid from nitrification is the main source of non-carbonic acid weathering, and proven amount of ammonia fertilizer applied
Acid buffering: measured bound acidity in the NFZ
Calculated potential CDR loss
Base cations measured
Base saturation and CEC at the beginning and end of the reporting period
Calculated change in CDR from adsorption/desorption of base cations
Choice whether to measure CDR increase in the NFZ from secondary carbonate formation.
If no, no further requirements.
If yes, the following are required:
ex-post sampling procedure
Newly formed SIC concentration at beginning and end of reporting period in treatment and control plots
calculated change in CDR from secondary carbonate precipitation
all points listed in the Monitoring requirements for successive spreading event on same site, same feedstock batch section
Site Characterization Report for the new site
If it is a new extrapolated site, proof that the strata type is eligible for extrapolation, and that the new site falls within the eligible strata's characteristics
An overview of the new total project area, including the newly added sites, with maps and updated strata descriptions
Signed contract with the owner of land where rock is spread, agreeing the landowner will not also issue carbon credits (No double counting criteria)
all points listed in the Monitoring requirements for successive spreading event on same site, same feedstock batch section
Feedstock characterization report with the following elements:
qualitative description of feedstock
feedstock CDR and ESDNH measurement results
CDR estimates, and
the
Proof of adherence to requirements
disclose the nature and impact of mining activities to source feedstock.
Proof of adherence to requirements
Diversion of rare earth elements and critical minerals from other applications, such as renewable energy supply chains.
Potential misallocation of mineral waste that could have lower-emission alternative uses.
7.2 Increase substantially the share of renewable energy in the global energy mix
7.3 Double the global rate of improvement in energy efficiency
7.4 Facilitate access to clean energy research and technology
8.2 Achieve higher levels of economic productivity through diversification, technological upgrading and innovation
8.3 Support decent job creation and innovation, and encourage micro-, small- and medium-sized enterprises
8.4 Improve global resource efficiency in consumption and production
8.5 Achieve full and productive employment and decent work for all women and men, including for young people and persons with disabilities
9.4 Upgrade infrastructure and retrofit industries to make them sustainable, with increased resource-use efficiency and greater adoption of clean and environmentally sound technologies and industrial processes
11.6 Reduce the adverse per capita environmental impact of cities, including air quality and municipal and other waste management
11.a Support positive economic, social and environmental links between urban, peri-urban and rural areas
12.2 Achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural resources
12.4 Achieve the environmentally sound management of chemicals and all wastes throughout their life cycle
12.5 Reduce waste generation through prevention, reduction, recycling and reuse
13.2: Integrate climate change measures into national policies, strategies and planning (note that only GHG reduction measures beyond what is considered for carbon credit issuance may be considered as a co-benefit)
14.1 Prevent and significantly reduce marine pollution of all kinds, in particular from land-based activities, including marine debris and nutrient pollution
14.3 Minimize and address the impacts of ocean acidification
15.1 Ensure the conservation, restoration and sustainable use of terrestrial and inland freshwater ecosystems and their services
15.5 Reduce the degradation of natural habitats, halt the loss of biodiversity and, by 2020, protect and prevent the extinction of threatened species
GHG emissions and reductions shall be calculated using the following IPCC Global Warming Potential (GWP) values for a 100 year horizon according to IPCC 2021 AR6, Chapter 7. The GWPs for the main greenhouse gasses are summarized below, and the full list of GWPs can be found in the IPCC AR6 Chapter 7 Supplementary Material, Table 7.SM.7.
CO
1
CH fossil
29.8
CH biogenic
27
NO
273
HFC-32
771
HFC-134a
1526
The following security measures are the minimum requirements for the Rainbow Registry, and ensure confidentiality, integrity, and data availability:
Data transfers shall always use industry-standard encryption technology (SSL/TLS/HTTPS).
Application authentication shall be enabled and verified by a third-party provider that meets industry best practice, is internationally recognized, and is ISO27001 certified.
Backend service and database hosting shall be enabled by a third-party provider that enables encryption.
Administrative tools shall be provided 2FA for admin authentication and sign-in.
The Rainbow Secretariat shall verify at least twice per calendar year that the IT security requirements are met, and summarize the findings in a report made publicly available on the Rainbow website. The following elements shall be verified:
Verify compliance with the above requirements
Verify security vulnerability status and upgrade all JavaScript dependencies with npm.
Review Authentication provider access
Review Cloud provider IAM accounts and access
Rotate database passwords, API keys (internal and external)
Review Database connection allowlist
Review repository history for leaked secrets
Verify application authorization rules
Some projects have particularly high environmental impacts in their first year(s) of operation. This can be caused by inefficiency in early stages of operations while ramping up their processes. For example, at the beginning of a project, there may be very high consumption of inputs for a rather low production of outputs. This does not include emissions of construction and infrastructure, which are amortized over many years.
In some cases, this ramp-up effect may lead the project to emit more GHGs than the baseline scenario in the first year of the crediting period. In this case, the project’s validation and verification of the first two years will be bundled. This way, the project’s net induced emissions from the first year are subtracted from the avoided emissions of the second year.
If the project is still a net emitter and does not avoid any emissions at the end of the second year of the crediting period, the project will be dropped from the Rainbow certification process.
When RCCs are bundled for the first two years of a crediting period, the vintage is the second year.
Note that this ramp-up effect only relates to high volume or frequent use of consumables in the first year, not to fixed inputs such as machinery and buildings. This is because according to the LCA approach, the emissions of these long-lived inputs are distributed annually over their usable lifespan. Fixed inputs refer to products where the lifespan is more than 1 year, and includes objects such as machinery, tanks, pipelines, building materials, and concrete slabs. Consumables refer to inputs that are taken up by the process and consumed in order to create the product. Their use is usually recurring and ongoing, and include inputs such as electricity, water, fuel for transportation, feedstock inputs (for biogas), and replacement screens (for electronics reconditioning).
There are two types of avoided emissions: those that lead to an absolute decrease in emissions, and those that lead to a smaller increase in emissions.
Absolute decrease: there is a real absolute decrease in emissions compared to the baseline scenario.
Smaller increase: there is a relative decrease in emissions compared to the baseline scenario, but still an absolute increase in emissions. This may happen when a project intervenes in a sector with growing demand, where overall production increases, so emissions increase over time.
Both types of avoided emissions can be eligible for RCCs, as long as they meet the reduction targets for their sector.
6.3 Improve water quality by reducing pollution, eliminating dumping and minimizing release of hazardous chemicals and materials
6.4 Increase water-use efficiency
6.5 Protect and restore water-related ecosystems
location of the source (GPS coordinates, name of the quarry/mine/site)
partner companies extracting the feedstock
additional processing steps undertaken by the project
general mineralogic composition and heterogeneity (specific mineralogic composition will be measured more frequently for each feedstock batch)
any jurisdictional regulations around rock spreading frequency, amount and mineral content (e.g. fertilizer guidelines)
waste status
if it is waste, describe its alternative use. This informs the creation of the , to determine whether to include baseline CDR from feedstock counterfactual use.
Project Developers shall measure the following characteristics of feedstock described in Tables 1 and 2 on a composite representative sample at least once for each feedstock batch. A feedstock batch is all feedstock that comes from the same feedstock source, in the same mining/extraction period (within 72 hours). Project Developers may justify alternative definitions for a feedstock batch if the feedstock source is highly homogeneous, and if aggregating feedstock does not increase variability in the overall batch composition.
It is assumed that all feedstock in the same batch has the same characteristics, and samples and measurements only need to be taken once per feedstock batch. The exception is moisture content, which must be measured just before each spreading event.
Equivalent measurement results already performed by the mine operator, for the same feedstock batch, can be used instead of performing the same measurements again.
Measurements shall be performed by third-party independent labs, and follow a recognized and standardized measurement technique (e.g. ISO 12677:2011 for XRD mineralogical analysis).
The following measurements shall be taken of feedstock before spreading for the purpose of estimating the maximum potential CDR for a given feedstock, and for modeling the potential CDR and weathering rate over the project lifetime (both detailed in the CDR Estimates section below).
Characteristics with two asterisks (**) do not need to be measured for every feedstock batch, if Project Developers measure them at least once and justify that they are not expected to vary across batches from the same feedstock source.
Table 1 List of measurements to perform on feedstock to determine CDR potential, via calculations and models described below. Provide average and distribution of results.
Chemical composition
Concentration of calcium (Ca), magnesium (Mg), potassium (K), sodium (Na), sulfur (S), phosphorus (P), aluminum (Al), silicon (Si), and iron (Fe), measured via XRF or similar
*to be measured from samples taken immediately prior to spreading feedstock
The following measurements shall be taken before feedstock spreading for the purpose of demonstrating that the project meets requirements. Project Developers shall compare all measurement results to the thresholds set in the relevant jurisdictional regulations. It shall be transparently stated when no regulation covers the given measurement, and which thresholds are used instead.
Characteristics with two asterisks (**) do not need to be measured for every feedstock batch, if Project Developers measure them at least once and justify that they are not expected to vary across batches from the same feedstock source.
Table 2 List of measurements to perform on feedstock to determine ESDNH compliance.
Using the CDR measurements described above, and site-specific considerations, Project Developers shall provide the following for ex-ante project validation and for each spreading event:
Maximum potential CDR of applied feedstock shall be calculated based on the modified Steinor equation, shown below (Renforth, 2019). Project Developers should use the average, minimum and maximum results from feedstock measurements and report the range of results.
represents the maximum CDR potential of a feedstock
and represent the elemental concentrations in the form of oxides
denotes the molecular mass of each respective oxide
represent the relative contributions of each oxide. According to Renforth, 2019, are equal to -1; equals -1; and equals -2.
represents the molar ratio of CO sequestered per divalent cation present in the feedstock. As a default, this may be assumed to be 0.85. See the section for more details.
Potential CDR over the project lifetime should be modeled, specifying CDR across any expected crediting period renewals.
The model should include a curve of expected weathering completion (e.g. 10 years after application, it is estimated that 70% of the material has weathered). The results of this modeling are used for informing allocation of upstream impacts in the . The models used shall:
include at least a consideration of moisture, temperature, and pH in the project region.
link biogeochemical and hydrological processes.
In the Feedstock Characterization Report, Project Developers shall describe and justify the following, considering feedstock heterogeneity and site-specific factors:
sampling frequency
how to ensure representative sampling
number of subsamples to combine into a composite sample
total amount of sampled material needed to conduct all measurements and obtain precise results
sample collection and handling methods
Parts of used devices that are no longer functioning and are replaced by spare parts in the refurbishing process.
Small IT and telecommunication equipment
A category of electronic waste (e-waste) defined by the , composed of devices no larger than 50 cm external dimension, including mobile phones, GPS, routers, personal computers, and printers.
Sold devices
A functioning device that was successfully refurbished and sold functioning by the refurbishing project. It fully meets the market requirements and replaces a new manufactured device.
Spare parts
Functioning parts used in the refurbishing process to replace non-functioning parts, such as a battery or display. They may be new manufactured parts, or harvested from dismantled non-functioning devices.
WEEE
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment, also called e-waste
Buyback
Buying used devices from consumers.
Device A
In this methodology, Device A refers to the first life of the refurbished device in the project scenario, and the waste device in the baseline scenario.
Device B
In this methodology, Device B refers to the refurbished device in the project scenario, and the new manufactured device in the baseline scenario.
Functioning device
A device that is successfully refurbished by the refurbishing project. It replaces a new manufactured device.
Non-functioning device
A device that is not successfully refurbished by the refurbishing project. It may be recycled, dismantled for spare parts to be used by the refurbisher, or sold for spare parts.
Refurbishing
The process of repairing and restoring used devices to good working order.
Residual value
The value (economic and lifetime) of a used device that is still remaining when it is sold and/or sent for refurbishing.
Scrap materials
The Rainbow Standard Documentation is the set of documents that describes requirements and procedures for all projects and methodologies under the Rainbow Standard.
The Rainbow Standard Rules undergoes regular revision to ensure it reflects up-to-date science and best practice in the voluntary carbon market.
The revision of the Procedures Manual follows the same process.
Major revisions are tracked through the first number after the standard document name (e.g. Rainbow Standard Rules V1). Major revisions include three phases: submission, review, and approval.
Open feedback: All the latest versions of the Rainbow Standard Rules and methodologies documentation are published on Rainbow’s website. This allows any interested party to be able to comment on every document at any time—not only during dedicated public consultations.
To ensure the relevance and rigor of the Rainbow Standard Documentation, the Climate team and the Secretariat actively monitor all references, and propose changes from referenced standards and tools (IPCC, ISO…).
Compilation of feedback: The Secretariat compiles feedback into a document called the 'Standard Revision Request'.
Formulation of Revision Proposal: After analyzing each feedback, the Secretariat drafts a 'Revision Proposal'. This proposal outlines the changes deemed necessary to the Rainbow Standard Documentation based on the feedback received.
Submission to SAB and deliberation: the Revision Proposal is presented to the SAB for their critical evaluation. If the Revision Proposal is validated, the SAB decides whether the proposed revision is of a nature that demands public input.
Public Consultation: the Secretariat organizes a public consultation of the proposed revisions (see section).
Integration of Public Feedback: the Secretariat integrates feedback from the public consultation into the existing 'Revision Proposal'. The outcome of this integration is a 'Final Standard Revision Proposition'.
SAB Review and Approval: The 'Final Standard Revision Proposition' is then presented to the SAB for their final approval. The SAB ensures that feedback from the public consultation phase has been genuinely and appropriately integrated.
Implementation: The Climate team implements the approved revisions into the Rainbow Standard Documentation and any affiliated documents. All changes are documented in the , and .
After the revision procedure is completed, each contributor receives an update on how their remark has been treated.
Project compliance: Projects that are already validated must become compliant with revised rules upon their next verification. They do not need to undergo a new validation process. The VVB shall check for gaps and compliance during the verification audit. If projects are incompatible with revised rules, no new RCCs will be issued for that project, but their verified RCCs will remain valid on the Rainbow Registry.
Minor revisions may be made by the Rainbow Climate Team when they are deemed necessary. All changes are documented in the , and . Minor revisions are tracked through the second number after the standard document name (e.g. Rainbow Standard Rules V1.1). Revisions are considered minor if they:
Correct typographical or formatting errors that do not affect the meaning or application of the standard.
Update references to external documents, tools, or standards without changing the core methodology.
Adjust procedural steps or timelines to improve clarity or efficiency without altering the overall process.
Add or update examples or case studies to aid understanding, without introducing new requirements.
The creation of new Rainbow Standard Documentation follows the Review and Approval phases described in the section, with the following differences:
Procedure and document development:
Internal process setting: All Rainbow Standard Documentation is initially drafted internally by the Climate team.
Basis of standards: procedures are tailored to Rainbow’s operations, but should draw inspiration and guidance from established standards such as ISO 9001 and ISO 31000, ensuring global compliance and recognition.
Instead of a Revision Proposal as described in the previous section, a creation proposal is submitted to the Standard Advisory Board for validation.
A public consultation is conducted for the creation of any new Rainbow Standard Documentation.
All public consultations are accessible on the website under the Standard Documentation section .
Anyone may submit a request for a new methodology at any time. The requests are summarized by the Secretariat into a Methodology Creation Proposal (template ).
The Methodology Creation Proposal is reviewed first by the Rainbow Climate Team, and if approved then it is reviewed by the SAB for final approval.
The reviews consider factors such as:
Maturity of the technology
Number of existing projects
If the proposal is validated by the SAB, a Methodology Creation Mandate is granted to the Secretariat and the Rainbow Climate Team. This mandate assigns the designated teams to research, develop, and finalize the methodology. The are presented below.
If the proposal is rejected by the SAB, it then decides whether to earmark it for reworking or, based on the gravity of the concerns, abandon it altogether.
The Secretariat gathers a technical working group composed of at least 3 members from the (TAC) and/or external experts. The technical working group collaborates with the Rainbow Climate Team to develop the methodology.
Members of the technical working group shall be selected based on
expertise related to e.g. the scientific foundations, sustainability issues, LCA/GHG quantification, policy, or operations of the methodology's subject.
representation from diverse stakeholders from e.g. researchers/academics, project developers, independent experts, or NGOs.
To research and develop the methodology, the Climate team will gather the working group and consult the TAC members on a regular basis. The first step of methodology development shall always be a literature review. Following steps depend on the needs of each methodology.
The minimum requirements for a Rainbow methodology include the following:
Eligible technologies and activities
Scope/delineation of a project (e.g. how many sites can be included in one project?)
Minimum requirements for a monitoring plan
Justification of the baseline scenario (pre-defined or guidance for baseline scenario selection), and frequency of updating the baseline scenario
Once a first version of the methodology has been drafted, the Secretariat organizes a 30-day public consultation by publishing a Call for Consultation. The Secretariat and Climate team integrates feedback into a new Final Methodology Creation Proposition.
The Final Methodology Creation Proposal is then validated by the SAB, which ensures that the feedback from the TAC, experts, and the public consultation was integrated.
Methodologies are adaptable to ensure their relevance and robustness. To streamline updates and maintain transparency, the Climate team implements:
Major updates: substantive alterations are subject to a thorough vetting process and follow the , plus the technical working group requirements described the section. Major updates are tracked through the first number after the methodology name (e.g. BiCRS methodology V1).
Minor updates and clarifications: Minor modifications to the methodologies are regularly published and continuously open for public feedback on the , ensuring constant engagement with stakeholders. Minor updates are tracked through the second number after the methodology name (e.g. BiCRS methodology V1.1).
Feedback integration: continuous feedbacks are integrated into the , promoting a feedback-driven refinement approach.
At a minimum, methodologies shall be reviewed and undergo public consultation every 3 years.
A methodology may be discontinued if:
shifts in scientific consensus indicate it no longer aligns with best practices
it fails to achieve measurable carbon reductions
it is no longer additional
it overestimates credits and cannot be revised to ensure conservativeness
Methodologies are evaluated against these criteria at least once every three years during the mandatory major revision process, though they can also be reviewed and discontinued at any time if necessary.
Projects already validated under a discontinued methodology may continue using it until their next verification. After that, they must transition to a new methodology or become ineligible for new RCCs. Previously issued RCCs remain valid and tradable.
Decision by the SAB: Public consultations are mandatory for all major revisions of the Rainbow Standard Documents and methodologies. For other revisions, the Standard Advisory Board (SAB) decides, based on their judgment and complexity of the topic at hand, whether to launch a public consultation.
Publishing the Call for Consultation: the Secretariat initiates the public consultation with the publication of a Call for Consultation. This call is widely broadcasted through relevant channels to ensure maximum outreach, inviting Project Developers, carbon credit resellers / brokers / marketplaces, Net Zero engaged corporates, Validation and Verification bodies, greentech experts, climate and environmental scientists and the general public to provide their insights and feedback on the topic. The minimum duration of the consultation is 30 days.
For all new methodologies, the Secretariat should organize a webinar to explain the rationale of the methodology and an overview of its requirements.
Compilation of feedback: After the conclusion of the public consultation period, the Secretariat compiles all feedback, suggestions, and perspectives collected. This collective feedback is then structured and summarized into a document known as the 'Consultation Report’. The report serves as a comprehensive repository of public opinion, ensuring that every suggestion is captured. The consultation reports are made available on the website under Standard Documentation .
Integration into Final Proposition: the Secretariat then integrates this feedback into the existing proposal. This revised document, now termed the Final Standard Revision Proposition, harmonizes both the initial proposal and the feedback from the public consultation.
Projects that reduce GHG emissions and are issued Rainbow Carbon Credits typically also contribute to a circular economy. The assessment of a project's circularity is considered under the co-benefits criteria, and represents the Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) number 12.2.
The Material Circularity Indicator (MCI) is the selected measure of circularity, due to its comprehensive assessment of material flows and alignment with global standards, notably established by The Ellen MacArthur Foundation.
The MCI examines mass of material flows throughout a product's lifecycle. It evaluates how efficiently materials circulate within a closed-loop system, assigning “more circular” scores to systems that minimize waste and optimize resource reuse. The formula uses input parameters such as material feedstock amount and type (e.g. from recycled, reused or biological sources), recycling rates, and lifespan extension potential to quantify a product's circularity.
A detailed description and formulas for calculating the MCI are documented in the dedicated methodology document, on pages 22 to 31, following the Product-level Methodology under the Whole product approach). Figure 3, modified from Cottafava, D. and Ritzen, M. (2021) summarizes the MCI material flows.
The MCI is a unitless indicator that varies from 0 to 1, where 0 represents a fully linear product and 1 is fully circular. The project scenario MCI is compared to the baseline scenario MCI, measuring how much more circular the project scenario is than the baseline.
The MCI methodology has been applied to electronic device refurbishment using the input data presented in Table 7.
Table 7 All variables needed to calculate the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI) for the Rainbow Electronic Device Refurbishing methodology are detailed below. The full methodology and equations can be found in the dedicated .
Project Developers shall demonstrate that they meet all eligibility criteria outlined in the Rainbow Standard Rules, and described below with a specific focus on biobased construction.
Eligibility criteria that do not require specific methodology instructions are not described here. These include:
Measurability
Real
Technology readiness level
Minimum impact
To demonstrate additionality, Project Developers shall perform regulatory surplus analysis, plus either investment or barrier analysis, using the .
Regulatory surplus analysis shall demonstrate that there are no regulations that require or mandate the use of biobased materials in building construction or construction product manufacturing. It is acceptable if regulations promote or set targets for these activities, because the resulting increase in these activities shall be accounted for in the baseline scenario.
For any type of barrier analysis, audited financial documents shall be provided as proof.
These documents should either demonstrate the financial status to prove financial barriers, or show that the project could not independently fund solutions to overcome institutional or technological barriers.
Requirements for projects located in France 🇫🇷
If the project
involves the construction of a permanent building/s in France (as opposed to the manufacturing of biobased construction materials), and
Requirements for projects complying with FR L229-55/R229-101
Projects in France seeking to comply with shall prove that the building's energy performance rating (DPE, diagnostic de performance énergétique) is rated "B" or better.
This requirement applies to projects:
The project biobased material must have an expected carbon-storage duration of 100 years or more to be eligible for removal RCCs. Note that the carbon storage duration may differ from the reference service lifetime.
The expected carbon-storage duration shall include the total years that carbon remains stored in the project biobased material. This includes its first use, plus additional years if the material is recycled, reused, or disposed of in a landfill.
By default, the carbon-storage duration shall equal the reference service lifetime declared in the material’s EPD.
Project Developers may justify a longer carbon-storage duration than the reference service lifetime. The justification shall be based on reputable sources, such as scientific literature, industry reports, public databases, or performance tests, among others.
For composite materials made of multiple components with different lifetimes, the carbon storage duration of the final product shall be used, even if some components have different lifetimes.
Project Developers shall fill in the to evaluate the risk of carbon storage reversal, based on social, economic, natural, and delivery risks.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score to each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The Rainbow Certification Team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
The project Developer or the Rainbow Certification Team may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project developers shall sign the , committing to follow the requirements outlined in the , including not double using or double issuing RCCs.
For projects that manufacture biobased construction materials, Project Developers shall prove that users of the project biobased material (e.g. building developers) will not issue carbon credits for their incorporation into buildings.
For the top buyers of the project biobased material that make up a sum of 80% of materials purchased annually, the Project Developer shall provide signed agreements with each buyer stating that the defined type and amount of biobased materials have already been issued carbon credits, and they commit to not issue carbon credits for that material in the building.
Project Developers shall communicate the same information to customers via marketing, packaging, or examples of sales contracts.
For projects that use project biobased materials in buildings, Project Developers shall prove that the biobased materials used were not already issued carbon credits for their manufacture and sale.
The Project Developer shall provide signed agreements with the top suppliers of biobased construction materials that make up a sum of 80% of biobased materials used in the building, stating that the construction materials used have not already been issued carbon credits.
If part of the project’s biobased components have already been issued carbon credits, the remaining portion of biobased components are still eligible. Signed agreements do not exclude a project from issuing RCCs for all of their biobased components– only for the components that have already been issued carbon credits in another project.
Biobased construction materials and buildings must be valid substitutes for the construction material chosen for the for the purpose of calculating avoided emissions.
Project Developers shall explain how the project biobased material substitutes the baseline material according to the following characteristics: function of the product, service lifetime, performance, and price/quality.
Performance indicators vary by material type, but may include insulation capacity, load bearing capacity, or compressive strength.
Sources for this criteria may include performance tests, dynamic thermal studies, secondary reports, scientific literature, and EPDs.
If the performance of the primary function of the project biobased material is different from the baseline material, this must be accounted for in the baseline scenario and project scenario selection.
If the performance of secondary functions of the project biobased material is worse than the baseline, and causes, for example, increased energy consumption during the use stage, this is included in the .
If the service lifetimes differ between the baseline and the project, the difference will be accounted for in the comparative LCA (see section).
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Project developers shall fill in the , to evaluate the identified risks of biobased construction. The identified risks include:
Forest management, land use and deforestation
Intensive cultivation of biomass with fertilizers, irrigation and pesticides
Use of dedicated crops, competition for food and agricultural land
Distant transport of biomass
The project’s avoided GHG emissions should not be indirectly transferred elsewhere.
Project Developers shall transparently evaluate the potential leakage risks from activity shifting and from upstream/downstream emissions in the PDD. Note that due to the LCA approach for GHG reduction quantification, most relevant upstream and downstream emissions are likely already included in the quantification.
Any material sources of leakage that cannot be mitigated shall be conservatively included in the GHG reduction calculations or the discount factor.
Biobased construction projects must lead to at least a 73% reduction in GHG emissions compared to the baseline scenario. This is aligned with the , as described in the .
The scope of the reduction is the embodied life cycle emissions of biobased material/product as calculated in the section, plus any direct improvements and emissions reductions caused by the biobased product implementation (e.g. improved energy efficiency). More details are in the section.
This shall be proven using the method described below.
Project Developers shall demonstrate that they meet all eligibility criteria outlined in the Rainbow Standard Rules, and described below with a specific focus on ERW.
Eligibility criteria that do not require specific methodology instructions are not described here. These include:
Measurability
Real
Technology readiness level
Minimum impact
The Substitution and Targets Alignment criteria have no specific requirements and are omitted because projects under this methodology are only eligible for removal RCCs rather than avoidance RCCs.
To demonstrate additionality, Project Developers shall perform regulatory surplus analysis, plus either investment or barrier analysis, using the .
Regulatory surplus analysis shall demonstrate that there are no regulations that require or mandate project activities (for removal and avoidance activities).
Investment analysis may be used to prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary to make the project investment a financially viable and interesting option. The investment may cover:
The creation and launching of new sites
Expansion of capacity of existing activities
The permanence horizon for ERW projects certified under this methodology is 1000+ years. This is based on well-known geochemistry concepts indicating that DIC is stable in oceans and other waterways for thousands of years, and will eventually precipitate out into new stable carbonate minerals.
Several parameters measured in the section are used to understand the expected pathways of weathering products and their permanence, such as the expected final reservoir of DIC.
Project Developers shall:
define the timeline of the expected reactions and subsequent transport of aqueous ions to ocean storage, and
list carbon release risk scenarios for precipitated and dissolved carbon, and discuss how they are accounted for in and .
Project developers shall sign the , committing to follow the requirements outlined in the , including not double using or double issuing RCCs.
Project Developers shall prove that the owner of land where rock is spread will not also issue carbon credits. This shall be proven using signed contracts.
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Project Developers shall fill in the , to evaluate the identified risks of ERW. The identified risks include:
Loss of soil organic carbon (SOC) in the near field zone (NFZ).
Disturbance of substantial organic carbon stocks downstream (e.g. in downstream peatlands).
Potential asbestos contamination in mineral amendments, and exposure during mining, processing, transport, and feedstock application.
Air quality impacts from silicate application and dust exposure.
Additionally, Project Developers shall:
meet national and local regulations for pollutant levels and fertilizer limits, and shall measure and report the elements listed in the section related to chemical composition, mineralogy, radioactivity, and particle size distribution.
If no regulations set thresholds for feedstock metal content, Project Developers shall model the potential metal accumulation in soils as a result of feedstock application and assess the risk of deployment.
If deploying on soils where heavy metal levels already exceed regulatory limits, prove that the project activity will not significantly elevate pollutant levels and/or bio-available pollutants (e.g. if heavy metals are taken up and exported in harvested biomass).
The project activity should not cause GHG emissions to be indirectly transferred elsewhere.
Project Developers shall transparently evaluate the potential leakage risks from activity shifting and from upstream/downstream emissions in the PDD. Note that due to the LCA approach for GHG reduction quantification, most relevant upstream and downstream emissions are likely already included in the quantification.
Any material sources of leakage that cannot be mitigated shall be conservatively included in the GHG reduction calculations or the discount factor.
Project Developers shall evaluate the following activity shifting risks:
Diversion of rare earth elements and critical minerals from other applications, such as renewable energy supply chains.
Potential misallocation of mineral waste that could have lower-emission alternative uses.
Land use changes from project infrastructure impacting undisturbed or high-value land.
Quantify the impact of spreading feedstock on crop yields. If statistically significant and material yield declines are measured compared to the baseline, replacement emissions shall be included for the project to deduct for this impact.
All projects certified under this methodology must cause additional carbon removals and/or reduce cement usage via accelerated and/or enhanced carbonation of alkaline minerals by CO2, in an ex-situ environment.
Many different technological setups are eligible under the present methodology and widely described in the
Project Developers shall demonstrate that they meet all eligibility criteria outlined in the , and described below with a specific focus on battery preparation for reuse/repurpose through either battery refurbishing or regeneration.
Eligibility criteria that do not require specific methodology instructions are not described here. This includes:
Measurability
Real
Technology readiness level
Simplify or streamline documentation language to improve accessibility, without affecting the technical content.
Formalize processes that are already implemented in practice.
Scientific consensus of substantial carbon reduction potential
Feasibility of carbon reduction measurement
Degree of circularity
Glossary with definitions of technical terms
Methodology-specific instructions for:
no double counting
co-benefits
substitution (for avoidance RCCs)
permanence (for removal RCCs)
ESDNH risks
leakage
targets alignment
Risk assessment template
Methodology-specific instructions for:
assumptions
data sources
description of processes to include in the project and baseline scenario
all equations needed to calculate avoided and/or removed emissions
uncertainty assessment
BiCRS carbon storage modules on geologic storage, marine sub-sediment storage and biomass sinking
BiCRS carbon capture modules on biogenic CO
Enhanced Rock Weathering
Ocean alkalinity enhancement
Reuse of building materials
Textile second life
Direct Air Capture
Changes deemed as major by the SAB
projects under that methodology consistently fail to meet the Eligibility criteria outlined in the Rainbow Standard Rules
Radioactivity**
measurement of radioactivity
Proof of adherence to jurisdictional regulations regarding radioactivity, such as BSSD (2013/59/Euratom) in the EU or OSHA 1910 Subpart Z in the US.
Particle size distribution
Concentration of particles with a diameter of 2.5 µm or less
*optional measurement. If not measured, safety precautions must be implemented and described to protect workers from RCS
transparently assess initialization assumptions and model uncertainty, and the resulting effect on CDR estimates.
include an estimate of CDR loss in the FFZ (i.e. in rivers, surface water, and the ocean).
use direct measurements of multiple variables to ground-truth models wherever possible.
provide all technical details needed to assess the validity of the approach to the VVB and/or peer reviewers
Alternatively, Project Developers may opt to count all upstream impacts in the first reporting period and credit issuance.
Mineralogical composition**
proportion of the different crystalline minerals and (assumed) amorphous phases, measured via XRD or similar
Mineralogical composition**
amount of carbonate minerals, measured via XRD or similar
Particle size distribution and morphology
measure particles with a diameter of greater than 2.0 mm to those with a diameter of 2.5 µm or less
Moisture content
gravimetric water content*
Chemical composition
Concentration of antimony (Sb), arsenic (As), barium (Ba), beryllium (Be), cadmium (Cd), chromium (Cr), cobalt (Co), copper (Cu), lead (Pb), manganese (Mn), mercury (Hg), nickel (Ni), selenium (Se), silver (Ag), thallium (Tl), uranium (U), vanadium (V) and zinc (Zn), measured via XRF or similar
Mineralogical composition**
Concentration of asbestos, asbestiform minerals
respirable crystalline silica (RCS) (quartz, cristobalite, and tridymite)*
measured via XRD or similar
Fraction of a product's biological feedstock from Sustained production.
It is assumed that no biological feedstock is used in electronic devices.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Material that is not from reuse, recycling or biological material from sustained production.
The amount of virgin materials used in the project scenario is the same as the Np when virgin material shall be extracted to produce new pieces.
All the input materials are considered virgin as no reuse or recycled materials are assumed in a status quo scenario.
Fraction of mass of a product being collected to go into a recycling process
Value based on the collection rate of each country and its recycling rate as presented in the . After the end of the device's first and second life, the product is assumed to follow the country's recycling rates where waste is generated.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product going into component reuse
Fraction considered under the Cr variable, according to the country's rates.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product being collected to go into a composting process
As no biological feedstock is used in electronic devices, this value is assumed to be zero.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product being collected for energy recovery where the material satisfies the requirements for inclusion
Energy recovery as part of a circular strategy only applies to biological materials, according to the MCI methodology. This value is assumed to be zero.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste through a product's material going into landfill, waste to energy and any other type of process where the materials are no longer recoverable
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is the same for both scenarios. Due to the comparative approach, it can be excluded.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Efficiency of the recycling process used for the portion of a product collected for recycling
Varies according to the country's rate, presented by Eurostat (2020).
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste generated in the process of recycling parts of a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is the same for both scenarios. Due to the comparative approach, it can be excluded.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Efficiency of the recycling process used to produce recycled feedstock for a product
Assumed equal to Ec as no data are available specifically for electronic devices. Additionally, since Fr is considered zero, this variable is not impactful.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste generated when producing recycled feedstock for a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology, and considering Fr equal to zero, this value is zero.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste associated with a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology and Rainbow's guidelines, this value is the same for both scenarios. Due to the comparative approach, it can be excluded.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Linear flow index
Varies from 0 to 1, where 1 is a completely linear flow and 0 is a completely restorative flow. In a circular project, the LFI shall be closer to zero, while the baseline shall be closer to 1.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Actual average lifetime of a product
Sum of lifespan of the product's first and second life according to Table 3, using an average weighted across all device types refurbished by the project.
Assumed 1
Average lifetime of an industry-average product of the same type
Average lifespan of the product's first life, weighted across all device types refurbished by the project (Table 3)
Assumed 1
Actual average number of functional units achieved during the use phase of a product
Calculated based on the extended lifetime of the project's product.
Assumed 1
Average number of functional units achieved during the use phase of an industry-average product of the same type
Assumed 1
Assumed 1
Utility of a product (function of the product's lifespan and intensity of use)
In electronics refurbishing projects, X is higher in the project scenario, as the project extends the product's life ()
Equal to 1 as the baseline scenario regards the status quo market (average industry scenario).
Material Circularity Indicator of a product
Varies from 0 to 1, where 0 represents a fully linear product and 1 is fully circular.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Symbol
Definition by the MCI
Guidelines for the project scenario
Guidelines for the baseline scenario
Mass of a product
Total mass (kg) of refurbished devices in the project scenario, according to Table 3.
Where is the number of refurbished devices , and represents the weight in kilograms of device
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product's feedstock from recycled sources
Assumed zero
Assumed zero
Fraction of mass of a product's feedstock from reused sources
Considers the mass of devices refurbished () and the mass of new pieces acquired (, in kg):
Project developers shall provide or an assumption based on its activity. If not available, 9% of virgin pieces will be considered in full refurbishing devices.
Assumed zero

falls under the scope of the RE2020 regulation, (Articles R172-1 to R172-9 of the French Building and Housing Code)
the project shall comply with the RE2020 regulation and shall surpass the regulation's future performance targets:
For projects initiated before January 1st 2025, compliance must be demonstrated against the 2025 RE2020 targets, notably achieving an IC Construction value for each building below
530 kgCO₂eq/m² for individual housing
650 kgCO₂eq/m² for collective housing
810 kgCO₂eq/m² for offices
For projects initiated on or after January 1st 2025, compliance must be demonstrated for each building against the more stringent 2028 RE2020 targets, notably achieving embodied emissions for each building below
475 kgCO₂eq/m² for individual housing
580 kgCO₂eq/m² for collective housing
In both cases, the embodied GHG emission values must be proven for each building using official RE2020 attestations provided at two stages:
Ex-ante, upon submission of the building permit
Ex-post, upon completion of construction
This is used to demonstrate compliance with FR L229-55/R229-101.
using biobased construction materials for building renovation or projects manufacturing biobased construction materials, and
seeking compliance with FR L229-55/R229-101.
The same principle should be followed for projects in other countries and shall be assessed qualitatively in the Rainbow biobased construction risk evaluation, but the strict requirement and cutoff does not apply.
Chemical treatment of construction materials
Energy intensive processing
Worsened energy or other performance in the use stage
8.4 Resource efficiency in consumption and production
Projects using waste biomass instead of raw materials such as concrete and steel use less raw, non-renewable resources.
9.4 Upgrade infrastructure and retrofit industries to make them sustainable, with increased resource-use efficiency and greater adoption of clean and environmentally sound technologies and industrial processes
Biobased construction may have better performance in the use phase, or may require less energy in the manufacturing phase.
12.2 Achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural resources
If waste biomass is used, projects give value and a second usable life to the organic waste.
15.1 Ensure the conservation, restoration and sustainable use of terrestrial and inland freshwater ecosystems and their services
Projects using wood from sustainably managed forests support the ecosystem services provided by those forests.
Projects should support at least two quantifiable and verifiable environmental or social co-benefits, aligned with the (SDGs) framework. Any co-benefits claimed by the Project Developer shall be quantified, monitored, and audited for each verification and credit issuance.
Common co-benefits under this methodology are detailed in the table below. Project Developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
SDG 13 on Climate Action by default is not considered a co-benefit here, since it is implicitly accounted for in the issuance of carbon credits. If the project delivers climate benefits that are not accounted for in the GHG reduction quantifications, then they may be considered as co-benefits.
Table 1 Common co-benefits that projects under this methodology may provide are detailed, including types of proof that can be used to justify each co-benefit.
Expansion by installing new processes
Business plans shall be provided as initial proof for investment analysis. During verification, audited financial statements shall be used to demonstrate that the initial estimates from the business plan were reasonable, and that carbon finance was used as initially described for the expected investment.
For launching brand new sites, additionality can be simply demonstrated if the business plan shows that carbon finance is expected to make up at least 80% of the company’s revenue, as detailed in the Rainbow Additionality Template.
Note that for investments in expansion, only the additional carbon reductions enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Rainbow Carbon Credits.
Barrier analysis may be used to prove that the project faces financial, institutional, or technological barriers to ongoing operations that can only be overcome using carbon finance. Examples include but are not limited to:
Financial barrier: financial analysis demonstrating that the project is not financially viable, evidenced by net cash being lower than the working capital requirements, or proof that the project is not meeting the projected financial targets in the business plans and loan documents, and that carbon finance would make it financially viable.
Institutional barrier: description of new regulation that the project must make costly changes to comply with, financial analysis showing that the project cannot fund the changes on their own, and carbon finance is necessary to make it viable.
For any type of barrier analysis, audited financial statements must be provided as proof. These documents should either demonstrate the financial status to prove financial barriers, or show that the project could not independently fund solutions to overcome institutional or technological barriers.
Health risks to workers and communities due to airborne particulates.
Hazardous mineral waste generation along the supply chain.
Heavy metal accumulation in soils and water systems.
Altered soil chemistry affecting crop yield and agrochemical use.
Altered soil physical properties affecting e.g. water drainage.
Water contamination from silicate application, impacting drinking water.
Harm to soil, water, air quality, biodiversity, and organisms from feedstock use.
Exceeding national and local pollutant thresholds.
Presence of radioactive materials or hazardous elements in feedstock.
Fossil energy use for mining, grinding, and transport of rocks and minerals.
provide safety protocols required for feedstock application, to minimize adverse impacts to farmer health, local air or water quality, upon project validation.
measure heavy metal content in soils and biomass grown where rock was spread, in addition to the feedstock measurements described in the Feedstock characterization section.
measure soil organic carbon in treatment and control plots, at least once after rock spreading during the crediting period (strongly recommended to measure more frequently)
model heavy metal dissolution in the environment, based on Feedstock characterization measurements.
notify local stakeholders if adverse local environmental impacts are expected following application.
describe how project revenue benefits farmers and local communities.
describe any potential downstream sensitive ecosystems, and plans to monitor for negative impacts resulting from rock spreading (e.g. pH shifts, contamination...).
disclose the nature and impact of mining activities to source feedstock.
SDG 12: Responsible Consumption and Production
ERW may reduce the need for agricultural lime, promoting more sustainable and resource-efficient agricultural inputs.
SDG 12: Responsible Consumption and Production
ERW may support more productive food systems by increasing crop yields through improved soil health and nutrient availability.
SDG 13: Climate Action
ERW may contribute to further climate mitigation not covered in removal RCCs by increasing soil organic carbon stocks, enhancing long-term carbon sequestration alongside CO₂ drawdown.
SDG 9: Industry, Innovation and Infrastructure
ERW projects may drive innovation through research, monitoring, and experimentation beyond methodological requirements, fostering transparent data sharing and advancing novel carbon dioxide removal solutions.
SDG 6: Clean water and sanitation
ERW protects and restores aquatic ecosystems by reducing acidity and adding bicarbonate which helps with acid buffering. This notably helps mitigate ocean acidification.
Projects should support at least two quantifiable and verifiable environmental or social co-benefits, aligned with the (SDGs) framework. Any co-benefits claimed by the Project Developer shall be quantified, monitored, and audited for each verification and credit issuance.
Common co-benefits under this methodology are detailed in the table below. Project Developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
SDG 13 on Climate Action by default is not considered a co-benefit here, since it is implicitly accounted for in the issuance of carbon credits. If the project delivers climate benefits that are not accounted for in the GHG reduction quantifications, then they may be considered as co-benefits.
Table 1 Common co-benefits that projects under this methodology may provide are detailed, including types of proof that can be used to justify each co-benefit.
Projects that contain components not listed above, but that meet the requirements of the present methodology and the Rainbow Standard Rules, shall be considered on a case-by-case basis.
Projects under this methodology are eligible for
removal Rainbow Carbon Credits (RCCs) from mineralization with biogenic, ambient and atmospheric CO2,
avoidance RCCs from mineralization with fossil and calcination CO2, and
avoidance RCCs from reduction of cement use.
Carbon removals under this methodology are estimated to have a permanence horizon of at least 1000 years. Reversal risks and baseline removals are assessed according to this duration.
Credits are issued on the basis of carbonated materials production.
Mineralization with fossil and calcination CO2 counts as Carbon Capture and Storage (CCS) and is issued avoidance credits.
These do not count for carbon dioxide removal (CDR), and are referred to as carbon storage throughout the methodology.
One project is defined as:
the operation of one or more mineralization sites, where a mineralization site refers to one reactor or other instrument where mineralization occurs,
within a single country,
using the same technology (e.g. carbonation curing of cementitious materials vs. carbonation during fresh concrete mixing/hydration, see Eligible technologies above),
using the same monitoring approach (see Project CO2 stored), and
operated at sites that are under the oversight or data access of a single Project Developer, regardless of whether the developer directly owns or manages each site.
Additional sites may be added to the project on an ongoing basis, provided the sites meet the requirements listed above and in the Eligibility criteria section. The addition of a site is considered a major project update, which will be assessed by a VVB during the project's next verification audit.
The project scope covers all additional removals and induced emissions, caused by the project activity, that would not have occurred in the baseline scenario/in the absence of the project.
Project Developers shall categorize the project's carbon capture and mineralization sites as either retrofits/additions on top of existing sites, or the installation of new sites. This helps distinguish between the project scope and the baseline. Project Developers shall prove the extent of existing operations of any connected activities using historical proof of operations of the existing site/s.
Project Developers shall summarize the following key descriptive meta-information for the project:
Mineralization reaction type, type of metal/s contributing to mineral formation, and expected carbonate compound type
Expected mineralization timeline after reactor exit, based on the kinetics of the specific technology (e.g. full mineralization occurs within 24 hours, 1 week, etc.)
Temperature and pressure of the reactor (within a target range of ±10%)
Carbon storage measurement approach: gas inflow-outflow or solid-sample
project
Projects certified under this methodology shall have a maximum crediting period duration of 5 years, which can be renewed for a total of 20 years. See the Crediting Period Renewal section of the Procedures Manual for procedural details.
A mineralization batch is the quantity of mineralized/carbonated material produced using the same input materials (alkaline feedstock and CO2) and operating conditions, at one site. Details on the delineation of mineralization batches are in Table 1. It is assumed that all carbonated material from the same mineralization batch has similar characteristics relevant to mineralization performance and measurement accuracy (i.e. carbonation rate, bulk density…). This facilitates mineralized material solid sampling and measurements, where a representative sample should taken for each mineralization batch.
The project-specific definition of the mineralization batch shall be clearly described in the PDD.
Measurements and reporting are performed at the mineralization batch level. Verification and credit issuance may be done per carbonation batch, or annually on the cumulative carbonation batches from that year.
Table 1 Specific examples of how to delineate a mineralization batch are summarized.
Alkaline feedstock: singular or homogeneous material
A change in material category, based on recognized standards (e.g. ASTM, EN),
A substantial change in material properties (recommended ±3%), even within the same product category, such as mineralogical composition (e.g. proportion of CaO, MgO, silicates, aluminates), bulk density or pH
A change in supplier or geographic source of the feedstock*
Alkaline feedstock: composite or heterogeneous material
A change in material category, based on recognized standards (e.g. ASTM, EN),
A substantial change in material properties (recommended ±3%), even within the same product category, such as mineralogical composition (e.g. proportion of CaO, MgO, silicates, aluminates), bulk density or pH
A substantial change in the fraction of reactive material in the design mix (recommended ±10%)
CO2 input
The biogenic vs. fossil fraction of the CO2 stream changes substantially (recommended ±3%)
The CO2 supplier or geographic source changes*
Carbonation site
The physical location and/or machinery in which the reaction is occurring.
Duration
A mineralization batch has a maximum validity of 365 days. After this period, a new batch must be defined and monitored, even if feedstock and CO2 conditions remain unchanged.
A mineralization batch may be non-contiguous. For example, if Feedstock 1 is carbonated on Day 1 and again on Day 3 (with a different feedstock used on Day 2), the operations on Days 1 and 3 can be treated as the same batch.
*If the Project Developer can prove that changes in the supplier or geographic source do not lead to material changes in the product used, in ways that affect the parameters used in GHG quantification, then a change in change in supplier or geographic source may be ignored for purpose of defining carbonation batch.
Minimum impact
To demonstrate additionality, Project Developers (PD) shall perform regulatory surplus analysis, plus either investment or barrier analysis, using the Rainbow Additionality Template.
Regulatory surplus analysis shall demonstrate that there are no regulations that require or mandate the collection and preparation for reuse/repurpose through refurbishment or regeneration, and resale of batteries. It is acceptable if regulations promote or set targets for these activities because the resulting increase in these activities shall be accounted for in the baseline scenario.
At the European Union level, projects automatically pass the regulatory surplus analysis, which has been conducted by the Rainbow Climate Team. None of these legislations require a battery second life through refurbishing or regeneration at the EU level. Project Developers are only required to provide a country-level regulatory surplus analysis.
At the EU level, batteries incorporated in Electrical and Electronic Equipment are considered under the Waste Electrical and Electronics Equipment (WEEE) Directive, introduced by the EU, and the RoHS Directive to tackle the issue of a growing amount of WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment). According to the WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU, batteries shall be removed and recycled from any separately collected WEEE. This does not affect the additionality of projects under this methodology, because the eligible battery types covered under this methodology are not included in the WEEE Directive (see Eligible technologies section).
The EU battery regulation () was approved in 2023, aiming to create holistic legislation for the safety and sustainability of batteries. The regulation mandates that portable batteries should be easily removable and replaceable by end-users or independent professionals. In addition, it sets recycling efficiency targets and material recovery targets for specific elements in recycling and treatment facilities for batteries. These targets will apply from December 31, 2027. This regulation does not affect the additionality of projects under this methodology, because it does not require battery treatment for reuse through refurbishing or regeneration.
The includes provisions for the reuse and recycling of vehicle components, such as batteries. However, the directive does not require the refurbishment or regeneration of batteries. The focus remains on recycling, with reuse being voluntary.
Battery reuse targets through either refurbishing and/or regeneration that are defined in these regulations will be accounted for in the GHG reduction quantification, at the country level.
Investment analysis may be used to prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary to make the project investment financially viable.
Barrier analysis may be used to prove that the project faces financial, institutional, and/or technological barriers to ongoing operations that can only be overcome using carbon finance.
For any type of barrier analysis, audited financial documents shall be provided as proof. These documents should either demonstrate the financial status to prove financial barriers or show that the project could not independently fund solutions to overcome institutional or technological barriers.
Project developers shall sign the Rainbow MRV & Registry Terms & Conditions, committing to follow the requirements outlined in the Rainbow Standard Rules, including not double using or double issuing carbon credits.
No additional measures for double issuance are required because double issuance among actors in the supply chain is unlikely, given that battery collectors and recyclers are not eligible under this methodology.
Project developers shall prove that their project provides at least 2 co-benefits from the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) framework (and no more than 4).
Common co-benefits of battery refurbishing and regeneration projects, and their sources of proof, are detailed in Table 1. Project developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
SDG 13 on Climate Action by default is not considered a co-benefit here, since it is implicitly accounted for in the issuance of carbon credits. If the project delivers climate benefits that are not accounted for in the GHG reduction quantifications, then they may be considered as co-benefits.
Table 1 Summary of common co-benefits provided by battery refurbishing and/or regeneration projects. Co-benefits are organized under the United Nation Sustainable Development Goals (UN SDGs) framework.
SDG 5.1 - Achieve gender equality and empower all women and girls
Women are less likely to work in the technology sector, and when they do they are usually paid less than men.
Battery refurbishing/regeneration projects may promote gender parity by having a large female workforce and having equal pay between men and women for doing the same job.
Average hourly earnings of men and women by age and disabilities (if any)
Standalone official policy for equal pay or current scenario in the sustainability report
SDG 8.5 - Achieve full and productive employment and decent work for all women and men, including for young people and persons with disabilities
Battery refurbishing/regeneration projects may hire people with disabilities, who tend to have lower rates of employment (e.g. 55% activity rate of people with some disability in the EU vs 74% overall activity rate).
Official record of the number of employees with a disability vs total employees of the workforce
SDG 12.2 - Achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural resources
The project’s circularity will be measured by the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI), according to the Ellen MacArthur Foundation's methodology.
Primary data collected from the project for the GHG reduction quantification, which are also used in the Circularity Assessment
SDG 12.4 - Achieve the environmentally sound management of chemicals and all wastes throughout their life cycle
Batteries contain precious metals, rare earth elements, and hazardous materials. By refurbishing batteries, and recycling the precious metals and rare earth elements they contain, projects avoid the destructive mining and extraction of these finite, virgin elements.
Battery waste diverted from recycling or other waste treatment (E.g. landfill or incineration)
Second life batteries must be valid substitutes for new battery production as modeled in the baseline scenario (i.e. the avoided new battery). Project developers must provide evidence proving the quality of their second life batteries, demonstrating that they are suitable replacements for new batteries of the same chemistry (e.g. Li-ion vs NiMH) and application (e.g. ESS vs EV). This evidence includes, but is not limited to, documentation of quality control inspections, the battery grading system, and the State of Health (SoH) of the battery after preparation for reuse/repurpose, ensuring it meets the necessary standards for sale rather than recycling.
Second life batteries are expected to have a shorter lifespan and performance than new batteries, primarily due to wear and degradation from their initial use, and therefore do not fully replace new batteries on a 1:1 basis. Two factors are considered here:
Battery lifespan: indicates the anticipated remaining lifespan, which is assumed to be shorter for a second-life battery compared to a new one. Default lifespans for new and second life batteries are presented in the Appendix 2.
Battery State of Health (SoH): represents the battery's performance, and is used here as supplementary information to adjust the battery's second-life lifespan. Second life batteries typically do not reach the same 100% SoH as new batteries, although it is technically possible.
Even if a second-life battery were restored to a near-perfect SoH of 100%, demonstrating a high ability to store and deliver energy compared to its original capacity, it is still assumed to have a reduced lifespan compared to a brand-new battery due to the cumulative wear from its previous application. In the absence of real-world data from Project Developers (PDs), this assumption will be adopted.
This performance difference is deemed acceptable as it is factored into the GHG quantification, which determines the number of new batteries avoided and, consequently, the number of RCCs to be issued for a project.
The number of new batteries replaced by a second-life battery is calculated by 1) taking the ratio of the second-life battery’s lifetime to that of a new battery, and 2) multiplying this by the second-life battery's SoH.
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high-risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification Team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project
Project Developers shall fill in the Rainbow- Battery second life risk evaluation, to evaluate the identified risks of battery refurbishing and regeneration. The identified risks include:
Improper on-site storage of non-functional batteries
Energy intensive processing
Greenhouse gas emissions from transport for collection
Worker health and safety
Frequent replacement of batteries due to shortened lifetime (rebound effect)
Frequent replacement of batteries due to economic incentives (rebound effect)
Export of reconditioned or regenerated batteries from Europe to countries with less stringent waste treatment standards
Release of pollutants and hazardous chemicals during the refurbishing/regeneration process
Leakage may occur when carbon-emitting activities are geographically displaced or relocated to areas outside the project boundaries as a direct result of the project's implementation. For battery refurbishing and regeneration, this includes:
There is a risk that a regenerated or refurbished battery is transferred to different countries with less stringent waste treatment standards than their original country. This can occur in the form of the refurbished battery itself, which will undergo waste treatment in the country where it is sold and distributed.
Upstream and downstream emissions shall be included by default in the GHG reduction quantification, as part of the life-cycle approach. The upstream and downstream emissions included in the quantification are detailed in the Baseline scenario and Project scenario section
Project Developers shall transparently evaluate the likelihood of the above leakage risks in the PDD, plus any other project-specific leakage risks deemed relevant by the Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification Team, or the VVB.
Battery refurbishing and regeneration projects must prove that they lead to at least a 47% reduction in GHG emissions compared to the baseline scenario. This is aligned with the European Union’s 2040 Climate targets, as described in the Rainbow Standard Rules.
The scope of the reduction is the system boundary used in GHG quantification section.
This shall be proven using the GHG reduction quantification method described in the GHG quantification section.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Added risk assessment template for environmental and social do no harm
Provide more detailed and prescriptive assessment framework, clearer instructions for project developers.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Removed text for sections that are the same for all methodologies:
Measurability
Real
Technology readiness level
Minimum impact
Repeated text from the Standard Rules.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Added Monitoring Plan section
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Remove Rebound Effect and Independently Validated criteria
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Added uncertainty assessment section
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Include fraction of refurbished devices already on the market in the baseline scenario of GHG reduction quantification
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6 and increase conservativeness.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Assign input used devices a fraction of environmental impacts from their first life, allocated based on their residual value
Input used devices are no longer considered waste. A more conservative assumption was made.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
E-waste treatment in the baseline scenario is modeled as a mix of e-waste incineration and landfill, rather than the ecoinvent process for device waste treatment. The latter is now used to model e-waste recycling (see Appendix 1 for ecoinvent activity names)
More accurate and representative of e-waste treatment practices.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Country WEEE rates come from data for only small IT and telecommunications devices, instead of all WEEE.
Improved precision, because statistics for all WEEE covered devices such as household appliances, lamps, photovoltaic panels.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Multiple WEEE rates from different countries are selected based on the source countries of collected devices.
Improved accuracy. Previously, only one source country could be selected in the calculation model.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
New device emission factors from ecoinvent were updated (see Appendix 1):
Smartphone: completely revised, see Appendix 5
Tablet, laptop: removed power adapter production, power adapter waste treatment, and the device waste treatment
PC: removed device waste treatment
Improved accuracy and harmonization of system boundaries.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Added additionality section
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
May 2024
V2.0 PC to V2.0
Replace number of devices collected for number of devices sold as main input data, from which other values are calculated
Devices sold are easier and more reliable to track for Project Developers
August 2024
V2.0 to V2.1
Change USA, China and Turkey e-waste recycling rates in Appendix 4
Previous rates were erroneously calculated.
October 2024
V2.1 to V2.2
Create project scope requirements
Specify that operations in different countries must be registered as separate projects
October 2024
V2.1 to V2.2
Add minimum list of ESDNH risks
Align with Standard Rules V6.2
October 2024
V2.1 to V2.2
Specify minimum frequency of updating baseline scenario
Clarity and transparency
October 2024
V2.1 to V2.2
Update desktop PC new and refurbished emission factors in Table 3
Typo in the values in the table, didn't match the values used in the model
May 2025
V2.2 to V2.3
Change GHG quantification from ecoinvent v3.10 to v3.11
Using more recent data
May 2025
V2.2 to V2.3
Update values in Table 3
Updated text to match model, after ecoinvent 3.11 update
September 2025
V2.3 to V2.4
Rename screen to monitor
Improve precision, since many devices contain screens
September 2025
V2.3 to V2.4
Revise light refurbishing process inputs
Added electricity, and corrected errors in input amounts for several device types
September 2025
V2.3 to V2.4
Add gaming console
Expanding device type options
September 2025
V2.3 to V2.4
Add large monitor (>25"), set existing monitor option as small monitor (<25")
Expanding device type options
September 2025
V2.3 to V2.4
Additionality: Add requirement that projects in France have EBITDA lower than 10%
Allows projects in France to comply with
September 2025
V2.3 to V2.4
Add Audit Compliance table
Clear and transparent auditing instructions
September 2025
V2.3 to V2.4
Increase uncertainty discount from 6% to 10%
Alignment with Label Bas Carbone circularity methodologies
December 2025
V2.4 to V2.5
Speicfy only devices that have not already been refurbished are eligible.
Conservative measure
December 2025
V2.4 to V2.5
Restructure sections: added Baseline Scope, renamed Eligible technologies to Eligibility and scope, renamed Eligibility criteria to Principles & requirements, moved Monitoring Plan to Principles & requirements
Align with Standard Rules V7 structure
December 2025
V2.4 to V2.5
Remove TRL and targets alignment criteria, move Substitution criteria requirements to Baseline Scope section
Align with Standard Rules V7 requirements
December 2025
V2.4 to V2.5
New Certification Scope section with requirements for crediting and monitoring period, project updates with methodology revisions, and site audits.
Align with Standard Rules V7 requirements
December 2025
V2.4 to V2.5
Remove limits on number of co-benefits, and require quantification and monitoring of all co-benefits
Align with Standard Rules V7 requirements
December 2025
V2.4 to V2.5
Environmental and social risk mitigation plan required for moderate or higher risks, instead of high risk
Align with Standard Rules V7 requirements
December 2025
V2.4 to V2.5
Combined the calculations for several types of devices
Some devices were grouped together and assumed to have the same impacts.
August 2023
V1.1 to V1.2
Added equations for calculation GHG reductions
Increased transparency.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Aligned terminology with ISO 14064-2:2019
Improved consistency with the voluntary carbon market. LCA principles still apply.
CFC-11
6226
PFC-14
7380

Auxiliary components
The individual non-electrochemical parts within a battery pack, including casings, connectors, and electronic control systems. It does not include Battery Units (BU) or Battery Management System (BMS).
Battery cell
The basic functional unit in a battery, composed of electrodes, electrolyte, container, terminals and, if applicable, separators, and containing the active materials the reaction of which generates electrical energy.
Battery marketplace
An online or physical platform for buying, selling, or trading batteries or battery-related services.
Battery Management System (BMS)
Electronic device that manages the electric and thermal functions of a battery to ensure the it’s safety, performance and service life; and manages the data for determining the battery’s state of health and expected lifetime.
Battery module
Any set of battery cells that are connected or encapsulated within an outer casing to protect the cells against external impact. One module may be used alone or in combination with other modules.
Battery pack
The item encompassing all other components described here. It includes battery units (arranged in series, parallel, or both), and depending on the specific battery type, may include a BMS and various auxiliary components.
Battery recycling
The process of recovering used batteries to extract valuable materials (such as metals, plastics, and chemicals) and ensure that harmful substances are safely disposed of. Unlike refurbishing or regeneration, the recycled battery is no longer usable after the process.
The baseline scenario structure remains valid for the entire crediting period but may be significantly revised earlier if:
The Project Developer notifies Rainbow of a substantial change in project operations or baseline conditions, and/or
The methodology is revised, affecting the baseline scenario.
The specific values within the baseline scenario will be updated during each crediting period, using project data to accurately reflect the equivalent of the project’s operations.
The eligibility criteria requirements that are applicable to all projects under this methodology are detailed in the sections below. Other eligibility criteria requirements shall be taken from the :
Measurability
Real
TRL
Projects that reduce GHG emissions and are issued Rainbow Carbon Credits typically also contribute to a circular economy. The assessment of a project's circularity is considered under the co-benefits criteria and represents the number 12.2.
The Material Circularity Indicator (MCI) is the selected measure of circularity, due to its comprehensive assessment of material flows and alignment with global standards, notably established by The Ellen MacArthur Foundation.
The MCI examines the mass of material flows throughout a product's lifecycle. It evaluates how efficiently materials circulate within a closed-loop system, assigning “more circular” scores to systems that minimize waste and optimize resource reuse. The formula uses input parameters such as material feedstock amount and type (e.g. from recycled, reused, or biological sources), recycling rates, and lifespan extension potential to quantify a product's circularity.
A detailed description and formulas for calculating the MCI are documented in the dedicated , on pages 22 to 31, following the Product-level Methodology under the Whole product approach). Figure 3 modified from
Monitoring Plans shall include the following information for each monitored parameter:
monitoring frequency
emission sources and sinks
data source
measurement methods/procedures, and their accuracy and calibration
Projects should support at least two quantifiable and verifiable environmental or social co-benefits, aligned with the (SDGs) framework. Any co-benefits claimed by the Project Developer shall be quantified, monitored, and audited for each verification and credit issuance.
Common co-benefits under this methodology are detailed in the table below. Project Developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
SDG 13 on Climate Action by default is not considered a co-benefit here, since it is implicitly accounted for in the issuance of carbon credits. If the project delivers climate benefits that are not accounted for in the GHG reduction quantifications, then they may be considered as co-benefits.
Table 1 Common co-benefits that projects under this methodology may provide are detailed, including types of proof that can be used to justify each co-benefit.
Battery refurbishing
The mechanical process of replacing worn components, reconditioning structure, disassembly, cleaning, and testing. High-quality parts are reused for "second-life" batteries, extending lifespan for battery repurposing or returning to its original application.
Battery regeneration
The process of restoring battery performance by reversing chemical degradation, via e.g. deep discharging and recharging, or applying specific electrical pulses. It can also include electrolytes replacement (Pb-acid batteries). It improves battery's capacity and efficiency without replacing major components. The regenerated battery usually returns to its original application.
Battery repurposing
A form of battery second life, where the battery is used in a different application than its original purpose and its first life use.
Battery reuse
A form of battery second-life, where the battery is used in the same application as in its first life, that it was initially designed for.
Battery second life
Extended use of a battery after it can no longer perform its original application from its first life. This reduces environmental impact by delaying recycling or disposal, and replacing the need for new battery production.
Battery Unit (BU)
A single battery (lead-acid batteries) or cells and modules (li-ion and NiMH) that can store electrical energy and provide power.
EV battery
A battery designed specifically to power electric vehicles (EVs), typically using lithium-ion and NiMH chemistry.
Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR)
A policy approach that holds manufacturers responsible for the entire lifecycle of their products, especially waste management.
Energy storage system (ESS)
A battery capable of storing energy in order to supply electrical energy at a later time.
Industrial battery
Batteries that are used in off-highway electric vehicles such as forklifts, construction equipment such as scissor lifts, excavators, and agricultural machinery.
Li-ion
Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery is a type of rechargeable battery that relies on lithium ions moving between a graphite anode and a lithium metal oxide cathode during charge and discharge cycles.
LMT
Batteries used in Light Means of Transport (LMT) such as e-bikes and e-scooters. Usually using Li-ion and NiMH battery chemistries.
NiMH
A battery Nickel Metal Hydrade (NiMH) battery is a type of rechargeable battery that uses a nickel oxide hydroxide cathode and a hydrogen-absorbing alloy anode.
Pb-acid
Lead-acid (Pb-acid) battery is a type of rechargeable battery that uses lead dioxide as the cathode, sponge lead as the anode, and a sulfuric acid solution as the electrolyte.
Preparation for reuse
Inspecting, testing, and preparing battery units, auxiliary components and packs to be reused in their original function without significant alterations
Preparation for repurpose
Inspecting, testing, and preparing battery units, auxiliary components and packs to be repurposed and used for a different function (e.g. an EV battery repurposed to an ESS).
PRO
A Producer Responsibility Organization (PRO) is an organization or company responsible for ensuring that producers meet their environmental obligations under EPR frameworks.
SLI
Starting, Lighting, and Ignition (SLI) batteries are a specific type of lead-acid battery used in vehicles to power ignition, lights, and electronic accessories.
SoH
The State of Health (SoH) represents a battery's condition and energy capacity compared to its original state. Expressed as a percentage, 100% indicates perfect condition, while lower values show degradation due to factors like age and use. SoH helps evaluate a battery's performance, and is a factor in determining remaining battery lifetime.
A change in supplier or geographic source of the feedstock*
Eligible technologies
carbonation curing of cementitious materials
carbonation during fresh concrete mixing/hydration
carbonation of solid materials, to add to e.g. concrete or asphalt
carbonation of liquids such as concrete slurry water, to add to e.g. concrete or asphalt
Eligible products
Ready mix concrete, mixed and installed
Pre-cast concrete blocks
SCMs, aggregates and other solids; destined for use in concrete, asphalt, road subbase or construction fill
Landfilled solid materials, or "no use"
Eligible CO2 sources
atmospheric CO2 from direct air capture (DAC) or ambient air
waste/byproduct biogenic CO2 from point-source capture (e.g. bioenergy production)
fossil CO2 from point-source capture (e.g. coal plants)
calcination CO2, or other non-fossil CO2 from heavy industries
mixed CO2 from waste incineration
pure or mixed CO2 streams of any type listed above
Eligible alkaline sources
Coal fly ash
Cement residues (e.g. cement kiln dust)
Concrete production waste (e.g. concrete wastewater)
Cement in fresh mixed concrete
Recycled concrete
Paper mill residues
Municipal incineration, biomass incineration and CHP waste (e.g., bottom ash, APC residues)
Steel manufacturing waste
Nickel tailings
Red mud from aluminum processing
Natural rock, mining waste
Independently verified
Business plans must be submitted as preliminary evidence for investment analysis. These plans should demonstrate that the investment is not self-sustaining without carbon finance support and that the carbon finance required is comparable to the total investment cost through financial indicators. During the verification process, audited financial documents must be provided to validate that the initial projections in the business plan were accurate and that the carbon finance was utilized as intended.
Note that for investments in expansion, only the additional carbon reductions enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Rainbow Carbon Credits.
proof that the project suffers from a lack of skilled workers (since the refurbishment and regeneration processes are manual, technical processes), which negatively affects the overall quality or logistics of the project. Carbon finance may help overcome this barrier by providing training for employees.
proof that the project is unable to scale due to, for instance, lack of refurbishing/regeneration capacity since machinery and time for refurbishing/regenerating is a limiting factor.
Battery refurbishment and regeneration in Europe may struggle to be cost-competitive with new battery sales. Carbon finance may be used to lower the selling price of the project’s refurbished/regenerated battery, making it a more attractive and competitive option.
SDG 12.5 - Reduce waste generation through prevention, reduction, recycling and reuse
The project diverts battery waste from improper disposal accordingto the EU shares as presented in Apendix 2.
Weight of batteries refurbished by chemistry. The amount of rare earth elements avoided is calculated in Rainbow life cycle inventory models.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Rainbow’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
Any identified material risk (defined as issues with a risk score of moderate or higher) shall be subject to a Risk Mitigation Plan, which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification Team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
710 kgCO₂eq/m² for offices
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Rainbow’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
Any identified material risk (defined as issues with a risk score of moderate or higher) shall be subject to a Risk Mitigation Plan, which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification Team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project Developers shall fill in the Methodology Risk evaluation template at the link below to evaluate the risk of carbon storage reversal, based on social, economic, natural, and delivery risks.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score to each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The Rainbow Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
The Project Developer, Rainbow Certification team, or the third-party auditor may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Each reversal risk with a high or very risk score is subject to:
Minimum impact
To demonstrate additionality, Project Developers shall perform regulatory surplus analysis, plus either investment or barrier analysis, using the Rainbow Additionality Template.
Regulatory surplus analysis shall demonstrate that there are no regulations that require or mandate project activities.
Project Developers must demonstrate that CO2 capture was not mandated under an Emissions Trading System (ETS). A site may be eligible if the site had already met its ETS obligations, and the captured CO2 exceeded those required reductions, and the site complies with the No double counting criteria.
At the European Union level, projects automatically pass the regulatory surplus analysis, which has been conducted by the Rainbow Climate Team. Project Developers are only required to provide a country-level regulatory surplus analysis.
Investment analysis may be used to prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary to make the project investment a financially viable and interesting option. The investment may cover:
The creation and launching of new sites
Expansion of capacity of existing activities
Expansion by installing new processes
Business plans shall be provided as initial proof for investment analysis. During verification, audited financial statements shall be used to demonstrate that the initial estimates from the business plan were reasonable, and that carbon finance was used as initially described for the expected investment.
For launching brand new sites, additionality can be simply demonstrated if the business plan shows that carbon finance is expected to make up at least 80% of the company’s revenue, as detailed in the .
Note that for investments in expansion, only the additional carbon removals and avoidance enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Rainbow Carbon Credits.
Barrier analysis may be used to prove that the project faces financial, institutional, or technological barriers to ongoing operations that can only be overcome using carbon finance. Examples include but are not limited to:
Financial barrier: financial analysis demonstrating that the project is not financially viable, evidenced by net cash being lower than the working capital requirements, or proof that the project is not meeting the projected financial targets in the business plans and loan documents, and that carbon finance would make it financially viable.
Institutional barrier: description of new regulation that the project must make costly changes to comply with, with financial analysis showing that the project cannot fund the changes on their own, and carbon finance is necessary to make it viable.
The permanence horizon for projects certified under this methodology is 1000+ years. This is ensured in part by the eligible uses of carbonated materials, which include only materials that won't be incinerated (i.e. concrete).
Carbon is considered permanently stored upon mineralization/material production, but the final end use of the material affects its risk of reversal. Therefore, Project Developers shall provide information on:
the expected end use of carbonated products, including the building/structure type and geographic location, and
the type of carbonate produced and its specific risk of reversal under different heat and pH conditions, and
justification that exposure to reversal risks are negligible, addressing the risk of exposure to high temperature (e.g. burning) and to acids (e.g. acid rain, acidic groundwater infiltration...).
If Project Developers can provide the required information at the time of production (e.g. through signed sales contracts limiting the final use of the product), credits may be issued upon production. If this information is only available once the carbonated product is sold, credit issuance shall be delayed until the point of sale or provision of the required information.
Project Developers shall fill in the Rainbow Mineralization risk evaluation to evaluate the risk of carbon storage reversal, based on social, economic, natural, and delivery risks.
Project Developers shall sign the Rainbow MRV & Registry Terms & Conditions, committing to follow the requirements outlined in the Rainbow Standard Rules, including not double using or double issuing carbon credits.
The following double counting risks have been identified for alkaline material mineralization projects. Project Developers shall follow the outlined requirements for each risk.
Double issuance of carbon credits with downstream material users
Users of low-carbon concrete may seek to issue carbon credits in building methodologies in regulated or voluntary carbon markets
Identify all direct downstream users/buyers/actors in their supply chain.
Provide the company/organization name, name of an individual contact person at the company/organization, and their contact information (email address at minimum).
Provide signed agreements and/or sales contract clauses stating carbon credits have already been issued, and users will not claim benefits or issue carbon credits for the product.
Double claiming of removals or reductions with EPDs
If there is an EPD for the carbonated product, then carbon removals and/or avoidance may be claimed by downstream users throughout the supply chain, who may issue credits or claim other environmental labels for the carbon benefit already counted and sold elsewhere
Provide the product’s EPD (if there is one), including:
actual GWP values with carbon benefits, as required by norms/standard, and
a clause specifying when users must exclude carbon benefits in calculations using values from the EPD.
For ex-ante projects that don't yet have an EPD, a signed statement may be provided to validate the project. Credits shall only be issued ex-post upon providing the EPD as described above.
Double issuance of carbon credits with upstream CO2 capture (e.g. DACCS projects)
Carbon capture projects are well incorporated in carbon markets (e.g. BECCS, DACCS), and Project Developers must agree on which entity is issued credits/how to repartition credits or carbon finance
Identify all CO2 suppliers in their supply chain.
Provide the company/ organization name, name of an individual contact person at the company/organization, and their contact information (email address at minimum).
Provide signed agreements and/or sales contract clauses stating carbon credits have been issued by the CO2 user, and CO2 suppliers will not claim/issue the same carbon benefits in the carbonated material.
Double claiming of removals or reductions with ETS
CO2 used for mineralization may be captured from heavy emitting industry sites that are covered by an ETS. When the site captures CO2 emissions, they can claim the benefit in the ETS, or participate in the carbon credit issuing project, but not both.
SDG 12.2 Achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural resources
The project’s circularity will be measured by the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI), according to the Ellen MacArthur Foundation's methodology, and compared to the circularity of the baseline product.
Types of inputs used and waste status
% circularity, % improvement from baseline
SDG 9.4 Upgrade infrastructure and retrofit industries to make them sustainable
Increase strength, durability and lifetime of concrete, extending infrastructure lifespan.
Internal testing, R&D results
% extended lifespan
SDG 8.4 Improve global resource efficiency in consumption and production
Reusing alkaline waste materials in the mineralization process diverts them from other waste treatment methods.
Invoices and operations records
The carbonated material shall fulfill the same function and meet the same quality and performance standards as the baseline material it replaces. Project Developers shall prove this using representative test results from pilot testing, R&D laboratories, or full-scale operations.
Project Developers shall justify that using their carbonated product in concrete (or other final product) leads to the same quality and performance as the baseline material, considering:
durability
service lifetime
compressive strength (where relevant)
use-phase mineralization (where relevant)
other performance characteristics related to non-concrete end uses.
If the expected use-phase carbonation in the baseline scenario is larger than the project scenario, this shall be accounted for in the baseline GHG quantification. Inversely, if the project is expected to lead to larger use-phase removals, this shall be conservatively excluded from quantification. It may be considered a co-benefit.
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms. Projects must follow all national, local and European (if located in Europe) environmental regulations, and prove such compliance using, for example, permits, certifications, or licenses.
In addition to completing the Rainbow Mineralization risk evaluation below, Project Developers must prove the following elements:
For fossil CO2 use, Project Developers shall prove that the CO2 was not generated or emitted for the sole purpose of carbon storage, and that it was captured from an existing CO2 emission source.
For biogenic CO2 use, Project Developers shall prove that the original biomass used to generate the biogenic CO2 meets the EU's RED III Article 29 sustainability criteria for biomass (even if the project is not located in the EU). This includes the following, summarized here for informative purposes only:
If the biomass is proven to be waste, no further sustainability requirements apply (refer to the positive list in the Rainbow Biomass feedstock module).
If the biomass is not waste, Project Developers shall prove that it did not come from:
Primary or old-growth forests
Highly biodiverse forests or other wooded land designated as such by competent authorities.
Protected areas for rare or endangered ecosystems/species (unless proven that biomass production does not interfere with conservation goals).
Highly biodiverse grasslands
Heathland, wetlands, or peatlands
Recently deforested, converted or degraded ecosystems (within past 20 years)
Forestry biomass shall follow the requirements listed above, and
Respect international, national and regional legal requirements
Promote forest regeneration by avoiding large clear-cuts or extraction of stumps/roots
Protect biodiversity and soil quality
Project Developers shall fill in the Rainbow Mineralization risk evaluation, to evaluate the identified environmental and social risks of projects. The identified risks include:
Heavy metal leaching from stored alkaline feedstock
Dust and particulate generation from alkaline feedstock storage and handling
Water use in the mineralization process
Fugitive CO2 leaks during the mineralization process
Hazardous waste generation from the use of chemical additives
Leaching pollutants from carbonated products during the use phase
Demand for fossil CO2 as a valuable product increases fossil fuel output
Pressure on unsustainable or nonrenewable biomass use for biogenic CO2 generation
Environmental impacts from opening a new mine or quarry to obtain alkaline feedstock
mineralization of materials must not contribute to activity shifting leakage. The following leakage risks are already covered by other requirements in this methodology:
Displacement of baseline mineralization: a small amount of atmospheric carbon removal via mineralization may be modeled in the Baseline Scenario where relevant, effectively deducted from the project's carbon storage.
Increased emissions during use: leakage emissions from use of carbonated products downstream of the project are mitigated by the Substitution requirement, where project materials must have the same performance as baseline/replaced products.
Upstream and downstream emissions: considered in the life-cycle based GHG quantifications.
Any material sources of leakage that cannot be mitigated shall be conservatively included in the GHG calculations.
Projects that issue avoidance RCCs on the basis of cement reduction must prove that they lead to at least a 73% reduction in GHG emissions compared to the baseline scenario. This is aligned with the European Union’s 2040 Climate target and described in the Rainbow Standard Rules.
The scope of the reduction is concrete production impacts for the given concrete mix design. This is assessed at the project-level for determining the baseline scenario, and shall be proven by following the GHG quantification section.
This eligibility criteria may be disregarded for projects that only issue RCC on the basis of carbon storage from mineralization.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Rainbow’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
Any identified material risk (defined as issues with a risk score of moderate or higher) shall be subject to a , which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification Team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
The MCI is a unitless indicator that varies from 0 to 1, where 0 represents a fully linear product and 1 is fully circular. The project scenario MCI is compared to the baseline scenario MCI, measuring how much more circular the project scenario is than the baseline.
The MCI methodology has been applied to the battery's second life using the input data presented in Table 5.
Table 5 All variables needed to calculate the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI) for the Rainbow Battery Second Life methodology are detailed below. The full methodology and equations can be found in the dedicated methodology document.
Symbol
Definition by the MCI
Guidelines for the project scenario
Guidelines for the baseline scenario
Mass of a product
Total mass (kg) of second life batteries in the project scenario.
Where and are defined in in the section.
Consider the same guidelines as for the baseline scenario
Fraction of mass of a product's feedstock from recycled sources
Assumed zero
Assumed zero
Fraction of mass of a product's feedstock from reused sources
Considers the mass of second life batteries () and the mass of new components acquired (, in kg):
is the sum of new Battery materials as described in and (for Pb-acid batteries)
Assumed zero
quality assessment or quality control procedures
responsible party for collecting and archiving data
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Rainbow’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
Any identified material risk (defined as issues with a risk score of moderate or higher) shall be subject to a Risk Mitigation Plan, which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification Team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Rainbow’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
Any identified material risk (defined as issues with a risk score of moderate or higher) shall be subject to a Risk Mitigation Plan, which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification Team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project Developers shall fill in the Methodology Risk evaluation template at the link below to evaluate the risk of carbon storage reversal, based on social, economic, natural, and delivery risks.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score to each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The Rainbow Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
The Project Developer, Rainbow Certification team, or the third-party auditor may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Each reversal risk with a high or very risk score is subject to:
This methodology covers projects that transform and store biomass into a permanent carbon removal solution, also called biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS). This methodology is composed of modules, which give more specific requirements and instructions for different parts of project operations. This methodology document provides general requirements and instructions that are relevant for all BiCRS projects, regardless of the specific modules they use.
Methodology name
Biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS)
Version
1.0
Methodology ID
RBW-BICRS-GEN-V1.0
Release date
December 4th, 2024
Status
This methodology is composed of modules, which allows Project Developers to choose the relevant modules for their project depending on their specific operations.
Modules are arranged into three module categories: carbon capture, carbon storage, and general Rainbow transformation modules. An example of the modules that can be used in the Rainbow BiCRS methodology are presented in the figure below.
Modules are like mini-methodologies that only cover a part of the project life-cycle. Combining the relevant modules for a project results in a complete picture of eligibility criteria, GHG reduction quantification requirements, required data, monitoring plans, and other instructions for Rainbow certification.
For a given project, multiple modules from each Module category may be selected if they are relevant to the project. For example, most projects will likely use both Transportation and Infrastructure and machinery modules from the Transformation category. At least one module must be selected from the carbon capture, transformation, and carbon storage categories.
Modules are compiled seamlessly on the Rainbow Certification Platform. Project Developers only need to select the modules that are relevant for their project.
It is widely acknowledged that in addition to reducing global greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, carbon dioxide must be removed from the atmosphere and permanently sequestered. One way to do this is through Biomass Carbon Removal and Storage (BiCRS), which involves a range of technologies that use plant biomass to remove carbon dioxide (CO) from the atmosphere and store that CO underground or in long-lived products.
This methodology document outlines the general requirements for BiCRS projects certified under the . These projects are eligible for removal Rainbow Carbon Credits (RCCs) related to their carbon removals, and avoidance RCCs as a result of generating valuable co-products. Further details for specific technologies are available in module documents.
All projects certified under this methodology must convert biomass into permanent carbon storage solutions.
Avoidance Rainbow Carbon Credits (RCCs) may be issued for eligible project activities, such as energy production.
Any share of removals coming from non-biogenic carbon are not eligible for removal RCCs under this methodology.
Carbon removals shall be ensured for at least 100 years, according to the Rainbow Standard Rules permanence criteria. Each project shall transparently disclose their permanence horizon of 100 or 1000+ years.
Technologies that are not detailed in a module, but that meet the general requirements of the present methodology, may be considered on a case by case basis.
The default project scope shall be defined in the Carbon storage modules.
The eligibility criteria requirements that are applicable to all projects under this methodology are detailed in the sections below. Other eligibility criteria requirements shall be taken from the accompanying modules and Rainbow Standard Rules:
To demonstrate additionality, Project Developers shall perform regulatory surplus analysis, plus either investment or barrier analysis, using the .
Regulatory surplus analysis shall demonstrate that there are no regulations that require or mandate project activities (for removal and avoidance activities). It is acceptable if regulations promote or set targets for these activities, because the resulting increase in activities shall be accounted for in the .
At the European Union level, projects automatically pass the regulatory surplus analysis, which has been conducted by the Rainbow Climate Team. Project Developers are only required to provide a country-level regulatory surplus analysis.
Investment analysis may be used to prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary to make the project investment a financially viable and interesting option. The investment may cover:
The creation and launching of new sites
Project Developers shall sign the , committing to follow the requirements outlined in the , including not double using or double issuing carbon credits.
BiCRS projects have a risk of double issuance of credits if the user of the removal solution and/or operator of the storage site also seeks credit issuance. Project Developers shall:
Identify all direct downstream users/buyers/actors in their supply chain, providing the company/organization name, name of an individual contact person at the company/organization, and their contact information (email address at minimum).
Provide proof that measures have been taken to avoid double issuance with those actors, such as through signed agreements, packaging/marketing material stating carbon credits have already been issued, and/or sales contract clauses.
If the Project Developer proves that the removal solution stays within the project scope all the way through storage, and it is never sold or transferred, then the requirements above may be disregarded.
At the validation stage for projects under development, this information may not be determined yet. In this case, upon validation Project Developers shall describe any information available on the expected buyers, and provide signed agreements committing to provide the necessary information upon verification. During the verification stage, Project Developers shall provide the information described above in order to issue RCCs.
Project Developers shall fill in the, in addition to all module-specific risk evaluations, to evaluate the identified environmental and social risks of projects. The contains the defined in the Rainbow Standard Rules.
BiCRS projects that issue avoidance RCCs must prove that they lead to at least the following GHG emission reductions compared to the baseline scenario, which are aligned with the and described in the .
Biochar use in concrete: 73%
Biochar replacement of peat or horticultural products: 58%
Energy co-products: 45%
The scope of the reduction is the system boundary used in GHG quantification, described in the Baseline scenario and Project scenario sections below.
This shall be proven using the GHG reduction quantification method described below and in the relevant modules.
This eligibility criteria may be disregarded for projects that only issue removal RCCs.
General GHG quantification rules can be found in the .
Process-specific GHG quantification rules can be found in the accompanying BiCRS , BiCRS , and general Rainbow modules.
The net removals for a project shall be calculated by summing the emissions and removals of each module used by that project.
Calculations of GHG emissions for the baseline and project scenarios shall follow a robust, recognized method and good practice guidance. The overall methodological approach is a comparative life cycle assessment (LCA) at the project-scale, based on ISO 14064-2:2019.
BiCRS projects may be eligible for removal and avoidance Rainbow Carbon Credits. Removal and avoidance RCCs are calculated and issued according to two completely separate accounting mechanisms, described below. This conservative approach results in double counting the project's induced emissions, and avoids the need for allocation of emissions/removals.
GHG quantifications shall be completed either for each batch (batches are defined in the relevant ), or for each calendar year. Carbon storage module documents may provide specific requirements.
The functional unit shall be 1 tonne of carbon storage solution (e.g. 1 tonne of biochar spread on soils, 1 tonne of biomass buried...).
BiCRS projects may result in multiple products in addition to the primary carbon storage component. Emissions from multifunctional processes shared among co-products may be allocated across the respective products. However, emissions from processes exclusive to a single product (e.g., dedicated delivery of carbon storage products) must be fully attributed to that product.
If the co-product is a nonvaluable waste, then no allocation is required and all GHG emissions are allocated to the main product.
If the co-product is valuable and eligible for avoidance RCCs, then no allocation is performed, and process emissions are counted towards both the avoidance GHG accounting and the removal GHG accounting. This is a conservative approach to separately handling removal and avoidance accounting schemes.
If the co-product is valuable and eligible for removal RCCs, then emissions may be allocated to between the co-products. It is best practice to perform allocation based on an underlying characteristic that best represents the main function of the products. Here the main function is carbon removal, so allocation shall be based on the proportion of carbon removal of the two products, in tonnes of carbon.
A baseline scenario must be included for any project that issues avoidance RCCs. The baseline scenario represents the GHG emissions from the product or activity that is avoided by the project activity, i.e. the GHG emissions that would have occurred in the absence of the project.
Baseline scenarios may be included for projects that issue only removal RCCs, for example from . The baseline scenario represents the permanent carbon removals that would have occurred anyway, without the project intervention.
Specific instructions for definition and modeling of baseline scenarios are available in the relevant module documents.
Modules include specific instructions on calculating GHG emissions and removals for the relevant processes.
Each project must use at least one module from the following categories: carbon capture, transformation and carbon storage.
👉 Download the template
Feedstock application rate
Moisture content measurements of feedstock just before spreading, and ex-post sampling description
Updated maximum potential CDR and modeled CDR estimates for the newly spread feedstock, plus updated total project CDR estimates
Assessment of the impact on site stratification and, if relevant, extrapolation
Proof of adherence to ESDNH requirements:
meet national and local regulations for pollutant levels and fertilizer limits
provide safety protocols required for feedstock application
model heavy metal dissolution in the environment, corresponding to heavy metal from newly spread feedstock
notify local stakeholders if adverse local environmental impacts are expected following application.
describe any potential downstream sensitive ecosystems, and plans to monitor for negative impacts resulting from rock spreading (e.g. pH shifts, contamination...).
Updated induced emissions
Energy amount and type for feedstock extraction
Energy amount and type for feedstock processing
Transport data, using the Distance based, Energy amount or Energy efficiency data inputs from the BiCRS Transport module
Amount and type of other input/emissions not mentioned above
Description of how allocation of induced emissions and of FFZ loss will be updated to reflect updated CDR estimates
Updated FFZ loss estimates
Updated calculations of CDR loss in the FFZ, corresponding to the amount of newly spread feedstock
Description of how allocation of FFZ loss will be updated to reflect updated CDR estimates
Feedstock application rate
Moisture content measurements of feedstock just before spreading, and ex-post sampling description
Updated maximum potential CDR and modeled CDR estimates for the newly spread feedstock, plus updated total project CDR estimates
Assessment of the impact on site stratification and, if relevant, extrapolation
Proof of adherence to ESDNH requirements:
meet national and local regulations for pollutant levels and fertilizer limits
provide safety protocols required for feedstock application
model heavy metal dissolution in the environment, corresponding to heavy metal from newly spread feedstock
notify local stakeholders if adverse local environmental impacts are expected following application.
describe any potential downstream sensitive ecosystems, and plans to monitor for negative impacts resulting from rock spreading (e.g. pH shifts, contamination...).
Updated induced emissions
Energy amount and type for feedstock extraction
Energy amount and type for feedstock processing
Transport data, using the Distance based, Energy amount or Energy efficiency data inputs from the BiCRS Transport module
Amount and type of other input/emissions not mentioned above
Description of how allocation of induced emissions and of FFZ loss will be updated to reflect updated CDR estimates
Updated FFZ loss estimates
Updated calculations of CDR loss in the FFZ, corresponding to the amount of newly spread feedstock
Description of how allocation of FFZ loss will be updated to reflect updated CDR estimates
risk mitigation plan, developed by the Project Developer, that details the long-term strategies and investments for preventing, monitoring, reporting and compensating carbon removal reversal, OR
additional contributions to the buffer pool, at a rate of 3% of verified removal Rainbow Carbon Credits for each high or very high risk
risk mitigation plan, developed by the Project Developer, that details the long-term strategies and investments for preventing, monitoring, reporting and compensating carbon removal reversal, OR
additional contributions to the buffer pool, at a rate of 3% of verified removal Rainbow Carbon Credits for each high or very high risk
Fraction of a product's biological feedstock from Sustained production.
It is assumed that no biological feedstock is used in batteries.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Material that is not from reuse, recycling or biological material from sustained production.
The amount of virgin materials used in the project scenario is the same as the Np when virgin material shall be extracted to produce new pieces.
All the input materials are considered virgin as no reuse or recycled materials are assumed in a status quo scenario.
Fraction of mass of a product being collected to go into a recycling process
Value is based on the collection rates from the baseline scenario as presented in Appendix 3. After the end of the battery's first and second life, the product is assumed to follow the country's recycling rates where waste is generated.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product going into component reuse
Fraction considered under the Cr variable, according to the baseline's rates.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product being collected to go into a composting process
As no biological feedstock is used in batteries, this value is assumed to be zero.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product being collected for energy recovery where the material satisfies the requirements for inclusion
Energy recovery as part of a circular strategy only applies to biological materials, according to the MCI methodology. This value is assumed to be zero.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste through a product's material going into landfill, waste to energy and any other type of process where the materials are no longer recoverable
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is the same for both scenarios. Due to the comparative approach, it can be excluded.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Efficiency of the recycling process used for the portion of a product collected for recycling
According to the EU Regulation for batteries, recycling efficiencies are determined based on their chemical composition rather than their usage category:
Li-ion: 65%
Pb-acid: 75%
NiMH (other): 50%
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste generated in the process of recycling parts of a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is the same for both scenarios. Due to the comparative approach, it can be excluded.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Efficiency of the recycling process used to produce recycled feedstock for a product
Assumed equal to Ec as no data are available specifically for batteries. Additionally, since Fr is considered zero, this variable is not impactful.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste generated when producing recycled feedstock for a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology, and considering Fr equal to zero, this value is zero.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste associated with a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology and Rainbow's guidelines, this value is the same for both scenarios. Due to the comparative approach, it can be excluded.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Linear flow index
Varies from 0 to 1, where 1 is a completely linear flow and 0 is a completely restorative flow. In a circular project, the LFI shall be closer to zero, while the baseline shall be closer to 1.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Actual average lifetime of a product
Sum of the lifespan of the product's first and second life according to Appendix 2, using an average weighted across the battery types refurbished or regenerated by the project.
Assumed 1
Average lifetime of an industry-average product of the same type
Average lifespan of the product's first life, weighted across all battery types refurbished or regenerated by the project as presented in Appendix 2.
Assumed 1
Actual average number of functional units achieved during the use phase of a product
Calculated based on the extended lifetime of the project's product.
Assumed 1
Average number of functional units achieved during the use phase of an industry-average product of the same type
Assumed 1
Assumed 1
Utility of a product (function of the product's lifespan and intensity of use)
In battery second life projects, X is higher in the project scenario, as the project extends the product's life (MCI methodology, p. 29)
Equal to 1 as the baseline scenario regards the status quo market (average industry scenario).
Material Circularity Indicator of a product
Varies from 0 to 1, where 0 represents a fully linear product and 1 is fully circular.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario

proof that the project's carbonated product struggles to be cost-competitive with baseline products. Carbon finance may be used to lower the selling price of the project’s product, making it more competitive.
proof that the large amount and cost of R&D required for an innovative technology makes the technology unfeasible to scale without carbon finance.
For any type of barrier analysis, audited financial statements must be provided as proof. These documents should either demonstrate the financial status to prove financial barriers, or show that the project could not independently fund solutions to overcome institutional or technological barriers.
Come from sustainably managed forests
Demonstrate that the CO2 supplier is not covered by an ETS.
If the CO2 supplier is covered by an ETS, provide their official ETS reporting documents, showing that reductions that were issued carbon credits under the present methodology are not included in ETS reporting.
For ex-ante projects that don't yet have an updated ETS reporting document, a signed statement may be provided to validate the project. Credits shall only be issued ex-post upon providing the ETS reporting document as described above.
tonnes of waste material used
SDG 6.3 Improve water quality by reducing pollution, eliminating dumping and minimizing release of hazardous chemicals and materials
Projects that carbonate and reuse cement wastewater contribute to improved and useful wastewater treatment and water quality
Invoices and operations records
m3 of wastewater used
Expansion by installing new processes
Business plans shall be provided as initial proof for investment analysis. During verification, audited financial statements shall be used to demonstrate that the initial estimates from the business plan were reasonable, and that carbon finance was used as initially described for the expected investment.
For launching brand new sites, additionality can be simply demonstrated if the business plan shows that carbon finance is expected to make up at least 80% of the company’s revenue, as detailed in the Rainbow Additionality Template.
Note that for investments in expansion, only the additional carbon reductions enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Rainbow Carbon Credits.
Barrier analysis may be used to prove that the project faces financial, institutional, or technological barriers to ongoing operations that can only be overcome using carbon finance. Examples include but are not limited to:
Financial barrier: financial analysis demonstrating that the project is not financially viable, evidenced by net cash being lower than the working capital requirements, or proof that the project is not meeting the projected financial targets in the business plans and loan documents, and that carbon finance would make it financially viable.
Institutional barrier: description of new regulation that the project must make costly changes to comply with, financial analysis showing that the project cannot fund the changes on their own, and carbon finance is necessary to make it viable.
For any type of barrier analysis, audited financial statements must be provided as proof. These documents should either demonstrate the financial status to prove financial barriers, or show that the project could not independently fund solutions to overcome institutional or technological barriers.
represents any baseline GHG removals from the capture module(s), representing permanent storage that would have occurred in the absence of the project.
represents the project's GHG emissions from the capture module(s) used by the project.
represents the project's GHG emissions from the transformation module(s) used by the project.
represents the project's GHG emissions from the storage module(s) used by the project.
where,
represents the GHG emissions from the baseline scenario during the verification period, in tonnes of COeq.
, and represent GHG emissions from any baseline scenario created in the respective modules.
where,
represents the avoided GHG emissions from the project scenario, in tonnes of COeq.
was calculated in Equation 3.
was calculated in Equation 4.
In use


Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Rainbow’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
Any identified material risk (defined as issues with a risk score of moderate or higher) shall be subject to a Risk Mitigation Plan, which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification Team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
The baseline scenario structure remains valid for the entire crediting period but may be significantly revised earlier if:
The Project Developer notifies Rainbow of a substantial change in project operations or baseline conditions, and/or
The methodology is revised, affecting the baseline scenario.
The specific values within the baseline scenario will be updated during each crediting period, using project data to accurately reflect the equivalent of the project’s operations.
This is a Carbon Capture Module and covers the sourcing of biomass feedstock for carbon storage projects. This module is part of the Rainbow BiCRS methodology, which allows Project Developers to choose the relevant modules for their project, and shall be used with the necessary accompanying modules.
See more details on how modules are organized in the the BiCRS home page.
This module covers use of biomass feedstock for permanent carbon removal and storage. Eligible biomasses are those that:
could not have been used as main material products,
were not grown for the purpose of CDR or bioenergy production.
For simplification, all feedstocks that meet the above requirements will be referred to hereafter as waste. Biomass feedstocks are categorized accordingly:
Forest waste from secondary forest
Natural but not primary old-growth forest, may still be managed for timber
Default if no other forest type can be proven
Forest waste from managed forest
Managed mixed-use forests that may include agroforestry, plantations or rotational logging
Must provide proof
Necessary tree removal from any forest
Damaged trees, or trees removed for planned forest management such as preventing disease spread or fires
Must provide proof
Agricultural residues with value
Residues left on soil or reapplied to soils for nutrient recycling (e.g. mulching, composting, spreading fast-decaying cellulose-based residues with decay within 5 years)
The Project Developer and entity eligible for receiving carbon finance the user of biomass feedstock who enables the permanent carbon storage. This is further specified in the corresponding carbon storage module.
Land owners or managers where biomass is cultivated or collected are not eligible Project Developers.
The eligibility criteria requirements specific to this module are detailed in the sections below. Other eligibility criteria requirements shall be taken from the accompanying modules and methodologies:
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Projects must follow all national, local and European (if located in Europe) environmental regulations related to, for example, biomass harvesting, and forest management.
In addition to completing the Biomass feedstock risk assessment described below, Project Developers must prove the following elements.
Project Developers shall provide proof that the biomass feedstock is classified as waste. This can be done via any one of the following three methods:
Price: if Project Developers did not pay for the biomass, or if they were paid to handle it, the biomass can be considered waste. Acceptable proof includes invoices, receipts, or contracts.
Contextual analysis: Project Developers may submit an analysis supported by reputable sources that the biomass 1) could not be used as main material products, and 2) was not grown for the purpose of CDR.
Positive list of wastes: if the biomass is included in the following list, it can be considered waste. Acceptable proof includes invoices, receipts, contracts, or photographic evidence and is required for validation:
sawmill residues
sawdust
shavings
bark
Project Developers shall evaluate the most likely alternative use/s of the biomass in order to assess environmental risks, leakage risks, and to calculate replacement emissions (if applicable). The evaluation shall be transparent and conservative.
The alternative use shall address questions such as:
was the biomass used for a product or service, that now needs to be replaced?
was the biomass going to store carbon anyway (in the biomass itself and/or in the soil)?
Proof shall be provided and may include signed statements from the biomass provider, historical records from the biomass provider, regional statistics or reputable reporting.
A short list of likely alternative uses may be provided for descriptive purposes, but for the purpose of further analysis, one single alternative use shall be proposed.
Biomass feedstock originating from forests shall provide at least one of the following forestry sustainability certificates (or similar, with a sufficient justification):
FSC (Forest Stewardship Council)
PEFC (Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification)
RSB (Roundtable on Sustainable Biomaterials)
Project Developers shall fill in the Biomass feedstock risk evaluation, to evaluate the identified environmental and social risks of projects. The identified risks include:
Disruption of soil health when collecting and exporting organic matter
Presence of heavy metals, toxins or other chemical pollutants in the biomass
Spread of diseases or invasive species
Cultivation of feedstock
Deforestation from use of forestry products as feedstock
Distant transport of feedstock inputs (>100 km)
Biomass feedstock sourcing must not contribute to activity shifting leakage.
The requirement that biomass feedstock must be classified as waste prevents activity shifting leakage. Consequently, the evidence provided in the "Environmental and Social Do No Harm" section shall also be applied here to verify that the feedstock is waste.
Several other types of leakage risks are already covered by other components of this module:
Displacement of soil carbon storage: a small amount of soil carbon storage is assumed and modeled in the Baseline Scenario where relevant, effectively deducted from the project's carbon storage.
Upstream and downstream emissions: considered in the life-cycle based GHG quantifications in companion modules.
The GHG reduction quantification instructions from all other modules used by the project must be used in conjunction with the present module in order to obtain full life-cycle GHG reduction quantifications.
The required data from all projects using biomass feedstocks are presented in Table 2.
Table 2 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source for initial project certification and validation. Asterisks (*) indicate which data are required to be updated annually during verification (see Monitoring Plan section).
Amount of biomass used*
Tonnes of fresh matter
Primary: Internal tracking documents, invoices, contracts
Carbon content of biomass
% w/w, fraction, kg/tonne
Primary or secondary: Laboratory chemical analyses, scientific publications
Major assumptions in this module include:
The permanent carbon sequestration rate in the baseline scenario is 0.5%.
Because the only biomass types allowed are waste, they are assigned no environmental impacts from their production/cultivation stage. Impacts from following stages, such as harvest, transport, and processing, shall be accounted for in the Processing and energy use module.
This section is only required if the feedstock's alternative use was to be left on the soil or reapplied to soils for nutrient recycling. Specifically this includes but is not limited to:
mulching
composting
spreading fast-decaying cellulose-based residues (e.g. decay within 5 years)
The Baseline Scenario shall include permanent carbon storage that would have occurred anyway in the absence of the project.
Although most biomass carbon would be released before the CDR project's permanence horizon, a small fraction is stabilized permanently as soil carbon. This portion is accounted for in the Baseline Scenario and deducted from the project's carbon removal capacity.
The uncertainty around biomass carbon being 1) naturally incorporated into the soil and 2) converted to a stable carbon form is high, influenced by factors such as climate, soil type, soil health, and land use, making it hard to estimate for individual projects. Thus, it's assumed that 0.5% of the carbon in the biomass feedstock will be permanently stored in soils.
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the Rainbow Standard Rules. The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of RCCs to eliminate with the discount factor.
For projects that include baseline permanent carbon storage, the assumption that 0.5% of carbon is permanently sequestered is has moderate uncertainty, but the total net project removals is not sensitive to this assumption. Therefore, this translates to an expected discount factor of at least 3% for projects that include baseline permanent carbon storage.
Monitoring Plans for this module shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for each reporting period:
Mass, type and source of all biomass feedstocks collected by the project.
Sustainable forestry certification (if applicable)
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
Depending on the project type, chemical analyses may be performed on the biomass feedstock or the final carbon storage solution (e.g. biochar). The accompanying carbon storage module shall specify at which stage chemical analyses should be performed. In all cases, carbon content of biomass feedstock must be provided, although secondary sources may be acceptable (see Data sources).
If chemical analyses of feedstock are required, Project Developers shall follow the instructions in the Sampling Requirements page to ensure a random and representative sampling procedure.
Chemical analyses shall be defined by the carbon storage module and may include but are not limited to:
Organic carbon content
Determining amount of carbon removed and carbon removal efficiency
Total carbon content
Determining amount of carbon removed and carbon removal efficiency
C:N ratio
Stability of biomass
Moisture content
Mass conversions
👉 Download the template here
Module name
Biomass feedstock
Module category
Carbon capture
Methodology name
Biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS)
Version
1.0
Methodology ID
RBW-BICRS-CC-BMF-V1.0
Release date
December 4th, 2024
Status
In use
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Rainbow’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
Any identified material risk (defined as issues with a risk score of moderate or higher) shall be subject to a , which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification Team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
General GHG reduction quantification rules can be found in the Rainbow Standard Rules.
Calculations of GHG emissions for the baseline and project scenarios shall follow a robust, recognized method and good practice guidance. The overall methodological approach is a comparative life cycle assessment (LCA) at the project-scale, based on ISO 14064-2:2019.
Project biobased materials with an expected carbon storage duration of less than 100 years are only eligible for avoidance RCCs. Materials with an expected carbon storage duration of 100 years or longer are eligible for removal and avoidance RCCs.
See section for more details.
The avoided emissions between the project and baseline scenarios shall be compared on the basis of a common functional unit.
The functional unit shall describe the amount, units, lifetime, and function of the building material for the project and baseline scenario.
Annual avoided emissions are calculated by multiplying the avoided emissions per functional unit by the quantity of project biobased materials sold over the year (for building material manufacturers), or the quantity of project biobased materials used in all registered buildings (for building developers).
The Project scenario shall represent the manufacture or use of biobased construction materials by the project during the reporting period (typically 1 year).
It shall respect the and requirements described in the present methodology.
The baseline scenario shall represent the conditions or practices that would occur in the absence of the project. The baseline scenario depends on the project-specific context (e.g. project biobased material, country...), but shall follow the same standard guidelines:
If the project is a material or product:
Identify the replaced construction product: define the application of the project biobased material that is being replaced (e.g., thermal insulation for flat roofs).
Identify products with a similar application, performance, lifetime, price as the project biobased material.
If the project biobased material has multiple likely applications, a market mix of likely applications should be used (e.g., thermal insulation for roofs in general).
When faced with uncertainty in defining a baseline scenario, a conservative choice shall be made.
The baseline scenario shall account for the use of biobased construction materials, and biogenic carbon removals, already currently used. The method below for calculating the shall also be applied to any biobased baseline materials that have a lifetime of 100 years or more.
Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) shall provide the main source of information for both the project and baseline scenarios. EPDs are developed according to EN 15804, which itself is based on ISO 14025.
Information taken from EPDs shall include the project and baseline material’s:
lifetime (Reference Service Lifetime, RSL)
performance characteristics
end of life waste treatment methods
climate change impact (sum of fossil, biogenic, and land use change)
If no EPD is available for a project, then a similar document may be used instead, given that it includes the above information, is independently verified, and follows ISO 14025.
The avoided GHG calculations shall include the cradle-to-grave impacts of the project and baseline scenarios. This corresponds to the “cradle-to-grave and module D” scope that includes all stages of modules A, B, C and D in EN 15804 (Figure 1).
If module D was excluded from either the project or baseline EPD, then the A-C cradle-to-grave scope shall be used for all products in both the baseline and project scenarios.
The following formulas shall be used to calculate the avoided GHG emissions for all projects, regardless of the carbon storage duration:
If the expected carbon storage duration of the project biobased material is 100 years or more, then the project is eligible for removal RCCs in addition to the above-mentioned avoidance RCCs.
Project removals are calculated by subtracting the carbon sequestration of the project biobased material from the induced emissions from producing that material. Net removals are calculated by subtracting project removals from baseline removals.
The biogenic carbon amount reported in the EPD of the project biobased material shall be used as the basis for calculating the amount of carbon removal credits to issue.
Note that any ancillary materials required in the project scenario from avoidance calculations are not included in removal credit calculations.
Note that EPDs report biogenic carbon uptake as a negative value in Module A using the -1/+1 method (common in LCAs of construction), and this must be removed in order to consider only GHG emissions induced by production (see Equation 3).
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the . The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of avoided emissions to eliminate with the discount factor.
The use of an assumption for carbon storage duration leads to high uncertainty. This duration can be estimated, using best available information and proof, but it is impossible to know with certainty what will be the fate of the material decades from now.
The baseline scenario selection method has high uncertainty. The requirements outlined here ensure that appropriate baseline materials are selected, but ultimately this remains an assumption and can not be known with certainty.
Note that this covers only the method used to select the baseline scenario. For a given project, the specific baseline scenario selected may have more or less uncertainty, depending on the nature of the project.
Equations 1-5 are used to calculate GHG avoidance and removals and have no uncertainty. They are commonly used and basic equations.
No estimates or secondary data are used at the methodology level. The following secondary data are used as parameters at the project level, and their uncertainties must be assessed for each project. Expected uncertainties, based on the data source, are provided below as a guideline:
The uncertainty at the methodology level is estimated to be moderate to high. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 6% for projects under this methodology.
Project developers shall demonstrate that they meet all eligibility criteria outlined in the Rainbow Standard Rules and described below with a specific focus on biogas from anaerobic digestion.
Eligibility criteria that do not require specific methodology instructions are not described here. This includes:
Measurability
Real
Technology readiness level
forestry tops and branches
wildfire management residues
straw
husks
corn cobs
wood from horticulture (trimmings or whole plants)
nut shells
bagasse
sugar beet pulp
SBP (Sustainable Biomass Program)
These certifications are used to prove:
Legal and transparent chain of custody
Proper forest regeneration
Safeguarding biodiversity and soil health
Historically stable or increasing forest carbon stocks
Sound socio-environmental practices in forestry operations
Default if prior use could not be determined
Agricultural residues with no value
Plowed into soil, burnt in the field, no substantial return of nutrients to soil
Must provide proof
Other waste or residue
To be evaluated on a case by case basis according to criteria outlined in the present document
Must provide proof
How to use this module
BiCRS Methodology
BiCRS methodology
Additionality
No double counting
Targets alignment
ESDNH
Other modules
Permanence
Substitution
Co-benefits
No double counting
ESDNH
Rainbow Standard Rules
Measurability
Real
TRL
Minimum impact




The market mix should be based on national construction practices/statistics, and come from reliable, recent, and transparent data sources.
Identify the replaced construction material: clearly identify the type of material being replaced (e.g. stone wool or a mix of different materials)
Define the specific material/s that composes the replaced construction product/s (e.g. stone wool used for thermal insulation)
Identify materials with a similar performance, lifetime, price as the project biobased material
By default, a mix of materials from various manufacturers and Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) shall be used to accurately represent the market mix for the specified material type. A specific material type from a particular manufacturer may only be considered with adequate justification and proof.
A material in the national market share may be omitted if it is proven to be an unsuitable equivalent product for the project biobased material.
Select appropriate EPDs (or full building LCA) for the identified baseline construction product/s and material/s. This selection should be made conservatively and, as much as possible, should respect the geographic location of the project.
Ensure functional equivalence by analyzing the characteristics of the project biobased material and the chosen Baseline scenario EPDs. They should already have similar characteristics after following steps 1 and 2, but may not be equivalent. The amount of project or baseline material may need to be adjusted to ensure that the scenarios have the exact same functional unit (e.g. same amount, units, lifetime, and function). This includes, at a minimum:
Performance: the performance characteristics of the replaced product including but not limited to, energy efficiency, strength, mechanical resistance, reaction to fire, or insulation capacity (e.g., thermal resistance of 7 m²·K/W). See the Substitution section for more details.
Lifetime: e.g. if the project and baseline materials have an expected lifetime of 100 and 50 years, respectively, then twice the amount of the baseline material is needed to fulfill the same function as the project material, since it will be replaced halfway through the project material's lifetime.
If the project is a permanent construction building:
Identify the replaced construction product: define the application of the project biobased material that is being replaced (e.g., thermal insulation for flat roofs).
Identify products with a similar application, performance, lifetime, price as the project biobased material.
If the project biobased material has multiple likely applications, a market mix of likely applications should be used (e.g., thermal insulation for roofs in general).
The market mix should be based on national construction practices/statistics, and come from reliable, recent, and transparent data sources.
Identify the replaced construction material: clearly identify the type of material being replaced (e.g. stone wool or a mix of different materials)
Define the specific material/s that composes the replaced construction product/s (e.g. stone wool used for thermal insulation)
Identify materials with a similar performance, lifetime, price as the project biobased material
By default, a mix of materials from various manufacturers and Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) shall be used to accurately represent the market mix for the specified material type. A specific material type from a particular manufacturer may only be considered with adequate justification and proof.
Select appropriate EPDs for the identified baseline construction product/s and material/s. This selection should be made conservatively and, as much as possible, should respect the geographic location of the project.
Ensure functional equivalence by analyzing the characteristics of the project biobased material and the chosen Baseline scenario EPDs. They should already have similar characteristics after following steps 1 and 2, but may not be equivalent. The amount of project or baseline material may need to be adjusted to ensure that the scenarios have the exact same (e.g. same amount, units, lifetime, and function). This includes, at a minimum:
Performance: the performance characteristics of the replaced product including but not limited to, energy efficiency, strength, mechanical resistance, reaction to fire, or insulation capacity (e.g., thermal resistance of 7 m²·K/W). See the section for more details.
Lifetime: e.g. if the project and baseline materials have an expected lifetime of 100 and 50 years, respectively, then twice the amount of the baseline material is needed to fulfill the same function as the project material, since it will be replaced halfway through the project material's lifetime
Insulation products for horizontal surface roof.
Identify the replaced construction material:
Cellulose insulation is versatile with no specific replacement. Therefore, the market mix of roof thermal insulation is used.
Materials with similar performance include rook wool, glass wool, other biobased materials, extruded polystyrene insulation etc.
Market shares can be taken from the study on thermal insulation in France from ADEME (2024, p.8). The mix for the baseline is about 50% glass wool, 30% rock wool, 10% cellulose insulation, and 10% extruded polystyrene.
Select appropriate EPDs
For each material, one representative EPD is selected that represents the material with similar performance characteristics in France.
If multiple EPDs are appropriate, the most conservative one is used.
Ensure functional equivalence:
Performance: the amount of products is adjusted to achieve the same function of the project biobased material (e.g. if the project material's R is 2x higher than the baseline's, 2x the mass of baseline material is needed to achieve the same R.)
Based on the product's physical characteristics, bricks are a suitable replaced construction product.
Identify the replaced construction material:
The project biobased material is a premium product, due to its higher production costs and superior thermal properties.
Several types of brick were identified with similar technical performance to hempcrete. However, the premium price means it is likely replacing other premium products. In the Île-de-France region, the most common similar premium product is monomur-type bricks, which is selected as a suitable baseline.
Select appropriate EPDs:
Numerous manufacturers offer monomur-type bricks. Therefore, a mix of EPDs from different manufacturers with similar price and performance characteristics as the project are selected.
Alternatively, a single EPD (such as EPD 38048 from the INIES database) could be chosen if there is a clear justification, such as alignment with price, performance, or being the most widely sold option in the specific geographic area studied.
Ensure functional equivalence:
Lifetime: the baseline product's lifetime is 50 years, and the project biobased material's lifetime of 100 years. Therefore, 2x the amount of monomur-type bricks are required to perform the same function of hempcrete bricks.
biogenic carbon content
represents the quantity of the building material in one functional unit.
represents the service lifetime of the building material as defined in the functional unit.
represents the reference service lifetime of the building material as defined in the EPD. Often, this is same as the . However in some cases the project' biobased material may have a different lifetime than the material. In that case, a correction factor must be applied to consider the different amount of materials needed for functional equivalence.
represents the total annual tonnes COeq of GHG emissions avoided by the project.
represents the annual amount of functional units of the building material either 1) sold by the material manufacturer, or 2) used by the building developer, depending on the nature of the project, and the equivalent amount required in the baseline scenario to fulfill the same function.
is the GHG emissions from production of the biobased material. It corresponds to Modules A1, A2, and A3 in the norm EN 15804's terminology in Figure 1.
represents the kilograms of biogenic carbon stored for a given amount of a building material defined in the EPD.
is the conversion factor between carbon and COeq, and is calculated by dividing the molar mass of COeq by the molar mass of carbon = 44/12 = 3.67.
, and are described in section 3.6.1.
represents net tonnes of COeq removed per functional unit.
is the net tonnes of CO2eq removed, i.e. the carbon removed by the project in addition to what is removed in the baseline.
A conservative, default estimate of high uncertainty is used for these parameters because they are taken directly from EPDs, which typically do not provide information on uncertainty. Project Developers may provide information to justify lower uncertainty here.
This parameter should be known and measured for each project, so the uncertainty is low.
The uncertainty is low because this is a basic conversion based on the size of the product.
This parameter has no uncertainty because it is defined by the Project Developer for the purpose of the GHG reduction quantification.
The baseline scenario structure remains valid for the entire crediting period but may be significantly revised earlier if:
The Project Developer notifies Rainbow of a substantial change in project operations or baseline conditions, and/or
The methodology is revised, affecting the baseline scenario.
The specific values within the baseline scenario will be updated during each crediting period, using project data to accurately reflect the equivalent of the project’s operations.
ESDNH
Minimum impact
To demonstrate additionality, Project Developers shall perform regulatory surplus analysis, plus either investment or barrier analysis, using the Rainbow Additionality Template.
Regulatory surplus analysis shall demonstrate that there are no regulations that require or mandate biogas production from anaerobic digestion. It is acceptable if regulations promote or set targets for biogas production, because the resulting increase in biogas production shall be accounted for in the baseline scenario (see GHG reduction quantification section).
At the European Union level, projects automatically pass the regulatory surplus analysis, which has been conducted by the Rainbow Climate Team. Although the Renewable Energy Directive promotes biogas production/use, it does not require its production. Project Developers are only required to provide a country-level regulatory surplus analysis.
Investment analysis may be used to prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary to make the new project investment a financially viable and interesting option. The investment may cover:
the development and launch of a brand new biogas site, or
an expansion to increase production capacity, such as adding new biogas digesters.
Business plans shall be provided as initial proof for investment analysis. During verification, audited financial statements shall be used to demonstrate that the initial estimates from the business plan were reasonable, and that carbon finance was used as initially described for the expected investment.
Note that for investments in expansion, only the additional carbon reductions enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Rainbow Carbon Credits.
Barrier analysis may be used to prove that the project faces financial, institutional, or technological barriers to ongoing operations that can only be overcome using carbon finance. Examples include but are not limited to:
Financial barrier: financial analysis proving that the project is operating at a loss, and carbon finance would make it financially viable.
Financial barrier: financial analysis demonstrating that the project is not financially viable, evidenced by net cash being lower than the working capital requirements, or proof that the project is not meeting the projected financial targets (e.g. IRR) in the business plans and loan documents, and that carbon finance would make it financially viable.
Institutional barrier: description of new regulation that the project must make costly changes to comply with, financial analysis showing that the project cannot fund the changes on their own, and carbon finance is necessary to make it viable.
Project developers shall sign the Rainbow MRV & Registry Terms & Conditions, committing to follow the requirements outlined in the Rainbow Standard Rules, including not double using or double issuing carbon credits.
Projects shall comply with the requirements set out in the Rainbow Double Counting Policy.
No additional measures for double issuance are required under this methodology, because double issuance among actors in the supply chain is unlikely.
UN SDG
Description
Proof
SDG 7.2 Increase substantially the share of renewable energy in the global energy mix
Promoting renewable energy over fossil fuel energy is important not only for reducing GHG emissions, but also for energy security, diversification, and conservation of finite resources. By definition, producing biogas from anaerobic digestion contributes to increasing the share of renewable energy in energy mixes.
Energy produced (kWh), from injection receipts from gas network.
SDG 8.2 Achieve higher levels of economic productivity through diversification, technology upgrading and innovation
Anaerobic digestion sites, often managed by farmers, provide an opportunity for income diversification, helping small-scale farmers remain viable in a challenging agricultural landscape. This is particularly beneficial given the
Fraction of farmer income from anaerobic digestion site operation.
SDG 8.4 Improve global resource efficiency in consumption and production
Almost 11 million tonnes of mineral nitrogen and phosphorus fertilizer are used annually in the EU. Their production requires large amounts of fossil energy consumption and mining of finite resources. Anaerobic digestion recycles nutrients by converting agricultural residues into digestate, which returns nutrients to agricultural soils.
Amount of digestate applied to soils, calculations and conversions done in Rainbow’s model.
SDG 12.2 - Achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural resources
The project’s circularity will be measured by the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI), according to the Ellen MacArthur Foundation's methodology.
Primary data collected from the project for the GHG reduction quantification, which are also used in the Circularity Assessment.
The biomethane generated and injected into the gas grid must be a valid substitute for natural gas, as modeled in the baseline scenario.
This is typically already required by energy companies that manage the gas network that the biomethane is injected into. Project Developers shall provide contracts with the relevant energy company, where clauses require the final product to meet specific characteristics making it substitutable for natural gas.
The co-product of anaerobic digestion, digestate, must be a valid substitute for mineral fertilizer, which digestate is assumed to replace in the baseline scenario. Numerous scientific studies have confirmed that digestate has a high fertilization value, sometimes comparable with that of mineral fertilizer. Fertilization value is largely dependent on nutrient concentration, which shall be measured via laboratory tests for a sample of digestate from each project.
The amount of mineral fertilizer avoided in the project scenario shall correspond to the nutrient content of the digestate (see the Project avoided mineral fertilizer section for more details). This ensures that digestate is modeled as a realistic substitute for mineral fertilizer based on project-specific data.
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Projects must follow all European, national, and local environmental regulations related to, for example, anaerobic digestion management, feedstock storage, feedstock sourcing, digestate storage, and digestate spreading.
To be eligible under this methodology, projects shall use no more than 10% dedicated crops in their feedstock input mixture in the first year of the crediting period. This decreases to 5% in the second year, and 3% in the remaining years. This shall be monitored each year during the crediting period.
It is environmentally preferable to use waste, manure, and slurry as feedstocks rather than intermediate energy crops, but this may not be preferable to farmers/biogas producers for financial or productivity reasons. Although this methodology does not impose a strict threshold on intermediate energy crops in the feedstock mix, the example below highlights how biogas producers are incentivized to use waste, manure, and slurry as feedstocks.
Project Developers shall fill in the Biogas from anaerobic digestion risk evaluation, to evaluate the identified environmental and social risks of projects,. The identified risks include:
Use of dedicated crops, leading to competition for food and agricultural land;
Reliance on energy crops rather than waste, manure, and/or slurry;
Distant transport of feedstock inputs (>100 km) leading to increased greenhouse gas emissions from transport;
Energy intensive processing;
Methane leaks from digestion process and storage facilities;
Leaching of runoff from manure, slurry or digestate storage, increasing eutrophication risks;
Leaching of excess nutrients from digestate spreading, increasing eutrophication risks;
Air quality, volatile odors from manure, slurry or digestate storage;
Landscape conversion from rural to industrial;
Workers health and safety.
There is a risk of activity shifting leakage related to biomass feedstock, potentially causing indirect land-use change (ILUC). This occurs when deforestation or conversion of natural ecosystems happens elsewhere to compensate for agricultural land lost to feedstock cultivation.
Project Developers shall determine and transparently communicate in the PDD the leakage risk from their biomass feedstock (see example below).
The risk level is based on the European Union’s RED II criteria for sustainable biomass and the definitions of low and high ILUC risk for biofuels, bioliquids, and biomass fuels.
Projects using less than 90% low ILUC risk feedstock inputs are ineligible for Rainbow Carbon Credits.
Low ILUC risk biomass is defined as biomass that does not cause significant expansion into land with high carbon stock. This includes but is not limited to:
Wastes and residues
Manure, slurry
Straw
Agri-industry processing residues (e.g. sugar beet pulp)
Feedstock inputs that are high ILUC risk include but are not limited to:
Whole-crop maize cultivated during the main growing season
Maize silage cultivated during the main growing season
Example 1
Example 2
Leakage may occur when emissions are shifted upstream or downstream in the supply chain and outside the project’s direct scope. These emissions shall be included by default in the GHG reduction quantification, as part of the life-cycle approach. The upstream and downstream emissions included in the quantification are detailed in the Baseline scenario and Project scenario sections
Biogas from anaerobic digestion projects must prove that they lead to at least a 45% reduction in GHG emissions compared to the baseline scenario. This is aligned with the European Union’s 2040 Climate targets, as described in the Rainbow Standard Rules.
The scope of the reduction is the system boundary used in GHG quantification, described in the Baseline scenario and Project scenario sections below.
This shall be proven using the GHG reduction quantification method described below.
Projects should support at least two quantifiable and verifiable environmental or social co-benefits, aligned with the (SDGs) framework. Any co-benefits claimed by the Project Developer shall be quantified, monitored, and audited for each verification and credit issuance.
Common co-benefits under this methodology are detailed in the table below. Project Developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
SDG 13 on Climate Action by default is not considered a co-benefit here, since it is implicitly accounted for in the issuance of carbon credits. If the project delivers climate benefits that are not accounted for in the GHG reduction quantifications, then they may be considered as co-benefits.
Table 1 Common co-benefits that projects under this methodology may provide are detailed, including types of proof that can be used to justify each co-benefit.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Rainbow’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
Any identified material risk (defined as issues with a risk score of moderate or higher) shall be subject to a , which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification Team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
treatment of used Ni-metal hydride battery, pyrometallurgical treatment l used Ni-metal hydride battery l Cutoff, U, GLO
Li-ion battery recycling
64%: treatment of used Li-ion battery, pyrometallurgical treatment l used Li-ion battery l Cutoff, U, GLO
36%: treatment of used Li-ion battery, hydrometallurgical treatment l used Li-ion battery l Cutoff, U, GLO
treatment of scrap lead acid battery, remelting l lead l Cutoff, U, RER
Common steps
market for solvent, organic l solvent, organic l Cutoff, U, GLO
Baking soda solution
10.7%: market for sodium bicarbonate l sodium bicarbonate | Cutoff, U, RER
Refurbishing steps
New BU:
NiMH: BU-related processes from NiMH battery production
Li-ion:
NMC811: battery cell production, Li-ion, NMC811 l battery cell, Li-ion, NMC811 l Cutoff, U, RoW
Regeneration steps
New electrolyte:
Li-ion: electrolyte production, for Li-ion battery l electrolyte, for Li-ion battery l Cutoff, U, GLO
Pb-acid:
38%: market for sulfuric acid production l sulphuric acid l Cutoff, U, RER
Residual waste
Incineration (50%): treatment of hazardous waste, hazardous waste incineration l hazardous waste for incineration l Cutoff, U, Europe without Switzerland
Landfill (50%): treatment of inert waste, sanitary landfill l inert waste l Cutoff, U, RER
New battery production
NiMH:
battery production, NiMH, rechargeable l battery, NiMH, rechargeable l Cutoff, U, GLO
Li-ion:
Table A2 Summary of assumed lifetimes, of new and refurbished batteries by battery type and chemistry.
LMT
Li-ion
70%
6
5
LMT
NiMH
74%
6
Table A3 Summary of baseline scenario battery waste treatment, per battery type and chemistry.
Battery type
Chemistry
EU EPR collection target in 2028
Europe EOL market share
Adjusted Europe EOL
LMT
Li-ion:
NMC: 60%
50% NMC811
50% NMC111
51%
PRO collection schemes:
Battery second life: 10%
Recycling: 90%
PRO collection schemes:
Battery second life: 7%
Recycling: 93%
LMT
Li-ion:
NMC: 60%
LFP: 30%
NCA: 10%
NiMH
49%
Outside PRO schemes:
Battery second life: 19%
Recycling: 75%
Landfill and incineration: 6%
Outside PRO schemes:
Battery second life: 13.3%
Recycling: 80.7%
Landfill and incineration: 6%
EV/HEV
Transport, truck
market for transport, freight, lorry, 7.5-16 metric ton, diesel, EURO 5 | Cutoff, U, RER
NiMH battery recycling
The Project Developer (PD) submits a Project Application (PA) to start the certification process. This step is free of charge for PDs.
Once received, the PA is reviewed by the Certification team, with an average response time of 15 days. If clarification or additional details are needed, questions are sent to the PD.
For rejected applications, a refusal report explaining the decision will be provided to the PD. PDs may revise and resubmit at any time without restriction, allowing for the flexibility to revise and resubmit applications.
Approved PAs proceed to project registration.
To activate a Rainbow Registry account, the PD must complete the following steps:
Use the connection link received via email
Complete all administrative information required in the Admin page
Follow the to ensure the PD is registered properly
All sites where the PD operates the project’s mitigation activity shall be registered during the validation phase using the . This includes all factories, facilities, or operations under direct control of the PD, whose activities are issued Rainbow Carbon Credits.
If the PD chooses a partner to register projects under the Rainbow Standard, they must sign a Letter of Delegation (template provided ).
This document should name the Registration Partner and define their authority and responsibilities, formally authorizing them to represent the PD in all registration, documentation, and project management activities under the Rainbow Standard.
After the project is added to the registry, the PD is given access to the Impact Certification Platform to submit all elements required for the Project Design Document (PDD). The elements and their proof are checked by the Rainbow Certification Team, and upon approval the PDD is generated.
The PDD serves as the final validation document used for audit. PDDs shall contain, at a minimum, the following information:
Non-technical description of the project operations, scope, PD, location, and other relevant actors
Technical description of the technology and project operations
Justification that the project meets all 12 criteria described in the Rainbow Standard Rules, and, if relevant, the chosen methodology
Assessment of environmental and social risks
The Certification team evaluates the PDD and any supporting documents to ensure they respect Rainbow’s general and methodology GHG quantification steps and eligibility requirements.
The Certification team may require clarifications and additional information about the project via the Impact Certification Platform.
For projects unlike any previously validated by Rainbow, or in cases of uncertainty, the Certification team may recommend a full or partial proofreading of the PDD by a domain expert from the Technical Advisory Committee. This optional proofreading incurs fees based on the expert’s rates, charged to the PD.
Once the PDD completes an expert review (if needed) and is validated by the Certification team, the project proceeds to third-party validation with the VVB.
The PDD and proof documents are made available to the third-party Validation and Verification Body (VVB) on the Impact Certification Platform. The VVB audits the adherence to the Rainbow Standard Rules and the specified methodology. In this stage, the VVB may request additional information or ask questions to the PD or the Rainbow Certification Team.
Validation audits shall comply with the latest version of Bodies, available on the website under Standard Documentation. A minimum of two auditors from an accredited VVB must be involved for each project audit, ensuring a peer review mechanism to maintain accuracy and integrity.
The validation audit takes place between the PD, the VVB and where necessary, the Rainbow Certification Team, and clarification is managed on the Impact Certification Platform.
The audit results are documented in a report, shared with the PD and the Rainbow Certification Team and are available upon request.
If the VVB identifies any reservations or discrepancies during assessment, the PD must respond promptly within 30 days. The PD can either correct the issues directly or submit a mitigation plan, which, if accepted by the VVB, can be added to the project's Monitoring Plan.
A site audit is mandatory within two years of the project’s crediting period start date and/or before the second verification audit. This punctual site audit is complementary to the annual operations audits, which are checked during verification via documents and photos.
The goal of the site audit is to confirm that:
The project exists and is functional
The scale of the project is in line with the description
Projects that issue more than 10,000 RCCs per year must undergo an in-person site audit.
Projects that issue less than 10,000 RCCs per year may choose between an in-person or remote audit. A remote audit is allowed because 1) it eases the time and cost burdens of PDs and VVBs and 2) it is satisfactory for the industrial projects, which usually consist of small, unchanging, easily documentable sites. For details on the remote auditing process, refer to the
VVBs reserve the right to request an in-person site audit if the remote audit is deemed insufficient. This may be at any time in the process, before or after a remote audit has been conducted.
The VVB must determine the specific components to be checked during the site audit. These components should allow the VVB to complete the goal mentioned above. A list of components should be sent to the PD one week before the scheduled audit.
The output of the site audit includes the VVBs comments on each component, noting whether it was confirmed, if there are remaining reservations, if it was deemed false, or (if it was done remotely) if an in-person follow-up audit is necessary.
Projects must undergo a stakeholder consultation in parallel with or before the validation audit through the .
If a stakeholder consultation has already been conducted (to obtain a permit for instance), PDs are exempt from this requirement, and shall share the results on the Impact Certification Platform.
Additionally, the Rainbow Registry provides an open-access space where stakeholders can check the project details and provide feedback. The consultation is open for a 30 day period on the Rainbow Registry.
This feedback is gathered by the Certification team and analyzed in the . The feedback received is added to the PDD in an Appendix and made available on the Rainbow Registry.
Once validated by the VVB, the PDD is sent back to the Rainbow Certification Team to review the VVB’s remarks, and evaluate feedback from the (see details above).
If no concerns remain unaddressed, the project is validated. The PDD is made available on the Rainbow Registry.
For ex-post assessments, the project undergoes the simultaneously, which results in RCC issuance.
For ex-ante assessments, the project’s are estimated for the whole crediting period, and are eligible for pre-purchase agreements. The project proceeds to verification after it has started operating.
If concerns and critiques emerge from the stakeholder consultation or VVB report review, the Certification team may decide to subject them to the same process described above in the section.
Key impact indicators (KIIs) are identified during the GHG quantification (or LCA) and the eligibility criteria assessment, and reported in the PDD. These are parameters with high variability and importance that need to be audited continuously to measure the impact of the project and the number of RCC to be issued, and ensure the project’s eligibility. KIIs should represent processes that can be measured automatically. A project should have 5-10 KIIs.
KIIs that are directly linked to the project’s main function/output (such as mass of waste recycled/reconditioned, kWh in biogas production…) must be accounted for. KIIs should cover values that are important in calculating avoided GHG emissions in the LCA, plus values that demonstrate continued adherence to eligibility criteria.
Sources for each KII must be identified in the Monitoring Plan in the PDD, and must be:
auditable and documented: a process can be put in place that leads to these results. It is not subject to interpretation.
digitalized: sources will ultimately be associated with carbon credits, they must be at least digitized if not already digital.
A Monitoring Plan is provided in the PDD that defines the source, frequency, and responsible party of measurement for each KII. This facilitates the ongoing, regular verification processes to ensure data quality in project monitoring. On a regular basis (every 3, 6, or 12 months), Project Developers upload KIIs to the Impact Certification Platform for monitoring and verification of their impact.
Quality assurance and quality control is ensured by requiring verifiable evidence for each KII.
Minimum requirements for a Monitoring Plan are defined at the methodology level, but individual projects may require monitoring of extra elements. The Monitoring Plan is created by the Rainbow Certification Team for each project, and PDs can accept it or request modifications. The Monitoring Plan is reviewed by the VVB during the validation audit.
Failure to adhere to the Monitoring Plan, for example omitting a KII measurement due to unexpected interruption or errors in monitoring equipment or procedures, shall result in conservative estimation of the concerned KII that results in a deduction of carbon credits.
The sources and KIIs proposed in the Monitoring Plan are documented and submitted annually in the Monitoring Report.
Verification includes an audit of sources and KIIs listed in the Monitoring Plan. This verification is conducted by a Rainbow accredited VVB that assesses the project’s operation according to the .
A project shall undergo regular monitoring and verification. The default period for a verification period is one year. The length of the verification period may vary but shall not exceed two years of operations. If a project does not conduct a verification within 2 years it shall be de-registered and must .
The PD submits KIIs on the Impact Certification Platform to update the GHG quantification and calculate the actual carbon avoidance/removal that occurred during the crediting period. The updated KIIs and any compliance updates (see ) are summarized in the Monitoring Report.
The VVB delivers a verification opinion certificate for each verification, which is made publicly available on the Rainbow Registry.
Additionally, spot checks are conducted by the Certification team to ensure that the project’s mitigation activity occurs as described in the PDD.
Once the Monitoring Report and KII’s source are audited:
For projects that completed ex-ante validation, provisional credits are converted and issued as RCCs (see the )
For projects completing ex-post validation and verification simultaneously, or for subsequent verifications (e.g., in years 2, 3, etc.), the verified amount of RCCs are issued directly.
Upon credit issuance, the PD must have an activated account with the Rainbow Registry, where All RCCs are issued, transacted, and retired.
Projects may choose to issue credits more frequently than their verification audit interval by opting for continuous issuance. Continuous issuance eligibility requires that a project:
Operate for at least one month with at least one verification audit showing minimal discrepancies.
Demonstrate the ability to provide data at the desired continuous frequency.
Develop a continuous issuance Monitoring Plan.
Request and receive approval from a VVB and the Rainbow Certification Team.
The steps for continuous issuance include:
Project Developers submit data continuously to the Rainbow Impact Certification Platform, which automatically calculates GHG emission avoidance/removal
Calculations and proof are checked by the Rainbow Certification Team
are made available on the registry
A is performed at the desired frequency (every 3, 6 or 12 months), assessing the compilation of data and proof provided continuously over the previous reporting period
A project's validated status may be affected by:
Revisions to Rainbow Standard Documentation or Methodology:
If the Rainbow Standard Documentation or methodology used in the project validation has been updated, PDs must use the latest version for the subsequent verification of RCCs.
Ineligibility: If revisions render the project ineligible, it cannot issue credits at the next verification, though existing credits remain on the registry.
For both revisions and major changes, the following apply:
Verification by VVB: The VVB audits all changes summarized in the Monitoring Report to ensure they comply with Rainbow Standard Rules and the selected methodology uphold project integrity.
Updated LCA: All changes must be reflected in an updated LCA to ensure ongoing accuracy and conservatism.
The maximum duration of the crediting period is 5 years. This means that for 5 years after the start of the crediting period, the validation and Monitoring Plan is valid, and verification may be performed by following the Monitoring Plan requirements. At the end of the crediting period, the project must be renewed. For renewed projects, the crediting period shall be the total length of the combined crediting periods.
Upon renewal, projects must undergo a new validation assessment by performing the following steps, including all elements described in the section.
Preparation of a new PDD, with updated responses to all eligibility criteria, updated GHG reduction quantification, and an updated selection of a baseline scenario
Validation audit
Site audit
Stakeholder consultation
Project status is related to the different steps in the certification process.
See the section for corresponding information on credit status.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score to each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The Rainbow Certification Team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
The Project Developer, Rainbow Certification Team, or the third-party auditor may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Each reversal risk with a high or very risk score is subject to:
risk mitigation plan, developed by the Project Developer, that details the long-term strategies and investments for preventing, monitoring, reporting and compensating carbon removal reversal, or
additional contributions to the buffer pool, at a rate of 3% of verified removal Rainbow Carbon Credits for each high or very high risk
Project Developers shall prove that their project provides at least 2 co-benefits from the (SDGs) framework (and no more than 4).
Common co-benefits of projects certified under this methodology, and their sources of proof, are detailed in Table 1. Project Developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
SDG 13 on Climate Action by default is not considered a co-benefit here, since it is implicitly accounted for in the issuance of carbon credits. If the project delivers climate benefits that are not accounted for in the GHG reduction quantifications, then they may be considered as co-benefits.
Table 1 Summary of common co-benefits provided by projects certified under this methodology. Co-benefits are organized under the United Nation Sustainable Development Goals (UN SDGs) framework.
89.3%: market for water, completely softened | water, completely softened | Cutoff, U, RER
market for textile, knit cotton | textile, knit cotton | Cutoff, U, GLO
market group for electricity, medium voltage l electricity, medium voltage l Cutoff, U, RER
NMC111: battery cell production, Li-ion, NMC111 l battery cell, Li-ion, NMC811 l Cutoff, U, RoW
LFP: battery cell production, Li-ion, LFP l battery cell, Li-ion, LFP l Cutoff, U, RoW
NCA: battery cell production, Li-ion, NCA l battery cell, Li-ion, NCA l Cutoff, U, RoW
Pb-acid:
battery production, lead acid, rechargeable, stationary l battery, lead acid, rechargeable, stationary l Cutoff, U, RoW
New BMS:
battery management system production, for Li-ion battery l battery management system production, for Li-ion battery l Cutoff, U, GLO
New auxiliary components:
Glass fiber reinforced plastics:
market for glass fibre reinforced plastic, polyamide, injection moulded l glass fibre reinforced plastic, polyamide, injection moulded l l Cutoff, U, GLO
Plastics (polyethylene):
market for polyethylene, high density, granulate l polyethylene, high density, granulate l Cutoff, U, RER
injection moulding l injection moulding l Cutoff, U, RER
Plastics (polypropylene):
market for polypropylene, granulate l polypropylene granulate l Cutoff, U, RER
injection moulding l injection moulding l Cutoff, U, RER
Battery module packaging:
market for battery module packaging, Li-ion l battery module packaging, Li-ion l Cutoff, U, GLO
Aluminium:
market for aluminium, cast alloy l aluminium, cast alloy l Cutoff, U, GLO
market for sheet rolling, aluminium l sheet rolling, aluminium l Cutoff, U, GLO
Steel:
market for steel, low-alloyed, hot rolled l steel, low-alloyed, hot rolled l Cutoff, U, GLO
Electric connectors (wire):
market for electric connector, wire clamp l electric connector, wire clamp l Cutoff, U, GLO
Electric connectors (buss):
market for electric connector, peripheral type buss l electric connector, peripheral type buss l Cutoff, U, GLO
Electronic components (other)
market for electronic component, passive, unspecified l electronic component, passive, unspecified l Cutoff, U, GLO
62%: market for water, completely softened | water, completely softened | Cutoff, U, RER
NiMH: market for electrolyte, KOH, LiOH additive l electrolyte, KOH, LiOH additive l Cutoff, U, GLO
Pb-acid electrolyte treatment:
market for quicklime, milled, packed l quicklime, milled, packed l Cutoff, U, RER
50%: NMC811: battery production, Li-ion, NMC811 l battery, Li-ion, NMC811, rechargeable l Cutoff, U, RoW
50%: NMC111: battery production, Li-ion, NMC111 l battery, Li-ion, NMC111, rechargeable l Cutoff, U, RoW
30%: battery production, Li-ion, LFP, rechargeable l battery, Li-ion, LFP, rechargeable l Cutoff, U, GLO
10%: battery production, Li-ion, NCA, rechargeable l battery, Li-ion, NCA, rechargeable l Cutoff, U, RoW
Pb-acid:
battery production, lead acid, rechargeable, stationary l battery, lead acid, rechargeable, stationary l Cutoff, U, RoW
NCA: 10%
NiMH
5
EV/HEV
Li-ion
83%
8
5
EV/HEV
NiMH
74%
8
5
SLI
Pb-acid
100%
8
6
ESS
Li-ion
70%
8
6
ESS
NiMH
74%
8
6
ESS
Pb-acid
100%
8
6
Li-ion
NiMH
100%
Battery second life: 25%
Recycling: 75%
Battery second life: 17.5%
Recycling: 82.5%
SLI
Pb-acid
100%
Recycling: 100%
Recycling: 100%
ESS
Li-ion
Pb-acid
Li-ion
100%
Recycling: 100%
Recycling: 100%
For any type of barrier analysis, audited financial statements must be provided as proof. These documents should either demonstrate the financial status to prove financial barriers, or show that the project could not independently fund solutions to overcome institutional or technological barriers.
Cover crops, catch crops, intermediate crops, and intercrops
rye, maize, sunflower, alfalfa, and triticale silage, from crops grown outside the main growing period
Bioenergy crops on marginal or degraded land
energy crops grown at any time of the year, if the Project Developer can prove that the land was unable to be cultivated in the past 5 years.
45%
Summer (intermediate crop)
Yes
40%
Summer (intermediate crop)
Yes
Maize silage energy crop
7000
35%
Late summer/fall (intermediate crop)
Yes
SDG 12.5 - Reduce waste generation through prevention, reduction, recycling and reuse
Projects may use waste from agro-industrial processes as feedstock inputs, preventing other possibly harmful waste disposal or inefficient recycling.
Records of feedstock inputs showing the amount of waste used.
SDG 13. Take urgent action to combat climate change and its impacts.
Anaerobic digestion projects reduce emissions of methane, a GHG with an especially high climate change impact and global warming potential in the short-term. Climate change impacts over 100 years are used as the basis to calculate GHG reductions and issue carbon credits, but reducing climate change impacts in the short-term by reducing methane emissions is an additional climate co-benefit.
Percent GHG emission reduction compared to the baseline scenario using IPCC 2021 GWP20 values.
15.1 Ensure the conservation, restoration and sustainable use of terrestrial and inland freshwater ecosystems and their services
Energy cover crops can be grown and used for biogas production, and replace either bare soil or non-harvested cover crops. Compared to bare soil, energy cover crops can provide numerous ecosystem services such as reduced nitrogen leaching, improved soil health, and soil carbon sequestration (which is not included in the GHG reduction quantification).
Records of feedstock inputs showing energy cover crops, plus justification that energy cover crops are managed in a sustainable way.
Feedstock input
Amount (tonnes)
Percent of feedstock mix
Growing season
Low ILUC risk?
Cow manure
4,000
20%
NA
Yes
Sugar beet pulp
7,000
35%
NA
Yes
Sunflower silage energy crop
Feedstock input
Amount (tonnes)
Percent of feedstock mix
Growing season
Low ILUC risk?
Whole-crop maize
3000
15%
Main crop
No
Silo juice
2000
10%
NA
Yes
Rye silage energy crop
9,000
8000
A material in the national market share may be omitted if it is proven to be an unsuitable equivalent product for the project biobased material.
Location and host country
Technology type
Applied sector
Primary answers to core eligibility criteria: co-benefits, additionality
Environmental impact assessment, such as carbon accounting or life cycle assessment (LCA), of the project scenario compared to a baseline scenario.
reference person
contact information
host country
Justification of the chosen baseline scenario
Project-specific assumptions, data sources, and emission sources/sinks in the GHG quantification, that are not already specified at the methodology level
Demonstration of additionality
Project-specific uncertainty assessment
Monitoring Plan with Key Impact Indicators (KIIs) to be monitored
Site registration
Future production projections
Understanding the GHG quantification methods and sector-specific approaches
Assessing PD’s compliance with Rainbow's 12 eligibility criteria
Ensuring use of a conservative LCA model for GHG reduction calculations
Evaluating accuracy of input data in the calculation model
Confirming annual carbon credit estimates for removal/avoidance.
GHG quantification model used in regards to the methodology
Relevant and conservative baseline
Accurate, transparent data and conservative estimates
Model usage and the computations
5-year carbon credits estimation
Monitoring Plan
Key processes operate as described in the project PDD
GHG reduction/removal model usage
Data authenticity and estimates
RCCs estimation
Monitoring Plan.
The Rainbow Certification Team reviews the following content:
the VVB’s remarks
the PDD, with clarifications asked by the VVB included in the Appendix
feedback from the stakeholder consultation
or critical in demonstrating the project’s eligibility
KIIs may be related to:
energy (kWh)
number (for instance: number of products)
quantity: masses, liquids
transportation: t.km, km
chemical composition
Data authenticity and estimates
Project/Process changes
GHG quantification updates
RCCs verification
Compliance with Standard Document/methodology updates (see section below)
Additional elements may be included in the verification audit, as required by the project’s Monitoring Plan.
Provisional credits are converted to verified RCCs, and follow the issuance adjustments per the Under-/Overachievement section
Major Changes in Project Scope or Operations:
Required Updates: Significant changes in operations, processes, baseline scenario, technologies, or scale require the PD to update GHG quantification and eligibility in the next Monitoring Report.
Project validation review
Compliance and Updates
Projects must stay compliant with Rainbow Standard and methodology revisions and report major operational changes in the Monitoring Report.
VVB audits any revisions or changes, ensuring alignment with updated methodologies and standards.
Crediting Period Renewal
After a 5-year crediting period, the project must undergo a full revalidation, including a new PDD, validation audit, and stakeholder consultation to continue issuing credits.
Application
Project Developer (PD) submits a Project Application (PA); the Certification team reviews it within 15 days.
Clarifications may be requested, and a refusal report is issued if the application is rejected. Approved applications proceed to registration.
Registration
PD signs Terms & Conditions and completes administrative setup, including Know Your Customer (KYC) requirements.
Project sites and any Registration Partner are formally documented.
Pre-Validation
PD submits data and proof to the Impact Certification Platform
Project Design Document (PDD) is generated, outlining project operations, GHG quantification, additionality, and Monitoring Plan.
Certification team reviews the PDD, possibly involving domain experts, and approves it before third-party validation.
Validation
VVB conducts a validation audit to confirm project adherence to Rainbow Standard Rules and chosen methodology, involving the PD and Certification team as needed.
In parallel, PD conducts or provides evidence of a stakeholder consultation, open for 30 days on the Rainbow Registry.
Monitoring and Verification
Key Impact Indicators (KIIs) are monitored regularly to track project impact and eligibility.
PD submits KIIs per the Monitoring Plan; prepares a Monitoring Report which subject to the verification audit by the VVB annually (or as per schedule) to verify GHG quantification and RCC issuance.
Continuous Issuance (Optional)
Eligible projects may choose more frequent issuance of provisional credits if they meet the data frequency and accuracy requirements
Provisional credits are converted to RCCs upon verification.
Registered
The project has completed and undergone with Riverse.
Project Developers are given access to the certification platform and the project is added to the registry.
The project may be already operating or may still be in the planning phase.
No credits have been estimated or issued.
Validated
The project is registered, and has completed and .
The PDD is completed on the Impact Certification Platform and validation audit is completed by the VVB.
The project may be already operating or may still be in the planning phase.
If the project is in the planning phase,
Credited
The project is registered and validated, and has completed at least one round of .
A has been submitted and audited by a VVB.
The project must be operating.
Verified RCCs are issued and made available on the registry.
If the project is operating, it may undergo validation and verification at the same time, and pass directly to "Credited" status.
The project may retain this status for a maximum of 5 years, corresponding to the maximum 5-year crediting period length. After 5 years, the status changes back to Registered, and the project must undergo Renewal.
The compilation of sites where spreading and monitoring occurs is called the project area. Each project registered with Rainbow shall have one project area which is described in the initial Site Characterization Report contained in the validated PDD, plus any additional appendix Site Characterization Reports when new sites are added for .
The project area is composed of sites which will be statistically analyzed together with similar:
Administrative oversight and jurisdiction
Geographic area
Timing of spreading (less than 5 years between consecutive spreading events)
The depth of the NFZ should be at least 20 centimeters, or the tillage depth plus a 10 centimeter buffer, whichever is deeper. Deeper or shallower NFZs may be considered on a case by case basis if the Project Developer provides sufficient justification based on site hydrology or agronomic practices, including but not limited to the depth of the water table, depth of plant roots, or disturbance from installing sensors in non-tilled soil layers.
Project Developers shall submit a Site Characterization Report with the PDD during project validation, before any rock spreading occurs, that:
justifies why the project area is appropriate for ERW under baseline conditions before any rock spreading occurs, and is expected to lead to measurable CDR
demonstrates that spreading feedstock in the project area meets the Environmental and Social Do No Harm requirements, is not expected to cause adverse effects on the environment, and is not upstream of peatlands
delineates the spatial extent and buffer zones of the treatment and control plots
describes any approach used and the stratification results
details the number, location and management strategy of
describes the site (number of samples to take and sampling approach)
provides results and sources for all components listed in Table 1 for the site, soil and FFZ.
The characteristics listed in Table 1 shall be reported in the Site Characterization Report for each site in the project area. Sources may include measurements from pilot sampling, data from farmers, secondary databases and soil maps, remote sensing, or other well documented and reliable sources.
These characteristics shall be used to justify the modeling estimates, the control/treatment structure, stratification, and sampling protocol (e.g. where to install measurement infrastructure, at what depth, frequency of measurements...).
Table 1 The characteristics outlined in the table shall be included in the Site Characterization Report, prepared by the Project Developer for project validation.
The following characteristics apply to the Near Field Zone (NFZ).
Some agronomic characteristics listed below cannot be reliably projected multiple years in advance, because farmers may make such decisions annually. Project Developers should provide their best estimates of agronomic practices upon project validation, and actual practices shall be documented and updated throughout the crediting period.
GPS coordinates
GPS coordinates and map of extent of site
Cropping system
Past and expected crop types and rotation schedule
Root depth
Maximum root depth of expected crops
Fertilization practice
All items below shall include measurements of both the baseline composition and the spatial and temporal variability. They shall include averages and distributions (standard deviation, variance...). Those with an asterisk (*) are optional.
The following characteristics apply to the Near Field Zone (NFZ).
The following characteristics apply to the Far Field Zone (FFZ).
Project Developers should perform stratification to group the plots within a deployment area according to their key characteristics that influence CDR.
Stratification must combine key climate and soil properties to delineate strata that are relatively homogeneous in factors influencing ERW. The stratification approach shall be developed during project validation, prior to rock spreading, although this may be revised at later auditing events. The purpose is to:
designate treatment and control plots per strata (at least 1 control plot per strata), reducing variability and improving representativeness of control plots, and
(optional) used for spatial extrapolation.
Stratification shall be done using evidence from pilot sampling, data from farmers, secondary databases, remote sensing, or other well documented and reliable sources.
It is recommended that Project Developers perform this step in GIS software as a multi-criteria analysis that overlays layers representing each characteristic, but other approaches, methods and software can be considered on a case-by-case basis.
The suggested climate and soil properties to delineate strata are listed below. The properties in bold are strongly recommended for stratification, but Project Developers are encouraged to use as many properties as reasonably possible to increase the likelihood of statistical significance. Additional properties not listed here may be considered if justified as relevant.
Soil or porewater pH
Soil type
Feedstock application rate and timing
Feedstock type
Type of crop grown
Soil moisture
Soil texture
Topographic Wetness Index (TWI)
Temperature
Precipitation
Slope
Wind exposure
Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC)
Soil organic carbon
Categorical variables (e.g. soil type) should be treated as separate values, unless the Project Developer can justify why multiple types should be combined.
Continuous variables (e.g. pH, soil bulk density...) should be grouped using one of the approaches listed below, and justified by the Project Developer:
Standard deviation intervals
Equal intervals
Quantiles
Domain-specific thresholds (e.g. acidic, neutral and alkaline soils)
Natural breaks/gaps
Statistical clustering models (e.g. hierarchical or K-means clustering)
The Project Developer shall provide a statistical approach and results for grouping plots that are sufficiently similar to one another into strata.
The steps include:
Define the variables for stratification within the project area (see minimum required variables above)
Statistically assess the variables to establish strata types and groupings. Summarize the cutoff values for criteria.
Provide a summary report listing each stratum, its value for each variables, and names, GPS coordinates and map outline of each parcel.
Assign at least one treatment and control plot to each stratum, ensuring representativeness and minimizing bias (see more details on below).
(Optional) Split the treatment plot into a high-density sampling and low-density sampling plot (see more details on below).
The final stratification approach shall be described in the PDD and include:
a GIS generated map showing the extent of the total project area and the location of different strata.
list of the different strata types identified, with the number of disparate strata plots and the total area covered by each strata.
The stratification setup may be revised and plots reassigned to different strata throughout the project's crediting period if:
new sites are added,
successive spreading events alter the representativeness of sites, or
as a result of general learning and improvements.
This may occur if, for example, initial measurements show that a given treatment plot is more similar to a control plot in a different stratum. Such revisions should be submitted to Rainbow for approval before implementing a MRV approach that differ from the originally validated Monitoring Plan and Sampling Plan. Any revised stratification approach shall meet the original requirements of site setup (e.g. adding plots to a stratum would increase it's total area, and may require additional control plot area).
Results from pilot sampling and validation-stage measurements (before any spreading occurs) shall be used to designate treatment and control plots within the project area.
Treatment plots are the areas where Project Developers have spread feedstock. Within each stratum, the treatment plot may be divided into high-density sampling (HD) and low-density sampling (LD) treatment plots.
Project Developers must collect enough samples in LD treatment plots to ensure results are sufficiently similar to those observed in HD treatment plots. Project Developers shall describe in the Sampling Plan in the PDD the statistical test/s they plan to use to assess similarity of results (e.g. t-tests, Mann-Whitney tests, ranges of standard deviations, overlapping confidence intervals...).
The minimum sampling density for LD treatment plots is 1 soil sample per 15 ha (0.0667 samples/ha) and 1 aqueous sample per 45 ha (0.022 samples/ha), or 3 samples per plot of aqueous and/or soil samples, whichever is larger (this ensures that even very small plots will have multiple samples and generate a distribution of results). Sampling density requirements for the HD treatment plot are described in the Sampling and measurements section.
Alternatively, Project Developers may opt to maintain only HD treatment plots.
Control plots are used to measure baseline weathering and CDR in the NFZ that would have occurred without the project intervention. This is subtracted from the treatment plot's CDR, to only issue credits for CDR that occurs beyond business as usual.
Control plots shall be selected to be representative of their corresponding treatment plot and avoid contamination of weathering material from treatment plots. Each control plot shall correspond to one treatment area, and statistical analyses are done on these control-treatment pairs (i.e. demonstrating eligibility for credit issuance by proving statistically significant increase in weathering in treatment plot compared to control plot). The characteristics that shall be measured in control plots are presented in Table 2.
For projects using Method 1: Direct measurement of export to calculate CDR in the NFZ, if the sampling point at the end of the NFZ is catchment or drainage waters, an assessment of the site hydrology shall ensure that catchment or drainage waters of the treatment and control plots remain separate. This is to avoid collecting water that mixes signals from both plots, as this would compromise the comparison.
Table 2 The characteristics to measure in control plots and the measurement frequency.
Baseline CDR from counterfactual weathering
Each reporting period
Using the same NFZ measurement method as the treatment area, and FFZ deductions (see section for more details)
Soil organic carbon changes
At least once after rock spreading during the crediting period
Measurement shall be taken during the same reporting period for the treatment area/project scenario
Crop yields
At least once after rock spreading during the crediting period
Measurement shall be taken during the same reporting period for the treatment area/project scenario
Control plots should include business as usual (BAU) practices, including but not limited to continued use of pH management/agricultural lime on agricultural fields at pre-deployment rates. Where this is not possible, negative control plots can be used instead. Negative control plots may include no pH management, but continue other BAU agronomic practices (e.g. cropping, tilling, fertilizer...).
If a negative control plot is used instead of a BAU control plot, it shall be conservatively assumed that all agricultural lime dissolves and generates CDR at 100% efficiency, with negligible carbon loss terms. See the Baseline scenario GHG quantification section for more details.
BAU plots shall maintain the following counterfactual practices where relevant:
Liming
Crop selection
Tilling
Fertilization
Irrigation
Project Developers shall justify the amount, frequency, type, and any other relevant information for each BAU practice. The hierarchy of evidence from most to least preferred is:
records of historical or recent management/agricultural practices, using a trend/projection of recent practices, unless the Project Developer can justify that the trend is not representative
records of historical or recent management/agricultural practices, using a different value within the range of recent practices, e.g. if recent trends are not representative
records of average local/regional practices
recommended practices by local agronomists or extension agents
Each treatment plot shall have a corresponding control plot that is representative of the treatment plot. The number and size of control plots shall be large enough to capture the baseline variability of the corresponding treatment plot, and to ensure statistically significant comparisons with the treatment plot.
At least one control-treatment pair is required per stratum. If control plots are large, it is recommended to split them into multiple smaller plots, rather than maintaining a single, sparsely-sampled large plot. Control plots do not need to be contiguous with one another, or with their corresponding treatment plots. Small projects with only one stratum may contain only one control plot.
Control plots shall represent at least 1% of the total area of a given stratum, with a larger percentage recommended for smaller strata, up to 5%. Based on these guidelines, the following decay function was interpolated (shown in Figure 1) and is recommended to help guide Project Developers in determining the appropriate control plot area as a function of stratum area (in hectares, ):
Project Developers shall describe in the PDD the number and relative area of control plots in each stratum, considering the size of the stratum, baseline variability, sampling density, and statistical power.
Control plots must be representative of the strata to which they belong. A control plot is considered sufficiently representative if the standardized mean difference (SMD) between treatment and control plots across the quantified soil and site characteristics listed in Table 1 is less than 10%.
Alternative justifications for representativeness may be accepted on a case-by-case basis, subject to review. This requirement is expected to be readily met following the stratification steps.
The use of HD and LD sampling treatment plots already allows Project Developers to scale the size of their deployments with non-linearly increasing sampling requirements. Project Developers may further scale their deployments with one of the following options.
Conditions: Project Developers are eligible for this option if they meet both of the following requirements for NFZ CDR measurements in the HD sampling plot, after 12 months of monitoring:
Low inter-plot variability, demonstrating that strata are sufficiently narrowly defined and that characteristics affecting CDR have been properly considered. This can be shown using tests including, but not limited to Relative Standard Deviation (RSD) / Coefficient of Variation (CV) ≤ 10%.
Similarity to the LD plot, demonstrating that the HD plot is representative of the LD plot. This can be shown using tests including, but not limited to t-tests or ANOVA.
Scaling protocol: Reduce sampling density in existing LD plots to a minimum of:
1 soil sample per 30 ha (0.033 samples/ha), or
1 aqueous sample per 90 ha (0.011 samples/ha),
or 3 samples per LD treatment plot (whichever is larger) for aqueous and/or soil samples.
Project Developers shall notify Rainbow of their intent to reduce sampling density in LD plots prior to implementation. Eligibility for this adjustment must be approved by a VVB. Project Developers should include this analysis in a Monitoring Report, along with their proposed adjustments to the Sampling Plan, for review and approval by the VVB as part of an ongoing verification audit.
Project Developers may use models coupled with empirical measurements to estimate net NFZ CDR on new fields, after validating the model's predictive capacity for a given strata type.
Conditions:
Models shall be initialized and/or calibrated using site-specific data for a given stratum.
Models shall be spatially and temporally validated using measurements from at least 12 months on the HD and LD treatment plots, i.e.:
Spatial Validation: A model must demonstrate its ability to accurately predict either total CDR across the entire treatment plot (i.e. a general process-based ERW model), or to predict LD plot measurements using HD plot results as input parameters or for calibration (i.e. a data-driven model). This validates the model’s spatial predictive capability, within the same time frame and weather conditions.
Temporal Validation: A model must demonstrate the ability to accurately extrapolate measurements over time, whether from one season to another or from one year to the next for the same season, based on the Project Developer’s objectives. For example, the model should reliably adjust Year 1 HD plot measurements to account for Year 2 weather and agronomic conditions, thereby predicting Year 2 HD results with precision. This validated the model’s temporal predictive capability.
The overall approach shall account for variations in feedstock. This can be achieved in one of two ways:
The model is designed to incorporate varying feedstock characteristics as input data, or
The model is initialized and validated for a specific feedstock, and Project Developers limit new spreading events to the use of the same feedstock (i.e., identical particle size distribution, mineralogy, and application rate).
Further model requirements are described .
Scaling protocol: Project Developers may spread feedstock on new fields of the same validated stratum, monitoring them according to the low sampling density presented in the Reducing sampling on existing treatment plots section. Addition of these extrapolated fields to the treatment area does not change the total stratum size, and the required control plot area. The originally established control plot may still be used to compare to the newly established LD treatment plot.
Monitoring results are to be used as a validation check, ensuring that measured CDR values fall within the range of modeled predictions. Any discrepancies must be justified and addressed in the monitoring report. CDR for the entire stratum shall be counted using measurements from the HD and LD treatment plots, and the new extrapolated plot.
The organic material used as the raw input for biochar production, such as wood, agricultural residues, or manure.
Gasification
high-temperature process that involves the partial oxidation of organic materials in the presence of a controlled amount of oxygen (or air) and a gasification agent
GVW
Gross Vehicle Weight is the total weight of a vehicle, including its own weight plus the weight of any cargo
Loading rate
Ratio of actual load to the full load or capacity (e.g. mass or volume) that a vehicle carries per trip.
Molar H/Corg ratio
The ratio of hydrogen to organic carbon atoms in biochar, used to assess the stability and quality of biochar; lower ratios indicate higher stability.
Permanence horizon
Sequestration horizon, commitment period
Production batch
Biochar produced under the same conditions regarding production temperature and feedstock mix. A production batch has a maximum validity of 365 days.
Production batch ID
A unique identifier for each production batch.
Pyrolysis
thermal decomposition process that occurs in the absence of oxygen
Random reflectance
A measure of the reflectivity of biochar under a microscope, indicating the degree of carbonization, inertinite characteristics and permanence of the biochar.
Segment
Part of the transportation process involving the movement of inputs or products between point A and point B within the project boundary.
Transport segment
One shipment of a fixed amount of material from a known location A to a known location B. It represents a one-way trip.
Transport Unit
A general term used to describe any vehicle, vessel, or mode of transportation used to move goods or passengers from one location to another. In this module version, this includes trucks and ships.
Transport type/ mode of transport
Type of transport. E.g. by land (truck, rail, pipe), by water (boat, ferry), by air (airplane). This module's first version focuses on road and sea transport type.
Verification period
The time period of project activities that a given verification audit and carbon credit issuance covers. For biochar application to soils, this may be one calendar year, or the duration of validity of one production batch.
Bioenergy
Renewable energy derived from organic materials, such as plant and animal waste, agricultural crops, and forestry residues, that are converted into heat, electricity, or fuels through processes like combustion, gasification, or fermentation
BECCS
BECCS (Bioenergy with Carbon Capture and Storage) is a carbon mitigation technology that combines the use of bioenergy (from biomass) with carbon capture and storage (CCS) to remove and store carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions from the atmosphere
Biochar
material that is rich in stable carbon, produced through the thermal conversion of biomass in a low-oxygen environment
Delivery Risk
The potential risk that a project will not be able to deliver the anticipated results, such as the projected amount of biochar or carbon sequestration benefits.
End use application
The way biochar will be used, such as direct application to soil, mixing with compost and application of the mix to soil, mixing with cement for use in concrete.
End use point
The step in the production chain where biochar leaves the direct control of biochar producers, where it is assumed to be incorporated into its final end use application.
Embodied Transport Emissions
GHG emissions associated with the production, maintenance, and operation of transportation infrastructure and vehicles across all modes of transport (e.g., road, sea).
Feedstock
Determines soil compaction, influencing water infiltration and the interaction of crushed rock particles with soil and water.
Mineralogy
Identifies existing weatherable mineral concentrations in the soil, determining baseline weathering
Heavy metal content
Characterize the starting conditions of the soil, assess the risk of exceeding safe pollutant thresholds
Cation exchange capacity (CEC)
Measures the soil's ability to hold and exchange cations, affecting the retention of weathering products like Ca and Mg
Total alkalinity
Indicates the baseline ability of soil and porewater to neutralize acids and CO sequestration capacity
Porewater DIC concentration
Represents the baseline dissolved inorganic carbon in the NFZ, used for tracking CO₂ capture and movement through the NFZ
Soil organic carbon concentration
Influences microbial activity and CO₂ production or storage, and is an important supplementary indicator to measure (for or )
Soil inorganic carbon concentration*
Baseline measurement of pre-existing carbonates, important for assessing the net carbon removal potential of ERW
Surface water organic carbon
Sites must not have expected substantial organic carbon destabilization in downstream surface waters, e.g. from being upstream of peatlands
Frequency and amount of agronomic pH control and fertilizer use in previous 3 years, and expected use during the crediting period
Tilling practices
Frequency and depth of tilling practices in previous 3 years, and expected use during the crediting period
Irrigation practices
Frequency and amount of irrigation in previous 3 years, and expected use during the crediting period
Local climate
Temperature, rainfall, humidity, annual and monthly average
Soil horizons
Depth and types of different soil horizons, especially changes related to vertical infiltration of water (e.g. hardpans, plow pans, caliche layers...)
Soil type according to World Reference Base for Soil Resources (WRB)
Indicates many other soil characteristics and the particle size distribution and which affects water retention and mineral dissolution rates
Soil and porewater pH and buffer pH
Determines the acidity of the environment, as lower pH enhances mineral dissolution and CO₂ capture potential.
Base saturation
Reflects the proportion of exchangeable base cations (e.g., Ca²⁺, Mg²⁺) available, which influences soil's ability to neutralize acidity and facilitate weathering.
Hydrologic flow paths
Expected water flow paths, expected near-term carbon fate (groundwater, watershed, rivers, ocean entry point, aquifer), potential horizontal movement
Final carbon storage reservoir
Carbonate minerals, DIC in groundwater, DIC in oceans
Groundwater system durability
If "Final carbon storage reservoir" is DIC in groundwater, the fluids passing through the groundwater enter a flow path with high durability
CDR in vadose zone
What processes could cause CDR increases or losses below the depth of the NFZ (e.g. secondary precipitates)
Water table depth
Average and variability across deployment area
High-density (HD) sampling plots
small, intensively sampled fields
used to generate the main NFZ measurement dataset
provides detailed, high-quality measurements and robust datasets
spatial extent must match the size of their corresponding control plot, depending on the total stratum size (as detailed below).
Low-density (LD) sampling plots
larger areas with reduced sampling frequency
used to scale ERW deployments
measurements from LD plots
provide a validation check, ensuring results are within the same range of the corresponding HD plot, and
are added to the HD plot's NFZ result dataset to estimate total treatment plot CDR


Bulk density
All projects must meet the 12 general eligibility criteria described below. Detailed instructions and examples are presented in Methodologies.
1
Measurability
The GHG emission reductions are quantitatively, rigorously, and conservatively measured.
2
Real
The GHG emissions reductions have actually occurred, according to the monitoring plan. RCCs are ex-post.
3
Additionality
Project Developers shall follow the approach outlined in the section, based on ISO 14064-2:2019, to measure GHG emissions reduction, avoidance and/or removal.
GHG emission reduction measurements shall aim for completeness, accuracy, transparency, and conservativeness.
Project Developers shall specify the Rainbow they follow to measure GHG emission reductions.
If no Rainbow methodology exists for a given project, documented scientific research can be proposed to establish a measurement method. This method shall be evaluated and validated by the Rainbow Climate team and the VVB.
🖇️ Supporting documents:
GHG emission reduction measurements that meet the requirements and follow a Rainbow-approved sector-specific methodology (if available)
All sites where the project operates shall be registered during the certification process. This includes all factories, facilities, or operations under direct control of the Project Developer, whose activities are involved in RCCs verification and issuance. Sites registration procedures are detailed in the .
Upstream and downstream actors in the supply chain are not counted as project sites.
shall include the site’s:
purpose
relationship to the project
📎 Supporting documents:
Site registration certificate
Site audit certificate and report
The Project Developer shall submit a Monitoring Plan during the validation step that defines the list of Key Impact Indicators (KII).
For each KII in the Monitoring Plan, the Project Developer shall specify the update frequency and auditable source.
KIIs shall meet the minimum requirements for Monitoring Plans detailed in the Methodology, if applicable, and meet KII requirements described in the .
For each verification and issuance of RCCs, the Project Developer shall upload each KII with proof to the Impact Certification Platform.
📎 Supporting documents:
During validation: Monitoring Plan defining the Key Impact Indicators (KIIs) with examples of proof, source of the proof and update frequency.
During verification: values of KIIs with proof, uploaded to the Rainbow certification platform.
Regulatory surplus analysis: Mitigation activities must go beyond what is required by regulations.
Projects shall prove that:
there is no law, regulation, statute, legal ruling or other regulatory framework that makes the implementation of the project compulsory, and
if there is a regulation, their mitigation activities allow for more GHG emission reductions than what is required by regulations. In this case, only the project activities that surpass the mandated amount are eligible for RCCs.
Projects eligible for removal RCCs are subject to the Permanence and risk of reversal criteria. Permanence and reversal risks are not evaluated for avoidance RCCs, because they are considered to have little to no material reversal risks.
By default, at least 3% of all verified removal RCCs shall be transferred to the buffer pool upon issuance.
Project Developers shall complete the Risk Assessment Template tailored to their specific project type, which is provided in the methodology documentation. This template guides Project Developers in evaluating the likelihood and severity of each risk type.
For each reversal risk type with a high or very high risk score, Project Developers shall develop a risk mitigation plan, or incur an additional 3% contribution of verified removal RCCs to the buffer pool.
The consequences of a carbon removal reversal are outlined in the Cancelation section of the .
If no methodology exists, the Project Developer shall suggest risks to consider in the PDD, which must be approved by the Rainbow Certification team and the VVB. Documentation and proof must be provided to justify that the identification of risks was performed with a similar level of rigor, scientific accuracy, and conservativeness that is required for methodology development.
📎Supporting documents:
Project Developer’s responses to the Risk Assessment Template evaluating reversal risks.
[conditional] If a risk has a high or very high risk of reversal, a risk mitigation plan, or signed agreement to contribute an extra 3% of verified removal RCCs to the buffer pool.
Rainbow’s provides full explanations and requirements regarding this eligibility criteria. Key points are summarized here.
Double use shall be prevented by the Rainbow Registry, where each project is automatically assigned a unique identifier, with project ID, location, and Project Developer name and contact information. An immutable certificate is generated upon retirement.
Project Developers shall not use another program to issue carbon credits for the given mitigation activity, for the same year. Project Developers shall disclose any issuance of carbon credits for the same project prior to the crediting period, or with a different project scope.
Project Developers shall ensure that specified upstream and downstream actors in the supply chain have not and will not issue carbon credits for their role in the mitigation activity. Specific requirements on this topic may be made in methodologies.
Double issuance is prevented by the signing of the , where all Project Developers agree to follow the requirements outlined in the present document.
Double claiming with NDCs shall be prevented by signed agreements with host countries and confirmation of corresponding adjustments. Such agreements will be made publicly available with the project documentation, and updated as needed.
Double claiming with national climate policies and emissions trading schemes shall be prevented by proof that the mitigation activity is outside the scope of such policies and schemes. If this is not the case, Project Developers must obtain proof of an accounting adjustment or cancellation in the emissions trading scheme.
Double claiming with other GHG-related environmental credit frameworks is not allowed. This is prevented by the signing of the , where all Project Developers agree to follow the requirements outlined in the present document.
For purposes of voluntary climate pledges and reporting (e.g. GHG protocol), Project Developers must inform upstream and downstream supply chain entities of claimed project/intervention/insetting emission reductions, report them to Rainbow, document any transfer of emission reduction units, and seek guidance in cases of conflicting claims from reporting bodies like the GHG Protocol.
📎 Supporting documents:
Signed agreeing to follow the requirements outlined in the present document, including those related to double counting.
Proof that carbon credits will not be issued by specified actors within the same value chain for the same mitigation activity (specific proof requirements depending on the methodology).
Projects shall support between two and four quantifiable and verifiable environmental or social co-benefits. These must be in addition to their climate benefits that are already accounted for in the issuance of RCCs.
Co-benefits must be positive environmental or social impacts that are substantial, and would not have occurred without the intervention of the project.
Project Developers shall use the SDGs outlined in the as the basis for identifying co-benefits, which are deemed most relevant to Rainbow’s program focus.
Other relevant UN SDG sub-objectives or sustainability indicators may be suggested by Project Developers, and accepted at the discretion of the Rainbow Certification team and the VVB.
Co-benefits shall be quantified and proven using the project’s GHG quantification results, primary data collection from the project, an LCA of the project or similar technology, or other reputable scientific documents. The tool, method, approach, and/or equations used for assessing co-benefits shall be described in methodology documents and/or DPDs.
📎 Supporting documents:
Identification of two to four UN SGDs that the project contributes to substantially as co-benefits, with:
quantified indicators for each co-benefit
Projects shall prove that their project outputs have similar performance metrics to the baseline scenario and deliver equivalent functions.
Project Developers shall identify and quantify performance metrics to compare between the baseline and the project scenario. Specific metrics to consider are detailed in methodologies.
The GHG quantification method shall use an appropriate functional unit that reflects the equivalent functions delivered by the project and baseline scenarios (see more details in the ).
📎 Supporting documents:
Proof that the project output has sufficiently similar technical and performance specifications to substitute for the baseline scenario.
Project Developers shall conduct a stakeholder consultation, gathering feedback on the environmental and social impacts of their project, among other feedback. The stakeholder consultation shall take place during the project's validation process, addressed to local stakeholders and communities. The feedback is reviewed by the Rainbow Certification Team during the final project validation review, and they may require the Project Developer to take corrective action to address the concerns. The feedback shall be made publicly available in an appendix of the PDD. More details are included in the .
If the project already has a legal permit (for example, construction permit, operation approval from authorities) that required similar stakeholder consultation or environmental and social impact assessments, Project Developers shall provide any documents related to those processes, and may be deemed exempt from the Rainbow stakeholder consultation by the VVB and the Rainbow Certification Team.
Project Developers shall fill in the methodology’s Template for their project type, evaluating the likelihood and severity of each environmental and social risk.
Certain methodologies may define strict rules and cutoffs that may disqualify projects based on their environmental and social risk assessment results.
If no methodology exists for the given project type, the requirement outlined at the end of the shall apply.
The Rainbow Certification Team or VVB may require annual monitoring of an environmental or social risk if they determine that the risk could lead to the project causing net harm.
Risk assessments shall assess at least the following risks, which should be avoided and minimized:
📎 Supporting documents:
Results of the stakeholder consultation
[conditional] Legal permits, or results of previous stakeholder consultations or environmental and social impact studies
Project Developers shall follow the relevant methodology requirements for identifying, assessing and mitigating leakage. Potential risks and detailed instructions are identified at the methodology level.
Methodologies provide instructions on how to assess leakage and manage and, if necessary, deduct leakage emissions. Any project-specific leakage risk may incur additional leakage emission deduction, up to the discretion of the Project Developer, the VVB and the Rainbow Certification Team.
If no methodology exists for the given project type, the requirement outlined at the end of the shall apply.
📎 Supporting documents:
Project Developer’s responses to the leakage risks identified in the methodology.
Projects shall at minimum reach TRL 6, which is described in the table above.
📎 Supporting documents:
Proof of technological progress and/or production capacities either in an operational environment or lab.
Projects’ reduction efficiency shall be higher than the targeted emission reduction targets for the project’s sector, presented in the table below:
📎 Supporting documents:
GHG quantification results showing that the project’s GHG reduction efficiency is aligned with the sector target emission reductions.
Projects shall justify a minimum emission reduction of 1000 tCOeq over the crediting period of the project.
To renew certification at the end of the crediting period, projects may re-conduct a complete validation process using the current Rainbow Standard Rules and methodology requirements.
For renewed projects, the crediting period shall be the total length of the combined crediting periods.
📎 Supporting documents:
GHG quantification results showing that the project’s GHG emission reductions over the crediting period are projected to be at least 1000 tCOeq.
reference person
contact information
host country
Projects shall undergo an in-person or remote site audit within two years of the project’s crediting period start date and/or before the second verification audit. The purpose of this site audit is to confirm that:
The project exists and is functional
The scale of the project is in line with the description
Key processes operate as described in the project PDD
Projects that are in the planning phase and seeking carbon finance to fund investments shall prove that the project will actually occur, and will begin operations within 2 years of certification. Proof may include contracts with suppliers of key inputs or receipts from purchase of key machinery.
After beginning operations, the Project Developer shall comply with the requirement listed above.
Project developers must define the scope of the project, i.e. the mitigation activities that are under consideration for RCC issuance. The scope specifies the geographic, temporal (i.e. project start date), site, and operation limits of the project.
For example, a company operating in multiple countries, that has existed for many years, with several operating sites, and multiple activities must define the scope of their operations that is defined as the project. A company’s annual operations are not a sufficient definition of a project.
Only activities that are additional shall be considered in the project scope.
The project must have started operating within the last three years.
The crediting period shall start when the mitigation activities begin, provided the project is already registered with Rainbow at that time. The crediting period shall be no longer than five years.
If the project is already underway, the crediting period may start up to 18 months prior to its registration date with Rainbow.
The project scope should not be confused with the , which is used for GHG reduction quantification. The system boundary defines the project scope plus upstream and downstream activities that count towards the project’s GHG emissions and removals.
[conditional] If the project is under development, proof that it will actually occur
Description of the regulatory environment concerning the project’s mitigation activity.
Description of current and confirmed upcoming regulations or incentives that promote the project’s solution.
Investment analysis: Project Developers may use investment analysis to prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary to make the project investment a financially viable and interesting option.
Projects shall prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary for investments to launch or expand the project.
Note that for investments in expansion, only the additional carbon reductions enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Rainbow Carbon Credits.
📎 Supporting documents:
Investment analysis, business plan, or completed of the UNFCCC Clean Development Mechanism “Investment Analysis”, with accompanying spreadsheet and calculations, showing that funding from carbon finance is necessary for the project investment.
Annual updates of predicted financial indicators.
Barrier analysis: Barriers may exist that prevent the mitigation activity from continuing or expanding. These may be financial, institutional, or technological barriers. Project Developers must demonstrate how revenue from carbon finance is necessary to allow projects to overcome these barriers.
Examples of barriers include but are not limited to:
Financial: high upfront costs, uncertain or low returns on investment, long payback periods
Institutional: complex or costly regulatory requirements, limited access to financing, lack of supportive infrastructure, limited market demand, resistance from incumbents
Technological: cost competitiveness and economic viability, scale and manufacturing challenges
Project Developers shall identify, describe and where possible, quantify the barrier, with verifiable proof.
Project Developers shall demonstrate that revenue from carbon finance is decisive in overcoming this barrier, including justification that:
the magnitude of revenue from carbon finance is similar to the amount of funding needed to overcome the barrier, and
the project could not have provided the funding itself.
Project Developers shall demonstrate that at least one alternative to the project activity does not face significant barriers, including the barriers faced by the project.
Note that for overcoming barriers to expansion, only the additional carbon reductions enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Rainbow Carbon Credits.
📎 Supporting documents:
Description and, where possible, quantification of the barrier. Demonstration that revenue from carbon finance is decisive in overcoming this barrier.
Risk assessment: projects eligible for removal RCCs must evaluate the risk of reversal during the validation step using the Reversal Risk Evaluation section of Risk Assessment Templates. Details on how to fill in the template, and how to use the results, are in the Risk assessment section below.
Each risk with a high or very risk score is subject to:
risk mitigation plan, developed by the Project Developer, that details the long-term strategies and investments for preventing, monitoring, reporting and compensating carbon removal reversal and/or environmental and social damages, or
for reversal risks, additional contributions to the buffer pool, at a rate of 3% of verified removal RCCs for each high or very high risk.
This is additive, so if a project has multiple risks with high or very high risk scores, they may have multiple risk mitigation plans, and/or multiple 3% buffer pool contributions.
reporting, to efficiently communicate the realization of a risk to Rainbow,
and compensation, to agree on outcomes and responsibilities of the Project Developer in case the risk is realized.
Prevention and monitoring may be ensured through technological solutions, long-term investments, strategizing, contingency planning, practicing/simulating risk, and increase in personnel.
For reversal risks, mitigation plans aim to manage the identified risks of carbon reversal, to ensure that carbon is removed from the atmosphere for at least the commitment period duration, which is at least 100 years. A reversal risk mitigation plan shall cover at least 40 years. In case reversal risks are realized, and more than 1 tonne of CO2eq is estimated to have been re-emitted, compensation measures shall follow the procedures outlined in the Cancelation section of the Rainbow Procedures Manual.
For environmental and social risks, mitigation plans aim to manage the risks of the identified environmental and social damages. Compensation may be determined during the validation phase for each project, and agreed upon by the Project Developer, Rainbow Climate Team and the VVB.
nationally determined contributions (NDCs),
national climate policies and emissions trading schemes, or
other GHG-related environmental credits.
For double claiming between entities retiring carbon credits, and the end-users of products that have been issued carbon credits, guidance from reporting schemes, GHG Protocol, and other accounting mechanisms shall be followed.
[conditional] Any other requirements specified in the methodology document.
[conditional] Letters of authorization from host country and proof of corresponding adjustments.
source/proof for each co-benefit
Examples of environmental and social risks include, and are not limited to, deforestation, use of dedicated crops, land use change, rebound effect, or use of harmful chemicals. The actual risks to consider are presented in each methodology’s Risk Assessment Template, and include any harm that could reasonably occur in a worst case scenario outcome of a reasonably operated project.
Health & Safety of workers is particularly important for Rainbow projects, given the standard’s focus on industrial projects. Industrial environments may pose unique challenges and risks to workers, who’s well-being and protection must be prioritized. Specific risks, such as exposure to harmful chemicals, are treated in methodologies where relevant. However, risks to workers are generally considered low for Rainbow projects, since they are operated in Europe, which is recognized for having strong protections for workers.
Projects must adhere to local, state, national, and international regulations. It is assumed that projects operating in Europe meet regulations due to the strict implementation and enforcement of regulations.
provide for equal opportunities in the context of gender
protect against and appropriately responds to violence against women and girls
provide equal pay for equal work
Project Developer’s responses to the Risk Assessment Template evaluating environmental and social risks
7
System model or prototype demonstration in operational environment
8
System complete and qualified
9
Actual system proven in operational environment
The mitigation activity would not have occurred without the revenues from carbon finance.
4
Permanence and risk of reversal
Carbon will be removed for at least 100 years (applicable for removal RCCs only).
5
No double counting
Mitigation activities are only counted once, and are not double used, issued or claimed.
6
Co-benefits
Projects must deliver additional positive impact towards environmental and social sustainability.
7
Substitution
The products/services generated as project outputs must appropriately, realistically, and efficiently substitute those of the baseline scenario, rather than create new demand.
8
Environmental & social do no harm
Projects must not contribute to environmental or social damage.
9
Leakage
The project’s avoided GHG emissions must not be indirectly transferred elsewhere via activity shifting.
10
TRL
The technology readiness level must be 6 or higher.
11
Targets alignment
Project’s emission reductions must be aligned with the European Union’s emission reduction targets for their sector.
12
Minimum impact
Projects must qualify for a minimum amount of RCCs.
Labor rights and working conditions
provide safe and healthy working conditions for employees
provide fair treatment of all employees, avoiding discrimination and ensuring equal opportunities
prohibit the use of forced labor, child labor, or trafficked persons, and protects contracted workers employed by third parties.
Resource efficiency and pollution prevention
minimize pollutant emissions to air
minimize pollutant discharges to water, noise and vibration
minimize generation of waste and release of hazardous materials, chemical pesticides and fertilizers
Land acquisition and involuntary resettlement
minimize forced physical and/or economic displacement
Biodiversity conservation and sustainable management of living natural resources
avoid and/or minimizes negative impacts on terrestrial and marine biodiversity and ecosystems
protect the habitats of rare, threatened, and endangered species, including areas needed for habitat connectivity
do not convert natural forests, grasslands, wetlands, or high conservation value habitats
minimize soil degradation and soil erosion
minimize water consumption and stress in the project
Indigenous Peoples (IPs), Local Communities (LCs), and cultural heritage
recognize, respect and promote the protection of the rights of IPs & LCs in line with applicable international human rights law, and the UN Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples and ILO Convention 169 on Indigenous and Tribal Peoples
identify the rights-holders possibly affected by the mitigation activity (including customary rights of local rights holders);
when relevant, apply the FPIC process
do not force eviction or any physical or economic displacement of IPs & LCs, including through access restrictions to lands, territories, or resources, unless agreed upon with IPs & LCs during the FPIC process
preserve and protect cultural heritage consistent with IPs & LCs protocols/rules/plans on the management of cultural heritage or UNESCO Cultural Heritage conventions
Respect for human rights, stakeholder engagement
avoid discrimination and respect human rights
abide by the International Bill of Human Rights and universal instruments ratified by the host country
take into account and responds to local stakeholders’ views
1
Basic principles observed
2
Technology concept formulated
3
Experimental proof of concept
4
Technology validated in lab
5
Technology validated in relevant environment
6
Technology demonstrated in relevant environment
Transport & mobility
17%
Construction & housing
73%
Agriculture
58%
Industry & waste
47%
Energy
45%
Gender equality
General GHG quantification rules can be found in the .
Calculations of GHG emissions for the baseline and project scenarios shall follow a robust, recognized method and good practice guidance. The overall methodological approach is a comparative life cycle assessment (LCA) at the project-scale, based on ISO 14064-2:2019.
The functional unit shall be 1 tonne of crushed rock/mineral applied to the soil
Net CDR shall be calculated for each reporting period as the following, where signifies the project scenario/treatment plots, and signifies the baseline scenario/control plots:
Where,
represents the net carbon removals caused by project in the reporting period, in , and equals the amount of removal RCCs to issue.
represents the net CDR from the Project Scenario, in , calculated in Equation 2.
represents the net CDR from the Baseline scenario, in , calculated in Equation 10.
represents the induced emissions caused by the project, in , is calculated in Equation 3.
The net CDR from the project scenario is determined by measuring the CDR gains in the Near Field Zone (NFZ) (), and subtracting the CDR losses in the Far Field Zone (FFZ) () and the GHG emissions from upstream and onsite activities (), using the following equations:
Where,
was described in Equation 1.
represents the net gain in carbon removal measured in the project/treatment area's NFZ in , detailed in sections Method 1: Direct measurement of export and Method 2: Mass balance. Project Developers shall choose one of the the two methods shall be used to quantify the amount of CDR occurring in the NFZ. It is calculated in Equation 4.
represents the loss/reversal of carbon removal in the project FFZ in , detailed in the section Project FFZ loss.
Where,
represents the induced emissions caused by the project, in .
represents the induced emissions caused by extraction of feedstock in the Project Scenario, in , detailed in the Project induced emissions section, and calculated in Equation 7.
represents the induced emissions caused by processing of feedstock in the Project Scenario, in , detailed in the Project induced emissions section, and calculated in Equation 8.
represents the induced emissions caused by transport of feedstock in the Project Scenario, in , detailed in the section, and calculated in Equation 9.
The system boundary of the project scenario is shown in Figure 1.
NFZ removal is calculated by measuring the export of carbonate alkalinity exceeding a counterfactual baseline, integrated across the duration of the reporting period.
Specifically, this is calculated by combining alkalinity concentrations—derived from a time series of in-situ measurements of porewater or drainage water—with water flux measurements at the NFZ boundary of the project/treatment plot, and comparing them to corresponding measurements from a representative baseline/control plot.
This is achieved through aqueous-phase measurements in each reporting period
Sampling requirements for aqueous phase samples are described in the Number of aqueous samples per strata section.
Both project and baseline (i.e. treatment and control plot) NFZ removal () shall be calculated according to the following equations.
In this method, the potential maximum CDR from alkalinity release from the feedstock is measured in each reporting period, along with adjustments to net CDR based on changes in soil inorganic carbon stocks (Figure 2). These adjustments account for:
Cation uptake in biomass
Cation retention on sorption sites
Secondary carbonate formation, and
Alkalinity that is not charge balanced by bicarbonate.
NFZ removal is calculated using Equation 5, following these steps in each reporting period:
After accounting for each carbon loss term, the remaining alkalinity from feedstock dissolution reflects the additional alkalinity that remains in solution and is transported beyond the NFZ into the FFZ, where further CDR loss terms are applied (see Project FFZ loss section).
This method is based mostly on solid soil measurements, but may also include some porewater measurements (see the Feedstock dissolution and Inefficient conversion of alkalinity to CDR sections).
FFZ losses shall be considered in surface water and surface oceans (see Equation 6). The project site's specific hydrology, with expected flow paths and residence times, shall be taken into account, according to the Site Characterization Report.
FFZ losses are expected to occur over thousands of years; however, for the purposes of RCC issuance, they must be estimated upfront based on the total potential CDR and proportionally allocated across reporting periods according to the amount of CDR reported and credited.
If Project Developers can prove that weathering products will not pass through surface water, and will instead travel straight to groundwater and then the ocean, then the surface water CDR loss may be omitted.
As detailed in the Site characterization section, Project Developers shall describe the expected final CDR reservoir, indicating whether carbon is ultimately stored as bicarbonate ions in the ocean or as carbonate minerals within the watershed. If carbonate minerals are a significant reservoir, developers must assess the risk of strong acid weathering of this carbonate; if the risk is high, it must be accounted for as a deduction in the project's CDR through the Reversal Risk assessment.
The project system boundary shall include the following processes:
Mining and extracting feedstock. This shall be omitted if it is proven that the feedstock is waste from other mining activities. Feedstock shall be considered waste if it has no economic value and would not have been used otherwise. Emissions from the following activities shall be included:
Electricity production
Fuel production and combustion
Water provisioning
Material production and waste treatment
Equipment production and waste treatment
Feedstock crushing and storing, including emissions from:
Electricity production
Fuel production and combustion
Water provisioning
Material production and waste treatment
Transporting feedstock:
from the mine to the project processing site and
from the processing site to the spreading areas.
Emissions from the following activities shall be included:
Energy production and use
Any process that is shown during a screening LCA to have contribute than 1% of the total induced emissions and removals may be excluded, up until the cumulative excluded processes exceed 3% of total induced emissions and removals.
Project emissions shall be allocated across the reporting periods. This allocation shall be done in a way that ensures that all upstream emissions are accounted for within the first 50% of potential CDR (as modeled from Potential CDR over the project lifetime calculations, described in the Feedstock characterization section). The distribution may be done proportionally to the amount of CDR completed/credits issued in each reporting period, or may be done more upfront to incur the induced emissions early on to reduce uncertainty later.
The baseline scenario shall represent the conditions or practices that would occur in the absence of the project. Only removals are considered in the baseline scenario, not induced emissions, to ensure that the project is only credited for removals it causes beyond business-as-usual removals that would have happened anyway. This includes changes in CDR due to:
use of pH adjusting products on agricultural fields where feedstock is spread (e.g. agricultural lime)
cropping and tillage on agricultural fields where feedstock is spread
fertilizer use on agricultural fields where feedstock is spread
irrigation on agricultural fields where feedstock is spread
weathering in waste feedstock piles
This is calculated using:
Where,
represents the net gain in carbon removal measured in the baseline/control area's NFZ in , measured using the same approach as in the Project Scenario, detailed in section Baseline NFZ.
represents the net gain in carbon removal measured in the business as usual management of the rock feedstock used in the project (if it is waste rock), in , detailed in section Baseline Feedstock CDR.
represents the loss/reversal of carbon removal in the baseline FFZ in , detailed in the section Baseline FFZ loss.
By default, the overall structure of the baseline scenario for a given project is valid for the entire crediting period. This may change if the Project Developer informs Rainbow of a material change in their operations or in baseline conditions, and/or if the methodology undergoes revisions that change the baseline scenario. Note that the actual values in the baseline scenario are updated in each reporting period.
Spreading of pH adjusting products (e.g. agricultural lime) to agricultural fields can result in either CDR gains, losses, or neutral effects, or several different effects at different times in the process (e.g. short-term losses but long-term gains). ERW projects shall only be issued removal credits for the removals they cause beyond any baseline CDR gains.
To account for this, control plots are managed and monitored to measure CDR gains () that would have occurred in absence of the project, to deduct from the project CDR. Quantification of baseline CDR in the NFZ on fields shall be done by:
NFZ in a BAU control plot: applying NFZ method 1 or NFZ method 2 to the baseline/control plots to measure and calculate . The same Method must be chosen for both the control and treatment plots. and
NFZ in a negative control plot: assume that all agricultural lime that would have been used generates CDR at 100% efficiency with nearly no CDR loss
See the Control plot section for more details on how to set up, justify, and monitor control plots.
Baseline NFZ results shall only be included in the project net CDR quantification if they result in CDR gain (i.e. if the value is negative). If the use of agricultural lime in the baseline scenario is determined to be a net source of emissions, it's value shall be considered 0 tCO2eq, to ensure avoided emissions from liming are not counted towards project CDR.
If negative control plots are used, it shall be conservatively assumed that all agricultural lime that would have hypothetically been used (e.g. using regional statistics or historical records) dissolves and generates CDR at 100% efficiency, with negligible carbon loss terms.
Only loss from non-carbonic weathering adjustments may be considered, using the same assumptions and calculations as in the project scenario/treatment plots.
This baseline CDR should be subtracted from the project CDR in the reporting period when the agricultural lime spreading would have occurred.
Loss of CDR from processes in the FFZ () shall be calculated by applying the same models, calculations and assumptions from the Project FFZ loss section to the control plots.
The baseline scenario shall also consider CDR from the alternative fate of feedstock (), if the project uses waste feedstock e.g. from mining, that would have otherwise been stored and exposed to the atmosphere and driven CDR.
Project Developers shall
Describe the alternative fate of feedstock.
If waste, characterize the feedstock's inorganic carbon content, mineral and waste handling practices, and expected storage conditions.
Explain assumptions around if/how this storage leads to baseline CDR.
Justify any expectations of zero ambient weathering from the mineral feedstock.
If baseline weathering is not assumed to be zero, Project Developers shall model CDR from baseline weathering for the surface layer of feedstock, considering the same factors described in the Feedstock Characterization section, plus the environmental conditions where feedstock is stored (e.g. rainfall, temperature...). If it is estimated based on a preliminary LCA and modeling results to be <1% of emissions, it may be omitted, per the Rainbow Standard Rules.
The required primary data are presented in Tables 1-4. These data may be estimated for ex-ante validation, and should updated with real production values and proof for ex-post verification depending on the data type, and shall be made publicly available. Additional data sources for processes not explicitly listed should be added if they are within the 1% cutoff threshold mentioned above.
Table 1 Summary of primary data related to project emissions needed from projects and their source for initial project certification and validation. Several data points need to be updated annually during verification if the upon a successive spreading events (see Monitoring Plan section).
Detailed process diagram with included/excluded processes
Flow chart
Internal process documents
Waste status of feedstock
Text description
Contract with feedstock provider, receipts, invoices
Estimation of counterfactual feedstock CDR
kgCO2eq
Contract with feedstock provider, contextual description, modeling results, scientific literature
Energy amount and type for feedstock extraction
kWh, MJ, liters
Operating records, machinery/equipment tracking, invoices, bills, receipts
The ecoinvent database version 3.11 (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in Appendix.
If the available emission factors do not accurately represent the project, a different emission factor may be submitted by the Project Developer, and approved by the Rainbow Certification team and the VVB. Any emission factor must meet the data requirements outlined in the Rainbow Standard Rules, and come from traceable, transparent, unbiased, and reputable sources.
The following tables summarize the required primary data for calculating net carbon removal gains and losses in the NFZ and FFZ. The specific measurement approaches used may differ by project and must be clearly described in the PDD, and are detailed in the Sampling and measurements section.
It is recommended that the values selected for CDR quantification represent either:
the lower bound of a two-sided 80% confidence interval (for frequentist approach), or
the 10th percentile of a posterior distribution (for Bayesian models).
If these are not used, higher uncertainty is assumed and a larger discount factor should be applied.
Table 2 Primary data needed to calculate net carbon removals for all projects, regardless of the NFZ measurement method chosen.
FFZ loss surface waters: permanent alkalinity sinks
%, fraction, or kgCO2eq
Modeled results, accounting for site-specific hydrology
FFZ loss surface waters: CO evasion in surface waters
%, fraction, or kgCO2eq
Modeled results, accounting for site-specific hydrology
FFZ loss ocean: permanent alkalinity sinks
%, fraction, or kgCO2eq
Modeled results, accounting for site-specific hydrology
FFZ loss ocean: CO evasion in surface waters
%, fraction, or kgCO2eq
Modeled results, accounting for site-specific hydrology
Table 3 Primary data needed to calculate net carbon removals for projects using NFZ Method 1: Direct measurement of export.
Alkalinity export from the NFZ, time integrated over the reporting period, converted to kgCO2eq
kgCO2eq
Primary measurements of carbonate system parameters and/or major ion concentrations, with data analysis and processing
Table 4 Primary data needed to calculate net carbon removals for projects using NFZ Method 2: Mass balance.
CDR gains from feedstock dissolution and export of base cations from NFZ, converted to kgCO2eq
kgCO2eq
Primary measurements of base cations with or without immobile tracer, with data analysis and processing
CDR loss from biomass uptake of base cations, converted to kgCO2eq
kgCO2eq
Primary measurements of biomass removed and base cation concentration, with data analysis and processing
CDR loss from pH-dependent speciation, converted to kgCO2eq
kgCO2eq
Primary measurements of at least two carbonate system parameters in the aqueous phase, coupled with models, or
Conservative correction/ loss term based on strong acids in the NFZ
CDR loss from non-carbonic acid weathering, converted to kgCO2eq
kgCO2eq
Primary measurements of major anion flux in aqueous phase, with data analysis and processing, or
conservative estimate with fertilizer amounts, or
conservative proxy correction factor
When calculating (the increase in CDR as the potential theoretical maximum CDR associated with the measured release and loss of base cations), it is assumed that all base cations released through feedstock dissolution are fully charge-balanced by bicarbonate (HCO₃⁻). This is later adjusted in the Inefficient conversion of alkalinity to CDR term.
Organic acids are assumed to degrade after reacting with silicate minerals, producing dissolved inorganic carbon (DIC) equivalent to that from carbonic acid weathering.
It is assumed that no net CDR gains occur in the FFZ; only potential losses are considered, a conservative approach that may underestimate CDR in acidic soils where feedstock dissolution is high.
Secondary silicate and carbonate precipitation are already accounted for through integrated weathering DIC export measurements in and full-depth solid-phase soil assessments of feedstock dissolution in .
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the Rainbow Standard Rules. The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of avoided emissions to eliminate with the discount factor.
The following assumptions have low uncertainty:
Organic acids are assumed to degrade after reacting with silicate minerals, producing dissolved inorganic carbon (DIC) equivalent to that from carbonic acid weathering.
The following assumptions have high uncertainty:
It is assumed that no net CDR gains occur in the FFZ. This is a very conservative assumption that leads to under-crediting.
Calculating assumes that all base cations released through feedstock dissolution are fully charge-balanced by bicarbonate (HCO₃⁻), however this is adjusted through other loss terms and measurements.
Secondary silicate and carbonate precipitation are already accounted for through integrated weathering DIC export measurements in NFZ Method 1 and full-depth solid-phase soil assessments of feedstock dissolution in NFZ Method 2.
The baseline scenario selection guidance in this methodology has low uncertainty because it is based on project-specific information and is well known.
The equations presented in this methodology have low uncertainty because they consist of basic operations. The uncertainty in equations used at the project-level to convert measurements into CDR shall be assessed for each project.
No estimates or secondary data are used as a default for projects in this methodology.
Uncertainty of models and measurements shall be assessed at the project level. Project Developers shall justify the statistical methods used to assess uncertainty, such as frequentist approaches, Bayesian approaches, or error propagation, and transparently disclose assumptions, equations and results.
It is recommended that the values selected for CDR quantification represent either
the lower bound of a two-sided 80% confidence interval (for frequentist approach), or
the 10th percentile of a posterior distribution (for Bayesian models).
If these are not used, higher uncertainty and a larger discount factor should be applied.
The minimum uncertainty at the methodology level is estimated to be low, especially given the measures already taken to address uncertainty in a conservative way. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 3% for projects under this methodology. Project-specific factors may introduce higher uncertainty and justify higher discount factors for given projects.
Equipment production and waste treatment
Fuel production and combustion
Electricity production
Embodied emissions
Vehicle production and end of life
Road production and maintenance
See the Transportation module for more details and equations, which shall also be applied here. Project Developers may choose between the Fuel amount, Fuel-efficiency or the Distance-based approach for monitoring and calculating transport energy use emissions.
Energy amount and type for feedstock processing
kWh, MJ, liters
Operating records, machinery/equipment tracking, invoices, bills, receipts
Energy amount and type for feedstock spreading
kWh, MJ, liters
Operating records, machinery/equipment tracking
Transport data: delivery of feedstock to spreading site
t*km, or
liters, kg, MJ of fuel
See the Transportation module from the BiCRS methodology for more details
Type of other input/emission*
Text description
Internal process documents
Amount of other input/emission*
kg, liter, kWh, MWh, GWh, m
Meter readings, bills, internal tracking documents, invoices, contracts, gas analyzers or sensors on pyrolysis equipment, calculated using conversions from other primary project data
CDR loss from acid buffering, converted to kgCO2eq
kgCO2eq
Primary measurements of bound acidity, with data analysis and processing
CDR gain or loss from base cation sorption, converted to kgCO2eq
kgCO2eq
Primary measurements of base cation saturation and CEC, with with data analysis and processing
CDR gain or loss from secondary carbonate formation, converted to kgCO2eq (optional)
kgCO2eq
Primary measurements of soil inorganic carbon, with data analysis and processing
What to measure
carbonate system parameters (e.g. alkalinity, DIC)
major ion concentrations (e.g. base cations , major anions)
See the Measurements and data sources section for details on which measurements may be used.
Where to measure
Either of the measurements listed on the left can be measured in:
soil porewater at the end/depth of the NFZ
drainage or catchment waters beyond the NFZ
The specific NFZ boundary is defined by the site hydrology, detailed in the Site Characterization section.


Measurement approaches may differ by project and must be clearly described in the PDD. Measurements shall be performed by third-party independent labs, and follow a recognized and standardized measurement technique (e.g. ISO 10304 for non-carbonic acid concentration).
Final values selected for use in the specified CDR term must adhere to composite sampling and homogenization requirements outlined in the Sampling protocol section. It is strongly recommended that the values selected for CDR quantification represent either:
the lower bound of a two-sided 80% confidence interval (for frequentist approach, e.g. bootstrapping), or
the 10th percentile of a posterior distribution (for Bayesian models, e.g. Monte Carlo simulations).
If these are not used, higher uncertainty is assumed and a larger discount factor should be applied.
The following measurements of alkalinity export () are required for projects using for NFZ removal quantification.
Project Developers shall measure at least two, and ideally three, from the following:
pH
Total alkalinity
Dissolved Inorganic Carbon (DIC)
[] (Dissolved concentration)
Alternatively, Project Developers may measure major anions (both base cations and major anions) export from the NFZ in aqueous samples to demonstrate complete CDR.
The following adjustments shall be made to direct measurements of alkalinity export, where applicable:
If total alkalinity is used, Project Developers shall assess and discuss any potential contribution from organic alkalinity.
If base cation concentration or total alkalinity are used, Project Developers shall account for carbonic acid system speciation to correctly convert these values to DIC (note that in
The following measurements for feedstock dissolution () are required for projects using
Feedstock dissolution shall be measured via solid-phase soil-based mass balance measurements, comparing the concentration of soluble base cations (Ca²⁺, Mg²⁺, K⁺, Na⁺) in soil samples at the beginning and end of the reporting period (or for the first reporting period, directly after feedstock application and at the end of the reporting period). Such measurements may be done:
Option 1: within the treatment plot, relative to an immobile tracer element that does not dissolve (e.g., Zr, Ti, Nb), or
Option 2: comparing results between the treatment and control plots, measuring base cations directly (i.e. if immobile tracers are not present or abundant).
A decrease in measured base cations represents a loss of base cations from the solid phase, which suggests weathering is occurring, and represents the potential maximum increase in CDR during that reporting period.
The potential maximum increase in CDR is calculated by first converting solid-phase base cation loss to equivalent bicarbonate formation (according to the base cation charge), and finally converting bicarbonate to COeq assuming a 1:1 replacement ratio on a molar basis (although this 1:1 ratio is adjusted later in the term).
Decreasing base cations from the solid phase of the NFZ only suggest CDR because they may be:
dissolving into the aqueous phase into porewater and successfully driving CDR, or
going somewhere else accounted for in the other terms such as biomass uptake.
If Option 2 is used to measure feedstock dissolution without an immobile tracer, Project Developers shall justify their approach for addressing the following elements, which are otherwise controlled by the use of an immobile tracer:
potential decreases in base cation concentrations caused by physical processes (such as wind or water erosion) that may remove base cations from the solid-phase measurement zone, and
variability in feedstock application rates.
Due to the lack of certainty in interpreting decrease of base cations (i.e. whether it causes CDR, is tracked in other terms, or is untraceable), it is strongly recommended to measure base cation concentration in soil porewater, particularly in cases where significant uncertainty exists regarding the fate of base cations (e.g., high potential for physical transport or secondary mineral formation). If porewater measurements show discrepancies with solid-phase losses, additional verification may be required to adjust CDR estimates accordingly.
Biomass cation uptake () shall be measured by sampling plant tissues and measuring base cation content. All base cations that may contribute to weathering shall be measured.
For annual crops, this includes measuring base cation concentration of all harvested biomass. Base cation concentration is multiplied by the total mass of biomass removed to obtain total base cations removed.
For perennial crops, this includes measuring base cation concentration of all new growth biomass. Base cation concentration is multiplied by the total mass of new growth biomass to obtain total base cations removed.
Total base cations removed in the project/treatment fields are compared to total base cations removed in the baseline/control fields, to determine the net loss of base cations from biomass uptake. Base cation uptake from biomass is converted to alkalinity loss which is converted to CDR in tCOeq.
These measurements are required for all projects using . For projects using , this shall only be included if the end of the NFZ, and therefore the depth of weathering product export measurements, is shallower than the root depth.
The potential maximum increase in CDR from measurements assumes that all base cations released from feedstock are charge balanced by bicarbonate, contributing to the most efficient CDR outcome. This assumption does not account for several sources of inefficiency in base cation release driving CDR, which must be corrected through adjustments to the following ():
pH-dependent speciation: carbonic acid system speciation (i.e. ratio of of , , and ) depends on pH. In high pH soils, more carbonate than bicarbonate is present, and when base cations react with carbonate it leads to less CDR than if they had reacted with bicarbonate (1 mole of CO removed rather than 2 moles of CO, respectively). To account for this, Project Developers shall measure the following:
Measure at least two carbonate system parameters in the aqueous phase from the list provided in the measurement section
Use a carbonate speciation model (e.g. PHREEQC) to assess the distribution of , , and
These measurements are required for all projects using . For projects using , these measurements are not necessary since they are already inherently accounted for in export measurements.
Any temporary changes in base cation availability due to adsorption onto soil particle surfaces () must be accounted for in each reporting period. In any given reporting period, this may result in a net adsorption (base cations becoming bound and unavailable) or net desorption (base cations become available again to drive alkalinity generation and CDR), and therefore a net gain or loss of CDR.
This is measured via changes in the stock of base cation in the exchangeable fraction in the NFZ. The exchangeable fraction refers to the base cations (Ca²⁺, Mg²⁺, K⁺, Na⁺) that are loosely held on soil particle surfaces (e.g. clay minerals and organic matter) and can be readily exchanged with the soil solution (aqueous phase). Changes in base cation stock are calculated by multiplying changes in cation exchange capacity (CEC) and base saturation.
These measurements are required for all projects using . For projects using , these measurements are not necessary since they are already inherently accounted for in export measurements.
The precipitation and formation of secondary carbonates () within the NFZ can:
Decrease optimal ERW CDR efficiency because base cations are tied up in carbonate minerals instead of remaining in solution to support bicarbonate (HCO₃⁻) export, which is the most effective and preferred pathway for long-term CO₂ removal in ERW, because this pathway results in a 2:1 CO₂ removal ratio (2 moles CO₂ removed per mole of Ca/Mg )
Still contribute to some CDR if the carbonates remain stable over long timescales, as they store CO in mineral form, creating a long-term carbon sink. This pathway is less effective because it results in a 1:1 CO₂ removal ratio (1 mole CO₂ removed per mole of Ca/Mg )
Secondary carbonate formation can be treated in ERW projects by:
Method 1 Direct measurement of export:
CDR decreases from secondary carbonate formation are already accounted for in the integrated measurements of DIC export, since the corresponding base cations are not measured as being exported.
CDR increases from long term CO₂ removal and storage in carbonates are not accounted for in this method, because they could dissolve and carbon removal would be reversed. Plus, upon dissolution and export from the NFZ, they would be measured and counted as CDR. This would result in double counting: CDR from a given base cation can't be counted once as temporary storage in carbonates and a second time as export.
See Cascade Climate's Foundations for Carbon Dioxide Removal Quantification in ERW Deployments for more details and explanation.
Project Developers shall assess how application of agricultural lime to control and treatment plots affects the measurements and how it is accounted for.
These measurements are required for all projects using , and excluded from projects using .
CDR decreases when dissolved base cations (Ca, Mg, K, Na) and silica (SiO) precipitate into secondary mineral phases, such as clays, amorphous silica, or Fe/Al oxyhydroxides, instead of remaining in solution to drive alkalinity export ().
Similar biogeochemical processes in the NFZ may continue in the lower vadose zone, sometimes stretching meters below the depth of the NFZ, and in groundwaters, leading to CDR loss (). Due to scientific consensus that there are not sufficient models or monitoring tools to assess these processes, these are excluded from CDR calculations. This is an active topic of research that Rainbow is closely monitoring.
The following sources of CDR loss in downstream surface waters () should be accounted for:
When alkalinity from rock weathering enters the ocean, CO may be released into the atmosphere (outgassed) as the two meeting bodies of water adjust their carbonate balance, especially when mixing with water that has different chemistry.
How to calculate:
Justify expected CO outgassing using CO flux equations for water-air gas exchange, using
An average annual or seasonal pH, based on either direct measurements from the project or on reliable databases, and
Either direct measurements of surface water temperature and DIC/pCO, or a conservative estimate of carbonate system parameters, and
CDR loss due to outgassing from DIC system equilibration in surface ocean waters () shall be accounted for. This may be done using models, such as those described for , or using conservative assumptions and thermodynamic storage efficiency calculations.
Such calculations shall assume complete equilibration between the surface ocean carbonic acid system and atmospheric CO, at representative temperature, salinity, and current atmospheric pCO at the time of calculation. These calculation parameters should be obtained from reliable secondary sources for the specific ocean basin where weathering products are expected to flow into, based on hydrological measurements or modeling (e.g. from the OceanSODA database, or output from the GENI model).
Models may be used for several components in this methodology. The uses of models include:
Feedstock dissolution for ex-ante calculations, estimating provisional credit volumes, and creating expected timeline of weathering and crediting (required)
Groundwater flow path and residence time models (required)
Hydrological flow path, determining which ocean basin weathering products will end up in (required)
FFZ loss models (rivers and oceans)
Models used shall be described in the PDD, and details shall be provided either directly in the project documentation or in referenced, publicly available documentation. Required details include a description of the overall structure of the model, key sources/references, assumptions, uncertainty and sensitivity, input data, and secondary/fixed data used.
Use of in-house models requires transparently sharing all information needed to develop and validate the model with at least the the Rainbow Certification team and the VVB and/or a peer reviewer. The final results and performance of the model (e.g. uncertainty, sensitivity, proximity of modeled and measured results...) shall be publicly shared in the PDD.
The development of models beyond the requirements and outside the purpose of crediting is encouraged for the advancement of the scientific field, and to facilitate model use in MRV in the future, but is not required for carbon credit issuance. See the on how this work is accounted for.
Project Developers shall describe their ex-ante Sampling Plan for monitoring the measurements that are used in . This shall be prepared during project validation, before any rock is spread. It shall reference the pilot measurements described above to justify the sampling protocol will ensure signal resolvability, representativeness, and minimize bias. Secondary sources and desk research may also be used as sources to justify the sampling protocol.
Project Developers may revise the Sampling Plan and/or Monitoring Plan throughout the crediting period, based on initial measurement results, or as scientific knowledge and best practices evolve. Any proposed changes should be submitted to Rainbow before implementation. Depending on the scope of the revisions, updates may require auditing and approval by the VVB. Failure to obtain prior approval may result in measurements being rejected for credit verification and issuance, due to substantial deviations from the audited and agreed-upon Monitoring Plan.
Ideally, sampling events should align exactly with the Sampling Plan. However, given real-world challenges that may arise during monitoring, some deviations are expected. Project Developers shall note any deviations from the Sampling Plan during monitoring, addressing all points listed in the section below. Any deviations shall be documented in the during verification.
The Sampling Plan shall include descriptions of:
field area coordinates of sampling/monitoring sites (center and radius for sub-samples)
CDR quantification approach ( or ) and a list of each measurement that will be used/required by the project
number of samples taken per strata (see section below)
statistical test/s to check if LD treatment plot results are sufficiently similar to HD treatment plot results
The Sampling plan shall include a detailed description of the sampling frequency for each stage of the project. At a minimum, the following time points must be addressed:
Pilot sampling: Conducted well before rock spreading to support site characterization and inform stratification. (Mandatory)
Baseline sampling: Performed immediately prior to rock application to document pre-spreading conditions. (Mandatory)
Post-spreading sampling: Conducted shortly after rock application (e.g. within 30 days) to capture early-phase responses. (Optional)
For aqueous-phase samples (e.g. porewater or drainage water), the sampling frequency must be specifically justified, considering site-specific hydrological factors such as precipitation patterns and irrigation events.
Projects using for CDR quantification are required to perform sample compositing. This means that for one monitoring site, one sample is sent for laboratory analysis, but that sample is composed of many sub-samples (between 6-20). These sub-samples are taken from a small geographical area, within a defined radius of the center monitoring site point, and are homogenized to form one sample.
The following sampling requirements apply to projects pursuing for CDR quantification.
Project Developers shall justify the following in the Site Characterization Report, accounting for site hydrology and temporal and spatial variability of measurements of weathering product concentration and water flux through the NFZ:
sample density and total number of samples per strata in the control plot, and high-density (HD) and (optional) treatment plots
statistical power of sample number
spatial placement of sampling points per strata
frequency of sampling
It is recommended that this justification be based on power analysis of baseline variability of dissolved species being measured (e.g. alkalinity, base cation concentration...), measured in pilot sampling before any rock is spread, but other justifications will be considered on a case by case basis. Alternatively, this could be justified using the variability of other factors that affect hydrology and weathering rates such as topography, soil and buffer pH, base saturation, soil texture...
The number of samples shall be sufficient to establish a statistically significant time-integrated export of carbonate system parameters (e.g. alkalinity, DIC) and/or major ion concentrations (e.g. base cations , major anion) at the end of the NFZ, between the treatment and control plots. It is in the Project Developer's best interest to ensure enough samples are taken to obtain a statistically significant result, otherwise no significant CDR will be detected and no credits issued (see section for credit issuance requirements).
The absolute minimum sampling density for LD treatment plots is 1 aqueous sample per 45 ha (0.022 samples/ha), or 3 samples per plot of aqueous and/or soil samples, whichever is larger.
Treatment and control plot samples must be time-paired to minimize temporal variability. Samples from control and treatment plots shall be collected within a timeframe that ensures comparable environmental conditions across all samples.
If no porewater can be extracted from the soil due to dry conditions, it shall be assumed by default that no CDR is occurring. This may be modified given sufficiently justified temporal interpolation methods.
The following sampling requirements apply to projects pursuing for CDR quantification.
The necessary sampling density to obtain a statistically significant result is dependent on the baseline variability of the soil. Therefore, no fixed sampling density can be recommended, and this must be determined separately for each stratum in each project. The number of samples per stratum should be defined using a power analysis based on the baseline mean and variance of base cation concentration.
The following approach is recommended, but Project Developers may propose and justify an alternative approach if it is more relevant for their project-specific conditions.
Treatment plots: The number of samples needed per treatment plot per stratum should be determined using a paired T-Test power analysis on the expected mean difference, effect size, or minimum detectable change.
Control plots: The control plots may use the same sampling density as the treatment plot in the corresponding stratum, or a power analysis considering the absolute or relative allowable error may be used to determine the number of samples needed for control plots.
The absolute minimum sampling density for LD treatment plots is 1 soil sample per 15 ha (0.0667 samples/ha), or 3 samples per plot of aqueous and/or soil samples, whichever is larger.
It is in the Project Developer's best interest to ensure enough samples are taken to obtain a statistically significant result, otherwise no significant CDR will be detected and no credits issued (see section for credit issuance requirements).
[] (Carbonate concentration)
If carbonate minerals are present, Project Developers shall differentiate weathering sources by identifying if weathering products come from silicate weathering or carbonate mineral dissolution (from feedstock or fertilizers). Net CDR calculations shall be adjusted to remove CDR from weathering of carbonate minerals.
Validation may be conducted during the first year of project monitoring, with the option to transition to in-situ methods in later years, subject to approval by the Rainbow Certification team and the VVB.
Compare the modeled DIC:Alkalinity ratio to the ideal ratio (typically close to 1 at moderate pH) to determine how much DIC formation is “lost” to high-pH speciation.
Alternatively, if direct measurements are not available, apply a conservative correction/loss term by 1) estimating strong acid addition to, or production in, the NFZ, 2) assuming that all of the previously estimated acidity leads to CDR loss
Non-carbonic acid weathering: weathering by sulfuric, nitric or organic acids instead of carbonate, which releases base cations but does not generate alkalinity and lead to CDR. To account for this, Project Developers shall use one of the following approaches:
Directly measure the flux of major anions (nitrate, sulfate, chloride, and dissolved phosphorus ions) in the aqueous phase from the NFZ.
If nitric acid from nitrification is the main source of non-carbonic acid weathering, as opposed to the other mentioned anions, then non-carbonic acid weathering can be estimated using documented ammonia fertilizer application rates and as assumed 100% nitrification of ammonia. This may be adjusted with measurements of nitrogen-use efficiency from plant biomass with sufficient proof.
If carbonate system parameters cannot be directly measured, Project Developers may use a conservative proxy correction factor to estimate the proportion of weathering driven by non-carbonic acids, as a function of soil pH, from Dietzen & Rosing, 2023.
Acid buffering: acidity released from soil exchange sites (exchangeable or bound acidity), which may react with bicarbonate and reverse CDR. To account for this, Project Developers shall measure the following:
Measure bound acidity in soil samples and calculate changes over the reporting period
Calculate lost CDR assuming a 1:1 molar ratio of bound (or total) acidity neutralized to moles of CO₂ released (exchangeable acidity is already accounted for in the Base cation sorption measurement section below)
Method 2 Mass balance:
CDR decreases from secondary carbonate formation are already accounted for in the feedstock dissolution measurements, which shall be taken to the depth of the NFZ to fully account for secondary carbonate formation (and any potential dissolution). Projects shall ensure carbonate phases are retained during soil sample processing (e.g., avoid ammonium acetate or acid rinses that remove carbonates).
CDR increases from net CO₂ removal and permanent storage in carbonates may be optionally proven using soil inorganic carbon (SIC) measurements, comparing increases in SIC in the treatment and control plots. Such measurements shall prove that newly formed secondary carbonates are driven by ERW. Project Developers shall distinguish newly formed carbonates from background SIC using one of the following methods:
Stable isotope analysis (δ¹³C) to confirm that new carbonate formation is derived from atmospheric CO₂.
Sequential SIC sampling over time to track ERW-driven changes in carbonate content.
Depth-resolved SIC profiling to check if carbonates form at expected ERW-reactive depths.
Microscopic mineral analysis (XRD, SEM-EDS) to confirm carbonate crystal morphology and formation process.
Method 1: Direct measurement of export: Any decrease in net CDR due to secondary phase formation is already reflected in reduced alkalinity flux at the NFZ outflow
Method 2: Mass balance: Feedstock dissolution is measured at the depth of the NFZ, reflecting only base cations that are exported from the NFZ (i.e. excluding any that are precipitated into secondary mineral phases in more shallow parts of the NFZ)
Therefore, there are no additional measurement requirements related to this term. It is described here for completeness.
Nonetheless, Project Developers shall assess the site hydrology, and provide a qualitative discussion of expected flow paths and residence times through the lower vadose zone and groundwaters in the Site Characterization Report.
During ongoing monitoring and verificatin, there are no additional measurement requirements related to this term.
Assume that water is in full equilibrium with the atmosphere.
Where to measure:
Calculate for the following two locations, and apply the CDR loss result that is greater from the following two calculations:
In the immediate discharge zone, where the weathering products from a deployment drains into the first surface water system. This zone should already be identified in the Site Characterization Report, based on the regional hydrology.
In the primary river system of the deployment catchment, specifically the highest-order river segment within the expected hydrological flow area. This river segment should already be identified in the Site Characterization Report, based on the regional hydrology.
If surface waters become oversaturated with calcite, there is a higher likelihood that dissolved calcium and carbonate ions will precipitate as carbonate minerals, causing a loss of CDR from alkalinity that does not reach long-term CO₂ storage sinks like the ocean.
Project Developers shall evaluate calcite saturation throughout the flow path from the NFZ to the ocean, to assess the risk of carbonate precipitation (see instructions below). If the discharge waters have a baseline or a post-DIC maximum calcite saturation index (SI) of
SI > 1, then Project Developers shall model CDR loss from downstream carbonate precipitation
SI < 1, then this term may be omitted/assumed to be zero.
Project Developers shall describe their sampling plan and justify why it is temporally and spatially representative and sufficient.
Project Developers shall conservatively account for only carbonate precipitation and not its dissolution.
Calculating SI: saturation index shall be calculated using the following equation
Where
is the saturation index
and represent calcium and carbonate ion concentrations, respectively
represents the solubility product constant of calcite, which is temperature dependent and shall be calculated using a temperature-adjusted solubility equation.
Modeling carbonate burial: If the calculated SI > 1, Project Developers shall use process-based models to model carbonate precipitation and hydrological models to model fluid flow. Model structure, data inputs, key assumptions, model uncertainty, and sources shall be clearly defined, and should be publicly available.
Project Developers shall demonstrate that the model can accurately reproduce relevant background variations, including spatial and temporal fluctuations in carbonate system parameters.
surface water carbonate mineral burial (required if maximum SI in immediate discharge basin is > 1)
ocean outgassing (optional, may be conservatively calculated using simple conversions instead)
Scaling and extrapolation (optional)
stratification approach and results
sampling pattern approach (random, grid, transect, targeted...), with a justification of why the pattern is suitable for the element being measured, the characteristics of the project area, and the monitoring objectives
sampling steps e.g. depth, coring technique, laboratory techniques, storage, compositing, instruments/methods, approach for reducing/determining analytical error
averaging, compositing and grouping of data, and plan for handling missing data
any sampling components that are not fixed, and are anticipated to deviate from the original plan as the project continues operations and gathers more data (approval of such contingencies here may avoid the need to audit changes to the Sampling Plan later)
frequency of sampling
temporal and spatial interpolation methods
Validation requirements
ex-ante sampling plan
identification of carbonate system parameters/DIC to measure
baseline pre-spreading concentrations and variability of carbonate system parameters/DIC
analysis/justification of signal resolvability of given sampling/measurement plan
Verification requirements
ex-post sampling procedure
measurement and extraction methods
measurement of carbonate system parameters and/or major ion
final adjustments accounting for organic alkalinity, carbonic acid system speciation, and non-carbonic acid weathering
Validation requirements
ex-ante sampling plan
identify immobile tracer and base cations
estimate feedstock application rate
measure baseline soil concentrations and variability of immobile tracer
Verification requirements
ex-post sampling procedure
measurement and extraction methods
concentration of immobile tracer and base cation/s (solid phase required, aqueous phase optional)
Validation requirements
ex-ante sampling plan
identify base cations to measure
crop description (annual vs perennial, crop type)
maximum crop root depth
Verification requirements
ex-post sampling procedure
measurement and extraction methods
measured concentration of base cation/s
total biomass removed (annual crops) or new growth (perennial crops)
Validation requirements
ex-ante sampling plan (notably frequency/management of porewater samples, if used)
planned measurement methods
pH-dependent speciation: choose direct porewater measurements or conservative deduction
Verification requirements
ex-post sampling procedure
measurement and extraction methods
pH-dependent speciation
Validation requirements
ex-ante sampling plan
planned extraction and measurement method
base cations to be measured
estimated results and magnitude of potential CDR loss
Verification requirements
ex-post sampling procedure
measurement and extraction methods
base cations measured
base saturation and CEC at the beginning and end of the reporting period
Validation requirements
choice whether to measure CDR increase in the NFZ from secondary carbonate formation.
If no, no further requirements.
If yes, the following are required:
Verification requirements
choice whether to measure CDR increase in the NFZ from secondary carbonate formation.
If no, no further requirements.
If yes, the following are required:
Validation requirements
Outgassing from DIC system equilibration:
water pH value and data source (description of measurement or secondary source)
direct measurements of surface water temperature and DIC/pCO, or a conservative estimate of carbonate system parameters
identification of the immediate discharge zone and the primary river system (name, GPS coordinates)
Verification requirements
Outgassing from DIC system equilibration:
amount of initially estimated CDR loss applied to the reporting period
any additional CDR loss to consider from successive spreading events during the reporting period
Carbonate mineral burial
If initial SI results were >1
Validation requirements
identified specific ocean basin into which weathering products are expected to flow
choice of modeling or thermodynamic storage efficiency calculations approach
if modeling, description of model and CDR loss from outgassing results
Verification requirements
amount of initially estimated CDR loss applied to the reporting period
any additional CDR loss to consider from successive spreading events during the reporting period
plan to adjust results accounting for organic alkalinity, carbonic acid system speciation, and non-carbonic acid weathering
estimated potential CDR
calculated CDR
analysis/justification of signal resolvability of given sampling/measurement plan
expected mass-balance equation
estimated potential CDR
expected measurement method
calculated potential CDR loss
If porewater measurements, estimated water volume infiltrated through NFZ soil and two carbonate system parameters to measure
If conservative deduction, estimated source and amount of strong acid addition to or production in the NFZ
Non-carbonic acid weathering: choose direct porewater measurements or nitric acid from fertilizer simplification
If porewater measurements, estimated water volume infiltrated through NFZ soil and chosen anions to measure
If nitric acid simplification, justification that that nitric acid from nitrification is the main source of non-carbonic acid weathering, and estimated amount of ammonia fertilizer to apply
Acid buffering: estimated bound acidity in the NFZ
from all categories, estimated magnitude of potential CDR loss
If conservative deduction, measured source and amount of strong acid addition to or production in the NFZ
Non-carbonic acid weathering
If porewater measurements, measured water volume infiltrated through NFZ soil and anion concentration results
If nitric acid simplification, proof that that nitric acid from nitrification is the main source of non-carbonic acid weathering, and proven amount of ammonia fertilizer applied
Acid buffering: measured bound acidity in the NFZ
calculated potential CDR loss
calculated change in CDR from adsorption/desorption of base cations
ex-ante sampling plan accounting for baseline variability of SIC and agricultural lime application
planned extraction and measurement method
estimated results and magnitude of potential CDR loss
ex-post sampling procedure
measurement and extraction methods
Newly formed SIC concentration at beginning and end of reporting period in treatment and control plots
calculated change in CDR from secondary carbonate precipitation
calculated CO outgassing for the immediate discharge zone and the primary river system
overall calculated CDR loss value to apply
Carbonate mineral burial
identify the immediate discharge zone (name, GPS coordinates)
sampling plan and results for calcium and carbonate ion concentrations
calculated solubility product constant of calcite ()
value of calcite saturation index (SI). If
SI < 1: no further requirements
SI > 1: description of and results from process-based model to model carbonate precipitation and hydrological model to model fluid flow
overall calculated CDR loss value to apply
Justification that the site and its hydrology will not lead to substantial organic carbon destabilization downstream
amount of initially estimated CDR loss applied to the reporting period
any additional CDR loss to consider from successive spreading events during the reporting period
overall calculated CDR loss value to apply
General GHG quantification rules can be found in the Rainbow Standard Rules.
Calculations of GHG emissions for the baseline and project scenarios shall follow a robust, recognized method and good practice guidance. The overall methodological approach is a comparative life cycle assessment (LCA) at the project-scale, based on ISO 14064-2:2019.
Mineralization projects certified under this methodology may be eligible for removal and avoidance Rainbow Carbon Credits.
GHG quantification shall be completed for each reporting period. The duration of the reporting period is chosen by the Project Developer and may be either each , each calendar year, another duration shorter than 1 year, or a maximum of 18 months.
This methodology shall be used in conjunction with the following Rainbow modules:
Two different functional units are used:
1 tonne of mineralized material produced (e.g. 1 tonne of carbonated concrete, 1 tonne of carbonated aggregate...)
1 tonne of captured CO2
Credits are issued on the basis of mineralized material production, so this may be considered the main functional unit. Captured CO2 is used as a secondary functional unit for comparability across CDR technologies.
A summary of the calculation approach is presented below, and detailed descriptions and equations for calculating GHGs are in the respective and scenario sections.
For removals and avoidance from mineralization:
The project system boundary shall include at least the following elements where relevant and additional (i.e. beyond BAU):
production of any non-waste inputs and additives
transport of inputs to the project site (e.g. CO2, recycled concrete, alkaline feedstock...)
Credits can be issued from mineralization processes that result in both
CDR/removals, from using biogenic and atmospheric (e.g. DAC) CO2, and
CCS/avoidance, from using fossil and calcination CO2.
The same calculation method applies to all CO2 sources, they are simply assigned different credit types upon issuance (i.e. removal vs avoidance, see Eq. 2 and 3).
If the CO2 stream used in the mineralization batch is 100% biogenic/atmospheric or 100% fossil/calcination, no allocation is needed. All carbon storage and project induced emissions are fully attributed to removal or avoidance, respectively.
If the CO2 stream is mixed, Project Developers must determine the proportion of biogenic/atmospheric vs. fossil/calcination carbon, according to Article 39 of the EU ETS monitoring and reporting (even for non-EU based projects), summarized here for informative purposes only:
conservatively assume all CO2 is fossil/calcination CO2, or
use mass balance of material inputs by type, or
use measurement method, e.g. C14 testing, or
use other standards and analytical methods, subject to approval by Rainbow and the VVB.
The proportion of CO2 types shall be used to allocate the following, which are accounted for in Eq. 2 and 3:
Carbon storage: CO2 flows shall assume a proportional repartition of the two CO2 types in the different CO2 fates (e.g. successfully carbonated CO2, inflow and outflow CO2, unsuccessfully carbonated CO2 left in pore space...).
Induced emissions: project emissions shall be proportionally assigned to removal or avoidance based on the share of CO2 input from each source.
When a process is shared between the project scope and BAU activities (e.g. total electricity use at a site performing both cement manufacturing and mineralization), only the portion attributable to the project and additional to the baseline should be included. This allocation should follow one of the approaches below:
Subdivide the system and isolate measurements to collect only input/output data directly relevant for the project scope (e.g. install electricity meters at the entry point of the mineralization process).
If subdivision is not feasible, allocate shared processes based on a relevant underlying characteristic of the shared systems (e.g. by mass for jointly transported materials, by economic value for co-products with distinct markets...).
This allocation shall be applied at the data collection stage. Project Developers shall do this allocation outside of the GHG quantification equations, and submit allocated data into the removal and avoidance calculations (with justification/proof of work for allocation).
By default, future uses (beyond the product's first life) or end-of-life treatment of the carbonated material will not lead to reversals. This assumes no significant changes in environmental conditions (e.g. pH or fire exposure) that would cause CO2 release.
A standard transport distance of 50 km is assumed for final product (concrete and/or carbonated solid materials) delivery. Transport emissions for distances below this threshold are considered equivalent between the baseline and project scenarios, and can be excluded from the project system boundary. Transport emissions for distances above this threshold shall be included in project induced emissions calculations.
For directly carbonated cement (e.g. during curing or hydration/mixing), it is assumed that either no significant amount of unreacted CO2 remains trapped in the pore space, or that any trapped CO2 will eventually react fully with the cement matrix.
The baseline scenario is twofold, and is detailed in following sections:
Removals from mineralization that would have occurred anyway, from alternative feedstock use/management (for mineralization of solid materials such as SCMs and aggregates) and in use-stage concrete carbonation (for all technology types).
Avoidance from reduced cement shall be considered for projects issuing avoidance credits from reduced cement use, thanks to improved binder strength.
The baseline scenario shall account for natural mineralization from both:
the alternate fate of non-cement alkaline feedstock, and
the use-phase natural mineralization of cement-based feedstock, that would have occurred anyway.
Any natural carbon unaccounted for, that would have occurred without the intervention, shall be counted as baseline removals.
If a first screening assessment based on conservative estimates demonstrates combined baseline removals (sum of alkaline feedstock and concrete use phase) are <1% of the net project removals, then baseline removals may be set to 1%, and the Project Developer does not need to collect more precise baseline removal information. Otherwise, the Project Developer may choose to collect/model baseline removals in detail in order to prove and apply a lower baseline removal rate.
Baseline induced emissions are only considered for avoidance credits from avoided cement production. In this case, baseline induced emissions shall include the emissions from producing an equivalent amount of cement to serve the same purpose (compressive strength, lifetime...) as the cement produced in the project scenario.
Emissions are calculated based on the quantity and emission intensity of cement used in the project scenario compared to the baseline. While the emission factor of cement production remains the same (since mineralization projects typically do not alter upstream or downstream cement/concrete production), the total amount of cement needed in the concrete design mix may differ. This is because the project may create a stronger binder, requiring less cement than conventional practices.
To determine the quantity of cement avoided, Project Developers shall provide the cement usage ratio between the project and baseline scenarios for each end use of the carbonated material.
This shall be proven using the stated concrete mix designs used by the client using the carbonated material, demonstrating a lower cement use than otherwise used, or similar project-specific estimates (i.e. not default global replacement rates).
Cement emission factors shall be taken from the following sources, in decreasing order of preference:
project-specific sources, provided by the client using the carbonated material (e.g. EPDs), or
low-carbon cement thresholds (e.g. provided by the Global Cement and Concrete Association
Calculations from this life cycle stage are presented above in Eq. 4-6 in the section above.
An example of a typical project design and system boundary is shown in Figure 1. Each life cycle stage is detailed in the following sections.
This stage includes process emissions from the CO2 capture facility, CO2 transport emissions, and CO2 leakage during transport.
Induced emissions from the CO2 capture process shall only include emissions/activities that would not have occurred in the baseline.
Typically, CO2 capture is done on industrial sites that are already operating and emitting CO2. In this case, emissions from the industrial site operations and embodied emissions shall not be counted towards the CO2 capture. Furthermore, the CO2 itself is considered a waste product, and according to the waste cutoff LCA principle, is modeled as entering the project system boundary with no environmental burden/emissions.
Processes that may be considered in this stage may include but are not limited to:
additional infrastructure/machinery/instruments that are required for carbon capture (note that only substantial pieces that contribute to at least 1% of the total project life cycle emissions should be included, according to the . This can be assessed with a screening LCA using estimates, and if deemed substantial, more precise data shall be provided).
This life cycle stage shall include the production, processing, and transport of alkaline feedstock to be carbonated.
Requirements for modeling induced emissions from feedstock production are presented in Table 2.
Table 2 The approach for modeling GHG emissions from various types of feedstock are presented here.
Examples of feedstock processing/preparation for mineralization that may be considered in this stage may include but are not limited to:
feedstock preparation/processing to increase mineral purity (e.g. magnetic separation of iron), to increase carbonation rates
feedstock preparation/processing to increase surface area (e.g. grinding), to increase carbonation rates
heating, drying, wetting, to obtain optimal feedstock moisture content and diffusivity
For calculations and emission factors, see the module.
Transportation of alkaline feedstock shall include the delivery transport from the alkaline material production source to the carbonation site. For calculations and emission factors, see the module.
This stage includes induced emissions from the mineralization process, including energy use, input and machinery use, and transport/delivery of the carbonated material; plus any CO2 leaked from the reactor. All induced emissions from the mineralization process shall be included and counted towards the project GHG quantification, because they are all by definition additional to baseline conditions and part of the mineralization project.
This shall include energy use (electricity, heat and fuel) for heating, maintaining temperature, and compression/maintaining pressure, to be measured directly for each reported period. These may be provided by, for example:
measurements for the whole site, and allocated to the project if needed (e.g. site-wide electricity bills), or
measurements for specific machinery used by the project (e.g. energy meters), or
calculated using machinery power requirements and operation hours.
Depending on the project-specific technology, this may also include but is not limited to:
Carbon storage shall be determined using project-specific measurements and CO2 mass balance calculations, using either:
Solid sample: Periodic measurements on a representative sample of solid carbonated material, measuring its carbon content compared to a baseline material, using TGA or dry combustion/TCA
Gas inflow-outflow: continuous measurements of CO2 gas inflow minus outflow.
Each method is described in detail below. Cross verification of carbon storage measurements with another method is encouraged but not required.
All solid sample carbon content measurement shall be conducted on:
A carbonated sample from the project, and
A non-carbonated control sample of the same material.
The difference in CO2 content between the two, measured using TGA or dry combustion/TCA, shall be used to quantify the amount of CO2 removed by the project activity.
To ensure consistency:
Project and control samples must be collected at the same time interval after exiting the reactor (e.g. 24 hours, 1 week, 1 month).
Both samples must be stored under identical conditions between mineralization and measurement to avoid variations due to natural ambient mineralization.
All measurements shall be performed on at least one representative sample at the following frequency:
For each (with batch validity limited to 1 year), or
At least once per quarter, or
Every 500 tonnes CO2 removed, whichever comes first.
Refer to the section for detailed procedures on sampling approach, frequency, and traceability.
Gas inflow-outflow measurements shall be taken continuously (at least 1x per minute) and summarized and reported daily.
Gas measurements shall use a calibrated flow metering with ±1.0% accuracy or better. Project Developers shall provide equipment calibration certificates and QA/QC procedures.
Any projects using:
Technology type: carbonated solid materials to add to e.g. concrete or asphalt, and
Measurement type: gas inflow-outflow,
The required primary data for GHG quantification from all projects, regardless of measurement approach, are presented in Table 3. Required primary data for projects using solid-sample carbon storage measurements are in Table 4, and for projects using gaseous inflow-outflow are in Table 5. These data shall be provided for each reporting period, unless specified otherwise, and made publicly available.
Table 3 Summary of primary data needed from all projects and their source. Asterisks (*) indicate which data are only required for initial project certification and validation, and do not need to be monitored and updated during verification. Two asterisks (**) indicate which data are only necessary if the project is eligible for avoidance credits from reduced cement use.
Table 4 Summary of primary data needed from projects using solid-sample CO2 storage measurements, and their source. Project Developers shall provide only one of the two data sources listed.
Table 5 Summary of primary data needed from projects using gas inflow-outflow CO2 storage measurements, and their source.
The ecoinvent database version 3.11 (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in .
The following have low uncertainty:
Baseline delivery of concrete or aggregates is 50 km.
Directly carbonated cement will have no CO2 trapped in pore space.
The following have moderate uncertainty:
Future uses or end-of-life treatment of the carbonated material will not lead to reversals.
All carbonated material from the same mineralization batch has similar characteristics.
The baseline scenario selection at the methodology level has low uncertainty, because it requires a project-specific assessment of the specific amount and type. The specific circumstances, amount and type of baseline material must be proven by the Project Developer, and their uncertainty shall be assessed at the project level. There is low uncertainty that the baseline scenario includes baseline removals and cement.
The equations have low uncertainty, because they consist of straightforward conversions. No models are used in this methodology. Secondary data include default baseline mineralization rates for a selection of alkaline feedstocks, which comes with low uncertainty due to its very small contribution and the low sensitivity of final results to changes in this value.
The uncertainty at the module level is estimated to be low. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 3% for projects using this module.
General GHG reduction quantification rules can be found in the Rainbow Standard Rules.
Calculations of GHG emissions for the baseline and project scenarios shall follow the method detailed below, based on ISO 14064-2:2019.
Electronic device refurbishing projects are only eligible for avoidance Rainbow Carbon Credits.
Electronic device refurbishing projects serve two functions: waste treatment from a device’s first life (Device A), and the provisioning of a “new” device in its second life (Device B). Both of these functions are included in the project and baseline scenario. See Figure 1 and Figure 2 for a depiction of project and baseline scenario system boundaries.
The baseline scenario represents the functionally equivalent set of activities that would occur in the absence of the project. Therefore, the baseline scenario is the average e-waste treatment of Device A, and the market mix for production of a new Device B. This market mix includes the fraction of refurbished devices that are already on the market (see ).
The distribution, packaging, use, and waste treatment of Device B are not included in the calculations because they are assumed to be the same in both scenarios. Therefore, the downstream system boundary is Device B at the factory gate.
Calculations and data collection are based on annual project operations.
Electronic device refurbishing projects are multifunctional (see General section above) so the functional unit is twofold:
production of one electronic device (Device B), plus
treatment of the corresponding amount of e-waste treated (from Device A) to generate this one device.
The required primary data for GHG reduction calculations from projects are presented in Table 2:
Table 2 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source. Asterisks (*) indicate which data are required to be updated annually during verification (see Monitoring Plan section).
Secondary data taken from the literature are used to define default values for the following elements:
Device expected lifetime (new and refurbished)
Device mass (if not provided by the Project Developer)
Emission factors from device production (when not available in the ecoinvent database, see paragraph below)
These values and their sources are provided in Table 3 in the section
The ecoinvent database version 3.11 (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in
Electronic devices are evaluated in categories of device types rather than specific device models to facilitate data collection. It is assumed that devices in the same device type category have similar characteristics (mass, emission factor, lifetime), as defined in Table 3. Only the device type "monitor" is separated into large and small monitors, due to the influence of monitor size on manufacturing impacts.
Some devices are not able to be refurbished to a functioning state, but contain some functional parts. Typically, the device is disassembled to harvest those scrap parts to use as spare parts for other refurbished devices. To maintain a conservative approach, these devices are assumed to go to electronic waste recycling.
In the baseline scenario, the distance for e-waste collection of Device A and transport to the waste treatment center is assumed to be 100 km.
Table 3 Summary of assumed lifetimes, masses, and emission factors of new and refurbished electronic devices. Refer to the for details and sources.
Residual value of input devices is detailed in , Residual value of input devices section and refers to the allocation of impacts from the production of Device A to the refurbished Device B, based on its residual economic value. This is calculated using the ratio of the buyback price to the price of the newly manufactured device. This ratio is calculated for each device type, and assumed to be the same for all models within that category.
The project scenario consists of refurbishing used electronic devices, which serves two functions: 1) waste treatment of the device after its first life (Device A) and 2) refurbishing to produce a “new“ device (Device B). This process is broken down into 3 life cycle stages, and displayed in Figure 1:
Device A e-waste collection
Device A e-waste treatment of scrap materials
Device B refurbishing process
The mass of e-waste collected equals the total mass of input used devices collected at the refurbishing site annually.
Total mass of devices shall be calculated using the number of devices collected for each device type (provided by the Project Developer), multiplied by the assumed mass of each device type shown in Table 3.
For calculating transport distance, Project Developers shall provide the country and/or city where used electronic devices are transported from, and provide the average distance from the collection source to the refurbishing project site.
It is assumed that transport within Europe is done 100% by truck, and overseas transport is done by long-distance air freight.
Devices collected by the project that cannot be refurbished undergo e-waste recycling. Refurbishing projects typically have contracts with e-waste recycling companies that collect and recycle such devices.
Project Developers shall provide the fraction of devices that are recycled, and they will be modeled as mechanical e-waste recycling with shredding and separation (see ecoinvent processes in ).
Some non-refurbished devices may be kept onsite to harvest spare parts in the future, but due to limited project data on this topic, they are assumed to be recycled.
Devices that are sold by the project in a non-functional state shall be treated in the calculations as recycled devices.
This life cycle stage is composed of four main processes, each described below:
light refurbishing impacts
full refurbishing impacts
residual value of input devices, and
secondary transport of devices.
Light refurbishment impacts: The refurbishing process is split into two categories: light and full refurbishment, representing the degree of intervention needed to restore the device to a functioning state. Light refurbishment involves testing device functionality, and cosmetic and software improvements, and does not require the replacement of parts (e.g. new battery, new screen…). This distinction was chosen because most environmental impacts from the refurbishing process come from production of new replacement pieces.
Light refurbishment includes inputs of electricity for testing and software improvement, and cleaning alcohol, tissues, and cloth for cleaning, and is modeled after the detailed LCA of electronic device refurbishing from the ADEME study.
Full refurbishment impacts: Full refurbishment includes light refurbishment plus repair and replacement of non-functional pieces. Detailed project data on all replacement pieces and inputs are rarely available, so full refurbishment impacts are modeled following the ADEME study.
Results from this study are used to obtain the ratio of impacts of a refurbished device to the impacts of the corresponding new device (). This ratio is then applied to the new device production impacts summarized in Table 3 to obtain the desired amount of emissions from refurbishing. The emissions from refurbishing are modeled using the mix of ecoinvent processes used in light refurbishment described above, plus production of commonly replaced parts including screens, batteries, microphones and speakers.
Residual value of input devices: In life cycle assessments, when a project uses waste as an input, it typically enters the project system boundary with zero environmental impacts. Refurbishing projects collect and refurbish used devices that are not always at the end of their life, and are not truly waste. They may still be functional and hold residual value from their first life. This is evidenced by the fact that Project Developers sometimes pay for used devices, as opposed to waste collection, where the waste generator has to pay for waste treatment.
In this case, some environmental impacts from the device’s first life should be allocated to the refurbished device. It is assumed that only devices that undergo light refurbishment were in good condition and had residual value, and are allocated a share of GHG emissions from the device’s first life. On the other hand, devices that undergo full refurbishment are assumed to be non-functional waste and are not allocated any environmental impacts from their first life.
The residual value and corresponding allocated emissions are based on the ratio of the buyback price to the selling price of a new manufactured device. An average ratio shall be used for each device type, and is shown in Table 4. Alternatively, Project Developers may provide a similar project-specific database with their own buyback data.
Table 4 Residual value of device types. See for more details for smartphone, iPhone, tablet, and iPad. The average value of these device types was applied to the remaining device types due to a lack of device-specific buyback data.
Secondary transport of devices: After the device is collected by the refurbishing project and sorted, it may be sent to a different refurbishment site, for example to do specialty repairs. Project Developers shall report such secondary transport by providing the distance transported, and the number and type of devices making this transport.
The baseline scenario consists of two main functions: 1) waste treatment of the device after its first life (Device A) and 2) provisioning of a new device (Device B). The system boundary of the baseline scenario is shown in Figure 2. This is broken down into 3 life cycle stages, which are detailed in the following sections:
Device A collection
Device A e-waste treatment
Manufacturing of Device B
The structure of the baseline scenario is the same whether the project consists of ongoing operations or an expansion. In the former, project data from all annual site operations is considered, and the baseline scenario is defined as the functional equivalent of all annual operations. For an expansion project, only project data related to the expansion is considered, because the normal annual operations would be the same in the baseline and project scenario, and can therefore be excluded.
It is assumed that e-waste is transported by truck 100 km to its waste treatment center.
The mass of e-waste collected in the baseline scenario equals the total mass of input used devices collected by the refurbishing project annually.
Total mass of devices shall be calculated using the number of devices collected for each device type (provided by the Project Developer), multiplied by the assumed mass of each device type shown in Table 3.
Project Developers may provide more precise information on the mass of collected devices if it is available.
The treatment of e-waste is split between recycling, landfilling and incineration (Figure 2).
The proportion of e-waste recycled is based on national statistics obtained from the Eurostat database for small IT devices, as defined by the WEEE directive. Data for other countries where used devices are frequently sourced are taken from the UN Global E-waste Monitor, and extrapolated where necessary. The dataset and more detailed information are in .
First, the fraction of e-waste that is not separately collected is assumed to be collected with municipal waste and incinerated or landfilled. In 2021, for example, this was an average of 31% for the countries included in Eurostat.
The repartition between landfilling and incineration (with and without energy recovery) was taken from Eurostat, and the total repartition for all EU countries from 2020 was used. This resulted in 52% incineration and 48% landfilling.
Then, the fraction of e-waste that is separately collected is considered (average of 69% in the EU in 2021).
This can be further broken down into the fraction successfully recycled/reused (average of 79% for EU countries in 2021) and the fraction that could not be recycled/reused (21%). Country specific fractions are used and are presented in .
The separately collected e-waste that could not be recycled/reused is assumed to be incinerated and landfilled, with the same proportions described in the Baseline scenario section .
The number of new devices to consider in the baseline scenario corresponds to the number of devices successfully refurbished and sold in a functional state in the project scenario. Note that this does not necessarily equal the number of used devices collected, because a fraction of devices can not be successfully refurbished.
To quantify avoided GHG emissions, the baseline scenario must consider the market share of the project technology already in use. Currently, new device purchases come from both new manufacturing and existing refurbishing activities, and this is reflected in the baseline scenario (see Figure 2). The proportions of new and refurbished devices are detailed in Table 5.
Table 5 Market share of refurbished devices sold annually in Europe. See for more details.
The process of manufacturing a new device is taken from the ecoinvent database: laptop, PC, tablet, and monitor (See ).
GHG emissions from manufacturing Apple devices (iPhones, iPads, iMacs, and Macbooks) are taken from the production-stage impacts reported in Apple’s Product Environmental Reports. An average emission factor for recent models of devices was taken, and the emission factors considered are presented in .
The emission factor for smartphones was based on ecoinvent data and adjusted to better represent average smartphones. This was necessary because
smartphones are one of the most frequently refurbished devices, so special attention should be paid to them
smartphone emission factors are notoriously variable, and
it has been noted that
The difference in lifetime between refurbished and new devices, described in the section, is accounted for in this life cycle stage. The amount of new device production avoided in the baseline scenario is proportional to the ratio of new and refurbished device lifetimes.
The impacts of refurbishing devices are described in the Refurbishing process section above.
Avoided GHG emissions are calculated by subtracting the sum of the project scenario GHG emissions from the sum of the baseline GHG scenario emissions.
The that are estimated to have high uncertainty (i.e. high variability and high impact) are:
The amount of devices avoided in the baseline scenario is proportional to the ratio of new and refurbished device lifetimes.
The ratio of new and refurbished device GHG emissions from ADEME can be extrapolated to represent the refurbishing process of all similar devices.
The residual economic value of used devices represents the GHG emissions that should be allocated from production Device A first life to the refurbished Device B.
The that are estimated to have moderate uncertainty are:
Similar devices have similar characteristics (mass, emission factor, lifetime), leading to grouping devices into device type categories rather than assessing specific device models and brands.
The distribution of Device B in the baseline and project scenarios is assumed to be the same.
The that are estimated to have low uncertainty (i.e. high variability and high impact) are:
Non-functioning parts are assumed to be recycled.
The distance for e-waste collection of Device A in the baseline scenario is assumed to be 100 km.
Packaging, use, and waste treatment of Device B are assumed to be the same in the baseline and project scenarios.
Monitors with no size breakdown are assumed to be <25". This assumption is conservative, as smaller monitors are associated with lower impacts from new device production, resulting in reduced avoided emissions.
The baseline scenario selection has low uncertainty and is mostly standardized. It accounts for project-specific information regarding the number, type and fate of devices, and national e-waste management statistics.
The equations used in this methodology consist of basic conversions and have low uncertainty.
Many estimates and secondary data are used in this methodology to enable a reasonable amount of project data collection. These data have varying levels of uncertainty, and are assessed in Table 6.
The uncertainty at the methodology level is estimated to be moderate. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 10% for projects under this methodology.
Table 6 Presentation of all secondary data and estimates used, and an assessment of their uncertainty.
if the project uses a portion of a concrete facility's flue gas (diverting the CO2 stream, using part for mineralization , and returning the unused portion to the main flue gas stream to be emitted), the project boundary shall not include the emission of unused CO2 that returns to the flue gas stream.
onsite energy use (electricity, fuels, heat...) related to e.g. preparation of feedstock, and the mineralization process
fugitive CO2 leaks during CO2 transport
carbon storage
see Figure 1 below for the system boundary diagram.
The baseline system boundary shall include:
any removals that would have occurred naturally from mineralization of the alkaline feedstock, and/or
any use-phase carbonation benefits that would have naturally occurred at greater rates had the project not altered the material or process.
Removals and avoidance from mineralization are calculated using the following high-level equations, detailed in their respective sections below.
For avoided GHGs from reduced cement:
The project system boundary shall include emissions from the manufacture of the actual quantity of cement used in the concrete mix designs, in which the carbonated materials are used.
The baseline system boundary shall include emissions from the manufacture of the quantity of cement that would have been required to achieve the same functional performance using conventional materials or methods, for the given concrete mix design. This will likely represent a larger amount of cement than in the project scenario, since mineralization projects may enhance binder strength and reduce the total cement required.
Avoided GHGs from reduced cement are calculated using the equation below.
These calculations do not account for carbon storage, and do not allow for allocation of induced emissions between the mineralization removal and the avoidance/reduced product.
calculates project induced emissions of 10 tCO2eq, plus 1 tonne of fugitive CO2 leaked from transport
Gross carbon storage repartitioned proportionally:
50 tCO2eq from fossil CO2
50 tCO2eq from biogenic CO2
Project induced emissions repartitioned proportionally:
5 tCO2eq from fossil CO2
5 tCO2eq from biogenic CO2
Fugitive CO2 leaked from transport, repartitioned proportionally:
0.5 tonnes fossil CO2 leaked, counted as 0.5 tCO2eq (fossil CO2 has a GWP of 1)
0.5 tonnes biogenic CO2 leaked, counted as 0 tCO2eq (biogenic CO2 has a GWP of 0)
This would result in
Avoidance credits from fossil CO2 mineralization =
Removal credits from biogenic CO2 mineralization =
All carbonated material from the same mineralization batch has similar characteristics.
represents baseline removals from mineralization of cement during the concrete use-phase that are larger than the use-phase carbonation for the project material, corresponding to the amount of concrete or cement produced by the project in the reporting period, in tCO2eq.
the Ecoinvent database, presented in Appendix 1, with a 20% deduction applied for conservativeness.
Other sources of emission factors may be submitted by the Project Developer, and approved by the Rainbow Certification Team and the VVB. Any emission factor must meet the data requirements outlined in the Rainbow Standard Rules, and come from traceable, transparent, unbiased, and reputable sources. A conservative uncertainty deduction shall be applied if the value is not project-specific.
is calculated in Eq. 13.
is calculated in Eq. 14.
additional energy use required for carbon capture: Project Developers shall isolate the amount of energy used at the site that is only for carbon capture, that is not related to the site's BAU activities.
energy or material use from purification and processing of CO2 streams, for example through chemical (e.g. amine-based absorption) or physical treatment (cryogenic separation or membrane separation).
For infrastructure calculations and emission factors, see the Infrastructure and machinery module. For energy use calculations and emission factors, see the Processing and energy use module.
Induced emissions from the transport of CO2 to the mineralization site shall be included. This may include transport via truck, pipeline, ship, or other methods.
For transport calculations and emission factors, see the Transportation module.
The following three methods are recommended for measuring and reporting CO2 leakage during transport, but other methods suggested by the Project Developer may be considered on a case by case basis:
Difference in CO2 shipped/received: Project Developers record the amount of CO2 leaving the capture site, and the amount entering the mineralization process. Any difference is assumed to be CO2 leaked during transport, and counted as project induced emissions.
Literature-based leakage rates: Project Developers may propose conservative leakage rates from scientific literature, if they are well documented, from reputable sources, and are representative of the project-specific technology.
Justification that leakage is negligible, under at least one of the following conditions:
it is 100% biogenic and/or atmospheric CO2, or
it came from a flue gas stream, where the unused flue gas is emitted anyway, or
transport technologies are proven to have negligible CO2 leakage (e.g. pressurized insulated containers)
represents the emissions from any additional infrastructure or machinery used for CO2 capture, calculated using the Infrastructure and machinery module, in tCO2eq.
represents the emissions from transporting CO2 to the mineralization site, calculated using the Transportation module, in tCO2eq.
represents the emissions from fugitive CO2 leaked during CO2 transport, in tCO2eq. It may be calculated using Eq 10, 11, 12, or a different approach.
Where,
was described in Eq. 9.
represents the total mass of CO2 leaving the CO2 supplier and destined for the mineralization site, throughout the reporting period, in tCO2eq.
represents the mass of gaseous CO2 entering the mineralization process (e.g. entering a reactor) throughout the reporting period, in tCO2eq. It may be calculated using Eq. 20, or provided via other operations records.
Where,
was described in Eq. 9.
was described in Eq. 10.
represents the default leakage rate of the given transport mode (e.g. truck, pipeline...), for all transport modes used in project operations, in tCO2 lost/tCO2, or as a fraction.
Where,
was described in Eq. 9.
represents the truck or ship transport segment considered, in tCO2*km.
represents the default leakage rate of the given transport mode (e.g. truck, pipeline...), in tCO2 lost/tCO2*km.
represents the emissions from any additional energy or mineralization materials used in feedstock processing (e.g. griding, heating...), calculated using the Processing and energy use module, in tCO2eq.
represents the emissions from transporting feedstock from its production site to the mineralization site, calculated using the Transportation module, in tCO2eq.
additives to increase dissolution rates (where dissolution of metal ions is the precursor to mineralization )
water
For energy use calculations and emission factors, see the Processing and energy use module.
All significant embodied emissions from machinery and infrastructure directly related to the mineralization process shall be included. For infrastructure calculations and emission factors, see the Infrastructure and machinery module.
Transport of the final product shall be included for any transport beyond 50 km, which is assumed to be the standard transport distance for conventional concrete and aggregates.
This is included because it cannot necessarily be assumed that the project and baseline transport is the same. Indeed, concrete is a commodity with relatively localized markets, whereas the project's innovative product may have buyers that are outside the typical radius of basic concrete transport.
For calculations and emission factors, see the Transportation module.
Project Developers shall either provide the amount of CO2 leaked or vented from a mineralization reactor, or justify why this amount can be assumed to be negligible.
Proof of the amount of CO2 leaked may include but is not limited to:
sensor measurements (actual sensor readings, or the amount of the detection threshold if the measured amount is zero)
reactor design documents showing an allowable or target limit of CO2 leakage
any approach mentioned in Article 41-46 of the EU ETS monitoring and reporting
mass balance of CO2 combining gas inflow-outflow and solid sample measurements, described .
Fugitive CO2 emissions may be considered negligible if:
it is 100% biogenic and/or atmospheric CO2, or
it came from a flue gas stream, where the unused flue gas is emitted anyway, or
reactor design documents show negligible (<0.5%) CO2 leakage, and Project Developers prove adherence to reactor maintenance and calibration
This may be measured as CO2 leaked per hour of operation, or per tonne of carbonated material produced. The allocation of carbon type (fossil/calcination vs biogenic/atmospheric) shall be determined by the process detailed in the section.
represents the emissions from infrastructure or machinery used for mineralization (i.e. reactors), calculated using the Infrastructure and machinery module, in tCO2eq per reporting period.
represents the emissions from transporting the carbonated material from its production site to the user, calculated using the Transportation module, in tCO2eq per reporting period. It is only considered if the transport distance is greater than 50 km.
represents the emissions from direct CO2 leakage from the reactor/mineralization site to the atmosphere, in tCO2eq per reporting period. Project Developers shall calculate this in external files, using their preferred measurement setup, and report the final value per reporting period in the MRV.
represents the amount of carbonated material produced by the project in the reporting period, in tonnes of dry material.
Where,
was described in Eq. 15.
represents the concentration of CO2 equivalent in the carbonated project material, derived from measured carbonate content using an approved solid sample measurement (TGA or dry combustion), in tCO2eq/t of dry material. It is calculated in equations below for each measurement method.
represents the concentration of CO2 equivalent in the non-carbonated control material, derived from measured carbonate content using the same measurement approach as for . It is calculated in equations below for each measurement method.
Project Developers shall use either Eq. 17 or Eq. 18 to measure project and control .
Where,
represents the concentration of CO2eq in the material, tCO2eq/t of dry material, derived from measured carbonate content using TGA. The same equation shall be used for .
represents the mass loss percentage of CO2, directly measured using TGA at 600–800 °C, in % mass loss or tCO2 lost/100 t dry material. Divided by 100 to convert to t/t.
Where,
represents the concentration of CO2eq in the material, tCO2eq/t of dry material, derived from measured carbonate content using dry combustion. The same equation shall be used for .
represents the measured inorganic or total carbon content of the material, in % mass of carbon or t C/100 t dry material. Divided by 100 to convert to t/t.
represents the molecular weight conversion factor between carbon and CO2, and equals 3.67.
represents the daily recorded mass of gaseous CO2 exiting the carbonation process (e.g. exiting a reactor), in tCO2eq, calculated in Eq. 20.
represents the unreacted CO2 stuck in pore space of the carbonated material, in tCO2eq, calculated in Eq. 21. It shall only be included for projects that carbonate solid materials (e.g. carbonating SCMs to add to concrete).
Where,
represents the flow of CO2 for types of CO2, either inflow or outflow from the carbonation process, in tCO2eq/day.
represents the volume of CO2 inflow or outflow of the carbonation process, at standard temperature and pressure, in m3 of gas/day.
represents the weighted average daily concentration of CO2 inflow or outflow of the carbonation process, at standard temperature and pressure, in tCO2/m3 of gas.
represents CO2 trapped in pore space in the carbonated material, in tCO2eq/t carbonated material. This term is only required for projects carbonating solid materials, to add to e.g. concrete or asphalt.
represents the molar concentration of an ideal gas (in this case, CO2), in mol/m3. Under standard conditions, the terms would be total gas pressure ( ), temperature ( ), and the ideal gas constant ( ), for a total term value of 40.89 mol/m3.
represents the gas void fraction of the material (i.e. fraction of volume per m3 that is pore space), unitless. This value may be measured, or estimated using secondary literature for well-defined, common, homogeneous alkaline feedstocks.
represents the molar fraction of CO2 in the pore gas, measured via gas analysis or conservatively assumed, unitless. It can conservatively be assumed to equal 1 (100% CO2 atmosphere).
represents the molar mass of CO2, which equals 0.000044 t/mol.
represents the bulk density of the dry carbonated material, measured or estimated using secondary sources, in kg/m3.
Amount and type of infrastructure/machinery used for CO2 capture*
kg, tonne, or m3; and material type
Technical design documents
Amount and type of infrastructure/machinery used for mineralization*
kg, tonne, or m3; and material type
Technical design documents
Transport distance or amount of fuel, and transport mode, for alkaline feedstock delivery
tonne*km, or kg fuel, or L fuel
Operations records
Baseline removal calculations from alkaline feedstock mineralization
kgCO2eq/tonne feedstock
Models, calculations
Baseline and project concrete use phase carbonation calculations
kgCO2eq/tonne concrete
Models, calculations
Amount cement needed in project scenario**
kg cement used/reporting period
Operations records
Amount cement needed in baseline scenario**
kg cement equivalent calculated/ reporting period
Cement mix designs, statements from clients, mandatory concrete mixes
Cement mix design and emission factor for avoided cement**
kgCO2eq/tonne cement
Project-specific sources (e.g. EPDs), low-carbon cement thresholds (e.g. provided by the Global Cement and Concrete Association ), or Ecoinvent
Energy and/or material use from CO2 capture
kg, liter, kWh, MWh, GWh, m3; and material type
Operations records
Energy and/or material use from CO2 purification
kg, liter, kWh, MWh, GWh, m3; and material type
Operations records
Energy and/or material use from alkaline feedstock processing
kg, liter, kWh, MWh, GWh, m3; and material type
Operations records
Energy and/or material use from mineralization
kg, liter, kWh, MWh, GWh, m3; and material type
Operations records
Transport distance or amount of fuel, and transport mode, for carbonated material delivery (if distance >50 km)
tonne*km, or kg fuel, or L fuel
Operations records
Amount of carbonated material produced
tonne
Operations records
bulk density of the dry carbonated material (if carbonating solid materials)
kg/m3
measured or estimated using secondary sources
Waste, no value
Recycled concrete aggregate
Feedstock enters the project system boundary with no emissions. The system boundary starts with the transport step where feedstock is diverted from its BAU use and sent to the project site, or the first non-BAU treatment step, whichever comes first.
Produced for the sole purpose of mineralization
Olivine
All feedstock production/mining/sourcing emissions shall be counted towards project induced emissions.
Valuable product, but not produced for the purpose of mineralization
Ordinary Portland cement (OPC) for carbonation curing
Production emissions are excluded, because they would have happened anyway/would be the same in the baseline scenario. The system boundary shall only include any processing steps specifically to prepare the feedstock for mineralization.
Valuable co-product
Steel slag
Amount of CO2 leaving CO2 capture facility
t CO2 per reporting period
Operations records, sales contracts, invoices
Repartition of CO2 types purchased, entering mineralization facility
fraction
Operations records, sales contracts, invoices
Transport distance or amount of fuel, and transport mode, for CO2 delivery
tonne*km, or kg fuel, or L fuel
Operations records
Amount and type of alkaline feedstock used
tonne/reporting period
Operations records
TGA: Carbon storage in project and control materials
mass loss percentage of CO2
Laboratory measurements
Dry combustion: Carbon storage in project and control materials
% mass of carbon or t C/100 t dry material
Laboratory measurements
Volumetric flow of CO2 inflow and outflow
m3 of gas/day
Primary measurements, sensors
Concentration of CO2 inflow and outflow
t CO2/m3 gas
Primary measurements, sensors
gas void fraction of the material (if carbonating solid materials)
fraction of volume per m3
measured or estimated using secondary sources
molar fraction of CO2 in the pore gas (if carbonating solid materials)
unitless
gas analysis or conservatively assumed to equal 1
The project system boundary shall include only the activities that are additional to the business as usual (BAU) scenario.
The baseline scenario system boundary shall include the processes that would have occurred in the absence of the project.
For alkaline feedstocks other than cement, Project Developers shall assess the natural mineralization of the feedstock upon exposure to atmospheric CO2, if it hadn't been used by the project for accelerated carbonation. The extent of natural carbonation depends on the:
alternative fate of alkaline feedstock
type and duration of exposure to CO2
mineralogy
For direct use of cement as a feedstock (e.g. carbonation curing), some natural mineralization of feedstock occurs during its use-phase in concrete. If the project technology only accelerates the rate of this carbonation, rather than causing additional net carbonation gains, then the portion of mineralization that would have occurred anyway (albeit at a slower pace) shall not be credited. Project Developers shall demonstrate that the CO2 mineralized by the project would not have occurred naturally without the project intervention. This may be justified by:
The fundamental design or operating principles of the technology, or
Selecting an appropriate post-treatment measurement time that excludes mineralization likely to occur during early use-phase conditions, or

The baseline scenario structure remains valid for the entire crediting period but may be significantly revised earlier if:
The Project Developer notifies Rainbow of a substantial change in project operations or baseline conditions, and/or
The methodology is revised, affecting the baseline scenario.
The specific values within the baseline scenario will be updated during each crediting period, using project data to accurately reflect the equivalent of the project’s operations.
A share of the production emissions shall be allocated to the co-product, preferably based on economic allocation
Percentage (%)
Track records from the refurbishing site
(Optional) The average buyback price per device category.
Currency
(Euro - € or dollar - $)
Invoices
The distribution of devices in the baseline and project scenarios is assumed to be the same, and is therefore excluded from quantifications. This is a conservative assumption, because new devices in the baseline scenario are likely manufactured in Asia or the USA and transported long distances. In contrast, the project scenario consists of mostly inter-EU shipping of devices across much shorter distances.
Packaging, use, and waste treatment of Device B are assumed to be the same in the baseline and project scenarios, and are therefore excluded from quantifications.
Refurbished devices are assumed to have shorter lifetimes than new devices, as presented in Table 3. To account for this difference, it is assumed that the amount of device production avoided in the baseline scenario is proportional to the ratio of new and refurbished device lifetimes. See the Baseline Scope section for more details. Lifetimes for Apple and non-Apple devices are assumed to be the same.
Detailed project data on the refurbishing process is rarely available. It is a manual process, and most impacts in the life cycle come from production of spare parts. Therefore, impacts of the refurbishing process are assumed to equal the ratio of impacts of new and refurbished devices in the detailed life cycle assessment on electronic device refurbishing, published by The French Agency for Ecological Transition (Agence de la transition écologique, ADEME), referred to hereafter as the ADEME study. Refurbishing impact ratios for Apple and non-Apple devices are assumed to be the same. See Refurbishing process Full refurbishment impacts section, for more details.
For the device type "monitor", if Project Developers do not have monitor/screen size data and are therefore unable to provide a distribution of monitor/screen sizes, it is assumed that all monitors fall into the <25" screen category. This assumption is conservative, as smaller monitors are associated with lower impacts from new device production, resulting in reduced avoided emissions.
2
Laptop
164
18
1.6
5
3
MacBook
155
17
1.7
5
3
PC
216
22
5.4
5
3
iMac
240
25
4.5
5
3
Tablet
83
10
0.5
3
2
iPad
58
7
0.5
3
2
Gaming console
293
68
3.0
5
3
Monitor <25 cm
352
36
4.5
7
4
Monitor >25 cm
538
55
6.6
7
4
represents the number of devices by type sold in a functioning state, and shall be provided by the Project Developer for each verification.
represents the fraction of input used devices of device type i that are recycled, saved for spare parts, or not successfully refurbished to a functioning state by the project, and shall be provided by the Project Developer for each verification.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the transport of devices collected for refurbishing in the project scenario, in kgCOeq.
was calculated in Equation 1.
represents the weight in kilograms of device i, according to the presented in Table 3.
represents the distance traveled for device collection in km, provided by the Project Developer per sourcing country/city () and device type ().
represents the fraction of the devices collected per sourcing country/city () and device type ().
represents the emission factor for transport in kgCOeq/kg.km according to the ecoinvent database and includes truck or air freight. Refer to for the ecoinvent processes used.
and were described in Equation 1.
is described in the section Calculations project e-waste collection section of the Project scenario.
EF_{recycling.\ i}\represents the emission factor of recycling each device type. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent processes used.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the transport of devices/scrap not suitable for refurbishing that are sent to recycling, in kgCOeq
and were described in Equation 1.
is described in the sectionCalculations project e-waste collection.
represents the distance in km until the waste treatment facility. If not known, this value is considered 100km.
represents the emission factor of truck transport. Refer to for the ecoinvent processes used.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions in the project scenario e-waste treatment of non-refurbished devices, in kgCOeq.
PC
14%
iMac
14%
Gaming console
14%
Monitor (both sizes)
14%
is calculated in the section Calculations project e-waste collection
represents the fraction of devices of type undergoing the light refurbishing process and sold in a functional state.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the light refurbishing of a device type.
is calculated in Equation 6.
alcohol, paper, cloth and electricity represent the amount of cleaning alcohol, paper and cloth needed to clean a device. These amounts were taken per device type from the ADEME study, pages 45, 77, and 103.
represents the emission factor, in kgCOeq, for cleaning alcohol composed of 70% ethylene and 30% water. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the emission factor, in kgCOeq, of paper. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the emission factor, in kgCOeq, of cloth used for cleaning. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the emission factor, in kgCOeq, of electricity in the national grid where the project is located, used for software and functionality testing. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
where,
represents the number of devices of type undergoing the full refurbishing process and sold in a functional state.
is described in the section Calculations project e-waste collection.
represents the fraction of devices of type undergoing the full refurbishing process and sold in a functional state.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the full refurbishing of a device type.
is calculated in Equation 8.
represents the rate of full refurbishment activities modeled per device type i. This reflects the "amount" of refurbishment used as an input for that device. See Appendix 3 for its calculation and the amounts.
represents the emission factor, in kgCOeq, of one full refurbishment activity. This activity includes a mix of ecoinvent processes, described in and section .
where,
represents the sum of residual GHG emissions from the device's first life allocated to the refurbished device, for all devices.
is calculated in Equation 6.
represents the average price paid for the collected used devices of type i (also called the buyback price).
represents the average selling price of a new device of type .
represents the emission factor in kgCOeq/kg due to the production of the new device type . The emission factors of new devices are presented in Table 3.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions from secondary transport.
is the number of devices of device type that are sent for secondary transport.
and are described in the Calculations project e-waste treatment.
represents the distance traveled for secondary device transport in km per device type .
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions in the project scenario refurbishing process LCA step, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in Equation 1.
is described in Equation 2.
represents the distance of the device collection in kilometers, which is assumed to be 100 km.
represents the emission factor of truck transport in kgCOeq/kg.km. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent process used.
and are described in the section Calculations baseline e-waste collection.
is described in Equation 2.
represents the project's country waste reuse and recycling rate. These rates are presented in Appendix 1.
and represent the landfilling and incineration rates, respectively, described in section E-waste treatment.
represents the emission factor of treating e-waste via landfill, in kgCOeq/kg using ecoinvent database, according to the breakdown of materials on pg. 11 of the ADEME study:
treatment of waste plastic, mixture, sanitary landfill = 50%
treatment of waste glass, sanitary landfill = 10%
treatment of waste aluminum, sanitary landfill = 40%
represents the emission factor of treating e-waste via incineration, in kgCOeq/kg using ecoinvent database according to the following split :
treatment of waste glass, municipal incineration = 10%
treatment of waste plastic, consumer electronics, municipal incineration = 50%
treatment of scrap copper, municipal incineration = 20%
treatment of scrap aluminum, municipal incineration = 20%
\textbf{(Eq.15)}\ E_{B.separate\ waste} = \sum(N_{i.\ collected}*W_{.i}*{RR_{rate.i}}_{}*\ EF_{recycling.i}\)
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the e-waste treatment of separately collected devices.
,, and are describe above.
represents the emission factor of recycling device i, in kgCOeq/kg. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent process implemented.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions in the baseline scenario e-waste treatment life cycle stage, in kgCOeq.
Gaming console
6%
94%
Monitor
6%
94%
was described in Equation 1.
refers to the market share (in percentage) of new devices sold annually per device type i, as presented in Table 1.
represents the emission factor in kgCOeq/kg due to the production of the new device type i. The emission factors of new devices are presented in Table 3.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the refurbishing of used devices according to the market shares in the baseline scenario.
was described in Equation 1.
refers to the market share (in percentage) of refurbished devices sold annually per device type i, as presented in Table 5.
and are described in Equation 9.
Refurbished devices are assumed to have a shorter lifespan than new devices, as described in the Baseline Scope section. This is accounted for in the following adjustment to avoided emissions from new device manufacturing:
where,
represents the expected lifespan of a refurbished device i in number of years, as presented in Table 3.
represents the expected lifespan of a new device i in number of years, as presented in Table 3.
The total GHG emission for this life cycle stage are calculated according to the following equation:
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions in the baseline scenario new device production life cycle stage, in kgCOeq.
Market share refurbished vs new (percent)
Table 5
This secondary data is highly influential and is estimated to have low uncertainty for smartphones, where precise data were available for many countries. For other device types, there is moderate uncertainty.
Residual value of input devices
Table 4,
This measurement comes from device buyback prices and new device prices. For smartphones and tablets, there is low uncertainty here because buyback data came directly from Project Developers, and a large and representative sample of new device prices was taken. For other device types, the lack of buyback price data leads to moderate uncertainty.
WEEE statistics
These values have moderate uncertainty because they come from macro-level national datasets.
Parameter
Unit
Source proof
Amount of sold devices (sold in a functioning state) during the reference year, by type and sourcing country (listed in Table 3).*
Units of device, by type
Track records from the refurbishing site
Mass of devices (optional)
grams/device type
Internal document containing this parameter
Distance traveled during collection from the sourcing place/country until the refurbishing site, and mode of transport (road or air freight).*
km
Track records from the refurbishing site
If applicable, secondary transport to send collected devices from the project site to another more specialized refurbishing site.*
Number of devices by type, and distance (km)
Track records from the refurbishing site/invoices
Device type
Emissions new (kgCO2eq)
Emissions refurbished (kgCO2eq)
Average mass (kg)
Lifetime new (year)
Lifetime refurbished (year)
Smartphone
49
4
0.2
3
2
iPhone
64
5
0.2
Smartphone
11%
iPhone
14%
Tablet
20%
iPad
12%
Laptop
14%
Macbook
14%
Smartphone/iPhone
13%
87%
Tablet/iPad
7%
93%
Laptop/Macbook
8%
92%
PC/iMac
8%
Emissions new device (kgCO2eq)
Table 3
For Apple devices, an average emission factor for new device production was taken from recent models, and the data samples are presented in Appendix 2. There is low uncertainty in the data samples, since the LCAs come from the manufacturer for the specific model. There is moderate uncertainty related to the distribution of these values, where the different devices have coefficients of variation (standard deviation/mean) of 6-36%.
For smartphones, the emission factor from ecoinvent has been thoroughly researched and modified to better represent average modern smartphones. Still, there is large variability in smartphone design, and there is high uncertainty in this one representative value.
Other devices come from ecoinvent processes and similar to smartphones, have variable designs, so there is high uncertainty in using one representative value.
Impact of refurbished (%)
Table 3
This percentage comes from the detailed ADEME refurbishing LCA. That study uses high quality primary data so the values themselves have low uncertainty.
Average mass (kg)
Table 3
The same analysis can be applied from “Emissions new device (kgCO2eq)”. However this parameter has a smaller impact on the avoided GHG emissions calculations, so the uncertainty can be considered lower.
Lifetime new and refurbished (years)
Table 3


The baseline scenario structure remains valid for the entire crediting period but may be significantly revised earlier if:
The Project Developer notifies Rainbow of a substantial change in project operations or baseline conditions, and/or
The methodology is revised, affecting the baseline scenario.
The specific values within the baseline scenario will be updated during each crediting period, using project data to accurately reflect the equivalent of the project’s operations.
Percent of input used devices, broken down by device type, that undergo:
light refurbishment,
full refurbishment,
are recycled, and
are saved for spare parts or sold as non-functional devices.*
3
92%
These values come from the detailed and are well within the range of expected lifetimes found elsewhere in the literature. Nonetheless, these estimates have a large impact on the results and are expected to have moderate uncertainty.
represents the induced GHG emissions from the project during the verification period, in tonnes of COeq, calculated in Eq. 8.
represents the amount of cement used by the project in the reporting period, in tonnes of cement.
represents the emission factor for cement, in tonnes of COeq per tonne of cement. Possible sources for this emission factor are described in the section.
where,
represents the baseline scenario emissions from manufacturing and using a functionally equivalent amount of cement for the reporting period, in tonnes of COeq.
represents the amount of cement needed in the baseline scenario to fulfill the same function as the project-manufactured cement. This is expected to be higher than the amount needed in the project scenario, thanks to the project's improvements.
represents the emission factor for cement, as described in Eq. 4. The same emission factor shall be used for the project and baseline scenario.
where,
represents the avoided GHG emissions from the project scenario, in tonnes of COeq.
was calculated in Equation 5.
was calculated in Equation 4.
particle size
Project Developers shall either:
estimate baseline removals in alkaline feedstock using a description and proof of common practices for managing the alkaline material, mineralization models, scientific literature, or internal experiments, or
only if the feedstock is recycled concrete aggregate, opt for a default assumed carbon removal rate in the baseline scenario of
Opting for a default assumed carbon removal rate in the baseline scenario of 125 kgCO2eq/tonne of carbonated cement.
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the . The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of RCCs to eliminate with the discount factor.
An uncertainty assessment is presented below for all aspects of GHG quantification set at the methodology level. The findings from this assessment are then applied at the project level, where project-specific GHG quantification also undergoes an uncertainty assessment.
The overall project GHG quantification uncertainty is determined by qualitatively combining both the methodology-level and project-specific uncertainties for each identified source of uncertainty.
Module name
Biochar application to soils
Module category
Carbon storage
Methodology name
Biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS)
Version
2.2
Methodology ID
RBW-BICRS-CS-BCSOIL-V2.2
Release date
July 11th, 2025
This is a Carbon Storage Module and covers the biochar application to soils. This module is part of the Rainbow BiCRS methodology, which allows Project Developers to choose the relevant modules for their project, and shall be used with the necessary accompanying modules.
This is a Carbon Storage Module and covers the biochar application to soils. This module is part of the Rainbow BiCRS methodology, which allows Project Developers to choose the relevant modules for their project, and shall be used with the necessary accompanying modules.
See more details on how modules are organized in the .
Projects may be designed to prioritize bio-oil or bioenergy production, where biochar is the co-product. Such projects may still be eligible for removal Rainbow Carbon Credits under this module, if they meet all criteria outlined herein.
This module issues removal RCCs on the basis of biochar end use/delivery, i.e. application to soils and permanent storage, not on the basis of biochar production.
This module covers industrial biochar projects that meet all of the following criteria:
Biochar may be applied directly to soils or incorporated into soil-related products, such as soil additives, horticultural substrates, potting soils, fertilizer mixes, or compost.
Projects may be designed to prioritize bio-oil or bioenergy production, where biochar is the co-product. Such projects may still be eligible for removal Rainbow Carbon Credits under this module, if they meet all criteria outlined herein.
This module also covers any potential avoided horticultural products from the use of biochar.
This module issues removal RCCs on the basis of biochar use/delivery, i.e. application to soils and permanent storage, not on the basis of biochar production.
The Project Developer and entity eligible for receiving carbon finance may be either:
the operator of the biochar production site, or
land owners or managers who purchase biochar and apply it to their soil.
Pyrolyzer and gasification equipment manufacturers are not eligible Project Developers.
A production batch is the biochar produced under the same conditions regarding production temperature and feedstock mix. It is assumed that all biochar from the same production batch has similar characteristics (i.e. , moisture content…).
Specifically, the definition of a production batch follows the European Biochar Certificate Guidelines definition, where pyrolysis temperature and biomass feedstock composition must not change by more than 20%.
Measurements and reporting are performed at the production batch level. Verification and credit issuance may be done per production batch, or annually on the cumulative production batches from that year.
A production batch has a maximum validity of 365 days, after which biochar shall be considered part of a different production batch even if conditions are unchanged. In other words, the production batch ID number resets and a new production batch is created, and new monitoring requirements applied, after 365 days, regardless of if feedstock or pyrolysis conditions change or not.
The eligibility criteria requirements specific to this module are detailed in the sections below. Other eligibility criteria requirements shall be taken from the accompanying modules and methodologies:
Projects issuing removal RCCs from biochar application to soil may claim one of two different permanence horizons, depending on their method: a permanence horizon of 100 years or 1000 years.
Permanence is ensured by measuring one of the following characteristics of biochar that are known indicators of carbon stability:
100 year pathway: Hydrogen and organic carbon content (). must be less than 0.7 to be considered eligible for 100-year permanent removals.
1000 year pathway: Random reflectance. The fraction of the biochar residual organic carbon that has a random reflectance of 2% or higher can be considered inertinite, which is an extremely stable, permanent storage of mineral-like organic carbon.
The distinction between the two permanence horizons is supplementary, qualitative information that does not affect the inherent attributes of the removal RCC.
These indicators are suitable proof that a substantial fraction of the carbon present in biochar is permanently stable. The specific amount of permanently stored carbon is determined using the models and equations detailed in the section.
These indicators shall be monitored for each production batch according to the Rainbow .
Project Developers shall fill in the to evaluate the risk of carbon storage reversal, based on social, economic, natural, and delivery risks.
See the section for general requirements on this topic. Since both biochar producers and users are eligible for removal RCCs under this methodology, additional details are provided here.
If both the biochar producer and the farmer intend to issue carbon credits, they must agree on how to divide the annual biochar production for credit issuance. The credited biochar amount must be tracked and reported separately, governed by agreements outlining which party receives credits.
Since both biochar producers and users are eligible for removal RCCs under this methodology, additional details are provided here.
If only one party seeks to issue carbon credits, this must be proven through signed agreements, minimizing the risk of double counting.
If both the biochar producer and the farmer intend to issue carbon credits, they must agree on how to divide the annual biochar production for credit issuance. The credited biochar amount must be tracked and reported separately, governed by agreements outlining which party receives credits.
If Project Developers can prove that their biochar product replaces a specific and known amount of a specific product, (e.g. a known fraction of a horticultural substrate mix), then the product may be considered as replaced and avoided. The Project Developer shall justify the amount of material actually replaced by biochar, and may not simply use a 1:1 mass replacement ratio. A non-exhaustive list of possible replaced products include:
Horticultural peat/peat moss
Lime
Perlite and vermiculite
Synthetic mineral fertilizers (only when biochar is used as an ingredient in fertilizer mixes, not when it is directly applied to soils)
Project Developers must prove that:
the biochar is an appropriate and realistic substitute for the avoided product, and
that the user of the biochar actually uses less of the horticultural product than they did previously
By default, it shall be assumed that biochar application to soils does not replace any measurable, verifiable product.
If only removal RCCs are issued, then this eligibility criteria is not applicable.
Note that avoidance from is covered in a a separate module.
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Projects must follow all national, local, and European (if located in Europe) environmental regulations related to, for example, pyrolysis, gasification, waste feedstock management, and biochar spreading on soils.
Feedstock sustainability risks shall be taken from the .
Biochar applied to soils must be below the pollutant concentration thresholds outlined in Table 2, defined by the World Biochar Certificate Guidelines (for WBC-Agro). This shall be measured for each production batch.
Table 2 The thresholds for pollutant concentrations allowed in biochar, as detailed in the World Biochar Certificate Guidelines.
Project Developers shall fill in the , to evaluate the identified environmental and social risks of projects. The identified risks include:
Heavy metal or other pollutants in biochar applied to agricultural soils
The GHG quantification instructions from all other BiCRS modules used by the project must be used in conjunction with the present module in order to obtain full life-cycle GHG quantifications.
The system boundary of this quantification section starts at the arrival of biochar at the site of permanent incorporation/application (i.e. field for spreading, mixing into potting soil...) and ends at the biochar end of life, after accounting for decay and re-emission in its end use application.
The system boundary of this quantification section starts at the arrival of biochar at the site of permanent incorporation/application (i.e. field for spreading, mixing into potting soil...) and ends at the biochar end of life, after accounting for decay and re-emission in its end use application.
Quantification shall be done at a minimum for each biochar production batch, and may be done more frequently for continuous issuance.
GHG emissions covered in this module include:
Permanent carbon storage modeling
Production of avoided baseline scenario materials
The required primary data for GHG reduction calculations from projects are presented in Table 2. These data shall be provided for each production batch and made publicly available.
Table 2 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source for initial project certification and validation. All primary data sources listed here are required to be monitored and updated during verification (see Monitoring Plan section).
The ecoinvent database version 3.11 (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in .
No other secondary data sources are used in this module.
The rules outlined at the methodology-level in the shall be applied for allocating GHG emissions between co-products.
By default, biochar application to soils does not replace any product.
The fraction of biochar with an below 2% does not contribute to any permanent carbon storage. This fraction, classified as semi-inertinite rather than inertinite, likely plays a role in long-term carbon storage. However, due to limited research on its quantification, it is conservatively excluded from this analysis.
All biochar from the same production batch has the same characteristics (e.g. , , ).
The baseline scenario for the purpose of Removal vs Avoidance RCCs issuance is detailed below.
For removal RCCs, there is no baseline from this module because it is assumed that there is no significant share of the project activity already occurring in business-as-usual. Therefore, the baseline for removal credits is zero and is omitted from calculations.
According to the Rainbow Procedures Manual, this assumption shall be re-assessed at a during the mandatory methodology revision process, and any changes to this assumption would be .
Note that baseline scenario carbon sequestration may be included for the project from the .
For avoidance RCCs, a baseline scenario shall only be considered if the project meets the and is eligible to claim avoidance RCCs.
By default, it shall be assumed that biochar application to soils does not replace any measurable, verifiable product.
If Project Developers can prove that their biochar product replaces a specific and known amount of a specific product, then the product may be considered as replaced and avoided.
Examples of ecoinvent processes for these products are presented in
The baseline scenario for the purpose of Removal vs Avoidance RCCs issuance is detailed below.
For removal RCCs, there is no baseline from this module because it is assumed that there is no significant share of the project activity already occurring in business-as-usual. Therefore, the baseline for removal credits is zero and is omitted from calculations.
According to the Rainbow Procedures Manual, this assumption shall be re-assessed at a during the mandatory methodology revision process, and any changes to this assumption would be .
Note that baseline scenario carbon sequestration may be included for the project from the .
A baseline scenario shall only be considered if the project meets the and seeks to claim avoidance RCCs.
By default, it shall be assumed that biochar application to soils does not replace any measurable, verifiable product.
If Project Developers can prove that their biochar product replaces a specific and known amount of a specific product, then the product may be considered as replaced and avoided.
Examples of ecoinvent processes for these products are presented in
Project Developers must choose between one of two approaches to quantify the total carbon removals from their biochar product, as described in the . A single approach must be used consistently throughout each reporting period, though a different approach may be chosen for subsequent reporting periods.
, or
.
This approach is based on research from Woolf et al., 2021, and the IPCC modeling method. It is rooted in soil ecology and soil biochemistry disciplines. The permanent fraction of biochar carbon remaining after 100 years ( ) is modeled according to the local average annual soil temperature.
Soil temperature shall be obtained for the location of each biochar spreading/end use event, using the GPS coordinates provided in the and the global soil temperature dataset from Lembrechts et al., 2021. The Rainbow Certification Team can provide soil temperature values for Project Developers based on the provided GPS coordinates.
The permanent fraction of biochar carbon remaining after 100 years ( Azzi et al., 2024, and is least likely to overestimate carbon removals.
For verification, Project Developers shall provide primary project data in the form of laboratory measurements for and following the .
Table 3 Soil temperature ranges are categorized and their corresponding c and m regression coefficients are presented, which are used in Eq. 1 below to calculate . Values are taken from Woolf et al., 2021.
This approach is based on the research from Sanei et al., 2024, and is rooted in the organic petrology and geochemistry disciplines. This approach is built upon research showing that fractions of inertinite in biochar samples are:
inert and permanent and will not re-release their carbon for at least 1000 years.
represented by the fraction of residual (i.e. not reactive, not labile) organic carbon in the sample with a Random Reflectance () of 2% or higher.
For verification, Project Developers shall provide primary project data in the form of laboratory measurements for distribution, labile organic carbon content, and moisture content for each production batch, following the .
To determine the inertinite fraction of the biochar's organic carbon, first the labile carbon fraction is measured and subtracted from total organic carbon content, and only the residual organic carbon content is considered.
Next, random reflectance measurements are used to determine the fraction of residual organic carbon that is classified as inertinite:
The fraction of the distribution with an above 2% represents the fraction of the biochar carbon that is stored permanently for 1000 years.
The fraction of the distribution with an below 2% represents the fraction of biochar carbon that is not permanently stored, and for which no removal RCCs are issued.
distribution shall be based on at least 500 measurements, yielding a frequency distribution diagram similar to the examples in Figure 1a and 1b.
Rainbow is actively monitoring ongoing research and seeking expert advice on the potential development of a third approach that uses measurements as proxies for inertinite content. For example, if the value is less than 0.2, it could be interpreted as indicating that 95% of the biochar is inertinite. While this simplification has been suggested by experts and holds promise, it is currently considered insufficiently rigorous due to a lack of supporting evidence and clear guidance.
Rainbow is actively monitoring ongoing research and seeking expert advice on the potential development of a third approach that uses measurements as proxies for inertinite content. For example, if the value is less than 0.2, it could be interpreted as indicating that 95% of the biochar is inertinite. While this simplification has been suggested by experts and holds promise, it is currently considered insufficiently rigorous due to a lack of supporting evidence and clear guidance.
The three assumptions presented in the section have moderate uncertainty, but the most conservative approach is taken in the quantifications.
The baseline scenario selection (if applicable) has low uncertainty, because the specific circumstances, amount and type of baseline material must be proven by the Project Developer.
The equations and models have low uncertainty. The model for 100-year permanence from Woolf et al., 2021 has moderate uncertainty because it is a model fitted to experimental data, which always introduces variability. The equations for 1000-year permanence from Sanei et al., 2024 have low uncertainty because they are basic conversion equations.
The uncertainty at the methodology level is estimated to be low. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 3% for projects under this methodology.
The following indicators shall be measured for each production batch:
Carbon content (organic and/or total)
moisture content
random reflectance and residual organic carbon (only if applying for 1000-year permanence)
Measurements shall be performed by laboratories with at least one quality assurance accreditation, such as:
ISO/IEC 17025
CEN/TS 17225-1
ISO 10694
Unaccredited laboratories from academic settings shall be evaluated on a case by case basis by the VVB and the Rainbow Certification Team.
The sampling procedure detailed in sections below and summarized in Figure 1 is the recommended approach for representative sampling. However, Project Developers may implement their own approach if it is detailed in the PDD and in ; ensures one representative sample per production batch; addresses samples and composite samples amount and frequency; and ensures homogenization. The VVB and the Rainbow Certification team must validate the rigor and representativeness of the proposed sampling approach.
The recommended approach sampling requirements are based on the following sources:
EU Fertilising Products Regulation (EU) 2019/1009
European Biochar Certificate Guidelines Annex 4 Representative Sampling
One representative sample per Production Batch shall be created and sent for laboratory testing. This sample ensures that any within-batch variability is captured in the measurements.
Table 1 details the number of composite samples that shall be taken per Production Batch to obtain one representative sample, based on the EU Fertilising Products Regulation (EU) 2019/1009.
The representative sample size should be be 24 liters * the n number of composite samples per Production Batch detailed in Table 1.
Table 1 Recommendations for the number of composite samples of biochar to take, based on the site's annual biochar production output.
The European Biochar Certificate Guidelines Annex 4 Representative Sampling should be followed for taking composite samples. Those requirements are summarized below.
The first sample must be taken within 7 days of the start of the Production Batch.
To prepare one sample, 8 sub-samples of 3 liters each are taken at intervals of at least one hour directly at the discharge of the freshly produced material. This shall be repeated for three consecutive days.
The 24 samples are combined to form one composite sample.
The representative sample shall be homogenized by the Project Developer or by the laboratory that performs testing. The biochar shall be ground to a size of <3 mm.
The ground sample is mixed by shoveling the pile three times from one pile to another.
A sub-sample of 1.5 liters shall be taken from 15 spots in the mixed pile.
The 15 sub-samples are re-combined, and then mixed by shoveling the pile three times from one pile to another.
From the mixed pile of the combined sub-samples, 15 subsamples of 150 ml each should be taken at 15 different spots in the pile and combined. This combined homogenized representative cross sample is used for laboratory testing.
A one-liter retention sample shall be collected each day that biochar is produced. These samples should be combined for storage over the calendar month. Retention samples must be stored for a minimum of two years.
For each Production Batch, Project Developers shall submit a Sampling Record for verification to prove their adherence to the requirements above. Sampling Records shall include the following information for each sample taken:
Date of sampling
Amount of biochar sampled
Description of representative sampling process (either followed the recommended approach, or describe the individual approach)
Sample ID
Biochar projects often use carbon financing to launch new projects, and validation is done ex-ante before the project begins operations. In this case, are estimated using reasonable project data estimates. These provisional credit estimates are converted to verified issued credits upon verification using real project data. Required project data estimates are detailed below.
A project may use one quantification approach for ex-ante estimation, and use a different approach for verification.
A project may use one quantification approach for ex-ante estimation, and use a different approach for verification.
An estimated ratio and must be provided based on
measurements from samples from pilot phase or previous operations for the same site (preferred option),
equipment manufacturer data/quotes/estimates,
scientific literature for similar project conditions, or
When validation is conducted on non-operating projects that are in the planning stage, Project Developers shall prove during validation that the biochar is reasonably expected with strong certainty to end up in its intended use (application to soil). This shall be provided by either:
Option 1: Signed agreements with the end-buyers that they intend to purchase the agreed upon quantity of biochar annually (preferable).
Option 2: If the project is in planning stages and has not yet secured a buyer, a signed agreement from the Project Developer of their intended buyer/user of biochar. Note that the delivery risk is higher for this option, so Option 1 is preferable. An increased discount factor may be applied.
Upon verification, once the project has started operating, Project Developers shall prove that biochar has been used in the intended application for each Production Batch, (e.g. incorporated into soils, added to fertilizer mixes…). This shall be done in Biochar Application Verification Reports that shall contain all of the following:
Tracking records of the purchase and/or delivery of the biochar to its end use point of use, specifying the date, amount of biochar and Production Batch ID.
GPS coordinates of all end use points with according amounts of biochar, if known to the Project Developer.
Company name and individual contact information for each buyer/user of biochar, for traceability and random checking by VVBs.
Photo diary of biochar application, including photos of for example the biochar being delivered, tags/labels with information, road signs during delivery, process of biochar spreading.
Monitoring Plans for this module shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for each Production Batch:
Description of the pyrolysis conditions (temperature and residence time) and any variability in the process
Amount of biochar produced, in tonnes of fresh biochar
Moisture content of biochar
Organic carbon content
Monitoring Plans for this module shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for each calendar year:
Number of Production Batches
Total amount of biochar produced per year, in tonnes of fresh biochar
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
The table below presents a non-exhaustive selection of Ecoinvent activities that may be used in the GHG reduction calculations for this module. Additional activities may be used for any project, if the following selection does not cover all relevant activities.
Table A1 List of ecoinvent 3.11 processes used in the GHG reduction quantification model, all processes are from the cutoff database
👉 Download the template
This page describes the changes in the Biochar application to soils module.
Because this module is considered the V2.0 of the Rainbow BECCS and Biochar V1.0 methodology, the table below also includes changes from the Rainbow BECCS and Biochar V1.0 methodology that are covered in other modules (e.g. ).
Cr
200
As
20
8 EFSA PAH
1
Laboratory chemical analyses
GPS coordinates of biochar spreading sites*
coordinates
Internal tracking documents, invoices, mapping software (e.g. Google Maps)
Amount and type of avoided horticultural product (optional)
kg, tonnes, m3
Operations tracking and invoices from the product user
Amount of biochar produced*
Tonnes of fresh matter
Internal tracking documents, invoices, contracts
Organic carbon content
Percent
Laboratory chemical analyses
Average random reflectance
Percent
Laboratory chemical analyses
Fraction of distribution measurements above 2%
Note that avoidance from energy co-products is covered in a separate module.
The equations for calculating avoidance are presented in the BiCRS methodology document and shall be applied here.
Note that avoidance from energy co-products will be covered in a separate module.
The equations for calculating avoidance are presented in the BiCRS methodology document and shall be applied here.
>22.5
0.98
0.66
represents the ratio of molar hydrogen to organic carbon in biochar, measured by laboratory analysis for each project.
where,
represents the total carbon removals from biochar during the verification period, in tonnes of COeq. This value shall be applied to Equation 1 from the General BiCRS methodology document to calculate total project removals.
is calculated in Equation 1
represents the concentration of organic carbon in biochar, on a weight basis.
represents the amount of biochar delivered during the verification period, in tonnes of fresh biochar.
represents the moisture content of biochar, on a weight basis (%w/w), so converts to dry mass of biochar
is 44/12 = 3.67, and represents the molar masses of CO and C respectively, and is used to convert tonnes C to tonnes of COeq.
72% of the measurements are above the 2% inertinite threshold.
Therefore, this biochar sample has an of , so 68.4% of the organic carbon in the sample will be converted to COeq and considered as 1000-year carbon removals. The remaining 31.6% of carbon is assumed to decompose within the 1000-year permanence horizon, and is not considered for any removal RCCs.
95% of the measurements are above the 2% inertinite threshold.
Therefore, this biochar sample has an of , so 94% of the organic carbon in the sample will be converted to COeq and considered as 1000-year carbon removals. The remaining 6% of carbon is assumed to decompose within the 1000-year permanence horizon, and is not considered for any removal RCCs.
represents the fraction of the biochar organic carbon that is residual carbon, as opposed to reactive/labile organic carbon. It may be measured and reported directly, or obtained by subtracting measured reactive carbon from 100.
where,
represents the total carbon removals from biochar during the verification period, in tonnes of COeq. This value shall be applied to Equation 1 from the General BiCRS methodology document to calculate overall project removals.
is calculated in Equation 3
, , , and are described in Equation 1.
80 001 – 100 000
28
The first sample must be taken within 7 days of the start of the Production Batch.
Samples may be taken from a well-mixed pile of biochar produced within the last 7 days.
The amount of biochar used for one sample shall be equivalent to at least one day's production.
24 sub-samples of 3 liters each shall be taken from different spots in the pile.
The 24 subsamples are combined to form one composite sample.
Visual description and observation of biochar
Description of any potential anomalies
Proof of retention sampling (if performed for that Production Batch)
Photos showing the date, sample ID, and amount of biochar that is included in the present Sampling Record
verified measurements from other projects under similar conditions.
If options 2-4 are used, the estimated and shall automatically be discounted by 10% for the validation-stage estimates, in order to ensure conservative estimates and avoid over-estimations.
An estimated must be provided based on the same sources described for Approach 1: 100-year removals with H/C. This estimated value shall be used for quantification.
Project Developers must prove that they plan to perform pyrolysis at a temperature of at least 500°C.
Project Developers shall provide either:
distribution results for a sample of biochar produced at the project site under pilot/testing conditions. Measurements shall be used in Eq. 3 and 4 to estimate 1000 year removals.
may be used as a proxy only for validation stage estimates (not during verification). must be provided based on the same sources described for Approach 1: 100-year removals with H/C. This estimated value must be below 0.4 to use the 1000-year approach. A conservative default value of = 0.8 shall be assumed for all projects with a < 0.4 for the purpose of ex-ante validation estimates of 1000-year removals. The real results shall be used for verification and the final issuance of 1000-year removal RCCs.
Random reflectance ( ) mean and distribution, and residual carbon content (only for Approach 2: Estimating 1000-year removals using random reflectance)
Biochar Application Verification Reports, with names and GPS coordinates of spreading locations, among other information
Mineral NPK fertilizer #1
market for NPK (26-15-15) fertiliser, RER
Mineral NPK fertilizer #2
market for NPK (15-15-15) fertiliser, RER
V2.1
Added equations for calculation GHG reductions
Increased transparency.
September 2024
V2.0
Aligned terminology with ISO 14064-2:2019
Improved consistency with the voluntary carbon market. LCA principles still apply.
September 2024
V2.0
Added risk assessment template for environmental and social do no harm
Provide more detailed and prescriptive assessment framework, clearer instructions for project developers.
September 2024
V2.0
Removed text for sections that are the same for all methodologies:
Measurability
Real
Additionality
Technology readiness level
Repeated text from the Standard Rules.
September 2024
V2.0
Added Monitoring Plan section
Alignment with Rainbow Standard Rules V6.
September 2024
V2.0
Remove Rebound Effect and Independently Validated criteria
Alignment with Rainbow Standard Rules V6.
September 2024
V2.0
Added uncertainty assessment section
Alignment with Rainbow Standard Rules V6.
September 2024
V2.0
Infrastructure and machinery quantification expanded and specified, simple option added
Simplification, results not sensitive to impacts
September 2024
V2.0
New Leakage requirements
More rigorous eligibility criteria, and clear requirements and instructions for Project Developers
September 2024
V2.0
Allow option for 1000 year removals, measurement of random reflectance
Updated research
September 2024
V2.0
Added verification of end use reports
Increased rigor to ensure biochar is used as claimed
September 2024
V2.0
Added precise sampling requirements
Provide Project Developers with clear expectations, ensure representative sampling
September 2024
V2.0
Allow option to monitor data and quantify GHGs per production batch
Facilitate data collection and reporting for Project Developers
September 2024
V2.0
Biomass feedstock shall only be waste and biomass cultivated from sustainable production is not allowed
Increased stringency, following best practice and scientific recommendations
September 2024
V2.0
Status
In use
SDG 2.4: Ensure sustainable food production systems, increase productivity, help maintain resilient ecosystems, improve land and soil quality.
Biochar application to agricultural soils can increase crop yields, therefore reducing the amount of land, pesticides, fertilizer, and other environmentally impactful resources needed to grow food
Proof of biochar use in agriculture as opposed to other applications: contract, invoices, receipts of sale of biochar to farmers.
SDG 12.2: Achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural resources
The project’s circularity will be measured by the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI), according to the Ellen MacArthur Foundation's methodology. The indicator is expected to be 100% circularity for all biochar projects, since they use biomass feedstock and do not landfill or incinerate their product.
Type of feedstocks used, verification of end use of biochar
Pb
300
Cd
5
Cu
200
Ni
100
Hg
2
Zn
1000
Amount of biochar produced*
Tonnes of fresh matter
Internal tracking documents, invoices, contracts
Biochar *
Ratio
Laboratory chemical analyses
Organic carbon content
Percent
Laboratory chemical analyses
Biochar moisture content () *
<7.49
1.13
0.46
7.5-12.49
1.10
0.59
12.5-17.49
1.04
0.64
17.5-22.49
1.01
0.65
≤ 3 000
4
3 001 – 10 000
8
10 001 – 20 000
12
20 001 – 40 000
16
40 001 – 60 000
20
60 001 – 80 000
Peat moss
peat moss production, horticultural use, RoW
Perlite
expanded perlite production, CH
Lime
market for lime, RER
Nitrogen mineral fertilizer
market for inorganic nitrogen fertiliser, as N, country specific
Phosphorus mineral fertilizer
market for inorganic phosphorus fertiliser, as P2O5, country specific
Potassium mineral fertilizer
market for inorganic potassium fertiliser, as K2O, country specific
Specify residual organic carbon measurements needed for 1000-year removal claims
Provide clearer and more comprehensive instructions
July 2025
V2.2
Re-introduce 100-year carbon degradation model equations based on soil temperature
Aligning with common biochar modeling practices.
March 2025
V2.1
Changed pollutant requirements from European Biochar Certificate (EBC) thresholds to World Biochar Certificate (WBC) thresholds
Adding more projects outside Europe, more reasonable and feasible to hold them to worldwide best standards, not European
Feedstock
Use waste and residual biomass as feedstock, according to the module.
Processing
Heat biomass to at least 350°C during production.
Capture or cleanly burn pyrolysis gasses, as outlined in the module
Report methane emissions from pyrolysis, using the module
Biochar Quality and Use
Produce high-quality biochar with a molar below 0.7.
Apply biochar to agricultural, forest, or urban soils, ensuring permanent sequestration of its organic carbon content.
Feedstock
Use waste and residual biomass as feedstock, according to the module.
Processing
Heat biomass to at least 350°C during production.
Capture or cleanly burn pyrolysis gasses, as outlined in the module
Biochar Quality and Use
Produce high-quality biochar with a molar below 0.7.
Apply biochar to agricultural, forest, or urban soils, ensuring permanent sequestration of its organic carbon content.



Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score to each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The Rainbow Certification Team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
The Project Developer, Rainbow Certification Team, or the third-party auditor may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Each reversal risk with a high or very risk score is subject to:
risk mitigation plan, developed by the Project Developer, that details the long-term strategies and investments for preventing, monitoring, reporting and compensating carbon removal reversal, or
additional contributions to the buffer pool, at a rate of 3% of verified removal Rainbow Carbon Credits for each high or very high risk
Project Developers shall fill in the Methodology Risk evaluation template at the link below to evaluate the risk of carbon storage reversal, based on social, economic, natural, and delivery risks.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score to each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The Rainbow Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
The Project Developer, Rainbow Certification team, or the third-party auditor may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Each reversal risk with a high or very risk score is subject to:
risk mitigation plan, developed by the Project Developer, that details the long-term strategies and investments for preventing, monitoring, reporting and compensating carbon removal reversal, OR
additional contributions to the buffer pool, at a rate of 3% of verified removal Rainbow Carbon Credits for each high or very high risk
Project Developers shall prove that their project provides at least 2 co-benefits from the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) framework (and no more than 4).
Common co-benefits of projects certified under this methodology, and their sources of proof, are detailed in Table 1. Project Developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
SDG 13 on Climate Action by default is not considered a co-benefit here, since it is implicitly accounted for in the issuance of carbon credits. If the project delivers climate benefits that are not accounted for in the GHG reduction quantifications, then they may be considered as co-benefits.
Table 1 Summary of common co-benefits provided by projects certified under this methodology. Co-benefits are organized under the United Nation Sustainable Development Goals (UN SDGs) framework.
Projects should support at least two quantifiable and verifiable environmental or social co-benefits, aligned with the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) framework. Any co-benefits claimed by the Project Developer shall be quantified, monitored, and audited for each verification and credit issuance.
Common co-benefits under this methodology are detailed in the table below. Project Developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
SDG 13 on Climate Action by default is not considered a co-benefit here, since it is implicitly accounted for in the issuance of carbon credits. If the project delivers climate benefits that are not accounted for in the GHG reduction quantifications, then they may be considered as co-benefits.
Table 1 Common co-benefits that projects under this methodology may provide are detailed, including types of proof that can be used to justify each co-benefit.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Rainbow’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
Any identified material risk (defined as issues with a risk score of moderate or higher) shall be subject to a Risk Mitigation Plan, which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification Team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the Rainbow Standard Rules. The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of RCCs to eliminate with the discount factor.
Percent
24
March 2025
Minimum impact
Independently verified
Leakage
Fraction
Laboratory chemical analyses
Residual organic carbon ()
Fraction
Laboratory analyses
Biochar moisture content ()*
percent
Laboratory chemical analyses
Amount and type of avoided horticultural product (optional)
kg, tonne, m3
Operations tracking and invoices from the product user
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score to each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The Rainbow Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
The Project Developer, Rainbow Certification team, or the third-party auditor may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Each reversal risk with a high or very risk score is subject to:
risk mitigation plan, developed by the Project Developer, that details the long-term strategies and investments for preventing, monitoring, reporting and compensating carbon removal reversal, or
additional contributions to the buffer pool, at a rate of 3% of verified removal Rainbow Carbon Credits for each high or very high risk
General GHG reduction quantification rules can be found in the Rainbow Standard Rules.
Calculations of GHG emissions for the baseline and project scenarios shall follow the method detailed below, based on ISO 14064-2:2019.
Battery second life projects are only eligible for avoidance Rainbow Carbon Credits.
Battery second life projects serve two functions: (1) waste treatment from a battery’s first life (Battery A), and (2) the provisioning of a “new” battery in its second life (Battery B). Both of these functions are included in the project and baseline scenario.
The baseline scenario represents the functionally equivalent set of activities that would occur in the absence of the project. Therefore, the baseline scenario is the average waste battery treatment of Battery A, and the market mix for production of a new Battery B.
The distribution, packaging, use, and waste treatment of Battery B are not included in the calculations because they are assumed to be the same in both scenarios. Therefore, the downstream system boundary is Battery B at the factory gate.
Calculations and data collection are based on annual project operations.
Battery second life projects are multifunctional so the functional unit is twofold:
production of one battery (Battery B), plus
treatment of the corresponding amount of battery waste treated (from Battery A) to generate this one Battery.
All data shall be provided per battery type and chemistry because they use distinct materials and production processes, leading to varying environmental impacts, particularly during production and end-of-life waste treatment. This ensures an accurate assessment of emissions across the lifecycle.
The required primary data for GHG reduction calculations from projects are presented in Table 2:
Table 2 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source. Asterisks (*) indicate which data are required to be updated annually during verification (see section). Data are for a battery of type i and chemistry c.
Secondary data taken from the literature are used to define default values for the following elements:
Battery’s expected lifetime (first and second life), when real-life data from the project is inaccessible.
Battery unit (cells and modules) percentage, by mass, in a battery pack, when real-life data from the project is inaccessible.
The ecoinvent database version 3.11 (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in.
Batteries (including packs, units, management systems, and auxiliary components) are evaluated in categories of battery types and chemistries rather than specific battery models. It is assumed that batteries in the same battery type category and chemistry have similar characteristics (component percentages, emission factor, lifetime), as defined in .
A battery pack consists of several essential components, which vary depending on the battery type, manufacturer, and chemistry. To facilitate data collection, the entry battery pack is divided into three main components (see Figure 1 for a depiction of a battery pack with the following breakdown):
Battery unit (BU): responsible for the battery's primary function—energy storage and delivery. It contains potentially hazardous materials and heavy metals, making it a critical focus for environmental and safety considerations. Its structure and design vary depending on factors such as the battery type, manufacturer, intended application, and chemical composition. In this methodology, it is
LMT: The PRO collection scheme target for 2028 is set at 51% from the EU waste battery regulation. Therefore, the collection targets are assumed to be 51% for separate collection through PRO schemes and 49% for batteries collected outside of PRO schemes.
EV/HE, SLI, and ESS: These batteries do not have a collection target because the Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) systems are required to separately collect 100% of waste batteries. Therefore, none will go to incineration or landfilling, and they will all be recycled.
The project scenario consists of preparing used batteries for a second life, which serve two functions: 1) waste treatment of the battery after its first life (Battery A) and 2) preparation for reuse/repurpose to produce a “new“ battery via refurbishment/regeneration (Battery B). This process is broken down into 3 life cycle stages, and displayed in Figure 2:
Battery A waste collection
Battery A waste treatment
Battery B preparation for reuse or repurpose
The mass of waste battery collected (Battery A) equals the total mass of input used batteries collected by the battery second life project annually. The total mass of batteries collected is back-calculated based on the number of battery packs that were successfully prepared for reuse or repurpose and sold, and the rate of parts that could not be reused/repurposed and were recycled (see ).
To calculate the transport distance, Project Developers must provide the distance from the collection source to the battery's second life project site. Additionally, for better project understanding, the country and/or city from which the used battery packs are transported can be included in the project's risk assessment.
Battery packs and/or parts collected by the project that cannot be successfully prepared for reuse are processed through recycling.
Battery second life projects typically partner with certified recycling companies that are equipped to handle hazardous materials. These companies must be capable of managing BU, BMS and auxiliary components
Project Developers shall provide the percent of collected BUs, BMS, and ACs that are recycled.
Battery recycling is modeled using either hydrometallurgical or pyrometallurgical treatment depending on the battery chemistry (see ecoinvent processes in).
Some ACs such as the battery casing, cables, and cooling system, may be removed from batteries destined for recycling, and kept onsite to harvest spare parts in the future. If limited project data is available on this topic, they are conservatively assumed to be 100% recycled.
This life cycle stage is composed of some shared common steps across all battery second-life projects, plus different steps depending on the battery's second life technology implemented: refurbishing or regeneration.
Both refurbishing and regeneration processes start with the disassembly of the battery packs into their BUs (modules or cells). Next, the BU undergoes inspection and testing to assess its SoH and performance, including evaluations of voltage, performance, and charge retention. Any faulty BU, BMS, or auxiliary components that cannot be refurbished or regenerated are removed and .
Pieces that remain in good condition are prepared for reuse or repurposing through processes such as refurbishing or regeneration, and used in new second-life batteries.
Final testing and validation consume electricity and ensure the battery’s safety and functionality before it is partially charged (usually up to 60%), packaged, and distributed for reuse.
The refurbishing process typically includes electricity use for testing and charging, and may also involve replacing used, non-functional BUs, BMS or ACs with new ones. All components are cleaned and reassembled into a "new" refurbished battery pack. This pack undergoes strict quality control checks to ensure compliance.
Cleaning involves inputs of cleaning chemicals, paper and cloth, modeled after assumptions presented in the section.
In the first verification period, carefully tracked electricity data is used to calculate the project’s average kWh consumption per battery type or process step (e.g., inspection, testing, recharging). This average is then applied to all future monitoring periods.
The baseline scenario is composed of two main functions, to represent the same functions as the project scenario: 1) waste treatment of the battery after its first life (Battery A) and 2) provisioning of a new battery (Battery B). The system boundary of the baseline scenario is shown in Figure 3. This is broken down into 3 life cycle stages, which are detailed in the following sections:
Battery A collection
Battery A waste treatment
Manufacturing of Battery B
The baseline scenario shall be reviewed annually by the Rainbow Climate Team to account for any potential changes in regulations. Additionally, it shall be updated using project data to reflect the functional equivalent of the project's annual operations, considering the number and type of batteries collected and prepared for reuse.
The structure of the baseline scenario is the same whether the project consists of ongoing operations or an expansion. In the former, project data from all annual site operations is considered, and the baseline scenario is defined as the functional equivalent of all annual operations. For an expansion project, only project data related to the expansion is considered, because the normal annual operations would be the same in the baseline and project scenario, and can therefore be excluded.
It is assumed that battery waste is transported by truck 1800 km to its waste treatment center.
The mass of battery waste collected in the baseline scenario equals the total mass of input used batteries collected by the battery second-life project in the monitoring period.
Separately collected battery waste is assumed to undergo waste treatment based on the targets set by the European waste battery regulation. Most of this battery waste either undergoes specialized recycling, or repurposing for second life applications. Specialized recycling treatment is further divided into pyrometallurgical or hydrometallurgical processes, depending on the battery chemistry, as detailed in the section.
Battery waste that is not separately collected is assumed to eventually be sent for specialized battery waste recycling through pyrometallurgical or hydrometallurgical processes. This assumption is based on the hazardous nature of battery waste, which requires specific treatment technologies. Improperly managed battery waste that is not separately collected typically undergoes incineration or landfilling.
A portion of both separately collected and non-separately collected batteries will be repurposed for second life use. The environmental impacts associated with processing these batteries for second life applications are excluded from the baseline impacts due to the cutoff criteria for recycling (the impacts would instead be included in the second-life battery).
A detailed breakdown of battery waste treatment shares can be found in the section and . summarizes the battery treatment market shares.
The number of new batteries to consider in the baseline scenario corresponds to the number of batteries successfully prepared for reuse and sold in a functional state in the project scenario, adjusted by the shorter lifetime consideration for second life batteries.
To quantify avoided GHG emissions, the baseline scenario must consider the market share of the project technology already in use. Precise data on this topic are unavailable, but it is assumed that a rather small amount of new battery purchases come from existing refurbishing activities due to the novelty of the technology (<1%). The market share of the project technology currently in use is assumed to be zero.
The process and GHG impacts of manufacturing a new battery are taken from the ecoinvent database.
The difference in lifetime between refurbished and new batteries, detailed in the section, is accounted for in this life cycle stage. The amount of new battery production avoided in the baseline scenario is proportional to the ratio of the lifetimes of new and second-life batteries, adjusted by the SoH of the second-life batteries in the project scenario.
Avoided GHG emissions are calculated by subtracting the sum of the project scenario GHG emissions from the sum of the baseline GHG scenario emissions.
Uncertainty shall be evaluated at both the methodology level and the project level. The project-level uncertainty assessment must consider the uncertainty in the methodology, which is inevitably passed down to each project.
The uncertainty assessment below must be complemented by a project-specific uncertainty assessment. The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of avoided emissions to eliminate with the discount factor.
The assumptions that are estimated to have high uncertainty (i.e. high variability and high impact) are:
Second life batteries are assumed to have a shorter lifetime than new batteries. In the baseline scenario, new battery production is adjusted based on the lifespan of both new and second life batteries, as well as the second life battery SoH. It is assumed that the SoH serves as a proxy for the remaining performance of the battery.
The market share of the project's technology currently in use is assumed to be zero. While this assumption has a strong impact on the estimated avoided emissions, it remains reasonable based on expert opinion, which indicates that less than 1% of new battery purchases come from existing refurbishing activities due to the technology's novelty.
The assumptions that are estimated to have moderate uncertainty are:
Batteries in the same battery type category and chemistry have similar characteristics (component percentages, emission factor, lifetime)
In the absence of project data, it is conservatively assumed that 100% of the BMS and AC collected are not reused and, therefore, recycled.
The electrolyte in a Pb-acid battery constitutes approximately 27% of the total battery weight.
The assumptions that are estimated to have low uncertainty (i.e. low variability and low impact) are:
A battery pack is divided into three main components: BU, BMS, and AC.
The BMS rate is 2% by mass of the battery pack.
In the baseline scenario, the waste collection and transport distance of Battery A is assumed to be 1800 km for Li-ion and NiMH battery chemistries, and 500 km for Pb-acid batteries.
The collection of batteries in Europe is done 100% by truck.
The baseline scenario selection has low uncertainty. It accounts for project-specific information regarding the number and type of devices, and fate of devices is based on European battery waste management regulations.
The equations used in this methodology consist of basic conversions and have low uncertainty.
Many estimates and secondary data are used in this methodology to enable a reasonable amount of project data collection. These data have varying levels of uncertainty and are assessed in
The uncertainty at the methodology level is estimated to be moderate. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 6% for projects under this methodology.
Percentage by mass of BUs within a battery pack per battery type and chemistry (optional).
%
Battery second-life project tracking system
Total number and type of battery packs that were sold in a functioning state during the monitoring period.*
unit
Battery second-life project tracking system or invoices
Weight of sold battery packs per battery type and chemistry.*
kg
Battery second-life project technical documentation or direct measurements
Distance traveled for collecting used battery packs.*
km
Battery second-life project tracking system
Distance in km to the battery waste treatment facility used by the project (optional).
km
Battery second-life project tracking system
Assumption based on the recycling facility location and the project’s site
Total number of BUs collected and tested during the monitoring period.*
unit
Battery model technical document
Direct measurements made by the project
Amount of any new components (e.g., BUs, BMS, casing plastic, electrolyte) in sold second life battery packs that are new (i.e. not reused spare parts recovered from other collected batteries).*
selection
BU, BMS: identification numbers with source proof, purchase records, battery second-life project tracking system
AC: may be based on project estimates.
Electricity amount for inspection and testing of BUs.
kWh/BU
Battery second-life project tracking system
Electricity amount for the regeneration of BUs.
kWh/BU
Battery second-life project tracking system
Electricity amount for recharging the second life battery before the sale.
kWh/Bat
Battery second-life project tracking system
Second life battery SoH*.
%
Measurement from project.
Second life battery lifespan (optional).
years
Assumption based on technical documentation from the project. If not available, the most conservative choice will be considered.
Li-ion and NiMH batteries are assembled from individual cells or modules (groups of cells combined to create standardized units of capacity and voltage).
Pb-acid batteries are typically constructed as single units rather than separated into distinct cells or modules. In this methodology, Pb-acid batteries are considered a single BU.
Battery management system (BMS): the second most impactful component of a battery in terms of GHG emissions, due to its complex manufacturing process.
Battery auxiliary components (AC): other components that are not classified as BU or BMS. e.g. casings (e.g. aluminum, steel), connectors, and electronic control systems. It is assumed that all mass of the battery pack that is not BU or BMS is AC.
The BMS weight per kg of the battery pack may vary depending on multiple factors such as the battery type, chemistry, and manufacturer. Due to the lack of precise data per battery type and chemistry, it is assumed that the BMS rate is 2% by mass of the battery pack based on the ecoinvent process for Li-ion battery production.
The waste collection and transport distance for Battery A in the baseline scenario is determined using bounding analysis to identify the most conservative value. A distance of 1800 km is assumed for all battery chemistries under this methodology except Pb-acid. For Pb-acid, this value is assumed 500 km. The considered distances reflect the maximum distance between existing battery recycling facilities in Europe. These values can also be applied to the Project scenario if no project-specific data are available.
The waste collection for Battery A is assumed to be done 100% by truck within Europe.
In the project scenario, in the absence of project data, it is conservatively assumed that 100% of the BMS and AC from collected waste batteries (Battery A) are not reused and, therefore, recycled.
The distribution of Battery B in the baseline and project scenarios is assumed to be the same and is therefore excluded from quantifications. This is a conservative assumption because new batteries in the baseline scenario are likely manufactured in Asia, especially China, and transported long distances. In contrast, the project scenario consists of mostly inter-EU shipping of batteries across much shorter distances.
Packaging, use, and waste treatment of Battery B are assumed to be the same in the baseline and project scenarios and are therefore excluded from quantifications.
Second-life batteries are assumed to have shorter lifetimes than new batteries. It is assumed that the battery State of Health (SoH) can be a proxy for remaining battery performance and that the amount of battery production avoided in the baseline scenario is proportional to the ratio of new and second life battery lifetimes and second life SoH. See the Substitution section and Appendix 2 for details and examples.
It is assumed that when any battery component fails, the entire battery pack becomes non-functional, because the failure of even a single component—such as a cell, module, or critical part like the BMS—renders the whole battery pack inoperable. Therefore the input battery is assumed to be true waste, and no residual value is allocated from its first life. This means that new, unused batteries obtained from overproduction are not eligible under this methodology.
In the project scenario, the battery cleaning process involves (a) degreasing to remove oils and grease applicable to all battery types (2 ml degreaser per kg of battery pack), and (b) for Pb-acid batteries, neutralizing residual electrolytes using baking soda solution (0.08 ml solution per kg of battery pack). For cleaning, cloth is used (17g of cloth per kg of battery). These assumptions are based on estimates by the Project Developers. Only sold second-life batteries are assumed to be cleaned.
It is estimated that the electrolyte in a Pb-acid battery constitutes approximately 27% of the total battery weight.
The Pb-acid batteries electrolyte solution is assumed to be made of 38% sulfuric acid and 62% water.
In the regeneration of Pb-acid batteries, the electrolyte waste from Battery A (if present), is assumed to be neutralized using lime (CaO). The required amount of lime for neutralization is determined based on the chemical reaction between lime and sulfuric acid.
The Pb-acid battery lead content is assumed to be 609.7g/kg of Pb-acid battery. This value is used to calculate the impacts related to the Pb-acid battery waste treatment. Lead recovery process has 98.8% efficiency.
There are two main types of battery recycling treatment: pyrometallurgy and hydrometallurgy. Each battery chemistry is assumed to have the following repartition of the waste treatment process:
Li-ion: 64% Pyrometallurgy and 36% Hydrometallurgy.
NiMH: assumed to be 100% through pyrometallurgical treatment. Even though hydrometallurgy is the most common process for recycling NiMH batteries, pyrometallurgy is the most efficient and data-available process.
Pb-acid: 100% through remelting.
In the absence of the project, the Battery A end-of-life would have been treated according to the current market shares in Europe, which are detailed per battery type and chemistry in Table 3.
In the baseline scenario, for the fraction of waste Battery A that is separately collected by specialized waste battery programs (e.g. PRO), it is assumed that 70% of batteries will be refurbished or regenerated and 30% will be recycled. This assumption is based on projections provided by industry experts and is already accounted for in the "Europe EOL market share" in Table 3. Check Appendix 3 for detailed market share information.
In the baseline scenario, the lithium-ion battery market share for NMC is assumed to be evenly distributed across two specific compositions: NMC811 and NMC111. Although other NMC compositions may exist, these are used due to the limited data availability.
It is assumed that a rather small amount of new battery purchases come from existing refurbishing activities due to the novelty of the technology (<1%). The market share of the project technology currently in use is assumed to be zero.
In the baseline scenario, a portion of both separately collected and non-separately collected batteries will be repurposed for second life use. The environmental impacts associated with processing these batteries for second life applications are excluded from the baseline impact assessment due to the application of cutoff criteria.
ESS
Li-ion
Pb-acid
Separate collection 100%
Recycling 100%
represents the percentage of battery packs (BP) of type and chemistry that fail initial sorting and are sent directly to waste treatment. This rate is expected to be close to zero for most projects, but it is included here as a conservative measure.
represents the percentage, by mass, of input used BUs of type and chemistry that pass the initial sorting but are recycled after failing the first or last tests.
represents the percentage, by mass, of BUs within a battery pack of type and chemistry . This value should ideally be provided by the PD or selected from Appendix 2 if the exact value is unknown.
represents the percentage, by mass, of collected BMS of type and chemistry that are recycled. In the absence of project data, this is conservatively assumed 100%.
represents the percentage of BMS, by mass, in a battery pack. This is assumed to be 2% for all battery types and chemistries as defined in the assumptions section.
represents the percentage, by mass, of input auxiliary components (AC) of type and chemistry that are recycled (e.g. damaged cooling systems that cannot be reused). In the absence of project data, this is conservatively assumed 100%.
represents the percentage of ACs by mass in a battery pack, which are assumed to be everything that is not BU and BMS.
The weight of collected batteries may be directly reported by PDs, or may be back-calculated from the amount of sold battery packs, and the rate of parts that could not be reused/repurposed and were recycled.
where,
represent the total weight of input battery packs (Battery A) of type and chemistry collected by the project in the monitoring period, in kg of batteries.
represent the number of battery packs (Battery B) of type and chemistry that were sold in a functioning state, and shall be provided by the PD for each monitoring period.
represent the weight of sold battery pack (Battery B) of type and chemistry that was sold in a functioning state. In the case of battery repurposing (e.g. from EV to LMT) the sold battery weight may differ from the input collected battery weight, thus PDs are required to provide the mass and amount of sold functioning batteries.
is calculated in .
where,
represents the total greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, in kgCO₂ equivalent, from transporting waste battery packs collected by the project.
is calculated in .
represents the average distance traveled, in kilometers, for collecting battery packs (Battery A) of type and chemistry , as provided by the PD.
represents the emission factor for transport in kgCOeq/kg.km according to the ecoinvent database and includes truck. Refer to 1 for the ecoinvent processes used.
is calculated in .
is calculated in .
where,
represents the total GHG emissions, in kgCO₂eq, resulting from the recycling of batteries with chemistry that are unsuitable for reuse or repurpose.
is calculated in .
represents the conversion factor for Pb-acid batteries. remelting with lead recovery as presented in Appendix 1. For this, it is assumed that the lead recovery process has 98.8% efficiency and the battery lead content is 0.61kg of lead/kg of battery as presented in the Assumptions section. For other battery chemistries, consider this equal 1.
represents the emission factor for recycling a battery of chemistry , in kgCOeq per kg battery. For details on the ecoinvent processes used, refer to .
For Pb-acid batteries, it is assumed that the waste treatment used is the
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the transport of batteries not suitable for reuse that are sent to recycling, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in .
represents the distance in km for transporting battery chemistry scrap to the specialized battery waste treatment facility. If this value is not provided by the PD, it is conservatively assumed to be 1800 km for Li-ion and NiMH batteries, and 500 km for Pb-acid batteries, as described in the assumptions section.
represents the emission factor for truck transport, in kgCO₂eq/kg.km. For details on the ecoinvent processes used, refer to
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions in the project scenario battery waste treatment treatment of non-reusable parts, in kgCOeq.
is defined in .
is defined in .
For replacement of non-functional parts such as BUs and BMS, Project Developers shall select items/materials used among the options in Appendix 1. If the relevant input is not listed, it may be added/considered on a case by case basis, and approved by the Rainbow Certification Team. For each material, Project Developers shall provide the item it corresponds to and the amount used in the item. Items may be composed of multiple materials, or only one main material.
The regeneration process is only suitable for some BUs with specific chemistries (e.g. NiMH and Li-ion).
In addition to the common steps, and in some cases the refurbishing steps, regeneration involves sending controlled high-frequency pulses of electricity through the battery unit, and may include desulfation and the replacement of chemicals/electrolytes (for Pb-acid batteries).
Once regenerated, the battery is often reused in its first life application as regeneration can achieve similar performance as for a new battery.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the electricity consumption needed for sorting (inspecting and testing) incoming BUs (cells/modules), in kgCOeq.
represents the number of battery units of type and chemistry c entering the preparation for reuse or repurpose process after the first quality control and sorting process. This value shall be provided by the PD.
represents the amount of electricity needed in kWh/BU for inspection and testing per battery unit (cells or modules). The PD must provide this value along with supporting evidence for the data, such as documentation of the test machine's usage time and power consumption, details of the tracking system, or the software used in the project.
represents the emission factor of grid electricity in the given project country. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent process used.
After evaluating the battery, any BU, BMS, or damaged auxiliary components that are not suitable for refurbishing or regeneration are removed for recycling and are considered in the Project battery waste treatment calculation section. The remaining components are then cleaned.
The cleaning process typically includes (a) external cleaning to remove dirt and dust; (b) degreasing to eliminate oils and grease; and (c) neutralizing any residual electrolytes. Default amounts of cleaning product per kilogram of each battery type are assumed. It is assumed that only sold batteries will undergo the cleaning process.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the battery components cleaning. This includes chemicals and cloth, in kgCOeq.
is defined in .
represents the amount of chemical product used for cleaning the battery. This includes baking soda solution and degreaser as detailed in the assumptions section.
represents the emission factor of chemical . Refer to the assumptions to for the ecoinvent processes used.
represents the amount of cloth used for cleaning a battery, by battery weight. This amounts were assumed from data provided by Project Developers and is considered 17g of clothing per kg of battery.
represents the emission factor of cloth. Refer to the for the ecoinvent process used.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to battery preparation for reuse/repurpose common processes, in kgCOeq. This includes the impacts of sorting (inspection and testing) and cleaning.
is defined in .
is defined in .
Refurbishing impacts
Some components, such as BUs, BMS, or ACs may be replaced with new ones to substitute non-functional parts. Additionally, if the incoming battery is repurposed and the resulting battery type is intended for a different use than the original, additional ACs—such as a new casing—might be used. These changes are accounted for only if the process involves using brand-new parts.
where,
represents the total emissions from one new replacement battery component, in kgCOeq.
represents the amount of the material of type used in the component replacement battery for the second life battery , in the same units as the emission factor described below. This amount shall be provided by the PD for each monitoring period.
represents the life cycle emission factor/s for the material of type in kgCOeq (e.g. BMS, plastic for casing, aluminium, steel, etc) per given unit from ecoinvent. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent process used.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions, in kgCOeq, associated with charging battery B before it is sold, in kgCOeq.
is defined in .
represents the amount of electricity in kWh/battery needed for recharging the second life battery (Battery B) of type and chemistry c. This recharge usually accounts for 60% of the battery capacity.
is defined in Eq.8.
represents the sum of GHG emissions, in kgCO2eq, associated with battery refurbishing, in kgCOeq.
is defined in .
is defined in .
is defined in .
Regeneration impacts
Regeneration includes both the common impacts, refurbishing impacts (optional), and additional impacts associated with regenerating.
where,
represents the number of BUs from the collected battery (Battery A) suitable for regeneration after sorting.
defined in
represents the percentage by mass of collected BUs that are suitable for regeneration after quality control. is defined in .
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions associated with the electricity consumption for regenerating the collected battery units, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in .
represents the amount of electricity in kWh needed to regenerate a BU.
is defined in Eq.8.
Lead acid battery regeneration may also include the replacement of the BU's electrolytes, where fresh sulfuric acid is used to replace the old, degraded electrolyte in the BU. In such cases, the addition of a new electrolyte should be included in the regeneration process calculations, as described in Eq. 16.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions associated with the production of new Pb-acid battery electrolyte, in kgCOeq.
represents the amount, in kg, of new electrolyte used for the regeneration of Pb-acid batteries during the monitoring period, provided by the Project Developer.
represents the average fraction of electrolyte in a Pb-acid battery. Electrolytes typically constitute 27% of the battery's total weight, as described in the assumptions section.
represents the emission factor of the new Pb-acid battery electrolyte, in kgC kgCOeq/kg. Lead-acid batteries electrolyte is assumed to be a solution made of 38% sulfuric acid and 62% water. Details of the ecoinvent process used can be found in .
If new electrolytes are used, it is assumed that an equivalent amount of the used electrolyte undergoes waste treatment. During the regeneration of lead-acid batteries, the used electrolyte can either be regenerated or neutralized and then treated as wastewater. To neutralize this electrolyte solution, various chemicals can be used, with lime being the most commonly applied. For 1 kg of the electrolyte solution, approximately 217.3 g of lime (CaO) is required. For a conservative approach, it is assumed that the used electrolyte will be neutralized, as described in .
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions associated with the chemicals needed for treating the battery's used electrolyte, in kgCOeq.
represents the weight of any new electrolyte used for regenerating a battery of type and chemistry , in kg, provided by the PD if relevant.
represents the amount of lime needed to neutralize the electrolyte in kg of CaO per kg of used electrolyte.
represent the emission factor of lime, in kgCOeq/kg. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
Next, BUs are tested to verify the effectiveness of regeneration, which requires electricity consumption. This is calculated by applying Eq. 8 again (). Any BUs that fail this test are sent for recycling, which is covered in the Project Battery waste treatment section.
The battery is then reassembled (except lead-acid batteries, which are here considered as BUs), which may require new components. If applicable, refer to .
Finally, the battery is charged, following .
The impacts of regeneration are, therefore:
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions associated with the battery regeneration process, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in . It is used again here because the battery undergoes the same inspection and testing process at the end of regeneration as when it is first received by the project and sorted.
is defined in
is defined in .
is defined in .
is defined in .
is defined in .
is defined in , and may be zero if the project doesn't work with lead acid batteries.
is calculated in and represents the weight of battery type and chemistry collected by the project, in kg of batteries.
represents the distance traveled, in kilometers, for collecting battery packs. In the baseline scenario this is assumed 1800 km for Li-ion and NiMH batteries and 500 km for Pb-batteries as described in the assumptions section.
represents the emission factor for truck transport in kgCOeq/kg.km. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent processes used.
is calculated in .
represents the percentage of collected batteries of type and chemistry that are recycled after separate collection. In Figure 3, this is represented by RR%. This percentage is presented in the Assumptions section and Appendix 3. The specific recycling treatment used varies according to the battery chemistry (pyrometallurgy or hydrometallurgy), as described in the assumptions section 16.
represents the non-separately collected battery percentage in Europe for battery type and chemistry . In Figure 3, this is represented by (1-C%). This percentage is presented in the Assumptions section and Appendix 3.
represents the percentage of non-separately collected batteries of type and chemistry that are eventually recycled. In Figure 3, this is represented by nRR%. This percentage is presented in the Assumptions section and Appendix 3.
is defined in and it is only considered for Pb-acid battery chemistry.
represents the emission factor for treating battery of chemistry waste. Specific waste treatment shares per battery type are presented in the Assumptions section. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent process used.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to residual waste battery treatment (landfill and incineration), in kgCOeq. This regards especially LTM batteries of NiMH chemistry as described in Appendix 2.
is calculated in .
is defined in .
represents the percentage of separately collected batteries that become residual waste and are treated through either landfill or incineration. In Figure 3 this is represented by (RW%). Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
is defined in .
represents the percentage of non-separately collected batteries that become residual waste and are treated through either landfill or incineration. In Figure 3 this is represented by (nRW%). Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the emission factor for treating residual battery waste that is neither recycled nor reused, in kgCOeq/kg. This is assumed 50% incineration and 50% landfill. Refer to for the ecoinvent processes used.
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to battery waste treatment in the baseline scenario, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in .
is calculated in .
and are described in .
represents the emission factor in kgCOeq/kg due to the production of the new battery of chemistry c. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent processes used.
Note that the new battery produced may not be the same type i as the input battery when the project prepares the battery for repurposing. This is why the amount of batteries sold by the project is tracked separately from the amount of input batteries collected.
The shorter lifespan of second-life batteries is detailed in the Substitution section and is accounted for in the following adjustment to the avoided emissions from new battery manufacturing:
where,
represents the new battery (Battery B) lifetime adjustment factor.
represents the expected lifespan of a second-life battery type and chemistry in number of years. This value should be provided by the Project Developer (PD) with proof. If no project data are available, a conservative choice will be made according to the values presented in Appendix 2.
represents the expected lifespan of a new battery type and chemistry in number of years, presented in Appendix 2.
represents the SoH of the second life battery (Battery B) type and chemistry prepared for reuse or repurpose and sold by the project. This value shall be presented by the PD.
The total GHG emission for this life cycle stage is calculated according to the following equation:
where,
represents the sum of GHG emissions in the baseline scenario new battery production life cycle stage, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in .
is calculated in .
The Pb-acid battery lead content is assumed to be 609.7g/kg of Pb-acid battery.
In the baseline scenario, 70% of batteries undergoing a second-life process are reused, while 30% will be recycled.
In the baseline scenario, the Li-ion NMC is assumed to be evenly distributed across two specific compositions: NMC811 and NMC111.
The distribution, packaging, use, and waste treatment of Battery B in the baseline and project scenarios are the same.
When any battery component fails, the entire battery becomes non-functional, so no residual value is allocated to the collected waste batteries.
It is assumed that all second life batteries (Battery B) sold by the project will undergo cleaning with degreaser and electrolytes neutralizer depending on the battery chemistry.
The Pb-acid batteries electrolyte solution is made of 38% sulfuric acid () and 62% water.
In the regeneration of Pb-acid batteries, if the battery's electrolyte is changed, the waste electrolyte is assumed to be neutralized using lime (CaO).
There are two main types of battery recycling treatment: pyrometallurgy and hydrometallurgy depending on the battery chemistry.
In the absence of the project, the battery end-of-life would have been treated according to the market shares in Europe.
The environmental impacts associated with processing second life batteries are excluded from the baseline impact assessment due to the application of cutoff criteria.
Lifetime of a new battery and a second life battery
Table A2, Appendix 2
The lifetime of a new battery is highly variable due to factors such as operating conditions, usage patterns, and BMS efficiency. When available, battery lifetime data were sourced from recent studies or supplemented by Project Developers' expertise. This introduces high uncertainty, as lifetime is a sensitive and highly variable parameter. However, the assumption is conservative, as it reduces the impacts associated with producing a new battery in the baseline scenario. Project Developers are encouraged to provide this lifetime using primary data wherever possible.
Percentage, by mass, of all collected battery packs that fail initial quality control and are sent directly to waste treatment, with no parts recovered to reuse.*
%
Battery second-life project tracking system
Percentage, by mass, of collected battery units (BU) that pass initial quality control but are later sent for waste treatment, because they are later deemed unsuitable for refurbishment or regeneration*.
%
Battery second-life project tracking system
Percentage, by mass, of collected battery management systems (BMS) that pass initial quality control but are later sent for waste treatment, because they are later deemed unsuitable for refurbishment or regeneration*.
%
Battery second-life project tracking system
Percentage, by mass, of collected auxiliary components (AC) that pass initial quality control but are later sent for waste treatment, because they are later deemed unsuitable for refurbishment or regeneration*.
%
Battery second-life project tracking system
Battery type
Chemistry
Collection type
Waste treatment type
LMT
Li-ion:
NMC: 60%
LFP: 30%
NCA: 10%
NiMH
PRO collection schemes: 51% (separate collection)
Outside PRO schemes: 49% (assumed mix of some separate collection, some general battery fate)
PRO collection schemes:
Battery second life: 7 %
Recycling: 93%
Outside PRO schemes:
Battery second life: 13.3%
Recycling: 80.7%
Landfill and incineration: 6%
EV/HEV
Li-ion
NiMH
Separate collection 100%
Battery second life: 17.5%
Recycling: 82.5%
SLI
Pb-acid
Separate collection 100%
Recycling 100%
Chemistry per battery type
Table 3
Battery types encompass a variety of chemistries. This methodology focuses on the most common chemistries for each battery type, as identified through expert insights and market data.
While older systems may still contain small quantities of batteries based on Pl and NiCd, these are assumed to be negligible and are excluded from this methodology. This exclusion introduces a moderate level of uncertainty.
Separate collection 2024/2025
Table 3
While limited information is available on the separate collection rates of batteries at their end-of-life, this methodology relies on regulatory targets as a reference. Although this assumption introduces moderate to high uncertainty, it is considered a conservative approach.
Europe EOL market shares
Table 3
The EOL market share data for the studied battery types and chemistries is limited. To address this, market share estimates were gathered with support from industry experts, an operational facility in the Netherlands, and individual Project Developers' expertise.
While no official documentation validates the chosen market shares, these estimates are considered conservative. This is because the percentages include a large share of second life batteries, which are expected to be lower in reality (the environmental impacts associated with processing second life batteries are excluded from the baseline impact assessment due to the application of cutoff criteria).
Battery unit percentage, by weight, in battery pack
Table A2, Appendix 2



The percentage of BUs in a battery pack, by mass, is highly variable and depends on several factors, such as battery chemistry, pack design, and manufacturer. To simplify calculations, data from recent studies were used to estimate this value per battery chemistry, introducing a moderate level of uncertainty. Project Developers are encouraged to provide this percentage using primary data wherever possible.
General GHG reduction quantification rules can be found in the .
Calculations of GHG emissions for the baseline and project scenarios shall follow a robust, recognized method and good practice guidance. The overall methodological approach is a comparative life cycle assessment (LCA) at the project-scale, based on ISO 14064-2:2019.
Biogas from anaerobic digestion projects are only eligible for avoidance Rainbow Carbon Credits
Biogas from anaerobic digestion projects have one shared universal main function: energy production.
Projects that use manure and/or slurry as feedstock inputs have an additional function: improved manure/slurry management, which leads to fewer GHG emissions during storage and spreading, and higher nutrient availability reducing the need for mineral fertilizers.
The baseline scenario represents the functionally equivalent set of activities that would occur in the absence of the project. Therefore, the baseline scenario includes:
conventional energy production (mix of fossil fuels and biogas already present in the energy mix).
If the project uses manure and/or slurry, the baseline scenario also includes:
conventional manure and slurry management with higher GHG emissions, and
avoided mineral fertilizer production from manure and slurry application.
If the only function of the project is energy production, the functional unit is 1 GWh of energy delivered.
If the project uses manure and/or slurry as feedstock inputs, then the functional unit is 1 GWh of energy delivered plus the management and use of the equivalent amount of manure/slurry.
The required primary data for GHG reduction calculations from projects are presented in Table 2. These data shall be included in the project’s Project Design Document (PDD) and made publicly available.
Table 2 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source for initial project certification and validation. Asterisks (*) indicate which data are required to be updated annually during verification (see Monitoring Plan section).
Parameter
Unit
Source proof
Amount and type of feedstock used*
tonne of fresh matter
Track records from the biogas site
Average weighted distance for transporting each feedstock type from its source until the biogas site
km
Track records from the biogas site; map with the two points location and distance
Average number of days manure and slurry are kept stored, if applicable (optional)
Days
Estimate
On-site electricity consumption during the reference year*
kWh/year
Electricity bills
Secondary data taken from the literature are used to define default values, or provide conversion rates, to obtain the following elements:
Nitrogen, dry matter content, and biochemical methane potential (BMP) of cow and chicken manure and slurry (Table 3);
Percentage of Nitrogen in manure, slurry and different types of digestate (raw, liquid and solid) lost as N2O during storage (Table 3);
Rate of N2O emissions per kg of manure, slurry, digestate, and mineral fertilizer spread on agricultural fields (Table 3 and Table 6);
Amount of N, K2O and P2O5 mineral fertilizer avoided per tonne of manure and slurry
Average number of days manure and slurry are stored in the baseline scenario;
Characteristics of methane, biogas and biomethane;
Leakage rates of methane throughout the biogas production from digestion, purification, boiler for internal use, injection and distribution;
Percent of biogas produced that is used internally;
Emission rates of methane and N2O from combustion of biomethane, in kg/MJ;
Amount and density of digestate produced from feedstock inputs;
Gas mix in the baseline scenario, considering the market shares for natural gas, biomethane and biogas;
These values and their sources are provided in the Assumptions section.
The ecoinvent database version 3.11 (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in Appendix 1.
Feedstock inputs that are categorized as waste come with no impacts from their production or first life. They enter the project system boundary during the transport to the biogas site. This includes inputs such as manure, slurry, silo grain residue, spent beer grains, recirculated digestate, or damaged produce that can’t be sold.
In the baseline scenario, the transport distance for manure and/or slurry collection to the storage and use point is assumed to be 10 km.
Emissions of N2O and methane due to manure and slurry storage before the digestion process are linearly related to the amount of days manure and slurry are stored on site. If Project Developers do not have an estimation of this value, an average of 15 days is assumed. In the baseline scenario, this is assumed to be 180 days.
Emissions of N2O from slurry storage, in the project scenario, are sufficiently small (0.01-0.05% life cycle GHG emissions) that they can be excluded. This is because N2O emissions from slurry storage are generally small, plus the shortened storage duration in the project scenario minimizes them further.
Manure and slurry from pigs, horses, sheep, and other animals are modeled using the same characteristics as cow manure. Only chicken manure is treated differently, due to its high nitrogen content (Table 3).
Buildings and main infrastructure at the biogas site have an assumed lifetime of 20 years. Infrastructure amounts are modeled and extrapolated from the main digester exterior volume (m³) to simplify data collection, after numerous certification projects showed small impacts from infrastructure (1-2% of project life cycle GHG emissions). The ecoinvent process for the anaerobic digestion plant present in Appendix 1 is used, considering 1 m³ of digester volume annually.
Activated carbon used for biogas purification is modeled using a ratio of 0.2 tonnes of activated carbon/GWh of energy produced. The value was taken from biogas projects previously certified by Rainbow, and results are not sensitive to changes in this value.
In the project scenario, the amount of biogas self-consumed for onsite heating is assumed to be 4%. Results are not sensitive to changes in this value, which can regularly vary from 2-6% according to previous project data.
The mass of digestate produced is estimated to be 85-95% of the mass of feedstock inputs. A benchmark of 90% is often considered, according to the literature, expert partner consultation, and a sample of projects’ applications for environmental licenses, where they must do a detailed estimate of digestate production (“Facilities classified for environmental protection”, in French Installations classées pour la protection de l'environnement, ICPE). A conservative value of 85% was chosen. Indeed, the annual amount of digestate produced is not measured at project sites. Rather, sites measure the amount sold. Due to temporal, seasonal restrictions on when digestate can be spread, the amount sold over one calendar year does not correspond to the amount produced in that year. Records of digestate sold are still collected from project developers to validate that this is a reasonable approximation.
Methane emissions during digestate storage are reduced when the digestate is covered (e.g. airtight covers on tanks, not piles of solid digestate under a roof or rain covers). It is assumed that covers reduce methane emissions by 80%.
Nutrient availability in digestate, manure and slurry is equivalent to that of mineral fertilizer. For example, 1 kg of nitrogen applied to soils in digestate is assumed to substitute 1 kg of mineral nitrogen fertilizer.
Table 3a Summary of cow and chicken manure characteristics (from Esnouf et al., 2021 unless otherwise stated).
Fresh matter as nitrogen (%)
1.4
-
Dry matter in manure (%)
-
24
-Dry matter as nitrogen (%)
-
2.7
Nitrogen lost as N2O per 180 days of storage (%)
2
Table 3b Summary of slurry characteristics (from Esnouf et al., 2021 unless otherwise stated).
Dry matter in slurry (%)
4.27
Dry matter as nitrogen (%)
7.11
Nitrogen lost as N2O per 180 days of storage (%)
0.08
Rate of N2O released from slurry spreading (kgN2O/t of manure spread)
0.057
Biochemical methane potential (BMP) (m3 CH4/tonne fresh slurry)
19
Methane emissions during storage (as % of BMP)
36
The project scenario consists of anaerobic digestion, which serves three functions: 1) biomethane production, 2) digestate production, and if the project uses manure or slurry as a feedstock, 3) improved manure/slurry management. This process is broken down into 4 life cycle stages, displayed in Figure 1:
Feedstock provisioning, transport, and storage;
Digestion and biomethane management;
Digestate storage and spreading;
Avoided fertilizer production.
Project Developers shall provide the amount of each type of feedstock input used annually in tonnes of fresh matter.
Feedstock input types considered in the model include several types of energy cover crops, straw, whole-grain corn crops, manure, slurry, recirculated digestate, and various agro-industrial waste/by-products.
The production and cultivation impacts from non-waste feedstock inputs are modeled using the ecoinvent processes outlined in Appendix 1. These include dedicated crops, energy cover crops, and straw.
Project Developers shall provide the distance that feedstock inputs are transported from their origin to the site. Transport is assumed to be done by truck (see ecoinvent process in Appendix 1). When there are multiple sources of a feedstock, the average weighted distance for each feedstock type shall be used.
Manure and slurry may be stored onsite for several days or weeks if they cannot be added to the digester immediately upon their delivery to the biogas site. During this storage period, methane and N2O are emitted linearly over time. When they are stored for 180 days (a conventional non-biogas scenario), 2% of its nitrogen is emitted as N2O, plus some methane expressed as a fraction of BMP (Table 3). Manure is stored at biogas sites for fewer days than in a conventional scenario, which results in fewer N2O and methane emissions. The ratio of average days manure and slurry are stored at the biogas site, to the average storage duration of 180 days, is used to adjust the N2O and methane emission benchmarks detailed in Table 3 (see example in the box below).
Project Developers rarely have detailed receipts and tracking proof of feedstock inputs, even if they informally manage this very precisely for operations. In the absence of proof, calculations are used here to cross check expected biogas production from the given feedstock inputs vs the actual amount of biogas produced. Project Developers shall calculate the expected annual biogas production using the biochemical methane potential (BMP) of the sum of each feedstock input, available in public databases (Equation 6). The calculated expected methane produced value should be within 10% of the actual methane produced value based on injection receipts, calculated in the following section in Equation 11. Discrepancy here suggests high uncertainty which may result in a higher discount factor (see Uncertainty Assessment section).
Project Developers shall provide the amount of electricity used onsite annually, in kWh/year, and the electricity source (e.g. grid or onsite solar). A black-box approach is used for electricity consumption, and only the total amount of electricity used on-site is required (i.e. not broken down into different uses).
Leakages of methane throughout the project steps are calculated using leakage rates from the literature, and are summarized in Table 4. Even though modern anaerobic digestion plants only leak small amounts of methane, they can represent important sources of GHG emissions through the life cycle. Project sites have sensors to measure large, exceptional methane leaks, but the amounts considered in the GHG reduction quantification are below the threshold of most sensors.
Table 4 Rates of methane and biogas leakage from different steps in the project scenario, based on volume of gas.
Process
Leak rate original data
Leak rate as percent of methane produced
Source in Esnouf et al., 2021
Digestion
0.5% biogas produced leaked by volume
0.28%
page 36
Boiler leakage
0.25% internally used methane by volume leaked from the boiler
0.0055%
page 35, assuming 4% biogas produced used internally
Purification of gas
Project data, or
default value of 0.7%, or
0%
of methane produced by volume
0.7%
page 38
Project Developers should provide methane leakage rates from offgas during the purification step. This is typically provided in technical documents or contracts for purification machinery. If this value is not available, a default leakage rate of 0.7% of methane by volume will be used. If offgas is captured and used, this value may be zero.
The amount of biogas self-consumed in a boiler for onsite heating is assumed to be 4% (see Assumptions section).
The biogas and biomethane characteristics presented in Table 5 are used.
Table 5 Characteristics of biogas and biomethane
Lower heating value (LHV) (MJ/m³)
22.7
36
Methane content (% volume)
55
97
The amount of activated carbon used in purification is estimated to be 0.2 tonnes/GWh of energy produced (see Assumptions section). Other processes related to purification were excluded, given that they are consistently minor sources of impacts in biogas LCAs.
The most impactful direct emissions from the biomethane combustion step were taken from Table 53 in Esnouf et al., 2021. This includes 4.93e-7 kg N2O/MJ biomethane, and 1.96E-06 kg biogenic CH4/MJ biomethane.
All infrastructure and machinery are included in this step, even if some are actually used for digestate or feedstock storage described in other sections.
Infrastructure and machinery are modeled in ecoinvent with a process that includes production, transport and disposal of the main materials for an agricultural biogas plant (see Appendix 1). The ecoinvent process represents a site with a main digester of 500 m3.
Project Developers shall provide the external volume of their site’s main digester, in m3. This is used to adjust the amount of the ecoinvent infrastructure and machinery process used. For example, if the project’s main digester has a volume of 250 m3, it will only be assigned half of the impacts modeled in the ecoinvent process.
It is assumed that infrastructure has a lifetime of 20 years. This means that for calculating impacts of 1 year of operations of the project, infrastructure and machinery will be allocated 1/20th of their total impacts.
The amount of digestate produced annually is estimated to be 85% of the mass of feedstock inputs (see the Assumptions section).
Project Developers shall provide the repartition of digestate types (raw, liquid, and/or solid phase) that are stored and spread. If the repartition is different for the storage and spreading stages (e.g. stored raw, spread as liquid and solid), then the repartition that leads to higher project emissions shall be applied to all digestate management, in order to maintain a conservative approach. Data shall come from the repartition of digestate types sold annually.
Project Developers shall provide an estimate of the residence time, (the number of days feedstock spends in the digester).
Methane emissions during digestate storage are calculated as a function of residence time in the digester and percent of methane produced that is emitted, as illustrated in Figure 10.1 of Hartig 2010. The linear regression equation obtained from that dataset is presented in Eq. 21, and shall be used to predict methane leakage rates from digestate storage for a given project’s residence time.
It is assumed that storing digestate under airtight covers reduces methane emissions from storage by 80%. Project Developers shall report what fraction of their digestate storage is covered vs. uncovered.
Nitrous oxide emissions from digestate storage are calculated using 1) the amount of digestate stored, 2) the nitrogen content of digestate, provided by Project Developers in the form of laboratory analyses and 3) emission rates from the literature, summarized in Table 6.
Table 6 Percent of nitrogen present in digestate that is emitted as N2O from digestate storage and spreading.
Spreading
Raw, liquid, and solid
1
Storage
Raw
0.08
Storage
Liquid
0.08
Storage
Solid
Digestate transport from the biogas site to the farm for spreading is included when this transport is done by truck. No impacts are included for transport via irrigation pipeline, assuming that they would be below the impact threshold.
Nitrous oxide emissions from digestate spreading on soil is calculated using 1) the amount of digestate spread (which may differ from the amount stored if some digestate is recirculated as feedstock), 2) the nitrogen content of digestate, provided by Project Developers in the form of laboratory analyses and 3) an emission rate of 1% of nitrogen added to soils in digestate is lost in N2O, according to the IPCC Tier 1 emission factor for organic amendments.
The project is credited with avoiding synthetic mineral fertilizer production thanks to digestate spreading. This is because the project is multifunctional and makes a co-product digestate, which is treated using the common LCA practice of system expansion and substitution[48].
Project Developers shall provide the nutrient contents of all digestate types, measuring total N, P2O5, and K2O.
Amount of digestate spread is described and calculated in the previous section.
As described in the Assumptions section, nutrient availability in digestate is equivalent to that of mineral fertilizer, so for example spreading 1 kg of P2O5 from digestate is modeled as substituting the production of 1 kg of P2O5 mineral fertilizer production.
Along with avoiding nitrogen fertilizer production, digestate spreading also avoids N2O emissions from fertilizer spreading. These are calculated using the amount of nitrogen avoided by digestate, and nitrogen emission rates from mineral fertilizers, which equals 1% of applied N emitted as N2O.
The baseline scenario represents the GHG emissions that would occur without the project. It includes functionally equivalent processes that provide the same products/services as the Project Scenario.
As described in the Project Scenario section, the project delivers the following products/services, with their corresponding baseline scenario processes:
Biomethane production and injection into the gas grid: this is assumed to replace the average market mix of gas from the grid, primarily natural gas, with a fraction of biomethane and biogas already present in the mix.
Digestate production: this is assumed to replace synthetic mineral fertilizer production and application, which is already considered within the project scenario using system expansion and substitution (see Project avoided fertilizer section). It is not considered in the baseline scenario.
Manure and slurry management (if the project uses manure and/or slurry): this is assumed to replace conventional manure and slurry storage and spreading, which includes emissions from storage, and avoided mineral fertilizer production.
The baseline scenario includes 1 to 3 life cycle stages, depending on the project operations, displayed in Figure 2:
Energy production
Manure and slurry storage and spreading (if the project uses manure and/or slurry)
Avoided fertilizer production and use (if the project uses manure and/or slurry)
If the project injects biomethane into the gas grid, the baseline scenario is the market mix of gasses in the national gas supply. This shall include the share of biogas and biomethane already used at the national level.
Natural gas, biogas and biomethane production are modeled using ecoinvent processes detailed in Appendix 1. For natural gas, the process includes all upstream impacts of gas extraction, production, distribution, and combustion in a gas turbine. Biogas and biomethane processes include their production, and combustion was excluded assuming its impact would be very small because they are not fossil fuels.
The total amount of gas considered in the baseline scenario shall equal the amount of energy from biomethane injected by the project biogas site (provided by Project Developers), minus the calculated amount of biomethane lost during the distribution stage, in MJ.
The total amount of gas in the baseline scenario shall be broken down into the amount of natural gas, biogas and biomethane using data from Eurostat datasets covering biogas and natural gas consumption. An example is provided below.
If heat and/or electricity are exported by the project instead of gas injection, the baseline scenario shall include the national mixes of heat and/or electricity, based on Eurostat data for the most recent year (or data of a similar high-quality source). The amount of heat and/or electricity in the baseline scenario shall equal the equivalent amount of energy from heat and/or electricity exported from the project scenario to the grid/external industrial processes (i.e. excluding the amount that is self consumed).
If manure or slurry are not used as feedstock inputs at the biogas site, then this section is the only component of the baseline scenario.
This stage shall only be included in the baseline scenario if the biogas project uses manure or slurry as a feedstock input.
This stage includes N2O and methane emissions from manure/slurry storage and spreading, and GHG emissions from transport.
Project Developers shall provide the amount of manure and/or slurry used as feedstock inputs annually, in tonnes of fresh matter.
Project Developers shall specify if manure is from poultry vs any other type of animal. Manure from pigs, horses, sheep, and other animals are modeled using the same characteristics as cow manure, as described in the Assumptions section. Because poultry slurry is uncommon, all slurry is modeled as cow slurry.
Nitrogen content, N2O emission factors, and methane emission rates from storage and spreading for manure and slurry are summarized in Table 3.
This stage shall only be included in the baseline scenario if the biogas project uses manure or slurry as a feedstock input.
This stage is included to ensure that both the impacts and benefits of manure and slurry management are accounted for in the baseline scenario. It conservatively accounts for the tradeoff between diverting manure and slurry from use as organic soil amendments to biogas production. This diversion is modeled as avoided synthetic mineral fertilizer production and use, due to manure and slurry being used as organic soil amendments.
Similar to the Project avoided fertilizer section, it is assumed that nutrient availability is the same between manure/slurry and mineral fertilizer. For example, 1 kg of P2O5 from manure is modeled as substituting the production of 1 kg of P2O5 mineral fertilizer production.
Avoided N2O emissions are the same as in the Project avoided fertilizer section.
Project Developers shall provide the amounts of manure and slurry used as feedstock inputs, and values from the literature shall be used for converting to amounts of synthetic fertilizer avoided (Table 7).
Table 7 Rates of avoided synthetic fertilizer production and use, from manure and slurry use as organic soil amendments in the baseline scenario (Esnouf et al., 2021, Tables 35 and 38).
Nitrogen (N)
2.19
1.67
Potassium (K2O)
12.7
2.05
Phosphorus (P2O5)
2.75
1.59
Avoided GHG emissions are calculated by subtracting the sum of the project scenario GHG emissions from the sum of the baseline GHG scenario emissions.
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the Rainbow Standard Rules. The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of avoided emissions to eliminate with the discount factor.
The assumptions that are estimated to have high uncertainty (i.e. high variability and high impact) are:
The amount of digestate produced is estimated from 85-95% of feedstock input weight. A conservative assumption of 85% was taken.
Digestate stored in a covered area with gas recovery has 20% of gasses leaked
The assumptions that are estimated to have moderate uncertainty are:
Nutrient availability in digestate is equivalent to that of mineral fertilizer
The assumptions that are estimated to have low uncertainty are:
Waste feedstock inputs come with no production impacts.
The distance for waste feedstock collection of manure and/or slurry in the baseline scenario is assumed to be 10 km).
In case Project Developers do not have an estimation of days manure is stored onsite, an average of 15 days is considered. In the baseline scenario, this is assumed to be 180 days.
N2O emissions from slurry storage are generally small and, therefore, excluded from the project scenario’s GHG assessment.
Manure and slurry from pigs, horses, sheep, and other animals are modeled considering the same characteristics as cow manure.
In the project scenario, buildings and main infrastructure have a lifetime of 20 years and overall infrastructure impact based on the external volume of the main digester, leading to grouping infrastructure equipment and network into the same category rather than assessing specific equipment's impacts.
Activated carbon used by the project is accounted for in a ratio of 0.2 t/GWh of energy produced .
The amount of biogas self-consumed is assumed to be 4%
The baseline scenario selection has low uncertainty and is mostly standardized. It accounts for project-specific information regarding the amount of biomethane injected into the gas grid, type of feedstock, quality of digestate, and national gas market share statistics.
Numerous equations and models are used in this methodology and have low uncertainty:
Most are basic conversions that have been taken from the scientific literature, especially Esnouf et al., 2021, which is a rigorous, detailed LCA of biomethane production that underwent critical review and was published by INRAE Transfert, a subsidiary of the French National Institute for Research in Agronomics.
The linear regression model from Hartig 2010 has moderate uncertainty
Estimates and secondary data used in this methodology have varying levels of uncertainty and are assessed in Table 8.
The uncertainty at the methodology level is estimated to be low. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 3% for projects under this methodology.
Table 8 Presentation of all secondary data and estimates used, and an assessment of their uncertainty.
Chicken manure fresh matter as nitrogen (%)
Table 3
The rate of fresh matter as nitrogen contained in chicken manure was taken from a study conducted in 2015. There is low uncertainty in this data sample since chicken feed patterns are assumed to not have significantly changed.
Cow manure and slurry dry matter and nitrogen content
Table 3
These values come from Esnouf et al., 2021, Table 18. Their source was internal expertise and databases from the French National Institute for Research in Agronomics (INRAE), which is expected to have high quality data for these values that are relatively simple to measure. That study underwent critical review. Uncertainty is low.
Nitrogen lost as N2O during manure and slurry storage (%)
Table 3, Table 6
These values come from Esnouf et al., 2021, Table 34 and 37. Their source was INRAE 2013. These are estimated to be reputable scientific sources, but due to the sensitivity of this value, it is estimated to have moderate uncertainty.
Rate of N2O released from manure and slurry spreading (kgN2O/t of manure)
Table 3
The baseline scenario structure remains valid for the entire crediting period but may be significantly revised earlier if:
The Project Developer notifies Rainbow of a substantial change in project operations or baseline conditions, and/or
The methodology is revised, affecting the baseline scenario.
The specific values within the baseline scenario will be updated during each crediting period, using project data to accurately reflect the equivalent of the project’s operations.
For cow and all other manure types, this is 0.65% of fresh matter as nitrogen, as shown in Table 3 in the Assumptions section (2.7% of dry matter as nitrogen * 24% dry matter)
represents the rate of nitrogen emitted as NO from conventional manure storage of 180 days. According to Table 3, this equals 2%.
represents the number of days manure is kept stored in the project scenario. A default value of 15 days can be assumed if no project data is available. 180 represents the conventional manure storage duration of 180 days.
represents the conversion of nitrogen to NO equivalents by multiplying by the ratio of their molecular mass (1.57).
represents the global warming potential of NO over 100 years, which is 273 kgCOeq/kg N2O.
represents the methane density, which is 0.75 kg/m³.
was described in Equation 3.
represents the global warming potential of biogenic CH over 100 years, which is 27 kgCOeq/kg CH
represents the percentage of methane in biogas. This value is assumed to be 55%, as presented in the Assumptions section.
represents the percentage of biomethane leaked during the gas injection into the grid, which is 0.1% according to Table 4.
represents the percentage of biomethane leaked during the biomethane distribution to the final user, which is 0.13% according to Table 4.
represents the percentage of methane in biomethane. This value is considered 97%, as presented in Assumptions section.
represents the percentage methane produced that is leaked in the purification process. This value is estimated at 0.7% if data is not available for the project.
was described in Equation 4.
is explained in Equation 3.
and is explained in Equation 1.
and are explained in Equation 3.
and are explained in Equation 3.
was calculated in Equation 25.
and are explained in Equation 3.
represents the emission factor of natural gas, in kgCOeq/MJ. Refer to Appendix 2 for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the emission factor of biogas type i, in kgCOeq/m³.
represents the percentage of nitrogen lost as NO during storage of slurry, which is 0.0008% (Table 3).
and are explained in Equation 3.
and are explained in Equation 3.
The external volume of the site's main digester
m³
Licensing or design official document containing this parameter
Biomethane injected into the grid
m³ and GWh
Gas grid injection receipts
Digestate covered during storage
Percent
Any official document containing this parameter or estimates based on the volume of each storage facility
Repartition of solid, liquid and raw digestate stored and spread*
Percent
Records of digestate sales plus description of if/how digestate is separated
Whether leaks are recovered and recirculated during purification
Yes/No
Any official document containing this parameter
Efficiency of purification process (optional)
Percent of methane released with offgas
Machinery technical specifications
Average number of days that feedstock spends in the digester (residence time)
Days
Any official document containing this parameter or estimates
Nitrogen (total N), potassium (K2O) and phosphorus (P2O5) content in the digestate, per digestate type
kg/tonne of material
Official laboratory tests
Average distance that digestate is transported by road transport, per digestate type
km
Track records from the biogas site; map with the two points location and distance
2
Rate of N2O released from manure spreading (kgN2O/t of manure spread)
0.177
0.177
Biochemical methane potential (BMP) (m3 CH4/tonne fresh manure)
86
51
Methane emissions during storage (as % of BMP)
1.5
1.5
Injection
0.1% input biomethane leaked by volume
0.097%
page 76
Distribution
0.13% input biomethane leaked by volume
0.126%
Table 52
Sum
1.20%
2
These values come from Esnouf et al., 2021, Tables 35 and 38 and were calculated in the study. This is estimated to be a reputable scientific source, but due to the sensitivity of this value, it is estimated to have moderate uncertainty.
Nitrogen lost as N2O during digestate, storage (%)
Table 6
These values come from Esnouf et al., 2021, Table 18. Their source was INRAE 2013. These are estimated to be reputable scientific sources, but due to the sensitivity of this value, it is estimated to have moderate uncertainty.
Nitrogen lost as N2O during digestate, spreading (%)
Table 6
This value comes from the IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories. Although it is a reputable source, the value taken is a highly generalized global average and actually depends on soil and climatic factors. It is estimated to have moderate uncertainty.
Lower heating value of biogas and biomethane (MJ/m³)
Table 5
These characteristics come from the ecoinvent database and International Energy Agency, both of which are reliable sources. Biomethane LHV has low uncertainty since it is a consistent value, but biogas LHV has high uncertainty since the gas content, and therefore energy content, of biogas is variable.
Density (kg/m³)
Equation 4, 12 and 22
Methane density was obtained from a textbook on anaerobic digestion, and has low uncertainty.
Methane content (% volume)
Table 5
Methane percentages in biogas and biomethane were taken from the European Biogas Association. Biomethane has low uncertainty since it is a consistent value, but biogas has high uncertainty since its composition is variable.
Biomethane combustion N2O and CH4 emission rates
These values come from Esnouf et al., 2021, Table 53, and results are not sensitive to them. They are estimated to have low uncertainties.
Leakage rates in the digestion, purification, boiler, injection and distribution process (%)
Table 4
These values come from Esnouf et al., 2021. There is high uncertainty in this data sample. Even though the study is recent and uses reliable data, leakages depend on project-specific factors such as the site design and age. Projects certified under Rainbow's biogas methodology are considerably new (built after 2018), which justifies adopting the values for recently built sites from the data sample.
Manure and slurry avoided fertilizer (kg/tonne)
Table 7
The amount of N, K2O, and P2O5 avoided fertilizer per tonne of manure and slurry used in the baseline scenario was taken from the Esnouf et al., 2021, Tables 35 and 38. There is low uncertainty in these data samples.
Baseline grid gas mix
Baseline Energy production
In the baseline scenario, the mix of gasses for energy production is taken from national gas grid market shares from the Eurostat database. These data are estimated to have moderate uncertainty, because the most recent data available are from 2022, and because of inherent uncertainty and compatibility issues inherent in such macro, national data.


Table A1 List of ecoinvent 3.11 processes used in the GHG reduction quantification model
Smartphone*
consumer electronics production, mobile device, smartphone | consumer electronics, mobile device, smartphone | Cutoff, U, GLO
*removed the power adapter production and waste treatment, and the device waste treatment
**removed the device waste treatment
***amount of each input varies by device type, and values were taken from the ADEME study (see the )
Table A2 Mass and GHG emissions from production for iPhones gathered from Apple Product Environmental Reports, for a selection of recent models.
Table A3 Mass and GHG emissions from production for iPads gathered from Apple Product Environmental Reports, for a selection of recent models
*2021 is also considered in the average iPad emissions to have a bigger sample
Table A4 Mass and GHG emissions from production for MacBooks gathered from Apple Product Environmental Reports, for a selection of recent models
Table A5 Mass and GHG emissions from production for iMacs gathered from Apple Product Environmental Reports, for a selection of recent models
Table A6 The Refurbishing Impact Ratio is calculated by dividing the Results refurbished device column by the Results new device column. This fraction is then applied to the emission factors for new device impacts used in this study to obtain the emissions from the refurbishing process (Table 3).
The following equation is used to solve for , which represents the rate of full refurbishment activities modeled per device type i. This reflects the “amount” of refurbishment used as an input for that device. This is used in Equation 9 and Equation 18. Its values for each device type are presented in Table A7.
where,
represents the GHG emissions due to the full refurbishing of a device type i. These values have been calculated using secondary data and are summarized in Table 3.
represents the emission factor of the full refurbishing process, which is composed of a mix of replacement parts and cleaning supplies, and is detailed in Appendix 1.
Table A7 The amount of full refurbishment activity input to each device type to obtain the desired emission factor for refurbished devices, as presented in Table 3. Calculated by dividing the desired emission factor for refurbished devices by the emission factor for one full refurbishment activity. The full refurbishment activity is described in Appendix 1.
Table A8 The national WEEE waste treatment rates are summarized. Sources are indicated in the column names. Percent of all small IT e-waste that is recycled/reused (column 3) was calculated by multiplying the Percent small IT e-waste separately collected (column 1) by Percent of separately collected small IT e-waste that is recycled/reused (column 2). Percent of all small IT e-waste in municipal waste stream (column 4) was calculated by subtracting Percent of all small IT e-waste that is recycled/reused (column 3) from 100%. Note that when percentages were >100, they were automatically set to 100.
project scenario section explains that the ecoinvent 3.11 smartphone activity was modified. This was because:
Smartphones are the most frequently refurbished device type, so avoided emission calculations are particularly sensitive to their emission factor
Smartphone LCA results are highly variable
Many
A comparison of detailed life cycle inventories was the preferred approach, but was not possible due to a lack of transparent data on smartphone composition. Notably, the amounts of the most impactful smartphone components (mainboard, printed wiring boards, and integrated circuits) could not be found to adjust inputs to the ecoinvent process.
Instead, smartphone manufacturing emission factors were summarized for the smartphones that are most recent (released 2022-2024) and popular in Europe, and had publicly available LCAs.
For Apple iPhones (devices with most sales globally), the identified values are presented in Table A2, with an average of 64±15 kg CO2eq/device. Emission factors for other smartphones are summarized in the table below, and show an average emission factor of 49±13 kg CO2eq/device. These values shall be used for the emission factors for iPhones and other smartphones, respectively.
These values are around 25-50% greater than the smartphone production emission factor from ecoinvent 3.10.
To implement this change in the model, the amount of key inputs (mainboard, printed wiring boards, and integrated circuits) in the ecoinvent smartphone process was increased to reach the desired final emission factor.
Additionally, exchanges for the charger production, smartphone waste treatment, and cable waste treatment were removed from the process, to align with the project system boundaries.
Table A9 The non-Apple GHG emissions from manufacturing of smartphones gathered from manufacturer environmental reports, for a selection of recent and popular smartphone models. EF stands for emission factor.
The market share of new and used devices sold annually in Europe was used to determine the repartition of avoided new and refurbished devices in the baseline scenario. Most data were available for smartphones, taken from survey responses from 2022, and are presented in Table A10. The average values used for the GHG reduction quantification are a market share of 13% for refurbished smartphones, and 87% for new smartphones, as shown in Table 5.
Table A10 Breakdown of refurbished and new smartphones sold in European countries in 2022.
Similar detailed data were not available for other device types. Survey responses on the interest in buying a given refurbished device type were used to adjust the smartphone data in Table A10 proportionally to other device types (Table A11). The results from PCs were applied to laptops and gaming consoles, and the results for TVs were used as a proxy for monitors.
Table A11 Survey results asking respondents if they would be interested in buying the device type refurbished are summarized. The ratio of the results for smartphones compared to other device types was used to proportionally adjust the average percentage of refurbished smartphones gathered in Table A10.
The devices considered were the most popular and recent models estimated on the market in Europe for smartphones and tablets. New prices were taken from the manufacturer’s website where available, or from the manufacturer’s store on Amazon. In both cases, French sources were used. Average buyback prices were shared with Rainbow by Project Developers. Prices reflect annual buyback price for that device category, for devices from Europe, in 2023.
Table A12 Sample prices for a new Apple iPhone.
Table A13 Sample prices for a new Samsung smartphone.
Table A14 Sample prices for a new Apple iPad.
Table A15 Sample prices for a new Samsung tablet.
Monitors were categorized into two size groups: smaller or larger than 25" screen diameter, based on the distribution in Figure 29 here.
For the <25" monitors, the ecoinvent activity "display production, liquid crystal, 17 inches" was used to estimate emissions.
To approximate emissions the >25" monitors, the emission factor from this 17" reference was scaled up using data from an ADEME study that provides emissions for two screen sizes. This source indicates that increasing screen size from 21.5" to 23.8" (a 11% increase) results in a 12% increase in production-related GHG emissions. Assuming this scaling relationship is linear, a 47% increase in screen size (from 17" to 25") would lead to a 53% increase in emissions. Applying this factor to the original ecoinvent activity yields an emission factor of 538 tCO2eq per monitor >25".
According to ecoinvent, the 17" monitor used to model the <25" category weighs 4.5 kg. To estimate the weight of a >25" monitor, it was assumed that weight scales proportionally with screen size. Since a 25-inch monitor is approximately 47% larger than a 17-inch monitor, its weight was scaled up by the same proportion, resulting in an estimated weight of 6.6 kg.
👉Download the table
2022
14
256
0.172
67
79%
53
2022
14
512
0.172
83
79%
66
2022
14 plus
128
0.203
68
78%
53
2022
14 plus
256
0.203
75
78%
59
2022
14 plus
512
0.203
91
78%
71
2022
14 pro
128
0.206
65
81%
53
2022
14 pro
256
0.206
71
81%
58
2022
14 pro
512
0.206
84
81%
68
2022
14 pro
1TB
0.206
116
81%
94
2022
14 pro max
128
0.240
73
79%
58
2022
14 pro max
256
0.240
80
79%
63
2022
14 pro max
512
0.240
93
79%
73
2022
14 pro max
1TB
0.240
124
79%
98
2023
15
128
0.171
56
80%
45
2023
15
256
0.171
61
80%
49
2023
15
512
0.171
74
80%
59
2023
15 plus
128
0.201
61
79%
48
2023
15 plus
256
0.201
66
79%
52
2023
15 plus
512
0.201
79
79%
62
2023
15 pro
128
0.187
66
83%
55
2023
15 pro
256
0.187
71
83%
59
2023
15 pro
512
0.187
83
83%
69
2023
15 pro
1TB
0.187
107
83%
89
2023
15 pro max
256
0.221
75
83%
62
2023
15 pro max
512
0.221
87
83%
72
2023
15 pro max
1TB
0.221
110
83%
9
9th gen.
128
0.487
78
78%
61
2021
9th gen.
256
0.487
84
78%
66
2022
10th gen.
64
0.477
72
78%
56
2022
10th gen.
256
0.477
82
78%
64
2023
no iPad launched*
MacBook Air M2 chip
512
1.24
171
69%
118
2022
13-inch MacBook Pro
256
1.4
167
71%
119
2022
13-inch MacBook Pro
512
1.4
182
71%
129
2023
16-inch MacBook Pro
M3 Pro 512GB
2.15
290
67%
194
2023
16-inch MacBook Pro
M3 Max 1TB
2.16
348
72%
251
2023
14-inch MacBook Pro
M2 Pro 512GB
1.6
243
79%
192
2023
14-inch MacBook Pro
M2 Pro 1T
1.6
272
79%
215
2023
14-inch MacBook Pro
M2 Max 1TB
1.63
301
79%
238
2023
MacBook Air 15-inch M2 chip
256
1.51
139
73%
101
2023
MacBook Air 15-inch M2 chip
512
1.51
152
73%
111
iMac (24 inches)
M1 8-core GPU 256GB
4.47
486
45%
219
2021
iMac (24 inches)
M1 8-core GPU 512GB
4.47
511
45%
230
2022
no iMac launched
2023
iMac (two ports)
256
4.43
359
52%
187
weight source: and
2023
iMac (four ports)
512
4.48
389
52%
202
Laptop
168
18
11%
, p. 158. Table 74
PC
256
26
10%
, p. 107, and 166. Table 86
Monitor
212
22
10%
Emission factor extrapolated from PC results, adjusted by monitor weight, , pg 166.
0.39
iMac
1.61
iPad
0.53
Gaming console
5.01
85%
68%
32%
Czechia
57%
100%
57%
43%
Denmark
38%
83%
32%
68%
Germany
89%
85%
75%
25%
Estonia
74%
84%
62%
38%
Ireland
59%
86%
50%
50%
Greece
49%
60%
29%
71%
Spain
62%
68%
42%
58%
France
91%
73%
67%
33%
Croatia
60%
88%
52%
48%
Italy
44%
62%
27%
73%
Cyprus
75%
91%
68%
32%
Latvia
54%
77%
41%
59%
Lithuania
80%
77%
61%
39%
Luxembourg
64%
87%
56%
44%
Hungary
53%
77%
41%
59%
Malta
No data
Netherlands
77%
72%
55%
45%
Austria
96%
75%
73%
27%
Poland
No data
Portugal
82%
22%
18%
82%
Romania
No data
Slovenia
100%
90%
90%
10%
Slovakia
91%
92%
84%
16%
Finland
63%
95%
59%
41%
Sweden
53%
84%
45%
55%
Iceland
No data
Liechtenstein
No data
Norway
100%
77%
77%
23%
China
NA
NA
23%
77%
USA
NA
NA
82%
18%
Turkey
NA
NA
25%
75%
A54
49.2
69%
33.90
2023
Galaxy
S23 FE
47.5
79%
37.50
2023
Galaxy
S23
53
85%
45.00
2023
Galaxy
S23+
58.8
84%
49.22
2023
Galaxy
S23 Ultra
70.6
85%
60.22
2024
Galaxy
S24 Ultra
66.4
86%
56.90
2024
Galaxy
S24+
54.8
85%
46.47
2024
Galaxy
S24
50.3
84%
42.25
2022
Huawei
Mate 50 Pro
81
88%
71.33
2022
Huawei
Mate 50
75.3
88%
65.95
Germany
15%
85%
, pg 17
Scandanavia
12%
88%
, pg 17
The Netherlands
11%
89%
, pg 17
Poland
10%
90%
Deloitte Poland 2022,
Belgium
9%
91%
, pg 17
Italy
7%
93%
, pg 17
Average
13%
87%
TV
28%
6%
94%
€1,102
iPhone 14 pro, 256 GB
€1,235
iPhone 14 pro, 512 GB
€1,490
iPhone 14 pro, 1TB GB
€1,721
iPhone 14 pro max, 128 GB
€1,249
iPhone 14 pro max, 256 GB
€1,399
iPhone 14 pro max, 512 GB
€1,599
iPhone 14 pro max, 1TB GB
€1,699
iPhone 15, 128 GB
€969
iPhone 15, 256 GB
€1,099
iPhone 15, 512 GB
€1,349
iPhone 15 plus, 128 GB
€1,119
iPhone 15 plus, 256 GB
€1,249
iPhone 15 plus, 512 GB
€1,499
iPhone 15 pro, 128 GB
€1,229
iPhone 15 pro, 256 GB
€1,359
iPhone 15 pro, 512 GB
€1,609
iPhone 15 pro, 1TB GB
€1,859
iPhone 15 pro max, 256 GB
€1,479
iPhone 15 pro max, 512 GB
€1,729
iPhone 15 pro max, 1TB GB
€1,979
€309
Samsung Galaxy A54 5G, 256 GB
€410
Samsung Galaxy S23 FE, 128 GB
€699
Samsung Galaxy S23 FE, 256 GB
€759
Samsung Galaxy S23, 128 GB
€799
Samsung Galaxy S23, 256 GB
€859
Samsung Galaxy S23+, 256 GB
€919
Samsung Galaxy S23+, 512 GB
€993
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra, 256 GB
€969
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra, 512 GB
€1,039
Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra, 256 GB
€1,469
Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra, 512 GB
€1,589
Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra, 1 TB
€1,829
Samsung Galaxy S24, 128 GB
€899
Samsung Galaxy S24, 256 GB
€959
Samsung Galaxy S24+, 256 GB
€1,169
Samsung Galaxy S24+, 512 GB
€1,289
€1,599
iPad Pro 12.9 inch, 512 GB
€1,849
iPad Pro 12.9 inch, 1 TB
€2,349
iPad Pro 12.9 inch, 2 TB
€2,849
iPad Air, 64 GB
€789
iPad Air, 256 GB
€989
iPad 10th gen, 64 GB
€589
iPad 10th gen, 256 GB
€789
iPad 9th gen, 64 GB
€439
iPad 9th gen, 256 GB
€639
iPad mini, 64 GB
€659
iPad mini, 256 GB
€859
iPad Pro 11 inch 5G, 128 GB
€1,269
iPad Pro 11 inch 5G, 256 GB
€1,399
iPad Pro 11 inch 5G, 512 GB
€1,649
iPad Pro 11 inch 5G, 1 TB
€2,149
iPad Pro 11 inch 5G, 2 TB
€2,649
iPad Pro 12.9 inch 5G, 128 GB
€1,669
iPad Pro 12.9 inch 5G, 256 GB
€1,799
iPad Pro 12.9 inch 5G, 512 GB
€2,049
iPad Pro 12.9 inch 5G, 1 TB
€2,544
iPad Pro 12.9 inch 5G, 2 TB
€3,044
iPad Air 5G, 64 GB
€989
iPad Air 5G, 256 GB
€1,189
iPad 10th gen 5G, 64 GB
€789
iPad 10th gen 5G, 256 GB
€989
iPad 9th gen 5G, 64 GB
€609
iPad 9th gen 5G, 256 GB
€809
iPad mini 5G, 64 GB
€859
iPad mini 5G, 256 GB
€1,059
1749
Galaxy Tab S9 FE, 128 GB
529
Galaxy Tab S9 FE, 256 GB
599
Galaxy Tab S9 FE+, 128 GB
699
Galaxy Tab S9 FE+, 256 GB
799
Galaxy Tab A9, 64 GB
189
Galaxy Tab A9, 128 GB
219
Galaxy Tab A9+, 64 GB
259
Galaxy Tab A9+, 128 GB
299
Galaxy Tab S9 5G, 128 GB
1099
Galaxy Tab S9 5G, 256 GB
1079
Galaxy Tab S9+ 5G, 256 GB
1329
Galaxy Tab S9+ 5G, 512GB
1449
Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra 5G, 256 GB
1579
Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra 5G, 1 TB
1899
Galaxy Tab S9 FE 5G, 128 GB
629
Galaxy Tab S9 FE 5G, 256 GB
599
Galaxy Tab S9 FE+ 5G, 128 GB
799
Galaxy Tab S9 FE+ 5G, 256 GB
899
Galaxy Tab A9 4G, 64 GB
217
Galaxy Tab A9+ 5G, 64 GB
309
Galaxy Tab A9+ 5G, 128 GB
349
Tablet*
consumer electronics production, mobile device, tablet | consumer electronics, mobile device, tablet | Cutoff, U, GLO
PC**
computer production, desktop, without screen | computer, desktop, without screen | Cutoff, U, GLO
Laptop*
computer production, laptop | computer, laptop | Cutoff, U, GLO
Monitor
display production, liquid crystal, 17 inches | display, liquid crystal, 17 inches | Cutoff, U, GLO
Transport, truck
market for transport, freight, lorry 7.5-16 metric ton, EURO5 | transport, freight, lorry 7.5-16 metric ton, EURO5 | Cutoff, U, RER
Transport, air
market for transport, freight, aircraft, long haul | transport, freight, aircraft, long haul | Cutoff, U, GLO
Smartphone recycling
treatment of used smartphone, mechanical treatment | used smartphone | Cutoff, U, GLO
Tablet recycling
treatment of used tablet, mechanical treatment | used tablet | Cutoff, U, GLO
PC recycling
treatment of used desktop computer, mechanical treatment | used desktop computer | Cutoff, U, GLO
Laptop recycling
treatment of used laptop computer, mechanical treatment | used laptop computer | Cutoff, U, GLO
Monitor recycling
treatment of used liquid crystal display, mechanical treatment | used liquid crystal display | Cutoff, U, GLO
Light refurbishing***
market for ethanol, without water, in 99.7% solution state, from ethylene | ethanol, without water, in 99.7% solution state, from ethylene | Cutoff, U, RER
market for water, completely softened | water, completely softened | Cutoff, U, RER
market for tissue paper | tissue paper | Cutoff, U, GLO
market for textile, knit cotton | textile, knit cotton | Cutoff, U, GLO
market for electricity, low voltage, country specific
Full refurbishing
market for ethanol, without water, in 99.7% solution state, from ethylene | ethanol, without water, in 99.7% solution state, from ethylene | Cutoff, U, RER***
market for water, completely softened | water, completely softened | Cutoff, U, RER***
market for tissue paper | tissue paper | Cutoff, U, GLO***
market for textile, knit cotton | textile, knit cotton | Cutoff, U, GLO***
market for battery, Li-ion, NCA, rechargeable, prismatic | Cutoff, U, GLO (0.1 kg)
market for electronic component, passive, mobile, earpiece and speaker | Cutoff, U, GLO (0.002 kg)
market for liquid crystal display, unmounted, mobile device | Cutoff, U, GLO (0.1 kg)
E-waste incineration
treatment of waste glass, municipal incineration | waste glass | Cutoff, U, GLO = 10%
treatment of waste plastic, consumer electronics, municipal incineration | waste plastic, consumer electronics | Cutoff, U, GLO = 50%
treatment of scrap copper, municipal incineration | scrap copper | Cutoff, U, Europe without Switzerland = 20%
treatment of scrap aluminum, municipal incineration | scrap aluminum | Cutoff, U, Europe without Switzerland= 20%
E-waste landfill
treatment of waste plastic, mixture, sanitary landfill | waste plastic, mixture | Cutoff, U, RoW = 50%
treatment of waste glass, sanitary landfill | waste glass l Cutoff, U, GLO = 10%
treatment of waste aluminum, sanitary landfill | waste aluminum | Cutoff, U, RoW = 40%
2022
14
128
0.172
61
79%
48
Mean
64
Median
59
Standard Deviation
14.6
Coefficient of variation (Standard Deviation/Mean) (%)
22.8%
Year
Model
Memory (GB)
Mass (kg)
EF (kgCO2e)
Production (%)
EF production (kgCO2e)
Source
2021
9th gen.
64
0.487
75
78%
59
Mean
61
Median
61
Standard Deviation
3.8
Coefficient of variation (Standard Deviation/Mean) (%)
6.29%
Year
Model
Memory (GB)
Mass (kg)
EF (kgCO2e)
Production (%)
EF production (kgCO2e)
Source
2022
MacBook Air M2 chip
256
1.24
147
69%
101
Mean
161
Median
129
Standard Deviation
57.6
Coefficient of variation (Standard Deviation/Mean) (%)
35.8%
Year
Model
Memory (GB)
Mass (kg)
EF (kgCO2e)
Production (%)
EF production (kgCO2e)
Source
2021
iMac (24 inches)
M1 7-core GPU 256GB
4.47
481
45%
216
Mean
211
Median
216
Standard Deviation
16.7
Coefficient of variation (Standard Deviation/Mean) (%)
7.92%
Smartphone
84
7
8%
ADEME study, p. 152 Table 62
Tablet
74
9
12%
Device type
Rate of full refurbishment
()
Smartphone
0.30
Tablet
0.76
Laptop
1.35
Monitor <25"
2.73
PC
1.72
Macbook
1.27
Country
Percent small IT e-waste separately collected
Percent of separately collected small IT e-waste that is recycled/reused
Percent of all small IT e-waste that is recycled/reused
Percent of all small IT e-waste in municipal waste stream
Europe average
72%
79%
56%
44%
Belgium
100%
80%
80%
20%
Bulgaria
2023
Galaxy
A14
42.5
78%
33.20
2023
Country
Percent Refurbished
Percent new
Source
France
19%
81%
ARCEP 2024, Figure 23 (data from 2022)
UK
16%
84%
Deloitte Scandanavia 2022, pg 17
Austria
15%
85%
Deloitte Scandanavia 2022, pg 17
Device type
% interested in buying refurbished
Percent Refurbished
Percent new
Smartphone
59%
13%
87%
PC
35%
8%
92%
Tablet
34%
7%
93%
Model
New Price (€)
iPhone 14, 128 GB
€869
iPhone 14, 256 GB
€999
iPhone 14, 512 GB
€1,249
iPhone 14 plus, 128 GB
€969
iPhone 14 plus, 256 GB
€1,099
iPhone 14 plus, 512 GB
€1,349
iPhone summary
Average new
€1,354
Average buyback
€186
Residual value
13.7%
Model
New Price (€)
Samsung Galaxy A14 4G, 64 GB
€132
Samsung Galaxy A14 4G, 128 GB
€128
Samsung Galaxy A14 5G, 64 GB
€176
Samsung Galaxy A14 5G, 128 GB
€256
Samsung Galaxy A34, 128 GB
€237
Samsung Galaxy A34, 256 GB
€286
Smartphone summary
Average new
€790
Average buyback
€89
Residual value
11.3%
Model
New Price (€)
iPad Pro 11 inch, 128 GB
€1,069
iPad Pro 11 inch, 256 GB
€1,199
iPad Pro 11 inch, 512 GB
€1,449
iPad Pro 11 inch, 1 TB
€1,949
iPad Pro 11 inch, 2 TB
€2,449
iPad Pro 12.9 inch, 128 GB
€1,469
iPad summary
Average new
€1,430
Average buyback
€170
Residual value
11.9%
Model
New Price (€)
Galaxy Tab S9, 128 GB
899
Galaxy Tab S9, 256 GB
949
Galaxy Tab S9+, 256 GB
1149
Galaxy Tab S9+, 512GB
1149
Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra, 256 GB
1249
Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra, 512 GB
1499
Tablet summary
Average new
€944
Average buyback
€185
Residual value
19.6%
2021
2022
2021
, p. 157. Table 72
iPhone
79%
Galaxy
iPhone 14 pro, 128 GB
Samsung Galaxy A54 5G, 128 GB
iPad Pro 12.9 inch, 256 GB
Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra, 1 TB
Module name
Marine sub-sediment burial
Module category
Carbon storage
Methodology name
Biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS)
Version
1.0
Methodology ID
RBW-BICRS-CS-MSSB-V1.0
Release date
August 28th, 2025
This is a Carbon Storage Module and covers Marine sub-sediment burial. This module is part of the Rainbow BiCRS methodology, which allows Project Developers to choose the relevant modules for their project, and shall be used with the necessary accompanying modules.
See more details on how modules are organized in the .
This module covers marine sub-sediment burial projects that inject waste and residual biomass feedstock inputs directly into the anoxic layer of marine sub-sediments. Projects shall meet all of the following criteria:
Demonstrate capability to perform MRV as agreed upon in the validated project documentation
Demonstrate a net-negative project carbon footprint based on initial LCA estimates of induced emissions and initial CDR estimates based on modeling
Projects that sink biomass to the seafloor but do not bury and embed it into marine sub-sediments are not eligible.
The entity eligible for receiving carbon finance is the operator performing storage at the sub-sediment burial site. Biomass producers and sub-sediment burial machinery manufacturers are not eligible Project Developers.
A project is defined as all burial activities that take place from one port over the project lifetime (by default a maximum of 5 years, ), and all removal that occurs as a result of that burial, plus the upstream/downstream activities associated with that burial (e.g. GHG emissions from feedstock sourcing, transport...).
See the section for more details on how a project is organized into different burial areas and burial events.
Storage must be done in anoxic conditions.
Storage must be done in existing accessible marine sub-sediment. Projects that excavate, dredge or build wells for the sole purpose of accessing sub-sediments or creating sub-sediment conditions are not eligible, due to the associated environmental risks.
See the section for more specific requirements.
Only particulate terrestrial biomass feedstock that also meets the requirements of the is eligible in this module. Injection of liquefied or gaseous CO into sediments is outside the scope of this module.
See the for more specific feedstock requirements.
Measurements and reporting are performed for storage batches. Verification and credit issuance is done at the reporting period scale (by default, annually), and groups results for all storage batches concerned during that reporting period. The organization of a project into storage batches, sites and points is described below, and depicted in Figure 1.
Sedimentary conditions for storage points within one storage site must be within the following ranges (data requirements are outlined in the section):
Grain size: Grain size must be predominantly (> 50%) mud (< 63 µm grain size in diameter)
Water depth at storage point: At water depths 1-20 m, water depths must be within 0.5 m. At water depths 20-200 m, water depths must be within 5 m.
Sub-sediment depth of storage: At sub-sediment depths 2-3 m, storage depths must be within 0.5 m. At sub-sediment depths >3 m, storage depths must be within 1 m.
Ongoing burial into the sub-sediment shall last no longer than 31 days per storage batch, to standardize sampling timescales. If burial continues after 31 days, it shall be considered a separate storage batch.
One project may work with different storage batches simultaneously. Each storage batch shall be monitored and reported separately within the same Monitoring Report. Storage batch information shall be monitored and reported at least once per calendar year.
Information about storage batches may be monitored and by Project Developers by uploading claim information to the Rainbow MRV platform.
A feedstock mixture is defined as one biomass feedstock or uniform mixtures of feedstocks. One feedstock mixture may be used across several storage batches, but any time the feedstock mixture of one storage batch changes, a new storage batch shall be started.
Any water used in the feedstock mixture must come from within the 24 km storage batch area.
The feedstock mixture composition may vary by no more than 20% to be considered the same homogeneous feedstock mixture, where the composition is made of feedstocks of a specific type from a specific supplier.
See the section for requirements on feedstock sampling.
Storage points must meet the criteria outlined in Table 1 to be eligible. The criteria are set to ensure storage points are suitable for permanent carbon storage, are anoxic, and have low reversal risks.
All criteria shall be outlined in the Site Characterization Report, prepared before any burial events occur and submitted with the PDD for the validation audit. In addition, the Site Characterization Report shall provide GPS coordinates of each planned storage point, and a GIS-generated map showing each storage point and the delineation of the associated storage site.
Data sources characterizing storage points must be, in the following order of preference:
primary data from a pilot survey e.g. site surveys, in situ measurements and measurements on samples collected at the project site, delivered by the Project Developer, or
secondary data from the specific area concerned (e.g. published peer-reviewed literature or database measurements) or
secondary data from an area that is proven to be sufficiently representative and similar to the project area in the appropriate factors that relate to permanent storage.
Table 1 The required measurements and information for a storage site that must be presented in the Site Characterization Report, before any burial occurs, to justify that the storage site is appropriate for permanent CDR via marine sub-sediment burial.
Sampling occurs at two stages of the project: sampling of the feedstock mixture before burial to establish organic carbon buried, and sampling the feedstock mixture after burial to check for any reversals (i.e. carbon degradation or diffusion). At both stages of sampling, laboratory testing shall provide the following measurements of the feedstock mixture:
% organic carbon content of the solid biomass
% moisture content of the feedstock mixture
density of the feedstock mixture
Two representative samples of the feedstock mixture shall be prepared and sent for laboratory testing per storage batch: one at the beginning (day one) and one at the end of the storage batch (day 31, or an earlier date when the storage batch is complete).
Post-burial monitoring and sampling shall occur:
at least 12 months after the burial event, and
optionally, may also be performed within 1-3 months after the burial event if the Project Developer chooses the 50/50 credit issuance approach. See the section for more details.
Post-burial monitoring and sampling should be completed using sediment coring, to access the buried biomass, extract samples, and send them to a laboratory to measure the organic content of the solid biomass. Alternative approaches may be considered on a case by case basis, and approved by the VVB, the Rainbow Certification team and, if deemed necessary by the Rainbow Certification team, an expert peer reviewer.
Sampling and laboratory testing shall be done separately for each storage point. At least three sub-samples shall be taken from each storage point and mixed together to obtain one composite sample for the storage point. Samples can not be mixed from all storage points in one storage site to perform laboratory tests on a composite sample.
Project Developers shall prepare an ex-ante Sampling Plan before any burial events occur, and submit it with the PDD for the validation audit. The Sampling Plan shall describe:
how representative samples will be taken of the feedstock mixture in pre-burial sampling
how to preserve moisture content of feedstock mixture while sending it to the lab
number of samples used for post-burial sampling
strategy for ensuring random/representative/unbiased sampling locations for post-burial sampling
The Sampling Plan described above is developed ex-ante during validation and outlines the intended sampling approach. During monitoring and ex-post verification, Project Developers must provide a Sampling Procedure, described in the , which documents the actual sampling approach that was implemented.
Ideally, the Sampling Procedure should align exactly with the Sampling Plan. However, given real-world challenges that may arise during monitoring, deviations are expected. The purpose of documenting the Sampling Procedure ex-post is to ensure transparency by capturing any adjustments made to the original plan.
The Sampling Procedure shall include all elements listed in the Sampling Plan components section.
The eligibility criteria requirements specific to this module are detailed in the sections below. Other eligibility criteria requirements shall be taken from the accompanying modules and methodologies:
Removal Rainbow Carbon Credits (RCCs) issued from marine sub-sediment burial have a permanence horizon of 1000 years.
Permanence is assessed at two points during project certification:
at ex-ante validation it is estimated using site requirements that identify suitable sites for permanent burial
during verification it is demonstrated using direct measurements.
Requirements for each stage are detailed below.
To demonstrate that carbon in sub-sediment burial will remain permanently stable, indicators from the section must be provided at validation, in the Site Characterization Report, demonstrating compliance with the requirements. These indicators are suitable proof that a substantial fraction of the buried carbon will be permanently stable.
These indicators are suitable proof that a substantial fraction of the buried carbon is permanently stable. The amount of permanently stored carbon is determined using the models and equations detailed in the section.
At verification, it is assumed that 92% of organic carbon still remaining in the feedstock mixture 12 months after burial will remain permanently stored over 1000 years. This is based on modeled results for oxic marine sediments, and likely overestimate the non-permanent fraction of organic carbon in anoxic marine sediments, as required under this module.
At verification, the organic carbon content in the buried feedstock mixture of each storage batch is measured via sampling, and observed via remote sensing, at 1-3 months (optional) and 12 months (mandatory) to ensure permanent storage and negligible risk of reversal.
If measured organic carbon loss at 3 or 12 months exceeds 2% of the initially buried carbon, degradation/reversal may be triggered. In this case, the project is considered compromised, and carbon credit issuance for the affected storage batches will be paused. The Rainbow Certification team will collaborate with Project Developers to determine the cause of the unexpected loss and decide on appropriate corrective actions, including canceling issued credits according to the and suspension of future credit issuance.
The amount of permanently stored carbon that is issued credits is conservatively modeled, as detailed in the . Note that when default literature values for biomass are used, the modeled fraction of organic carbon that is still stored after 1000 years is 92%.
If measured organic carbon loss, at 3 or 12 months, exceeds 2% of the initially buried carbon, degradation may be triggered. In this case, the project is considered compromised, and carbon credit issuance for the affected storage batches will be paused. The Rainbow Certification team will collaborate with Project Developers to determine the cause of the unexpected loss and decide on appropriate corrective actions, including canceling issued credits according to the .
Project Developers shall fill in the Rainbow Marine sub-sediment burial to evaluate the risk of carbon storage reversal, based on social, economic, natural, and delivery risks.
All projects under this module are estimated to have a material reversal risk, due to
risk of degradation from improper burial in oxic conditions
risk of physical leakage from burial sites
the novelty of the technology, meaning the abovementioned points have not been proven as consistent and reliable.
Therefore, the risk mitigation plan includes adhering to all site characteristics, plus a reversal monitoring requirement. At least 5 years after burial, Project Developers shall
at a subset of storage sites, measure remaining organic carbon in feedstock samples
at all storage sites, confirm the presence and extent of buried feedstock using radar
All projects under this module are estimated to have a material reversal risk, due to
risk of degradation from improper burial in oxic conditions
risk of physical leakage from burial sites
the novelty of the technology, meaning the abovementioned points have not been proven as consistent and reliable.
Therefore, the risk mitigation plan includes adhering to all site characteristics, plus a reversal monitoring requirement. At least 5 years after burial, Project Developers shall:
at a subset of storage sites, measure remaining organic carbon in feedstock samples, and
at all storage sites, confirm the presence and extent of buried feedstock using radar.
Any identified carbon removal reversals shall result in canceled credits according to the .
Project Developers shall prove that their project provides at least 2 co-benefits from the (SDGs) framework (and no more than 4).
Common co-benefits of Marine sub-sediment burial projects, and their sources of proof, are detailed in Table 2. Project Developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
Table 2 Summary of common co-benefits provided by Marine sub-sediment burial projects. Co-benefits are organized under the United Nation Sustainable Development Goals (UN SDGs) framework.
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Projects must follow all national, local, and European (if located in Europe) environmental regulations related to the project activities.
Feedstock sustainability risks shall be taken from the .
Project Developers shall measure heavy metal content from biomass samples and demonstrate that it is below thresholds set by the relevant jurisdiction.
Project Developers shall fill in the Rainbow Marine sub-sediment burial to evaluate the identified environmental and social risks of Marine sub-sediment burial projects. The identified risks include:
Release of biomass via improper embedding
Release of aqueous CO or methane at sediment-water interface
Release of hydrogen sulfide at oxic-anoxic transition zone
Project activities impacting benthic life
Additional optional environmental impacts to monitor are described in .
Project Developers must follow all relevant laws and legal requirements for reporting operations to local, federal and international governing bodies. Project Developers must follow the requirements outlined in their permit relating to the amount of tonnes injected if specified, and geographic area permitted for operations.
Permits are typically required for accessing coastal marine sediments and performing sub-sediment burial. The Project Developer must provide written authorization by either 1) the permit granting regulatory authority or 2) by the partner providing the permit demonstrating freedom to operate and perform sub-sediment burial in the geographic area defined in the PDD.
Typically, the EIA should be completed in advance of obtaining permitting for credit generation, and will be completed over the course of operations and reported to Rainbow.
EIA may not be required for all permits for storage. When EIA is not required for permitting (e.g. for a research permit or permit exemption), the Project Developer shall demonstrate that a baseline environmental survey has been completed, assessing the elements listed below, and that the potential impacts have been considered to be within regulatory guidelines. This justification shall be evaluated by both the VVB and the Rainbow Certification Team. Project Developers shall provide the same information as they would in a full EIA to Rainbow for project validation, and cover aspects including:
Marine protected areas
Benthic habitat
Fishing grounds
Shipping lanes
Baseline environmental survey and/or EIA must address how the project adheres to regulatory requirements such as limitations on sediment resuspension and habitat destruction due to seabed intervention.
The system boundary of this quantification section starts after burial of feedstock mixture and covers carbon storage through end of life after 1000 years, and accounts for potential re-emission and decay modeled for 1000+ years. Sources of GHG emissions covered in this module include only permanent carbon storage modeling. Other GHG emissions shall be taken from the accompanying modules.
The rate of organic carbon degradation under oxic conditions is greater than the rate under anoxic conditions.
12 months is an appropriate and sufficiently long timeframe to determine if carbon degradation will likely occur over 1000 years, given that organic carbon degradation is
The required primary data for GHG reduction calculations from projects are presented in Table 3. These data shall be included in the project’s PDD and made publicly available.
Table 3 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source for project validation and verification. See the section for more details on monitoring and verification requirements. Asterisks (*) indicate which data shall be updated for each storage batch.
Secondary data taken from the literature may be used to define default values for the parameters outlined in Table 4. If instead, project incubation experiments or in situ experiments are used to provide values for and parameters, these experiments must either 1) be scientifically peer reviewed and published in academic journals, or 2) undergo independent external peer review for the specific project.
Table 4 Values from scientific literature that may be used instead of primary data, for validation stage ex-ante carbon degradation modeling.
Carbon storage is calculated by multiplying the fraction of organic carbon still stored over 1000 years, by the amount of initially buried organic carbon (Eq 1). Each component is described in the following sections.
The amount of carbon initially buried shall be calculating using using primary data, measured by Project Developers, for each storage batch, following Eq. 2 below.
A small fraction of the buried organic carbon may be decomposed by microbes in the sub-sediment. This is expected to be small because of:
the site requirements that ensure anoxic conditions, preventing degradation,
use of terrestrial biomass in marine settings, where microbial communities are not well adapted to degrade terrestrial biomass (see Appendix B), and
sediment conditions in the site requirements, ensuring that if degradation occurs, any evolved CO would likely stay trapped in the sub-sediment. Nevertheless, the calculations conservatively assume that any CO degraded is diffused out of the sub-sediment.
Carbon degradation is conservatively modeled using a multi-G kinetic model as shown in Eq. 3 (see justification in and ).
Empirical peer-reviewed research has only covered rate constants for organic matter degradation () for use in the multi-G kinetic model under marine sediment oxic conditions, but the projects covered under this methodology occur in marine sub-sediment anoxic conditions.
In absence of resources covering anoxic conditions, oxic-environment rate constants shall be used by default in the model for crediting, which is a conservative approach because this is expected to overestimate potential degradation in the sub-sediment burial anoxic conditions. As described in the section, Project Developers may provide project-specific anoxic rate constants, under certain conditions.
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the . The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of RCCs to eliminate with the discount factor.
The uncertainty in this module is assessed below for each component.
The baseline scenario selection has low uncertainty: it is rather certain that the share of project technology occurring in a Business as Usual scenario is very low.
measurements consists of basic conversions with low uncertainty.
modeling consists of the
The uncertainty at the module level is estimated to be low. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 3% for projects under this module.
👉 Download the template
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
Monitoring Plans to issue credits for this module shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for each new Storage Batch:
Reversal Monitoring Plans to check for reversals shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for a representative sample of storage sites:
This appendix outlines the scientific foundation for marine sub-sediment biomass storage, summarizing key research on organic carbon degradation and preservation in marine sediments. While no studies directly replicate the conditions described in this module, relevant literature on similar processes is compiled.
Marine sediments serve as the final carbon sink, storing 150–200 billion tons of organic carbon in their upper layers (; ; ). The biological pump transfers oceanic carbon to sediments via microbial fixation, food chain dynamics, and sinking particulate matter. Despite its inefficiency—only ~1% of sinking carbon reaches sediments, and just 0.1% is buried long-term (; )—this process significantly influences atmospheric CO2 levels.
Biomass degrades rapidly in oxygenated sediments, but in anoxic environments, it can persist for millennia. Oxygen exposure time (OET) controls degradation: prolonged exposure breaks macromolecules into labile forms, accelerating conversion to CO2 . Reducing OET preserves biomass, as seen in bog bodies and historic wooden structures preserved in compacted, oxygen-deprived sediments (; ).
Decades of research (; ; ) indicate that organic carbon degrades slowly in anoxic sediments due to low substrate availability, microbial competition, mineral protection, and biochemical inaccessibility (; ).
Biomass preservation for over 1,000 years is common in coastal zones with high sedimentation rates and low OET. For example, rapid burial in the Bay of Bengal (30 cm/yr sedimentation) protects wood from microbial degradation, preserving organic material for millions of years (). Similarly, wood fragments up to 11,900 years old have been recovered from the Gulf of Mexico (), and entire ancient forests remain buried off the Alabama coast (; ).
Studies show organic carbon degradation slows exponentially over time, with rates up to 1,000× lower in anoxic sediments than in oxic environments (; ; ; ). This supports the assumption that degradation rates in oxic conditions () represent a worst-case scenario for anoxic sub-sediment burial.
Biomass degradation begins with extracellular enzymatic hydrolysis, where aerobic microbes break down macromolecules into small organic compounds. These are further processed via anaerobic fermentation into substrates for redox reactions. However, without sufficient OET, enzymatic hydrolysis cannot begin, preventing degradation (; ). Ligno-cellulosic biomass requires longer OET than algal biomass to initiate breakdown.
In deep sediments, sulfate reduction is the dominant degradation process, accounting for 50% of total biomass decomposition globally (Jorgensen et al., 2019). This slow, energy-limited process produces CO2 and hydrogen sulfide (HS). CO2 diffuses upward, where it may be fixed by microbes or released at the sediment-water interface. Worst-case CO2 diffusion rates align with modern dissolved inorganic carbon (DIC) fluxes (). CO2 accumulates due to compaction, it can form hydrates at depths >10 m in cold marine sediments (Eccles & Pratson, 2012; Velaga et al., 2011).
Hydrogen sulfide (HS), though toxic, is rapidly oxidized in oxygenated environments, preventing marine toxicity. Additionally, 10–20% of HS reacts with iron hydrates to form pyrite (FeS), further stabilizing organic matter (Barber et al., 2017; Baumgartner et al., 2023).
Methanogenesis, consuming 15% of CO2 from sulfate oxidation, contributes to organic carbon degradation (Regnier et al., 2011). Over time, sediment compaction reduces porosity, slowing diffusion and promoting FeS formation. This further limits CO2 and methane movement, allowing microbial utilization.
Long-term biomass preservation in marine sediments is driven by low OET, rapid burial, and anoxic conditions. Anoxic degradation is significantly slower than oxic processes, enhancing the stability of buried carbon. Existing research supports the feasibility of sub-sediment biomass storage as a durable carbon sequestration strategy.
Written by Daniel Babin (Ph.D.), Head of Science, Sinkco Labs. See reference list at the end of the Appendix.
Marine sub-sediment burial is a carbon storage method that stores waste biomass products in anoxic marine sediment to prevent rot. This carbon storage method is supported by laboratory incubations, biogeochemical models, and numerous natural examples of well-preserved, million-old subfossil wood found in sediment around the world. The purpose of this annex is to:
Provide general evidence of the feasibility of permanent carbon removal from biomass burial in or below aquatic sediments,
Use model and literature data to determine a target preservation threshold for a 1 year monitoring period that justifies claims of 1000 year permanent removals.
Assess an appropriate and conservative estimate for how much carbon will remain stored after 1000 years based on biogeochemical models and chemical and physical data subfossil wood preservation from the literature.
A model for organic matter decay based on laboratory incubations indicates 92% of organic carbon will remain after 1000 years. This aligns with findings on the decay of subfossil wood in a wide variety of geologic settings that indicate preservation 88-97% preservation on the timescale of thousands of years.
Introduction Marine sediment has the potential to lock away carbon for millennia. Marine sediments are the final resting place for terrestrial and marine carbon with 150-200 billion tons stored in top meters of marine sediments globally (Hedges & Keil, 1995; Hedges et al., 1997; Atwood et al., 2020). However, the pathway to permanent storage in sediments is relatively inefficient — only 0.1% will ultimately be buried for millions of years due microbial activity in both the water column and the upper few centimeters of sediment where oxygen is present (Burdige, 2007; LaRowe et al., 2012).
At depth in marine sediments, organic matter is much better preserved. This environment is typically anoxic or hypoxic, cold, and saline. Dissolved oxygen is consumed rapidly near the surface, and below a few centimeters, decomposition relies on less efficient anaerobic processes . Additionally, cooler temperatures slow microbial enzyme activity, further decelerating decomposition (Bulesco et al. 2019). The combined effect of low oxygen, high salinity, and low temperatures means that marine sediments preserve OM far longer than soils or freshwater sediments.
Marine sub-sediment burial (MSSB) as a carbon removal protocol leverages the geochemical stability of carbon at depth in anoxic marine sediments by placing biomass even deeper beneath layers of sediment where microbial access and oxygen infiltration are virtually nonexistent. To store carbon, low-value agricultural and forestry residues (normally burned or landfilled) are mixed into a slurry and injected more than 15 feet down into sediments.
The durability of this carbon storage technique is further enhanced because marine sediment microbial communities are adapted primarily to marine-derived organic matter—not to the complex compounds typical of terrestrial plant biomass (like lignin and cellulose) often used in MSSB. These microbes often lack the necessary enzymatic pathways to efficiently degrade such materials . Recent studies show that when terrestrial-derived organic substrates (e.g., lignin, cellulose-rich material) enter marine sediments, only select microbial clades—usually rare or uncultured—respond, and even then, degradation is slow (Bulesco et al. 2019).
Predicting carbon loss in marine sediments To predict the amount of carbon degradation, the MSSB protocol draws on sediment biogeochemistry models. A particularly relevant framework is the multi-G kinetic model of organic matter degradation, originally developed for marine sediments. As reviewed by Arndt et al. (2013), the multi-G model assumes organic matter comprises multiple discrete pools (“G” classes), each with its own characteristic degradation rate (Arndt et al. 2013). Rapidly decaying compounds are exhausted early, leaving progressively more refractory fractions that break down extremely slowly. This multi-component kinetic formulation quantifies how overall reactivity declines with depth and time in sediment burial (Arndt et al. 2013). The model has been successful in simulating long-term carbon preservation in many sedimentary settings (Arndt et al. 2013), making it a promising tool to predict the fate of buried biomass carbon. The model is the closest fit to MSSB projects, although it assesses degradation in shallow layers of marine sediment, where more degradation is expected to occur than in MSSB projects, which bury organic matter deeper in sub-sediment layers. Because the model was calibrated in oxic conditions and MSSBs projects are required to bury biomass in anoxic conditions, the mullti-G model predictions are expected to be a maximum degradation rate.
Empirical evidence for long-term stability of buried organic carbon comes from deep-sea experiments, and corroborates results from the model described above. Keil et al. (2010) applied a multi-G type analysis to test burying crop residues in marine sediment. In a 700-day incubation using marine sediments, an initial brief pulse of decay oxidized <1% of the added plant material in the first week Keil et al. (2010). Thereafter, degradation virtually stalled: over the following two years only 3–8% of the terrestrial biomass (soy straw, corn stover, wood chips) was re-mineralized. This decay rate is much lower than the 19% lost from more labile, marine-native plankton material (Keil et al. 2010). The fitted kinetic parameters (e.g. approximately 0.004 yr-1 for terrestrial plant carbon) were orders of magnitude lower than typical decay rates for fresh organic matter (Keil et al. 2010).
For this study, we use the decay rate fit for alder wood from the laboratory experiments of Kiel et al. (2010) (Figure A1). Plankton, maize, and soy were also tested in their experiments, but alder was selected as the best representation of woody biomass (Figure A1). In Kiel et al. (2010), decay of alder is modeled as:
Where G(t) is the fraction of carbon left at time t, and Gint2 = 0.088, Gres = 0.911, kint2 = 0.003, and kres = 0 (Kiel et al. 2010).
The purpose of this annex is to validate the multi-G model’s predictions against real-world data from long-buried wood on land. We compiled carbon-loss measurements from subfossil wood recovered in a wide variety of settings (terrestrial and marine burial, archaeological settings, anaerobic bogs, landfills) to see if observed decay over years to millennia aligns with the multi-G kinetic curve. By comparing these field and laboratory observations to model expectations, we test whether biomass buried in marine sub-sediments can achieve the ultra-long-term carbon stability that the multi-G framework – and prior marine experiments – suggest.
Table A1: Summary comparing the conditions and parameters of 1) the multi-G model with input parameters from Keil et al. 2010, 2) empirical studies measuring carbon loss in buried wood, and 3) the requirements for marine sub-sediment burial projects under the present methodology.
Results The results are illustrated in a comparative plot (grouped data vs. model, Figure A2) which shows observed carbon loss at each timescale alongside the multi-G model prediction. Each empirical data point represents the mean percent carbon loss for one of the four age bins (0-1, 1-100, 100-1000, 1000-10,000 years), with error bars indicating the variability among studies in that bin. Light grey dots represent individual samples from studies measuring decay. The decay curve predicted by the multi-G model is overlaid for reference. The trajectory of the decay curve falls within the range of observations of subfossil wood, indicating that the multi-G kinetic model reproduces the real-world decay of buried wood within the margin of experimental error.
Quantitatively, very little carbon loss is observed in the early stages of burial, consistent with model expectations of initial rapid stability. In the 0–1 year group, the carbon loss was 1.2% ± 1.3% (Figure A2). Several studies reported essentially no measurable mass loss during the first year of anoxic burial. The multi-G model supports this, predicting negligible decay in year one due to the rapid exhaustion of only the most labile components. These observations suggest that if a maximum of <2.5% (1.2% + 1.3%) of carbon loss is observed in MSSB batches after 1 year, decay is consistent with empirical evidence for carbon loss in buried wood, and long-term storage can be estimated using model results. This directly supports purpose #2 of this annex—determining a <2.5% annual loss is a reasonable proxy for predicting 1,000-year carbon permanence.
Even after centuries of burial (100–1000 years bin), the compiled data show that most of the wood’s carbon is still retained (with 5.2% ± 3.3% lost), aligning with the model’s slow exponential decay phase (8% lost). The close alignment of model results (92% remaining) and empirical data (minimum 91.5% remaining) supports purpose #3 of this annex. Available evidence suggests that permanent carbon removal using MSSB is estimated to be a maximum of 91.5%.
Discussion These findings have positive implications for the long-term stability of buried woody biomass as a climate mitigation strategy. The close match between the multi-G kinetic model and real-world subfossil wood data validates that the model’s core assumption – a small labile fraction decays quickly, leaving a large refractory fraction that persists – holds true in practice. In other words, once the readily degradable components of wood are consumed (typically within the first months of burial), the remaining bulk of the carbon becomes extraordinarily stable. This outcome is consistent with previous research on wood in landfills: studies have concluded that wood disposed under anaerobic conditions effectively acts as a “long-term reservoir of carbon” with extremely slow decay. Ximenes et al. (2015), for instance, documented minimal decomposition of wood even after decades in well-managed landfills, confirming that most of the carbon is retained over time. Likewise, the observation of a >3,000-year-old buried log with only ~5% carbon loss underscores how durable buried biomass can be when oxygen and microbes are severely limited (Zheng et al. 2024). The reason is straightforward – lignin-rich wood in anoxic, water-saturated or clay-sealed environments does not readily support the microbial activity needed for decay. Our results reinforce that under such conditions, burial effectively “vaults” carbon out of the atmosphere for millennia.
For the release of carbon credits, we propose a monitoring period with a 1-year duration, with results that match evidence from subfossil wood and the multi-G kinetic model. The compiled literature and our analysis indicate that no more than 2.5% of carbon is lost in the first year of anoxic wood burial. If chemical data from storage batches align with literature and model estimates, then decay can be expected to match literature and model examples, which show 92% of wood carbon will stay sequestered on the timescale of thousands of years. The excellent agreement between the multi-G model and observed subfossil wood decay affirms storage of wood in anoxic sediment as a durable form of carbon removal.
ESDNH indicators may be measured by the Project Developer within the validation stage to reduce project risk, and suggested monitoring during the verification stage.
To monitor environmental risk, Project Developers should understand the biogeochemical zonation of sediment depths where biomass is stored. In anoxic marine sediments, organic molecules degrade via sulfate reduction, producing hydrogen sulfide (HS), which diffuses upward and oxidizes to sulfate in oxygen-rich layers. In the absence of sulfate, methanogenesis dominates, producing methane (CH). Both processes can generate HS or CH, posing environmental risks.
Hydrogen sulfide is toxic to benthic life, and excessive production may exceed oxidation rates, increasing ecological risk.
Methane, a potent greenhouse gas, can also impact benthic organisms if released.
To mitigate risks, HS and CHemissions at the sediment-water interface should remain below environmental thresholds. Project Developers are encouraged to measure dissolved sulfate, HS, and CHconcentrations in target sediment layers before burial and include these gases in their monitoring plans to ensure environmental safety.
Suggested monitoring plan additions to monitor environmental harms
In addition to reaching below the maximum oxygen penetration depth at any season, there is a required sub-sediment depth of at least 2 m depth into the sediment is required due to risk of reversal, due to maximum 2m sediment scouring during tropical zones, and infilling of previously scoured areas due to resuspension due to storms (; ), fluid-mud flows (), and erosion (, ).
On the continental shelf, seafloor sediments are eroded and reworked by bottom currents and wave action, a process known as “scouring” (). This creates linear or lobate depressions shaped by dominant environmental forces. Channel-shaped scours, or furrows, range from 10–100 meters wide and 100–1000 meters long, with coarse sand or gravel floors. Larger lobate deposits (100–500 meters wide) are often filled with mega-rippled coarse sand, forming "Rippled Scour Depressions" (). Major storms can also transport large amounts of sediment to the deep sea without leaving scours ().
Scouring and sediment resuspension pose risks to carbon storage in shelf sediments, as buried biomass must remain covered to prevent oxygen exposure. To assess this risk, we reviewed 29 studies on sediment furrows and ripple scour depressions across various depths and oceanographic settings (Figure A3, Table A3). Reported scour depths, including those from extreme events (e.g., Hurricanes Katrina, Ivan, Sandy), inform our recommendation of a >2-meter burial depth for carbon storage. While regional variation is significant, findings from suggest that wider continental shelves may offer greater protection from erosion.
Table A3: Summary of observation of furrowing and rippled scour depressions in literature
The Project Developer submits required documentation and undergoes an ex-ante validation audit. The project documentation is made available on the registry, and expected CDR volume is estimated and displayed for pre-purchase agreements. Specific prerequisites include:
Permissions have been granted to operate at the storage site, and to monitor the site up to 12-months after storage.
The storage points are technically appropriate and can allow for permanent carbon storage. This is proven by generating the Site Characterization Report, demonstrating adherence to all requirements in the Storage site requirements section.
The biomass feedstock has been secured and a preliminary assessment of organic carbon content has been made.
Expected project-scale CDR is modeled using equations in the section.
The feedstock mixture is buried in the predefined storage points. Visual proof of each burial event and site closure is required, via imagery documented and verified in Monitoring Reports, to confirm that the site is well-sealed by surrounding sediments or other surface enhancements (e.g. rocks/rubble, clay caps) and confirm closure.
Between 1-3 months after burial, Project Developers may conduct first monitoring by following the Monitoring Plan and the Sampling Plan to measure organic carbon content in buried biomass for each storage batch. Additional storage points may be added within the validated storage sites. CDR estimates and permanence are updated with verified real data.
Project Developers may choose to either use:
50/50 issuance: undergo a verification audit by a VVB at the first measurement step and issue the first 50% of removal RCCs on the Rainbow registry. Repeat the audit after the following step (Step 5) to issue the remaining 50%, or
One-time issuance: skip this first measurement and verification step, and wait to issue 100% of RCCs at the second measurement stage described below (Step 5).
Project Developers conduct the second monitoring at least 12 months after burial, following the Monitoring Plan and the Sampling Plan, to measure organic carbon content in buried biomass for each storage batch. CDR estimates and permanence are updated with verified real data, and verified by the VVB.
50/50 issuance: the remaining credits are issued. Any discrepancies in earlier results, for example as a result of degradation, shall be accounted for by updating CDR calculations and following the in the Rainbow Procedures Manual.
One-time issuance: all credits are issued for that storage batch based on the 12-month measurements.
Monitoring and verification continues for a maximum of 5 years until the end of the crediting period. The Project Developer may choose to renew the project's crediting period to extend the Monitoring Plan and continue repeating steps 3 through 5.
Sediment grain size
At the target sub-sediment depth, at least 50% of sediment grains must be maximum 63 µm particle size.
Authorization and access
Project Developers must be authorized by jurisdictional authorities to operate, perform burial events and complete monitoring at the given geographic coordinates.
Potential for Future Disturbance
This shall be qualitatively and transparently discussed in the Site Characterization Report to determine if sediment disturbance may occur in the next 40 years, due to deep-sea mining, oil and gas extraction, trawling from fishing vessels, other resource exploitation, or any other use-conflict that might lead to reversal of storage. The site lease agreement should implement suitable barriers to such disturbance events.
Marine life
Characterize the biodiversity of marine life at the storage site, considering species type and abundance. This is used to 1) identify any sensitive biodiversity hotspots and 2) as a benchmark to compare identify any environmental damages after post-burial. Jurisdictional permitting and Environmental Impact Assessment procedures should already cover this, so this is implemented as an abundance of caution.
Transfer of harmful pollutants in biomass feedstock
Marine pollution due to ship time spent over storage site
Materials of historical significance
Biomass degradation can be measured by tracking organic carbon content of samples of the buried feedstock mixture over time.
Storage points will not experience re-suspension or re-working such that burial biomass is exposed to the water column over 1000 years.
The site characteristics and requirements detailed in Table 1 are suitable to identify sub-sediment areas that are anoxic.
Any organic carbon degradation from the buried biomass leads to CO released to the water column, and eventually back to the atmosphere, via diffusive transport. This is a conservative assumption, because degraded carbon may remain trapped permanently in the sediment matrix as CO. Indeed, the site requirements are set to ensure that CO diffusion out of the sediment matrix is minimized.
Methane diffusion can be measured using oxygen penetration depth as a proxy. If O is measurable in the surface layer of marine sediments, methane is unable to diffuse out of the sediment-water interface.
Organic carbon content of feedstock mixture*
% organic carbon, dry mass basis
Laboratory testing of
Measured per storage batch, and (1-3 months, and 12 months)
Reported in the Feedstock Characterization Report for each storage batch
Bulk density of dry feedstock*
tonne/m
Same as above
Solids mass fraction*
fraction
Laboratory testing of
Measured per storage batch, upon burial
Reported in the Feedstock Characterization Report for each new storage batch
A literature review is described in Appendix B justifying the use of the proposed multi-G kinetic model and rate constants, comparing them to empirical findings of biomass buried in non-oxic conditions.
represents the fraction of initially buried organic carbon that remains permanently buried after 1000 years, and is modeled according to Eq.3.
Where
is described in Eq. 1.
represents the total volume of feedstock mixture buried in m. Note that this represents solid biomass feedstock mixed with water in a slurry.
represents the solid mass fraction of the feedstock mixture, as a unitless fraction
represents the bulk density of the dry feedstock in tonnes/m
represents the organic carbon content in the solid fraction of the feedstock mixture, in % dry mass (e.g. g organic carbon/g dry feedstock mixture). At validation, this value should be conservatively estimated.
is 44/12 = 3.67, and represents the molar masses of CO and C respectively, and is used to convert tonnes C to tonnes of COeq.
Where
was described in Eq. 1. It represents carbon degradation over 1000 years, calculated using the following multi-G degradation model.
represents time. The equations presented can be time-integrated from 0 to 1000 years, calculating carbon degradation/storage continuously. For the purpose of issuing RCCs under this module, only results at time = 1000 years are used.
represents the fraction of organic carbon originally buried in the feedstock biomass remaining after 1000 years. Also called .
and are the fractional pools (in tonnes of organic carbon) of intermediate 1, intermediate 2, and residual, described in Table 4.
and are rate constants for each fractional pool, described in Table 4.
Note that using default literature values presented in Table 4 results in a of 0.92.
Although carbon storage at 1000 years is conservatively modeled according to Eq. 3 for the purpose of issuing credits, carbon loss at each verification and credit issuance (1-3 and 12 months after burial) is measured using samples of biomass feedstock to check the permanence of storage at each storage point, and confirm the eligibility of removal at each storage site, as described in the Permanence section.
Where
represents the fraction of organic carbon originally buried that has been lost via degradation, at time . This shall be proven to be >0.02 during 1-3 or 12 month monitoring (i.e. 2% of buried organic carbon has degraded), in order to issue RCCs.
was described in Eq. 2.
represents the organic carbon content in the solid fraction of the feedstock mixture, in % dry mass, at time .
JUST FOR OSCAR, TO REMOVE LATER
is additional info for projects, to be shown in the mrv output, showing the acutal estimated carbon removals (interesting to compare to the conservatively calculated/credited removals based on models)
The secondary data used for all projects under this methodology are the and constants presented in Table 4. The use of these constants has moderate uncertainty, because they are not specifically adapted to project designs and biomass feedstock types. This uncertainty is mitigated and considered acceptable because they are conservative assumptions, representing oxic conditions where carbon degradation is assumed to be higher than in the anoxic conditions required for burial under the present module.
Low Uncertainty
Biomass degradation can be tracked by measuring organic carbon over time.
Organic carbon degrades faster in oxic than anoxic conditions.
The site traits outlined in Table 1 are suitable for identifying anoxic sub-sediment areas.
Oxygen penetration depth can be used to estimate methane diffusion.
Moderate Uncertainty
Organic carbon degrades quickly at first, following a logarithmic trend; 12 months is a suitable measurement period.
Storage points will remain undisturbed, preventing biomass exposure.
Any degradation releases CO to the water, then the atmosphere, via diffusion (a conservative assumption).
Visual proof of burial (e.g. photos or video taken during the burial event, satellite imagery)
To confirm that the storage site is closed.
Each burial event, including:
During burial, and
12 months post-burial, and
1-3 months post-burial (optional, for )
Centennial scale (100-1000 years) Over multi-century timescales (100–1000 years; Table 2), researchers have found wood preserved in natural waterlogged sites and archaeological contexts. Uçar and Yılgör (1995) described fir wood that had been submerged in a Turkish lake for roughly 300 years. Möttönen et al. (2022) analyzed a ~700-year-old Scots pine (Pinus sylvestris) trunk recovered from oxygen-poor lake sediments in Finland. In an archaeological example, Ghavidel et al. (2020) investigated oak timber posts buried for about 600–700 years in damp, low-oxygen soil at a 14th-century site in Romania.
Millennial Scale (1000-10,000 years) At the longest burial durations we surveyed (1,000–10,000 years; Table 2), numerous studies document ancient wood preserved in anoxic sediments across the world. Zeng et al. (2024) reported an Eastern red cedar trunk approximately 3,800 years old that was preserved below 2 m of clay deposits in Quebec. Subfossil wood a few millennia old has been found on multiple continents: for instance, oak logs ~1,000–2,800 years old recovered from riverbank sediments in the Czech Republic (Baar et al. 2019) and a ~2,500-year-old Sitka spruce (Picea sitchensis) in waterlogged river deposits of Washington State (Hedges et al. 1985). Mid‐Holocene examples (several thousand years old) have also been reported – Pan et al. (1990) documented a ~6,600-year-old hardwood (Bischofia polycarpa) buried in a Chinese riverbed, and Solar et al. (1987) described an oak about 8,100 years old found buried 16 m deep in soil sediments. In addition, Bednar and Fengel (1974) reported an oak (Quercus) trunk ~8,500 years old uncovered 10 m below ground in an Austrian gravel pit. Some exceptionally ancient wood specimens even extend beyond ten millennia – Fejfer et al. (2014) noted a pine log ~12,500 years old in Poland , and swamp-preserved kauri logs in New Zealand have been dated to approximately 30,000 years old (Freedland et al. 1994).
Burial Conditions The studies sourced from the literature span a wide range of environmental settings. With studies of wood preserved in natural settings for thousands of years, the burial history and geochemical environment of the wood is poorly controlled. Incomplete burial, exposure to oxygen during the transport and burial process, intermittent re-exposure to surface conditions or oxygenated ground water are a possibility for most samples sourced from the literature.
MSSB differs in that fresh biomass is delivered directly to fully anoxic pockets within marine sub-sediments. This control on transport and storage means MSSB projects are expected to provide greater permanence than estimates sourced from natural settings. Estimates derived from these literature examples should therefore be treated as conservative in nature.
Carbon Loss Estimation For studies providing chemical composition, we estimated carbon loss using a conservative lignin-based approach following Ximenes et al. (2015) and Zeng et al. (2024). In essence, we assumed the wood’s lignin – a decay-resistant polymer – remained intact during burial, so any decrease in holocellulose (combined cellulose and hemicellulose) reflects carbon that was lost as CO2 or CH4. This method uses the increase in relative lignin content to infer how much of the original carbon has decomposed. Carbon loss is calculated using the lignin-anchor fraction:
Where Lfresh and Lburied are the lignin concentrations in the fresh and buried wood samples. The preserved holocellulose fraction (P) can then be calculated as:
Where Hburied and Hfresh represent holocellulose concentrations in the buried and fresh wood sample. With these factors and the fraction of carbon in these components (0.447 in holocellulose and 0.6 in lignin), carbon loss can be calculated as:
For studies that directly reported wood density or total mass loss, we equated the percent mass loss to percent carbon loss, assuming carbon content per wood mass stays roughly constant. This is reasonable because wood is approximately 50% carbon by weight initially (Thomas and Martin, 2012), and if a certain fraction of the wood mass is gone (mostly via carbon-containing compounds), a similar fraction of the carbon should be gone as well. If either biomass compositional, mass, or density measurements indicated a theoretical gain in carbon, carbon loss was reported as 0.
Grouping and Analysis: To compare with the multi-G model, we grouped the burial cases by order-of-magnitude age ranges: 0–1 year, 1–100 years, 100–1000 years, and 1000–10,000 years. This binning strategy captures early-stage decay (months to ~1 year), intermediate-term decay (years to decades), longer-term decay (centuries), and millennial-scale preservation in separate categories. For each age bin, we computed the average carbon loss (%) observed across studies in that group, and the sample standard deviation to indicate variability. These mean values at four increasing time scales serve as a condensed representation of the empirical carbon loss vs. time curve. Finally, we plotted the binned results against the multi-G model’s predicted decay trend for woody biomass (Equation 1). We compared the model’s curve to the averaged observations to assess agreement.
New Zealand
Agathis australis
Buried in swamp
Composition
7.63
Fejfer et al. 2014
12500
Poland
Pinus sylvestris
Buried stumps in floodplain
Composition
20.25
Bednar & Fengel 1974
8500
Austria
Quercus
Buried in gravel pit
Composition
1.67
Solar et al. 1987
8100
Austria
Q. robur
Buried deep in soil
Composition
14.18
Pan et al. 1990
6600
China
Bischofia polycarpa
Buried in riverbed
Composition
0.49
Zeng et al. 2024
3775
Quebec
Eastern red cedar
Buried in clay
Composition
4.53
Baar et al. 2019
2800
Czech
Q. robur
Buried in river bank
Composition
8.65
Hedges et al. 1985
2500
Washington State
Picea sitchensis
Buried in river bank
Composition
9.16
Baar et al. 2019
1900
Czech
Q. robur
Buried in river bank
Composition
6.13
Möttönen et al. 2022
1600
Finland
Pinus sylvestris
Submerged in lake
Composition
11.75
Baar et al. 2019
1000
Czech
Q. robur
Buried in river bank
Composition
5.52
Möttönen et al. 2022
700
Finland
Pinus sylvestris
Submerged in lake
Composition
8.37
Ghadviel et al. 2020
700
Romania
Quercus
Buried fence posts
Composition
1.71
Ucar & Yilgor 1995
300
Turkey
Abies sp.
Submerged in lake
Composition
3.93
Horisawa et al. 2025
55
Japan
Larix kaempferi
Buried poles
Density
5.09
Ximenes et al. 2015
44
Australia
Agathis sp.
Buried in clay
Composition
0
Ximenes et al. 2015
44
Australia
Pinus sylvestris
Buried in clay
Composition
0
Ximenes et al. 2015
44
Australia
Pseudotsuga menziesii
Buried in clay
Composition
0
Ximenes et al. 2015
44
Australia
Eucalyptus sp.
Buried in clay
Composition
0
Ximenes et al. 2015
44
Australia
Eucalyptus sp.
Buried in clay
Composition
0
Ximenes et al. 2015
44
Australia
Eucalyptus sp.
Buried in clay
Composition
0
Ximenes et al. 2015
44
Australia
Tsuga heterophylla
Buried in clay
Composition
0.28
Ximenes et al. 2015
44
Australia
Picea sp.
Buried in clay
Composition
3.9
Ximenes et al. 2015
44
Australia
Pinus radiata
Buried in clay
Composition
0.89
Holt and Jones 1983
1
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0.03
Holt and Jones 1983
1
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0
Holt and Jones 1983
1
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
4.36
Holt and Jones 1983
1
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
1.96
Holt and Jones 1983
1
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
1.89
Holt and Jones 1983
1
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0.95
Holt and Jones 1983
1
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
1.23
Holt and Jones 1983
1
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
2.52
Holt and Jones 1983
1
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
4.09
Holt and Jones 1983
1
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
2.92
Holt and Jones 1983
1
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0.75
Holt and Jones 1983
1
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0
Holt and Jones 1983
0.5
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0.04
Holt and Jones 1983
0.5
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0
Holt and Jones 1983
0.5
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
2.91
Holt and Jones 1983
0.5
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
2.67
Holt and Jones 1983
0.5
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
2.53
Holt and Jones 1983
0.5
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0.39
Holt and Jones 1983
0.25
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0
Holt and Jones 1983
0.25
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0
Holt and Jones 1983
0.25
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
2.58
Holt and Jones 1983
0.25
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
2.1
Holt and Jones 1983
0.25
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0
Holt and Jones 1983
0.25
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0
Holt and Jones 1983
0.08333333
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0
Holt and Jones 1983
0.08333333
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0
Holt and Jones 1983
0.08333333
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0.98
Holt and Jones 1983
0.08333333
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
1.03
Holt and Jones 1983
0.08333333
England
Fagus sylvatica
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0
Holt and Jones 1983
0.08333333
England
Pinus sylvestris
Black sulfide mud
Mass
0
Kuptz et al. 2020
0.43
Lab
Picea abies
Anaerobic storage container
Mass
1.4
Kuptz et al. 2020
0.43
Lab
Picea abies
Anaerobic storage container
Mass
0.4
Kuptz et al. 2020
0.37
Lab
Picea abies
Anaerobic storage container
Mass
2
Kuptz et al. 2020
0.37
Lab
Picea abies
Anaerobic storage container
Mass
2.2
* Composition = lignin and holocellulose data reported, carbon loss with lignin conservation calculations used. Density = density loss reported. Mass = mass change reported.
Burdige, D. J. (2007). Preservation of Organic Matter in Marine Sediments: Controls, Mechanisms, and an Imbalance in Sediment Organic Carbon Budgets? Chemical Reviews, 107(2), 467–485. https://doi.org/10.1021/cr050347q
Fejfer, M., Zborowska, M., Adamek, O., Dzieduszyńska, D., Kittel, P., Petera-Zganiacz, J., & Twardy, J. (2014). Properties and dimensional stability of 12 500-year-old subfossil pine wood. Drewno. Prace Naukowe, Doniesienia, Komunikaty = Wood. Research Papers, Reports, Announcements, 57(193), 81–95. https://doi.org/10.12841/wood.1644-3985.075.05
Freedland, C., & Rowell, P. (n.d.). ENVIRONMENTALLY INDUCED PHYSICAL CHANGES IN ANCIENT KAURI (AGATHIS AUSTRALIS) WOOD.
Ghavidel, A., Hofmann, T., Bak, M., Sandu, I., & Vasilache, V. (2020). Comparative archaeometric characterization of recent and historical oak (Quercus spp.) wood. Wood Science and Technology, 54(5), 1121–1137. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00226-020-01202-4
Hedges, J. I., Cowie, G. L., Ertel, J. R., James Barbour, R., & Hatcher, P. G. (1985). Degradation of carbohydrates and lignins in buried woods. Geochimica et Cosmochimica Acta, 49(3), 701–711. https://doi.org/10.1016/0016-7037(85)90165-6
Hedges, J. I., & Keil, R. G. (1995). Sedimentary organic matter preservation: An assessment and speculative synthesis. Marine Chemistry, 49(2), 81–115. https://doi.org/10.1016/0304-4203(95)00008-F
Hedges, J. I., Keil, R. G., & Benner, R. (1997). What happens to terrestrial organic matter in the ocean? Organic Geochemistry, 27(5), 195–212. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0146-6380(97)00066-1
Holt, D. M., & Jones, E. B. (1983). Bacterial degradation of lignified wood cell walls in anaerobic aquatic habitats. Applied and Environmental Microbiology, 46(3), 722–727. https://doi.org/10.1128/aem.46.3.722-727.1983
Keil, R. G., Nuwer, J. M., & Strand, S. E. (2010). Burial of agricultural byproducts in the deep sea as a form of carbon sequestration: A preliminary experiment. Marine Chemistry, 122(1–4), 91–95. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.marchem.2010.07.007
Kuptz, D., Lesche, S., Mendel, T., Mack, R., Rist, E., Schön, C., & Hartmann, H. (2020). Fuel properties, dry matter losses and combustion behavior of wood chips stored at aerobic and anaerobic conditions. Biomass and Bioenergy, 142, 105745. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.biombioe.2020.105745
LaRowe, D. E., & Van Cappellen, P. (2011). Degradation of natural organic matter: A thermodynamic analysis. Geochimica et Cosmochimica Acta, 75(8), 2030–2042. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.gca.2011.01.020
Möttönen, V., Helama, S., Pranovich, A., Korotkova, E., Xu, C., Herva, H., Heräjärvi, H., Mäkinen, H., Nöjd, P., & Jyske, T. (2022). Subfossil Scots Pine (Pinus sylvestris L.) Wood from Northern Finland—Physical, Mechanical, and Chemical Properties and Suitability for Specialty Products. Forests, 13(5), Article 5. https://doi.org/10.3390/f13050704
Pan, D., Tai, D., Chen, C.-L., & Robert, D. (1990). Comparative Studies on Chemical Composition of Wood Components in Recent and Ancient Woods of Bischofia polycarpa. Holzforschung, 44(1), 7–16. https://doi.org/10.1515/hfsg.1990.44.1.7
Solar, R., Reinprecht, L., KACIK, F., MELCER, J., & HORSKY, D. (1987). Comparison of some physico-chemical and chemical properties of carbohydrate and lignin part of contemporary and subfossile oak wood. Comparison of Some Physico-Chemical and Chemical Properties of Carbohydrate and Lignin Part of Contemporary and Subfossile Oak Wood, 21(5), 513–524.
Thomas, S. C., & Martin, A. R. (2012). Carbon Content of Tree Tissues: A Synthesis. Forests, 3(2), Article 2. https://doi.org/10.3390/f3020332
Ximenes, F. A., Gardner, W. D., & Cowie, A. L. (2008). The decomposition of wood products in landfills in Sydney, Australia. Waste Management, 28(11), 2344–2354. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.wasman.2007.11.006
Ximenes, F., Björdal, C., Cowie, A., & Barlaz, M. (2015). The decay of wood in landfills in contrasting climates in Australia. Waste Management, 41, 101–110. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.wasman.2015.03.032
Zeng, N., Zhao, X., Poisson, G., Clifford, B., Liu, Y., Liu, H., Meng, T., Picard, L., Zeng-Mariotti, E., Zaitchik, B., & Hu, L. (2024). 3775-year-old wood burial supports “wood vaulting” as a durable carbon removal method. Science, 385(6716), 1454–1459. https://doi.org/10.1126/science.adm8133
50-100
Middle Atlantic Bight, USA
5-30
10-100
Southern Rhode Island, USA
0-10
50
Port Clarence, AK, USA
4-15
10-500
Southampton
1-12
10-60
100-300
California Coast, CA, USA
0-100
40-100
Shinnecock Inslet, NY, USA
3-9
50
30
Gray's Harbor, WA, USA
10-16
100
10-90
Humboldt Bay, CA, USA
16-36
100
Rhone Island Sound, RI, USA
0-42
50-80
Malin Shelf, Ireland
80-120
50-100
100
Drowned Forest, AL, USA
20
100
Dauphin Island, AL, USA
60
30-36
Innisfail, QLD, AUS
28-35
15
40-150
York River, VA, USA
5-100
Copper Harbon, MI, USA
100
50
3-5
English Channel, UK
50-200
10-20
Western Sahara
100
20
New Jersey, USA
100-150
5-15
Los Angeles, CA, USA
100-200
15-50
Mississippi, USA
100-200
5-10
Bolivar Peninsula, TX, USA
3.5
100
Fire Island, NY, USA
5-30
100
Barataria Bight, LA, USA
10-40
2-15
Status
In use
Marine water
Must be in coastal, sea or ocean waters with a salinity greater than zero. Freshwater burial is not currently eligible.
Anoxic Sediment Layer
Must reach deep enough into the sub-sediment to reach the anoxic zone. This shall be at least 2 m into the sediment (see Appendix D for justification), but actual depth to achieve this varies by site and shall be justified for each project.
The depth must remain anoxic year-round, accounting for bioturbation or increased advection/diffusion into sediments. The sub-sediment area must be stable with low likelihood of re-exposure, proven via established tools for determining sediment stability such as 210Pb or other geochronology tools.
Water depth
Must ensure the surface of the water bottom (seafloor or sediment surface) is not exposed to the air during tidal fluctuations. At water depths 1-20 m, water depths must be within 0.5 m. At water depths 20-200 m, water depths must be within 5 m
Methane diffusion
Methane must not be diffusing out of the sediment-water interface. This is measured using oxygen penetration depth as a proxy for methane diffusion. This requirement is to ensure that if any buried feedstock mixture degrades, it would not be emitted as the stronger GHG methane, and would instead be emitted as CO. In any case, loss of organic carbon from the biomass would be detected.
Potential gas exchange
Project Developers shall use all criteria mentioned above to calculate potential gas exchange from embedded depth into the atmosphere, to justify that there will be minimal gas exchange of any evolved gases with the atmosphere during a 1000 year period.
This requirement ensures that if any buried feedstock mixture degrades, the CO generated will likely remain trapped in the sediment and remain stored, rather than diffusing through the water column into the atmosphere.
Shelf slope
Sediment or seafloor gradation must be <1:100 to prevent sediment slumping.
SDG 9: Industry,
innovation, and
infrastructure
The use of offshore technology, such as oil and gas exploration and exploitation equipment, retrofitting maritime vessels to use for more sustainable application than fossil fuel extraction and merchant transport.
Project Developers standard operating procedure (SOP) for the disposal and burial of biomass feedstock.
SDG 14: Aquatic life
Project Developers can develop long-term ecological monitoring stations to support monitoring of sub-sediment burial and support regional monitoring for ocean health indicators.
Project Developers demonstrate collaborations with regional universities or governmental institutions for collaborative long-term monitoring, and measurements to be completed. Relevant data should be open source.
Sediment grain size
mm
primary data from a pilot survey of the site
secondary data from the specific area concerned (e.g. published peer-reviewed literature or database measurements)
secondary data from an area that is proven to be sufficiently representative and similar to the project area in the appropriate factors that relate to permanent storage
reported in the Site Characterization Report
Sub-sediment depth (X)
m
Same as above
Water depth
m
Same as above
Volume of feedstock mixture buried per storage batch*
m
Equipment logs on machinery delivering the burial
Fractional pools of complex organic carbon
and
Project Developers may choose between three sources for these values:
literature (oxic biomass bale sinking experiment, values for maize are 0.012, 0.091, 0.897 for each variable, respectively).
project incubation experiments with the feedstock mixture in representative marine sub-sediments.
in situ experiments with the biomass feedstock mixture in representative marine sediments.
Rate constants
and
Same options as above.
Literature values for maize are 0.04, 0.002, and 0 for each variable, respectively
Volume of feedstock mixture buried per storage batch
To calculate
Each burial event
Organic carbon content of solid fraction of feedstock mixture
To calculate
Each storage batch, including:
Day 1 and last day of burial, and
12 months post-burial, and
1-3 months post-burial (optional, for 50/50 credit issuance)
Solid mass fraction of feedstock mixture
To calculate
Each storage batch, including:
Day 1 and last day of burial, and
12 months post-burial, and
1-3 months post-burial (optional, for 50/50 credit issuance)
Bulk density of the feedstock mixture
To calculate
Organic carbon content of solid fraction of feedstock mixture
To calculate
5 years after burial, for a representative sample of storage sites
Solid mass fraction of feedstock mixture
To calculate
5 years after burial, for a representative sample of storage sites
Bulk density of the feedstock mixture
To calculate
5 years after burial, for a representative sample of storage sites
Visual proof of burial (e.g. photos or video taken during the burial event, satellite imagery)
To confirm that biomass remains physically buried.
Geochemical environment
Oxygenated marine sediment incubation
Poorly constrained, potentially oxygenated (floodplains, swamps, landfills, lakes, riverbeds, clays)
Site requirements of fully anoxic, leading to less decomposition than model and empirical results
Type of biomass
Alder (a type of tree/wood) results modeled here, study also tested agricultural residue and plankton
Variety of wood (see Table A2)
Wood dust, chips, or bark
Time scale
Modeled results at 1, 100, 1000 years
One month to 30,000 years (see Table A2)
Freedland et al. 1994
Dissolved hydrogen sulfide (HS) in storage batch sediment porewaters at 1- and 12-month intervals
To detect microbial activity that might indicate increased environmental risk, even without %OC changes
Each storage batch, 12 months after burial
Dissolved sulfate in the sediment porewaters
To determine that the depth of storage has > 1 Mm of sulfate for organic carbon degradation to proceed using sulfate as an electron acceptor
Each storage batch, 12 months after burial
Methane (if dissolved sulfate is not measurable)
To assess methane production, which would indicate the use of methanogenesis rather than sulfate reduction
Each storage batch, 12 months after burial, if dissolved sulfate is not measurable
Location
Water Depth
Scour Depth (cm)
Width (m)
Reference
Central CA, USA
30-70
5-500
Onslow Bay, NC, USA
0-20
20
Rio Balsas, Mexico
Module created
--
August 2025
V1.0
A storage batch is all burial events of homogenous feedstock mixtures at one storage site over a maximum of 31 days.
A storage site is a group of similar storage points within 24 km of one another with similar site characteristics.
A storage point is the precise spot where a burial event occurs. Similar storage points may be grouped into a storage site.





Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score to each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The Rainbow Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
The Project Developer, Rainbow Certification team, or the third-party auditor may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Each reversal risk with a high or very risk score is subject to:
risk mitigation plan, developed by the Project Developer, that details the long-term strategies and investments for preventing, monitoring, reporting and compensating carbon removal reversal, or
additional contributions to the buffer pool, at a rate of 3% of verified removal Rainbow Carbon Credits for each high or very high risk
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Rainbow’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
Any identified material risk (defined as issues with a risk score of moderate or higher) shall be subject to a Risk Mitigation Plan, which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Rainbow Certification Team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Each storage batch, including:
Day 1 and last day of burial, and
12 months post-burial, and
1-3 months post-burial (optional, for )
5 years after burial, for all storage sites
Require measurements at 1 year to prove aligned with modeled stable-removal results, make 1000 year claims.
30000
0-30
Leakage